Home

PICED Programmer`s Guide

1. Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 343 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 14 11 4 15 11 4 16 Action Click on OK See also Frequently Asked Questions Error 14015 Message There are too many Applications used Maximum is limit Cause You have attempted to use too many Application numbers The software can only support a limited number of different Application numbers Solution Use less Application numbers If necessary split the control across several projects Refer to the Project Summary to determine where the Applications have been used Information 14016 Message No errors found in project Reason The project was checked and found to be free of design errors Action Click on OK Error 14017 Message File File Name does not exist Cause The file File Name could not be found Solution Check that the file name is correct Check that you have the necessary privileges to access the file Check whether the file does exist Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 344 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 17 11 4 18 11 4 19 Information 14018 Message A Short Cut has been created on your desktop Reason A short cut to the PICED software and the currently loaded project file has been placed on your computer desktop Action Click on OK See also Frequently Asked Questions Confirmation 14019 Message
2. All files in the Project directory All files in the Project directory and its sub directories z r rchive File JV Include Power Failure Recovery File Archive File Name C Clipsal PICED Projects test cta c ERS J Include Windows Fonts Without the correct Fonts installed the project will not look the same Only non standard fonts need to be archived C Bus Project JV Include C Bus Project ONE_NET C Bus Project File C Clipsal C Gate2 tag ONE_NET xml e Files The files to be archived can be selected e Select Just Files used by the Project to archive just the files which are actually used by the Project This is a convenient way to extract just the files used by a project from a directory which contains several projects e Select All Files in the Project Directory to archive all files in the Project folder e Select All Files in the Project Directory and its sub directories to archive all files in the Project folder and any folders within the Project folder If you selected Just Files used by the Project you can also select additional files which may be required for example files which are used by Logic To add additional files click on the Add button select a file and click on OK Note that only files which are in the Project directory can be added To delete a file from the list select the file in the list then click on the Delete button The Power Failure Recovery file is added to the archive
3. Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 19 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 6 1 2 3 1 6 2 2 3 1 6 3 Add an application group level Edit an application group level Add a lighting group level Edit a lighting group level Add enable group value Edit enable group value Ramp Rate To select a Ramp Rate click on the Ramp Rate combo box and select the desired ramp rate Notes To see the numerical value of a selected Network Application Group Address or Level tag hold the mouse over the drop down list and a hint will appear To change between decimal and hexadecimal numbers use the Program Options form Add Group The Add Group form allows you to specify a group address and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 Select the group address using the Group Address drop down list It will list the remaining 256 addresses which have not been assigned a tag name If you want to change the group tag name see Edit an application group 2 Specify the tag group name in the Group Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes Edit Group The Edit Group form allows you to edit a group tag and to turn a group on or off Changing the group tag name To change the group tag name follow the procedure below 1 Edit the group tag name in the Group Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes If you want to add a new group see Add an
4. The Default Application is used when creating new Components Scenes and Schedules The Unit Address is necessary if you are going to be programming a Black and White C Touch or PAC over C Bus Refer to the C Bus Networks document which can be found in the Manuals folder for more details on the modelling of C Bus networks C Bus Control C Bus Control Ramp Groups to Level 1 then send Off r Ramp Groups to Off When a group address is ramped to level 0 the command is received by all C Bus Units on the network On some old C Bus input units the status indicator will go off as soon as this message is seen even though the level is still above 0 for some time For this reason many devices send a ramp to level 1 command followed by an off command when the level gets to 1 In this case the input unit status indicators will show the state correctly To select this behaviour select the Ramp Groups to Level 1 then send Off check box If this check box is not selected then ramping to level 0 will be done with a single ramp to level 0 command Nudge Ramp Scene disabled All of the Groups in the Scenes will be controlled regardless of their level Indicator Kill C Bus Indicator Kill show the status of Scenes Scene group levels will not be used for showing the status of Scenes Note that Indicator Kill messages are sent when a Scene is broken regardless of this setting Wiser Tab When a Wiser Home Control Project
5. To open an archive select the File Archive Import From Archive menu item This starts the Import Archive wizard The first page in the Wizard asks for the archive to load This will be a file with a cta extensionor tar gz for a file transferred from a Wiser Home Control Open File Select the Archive File to Open lt Archive file to open e Click on the Next button The restore files page selects where the files will be restored to Restore Files here do you want to restore the Project lt a Directory to put project e Click on the Next button The C Bus Project is imported next The xml file has to be copied into the C Gate tag directory If the C Bus Project file or the C Gate tag directory is incorrect enter the correct values If you want to manually copy the tag file later de select the Copy C Bus Project check box Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 88 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide C Bus Project How to import the C Bus Project lt a To install the C Bus Project the C Bus project file xml needs to be copied to the C Gate Tag directory V Copy C Bus Project C Bus Project File C DelphiBin ProjectsfHOME xmi S Destination c Clipsanc Gate2itag S Click on the Next button Finally any fonts which might have been saved are restored to the Project Directory They then need to be manually copied into the Windows Fonts directory for
6. Click on the OK button to use the selected time zone for your Project Note that the computer timezone can be set using Special Functions This is the timezone that the computer is in and will determine when it changes its time for daylight savings The project timezone must match the computer timezone when the project is installed and running During development of a project they may be different if you are developing a project to run on a computer in a different timezone Location Selection The Location tab of the Project Details Wizard Options Page allows you to enter the location of the project This process is simplified by clicking on the Map button on the Project Details Location tab This will open the Location Selection form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 80 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 9 Address Adelaide Australia Go to Address Latitude Longitude a 9186111111111 E 612777777770 Go to Location on Ee Get Location D NED Botanic Garden i Of Adelaide And fA State Herbarium _ Cowandilla Hilton i Keewie k Terminal v y LE se Mile End Dulwich Gardens eaese i m The map is centred on the selected latitude and longitude To change to a different latitude and longitude 1 Enter values in the Latitude and Longitude boxes 2 Click on the Go to Location button 3 The map will be centred on the new latitude and longitude To select a loca
7. Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 140 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 6 5 4 9 6 6 4 9 6 7 To paste the copied cut Componeni s e Select the Page where you want the new Components to be e click on the paste item from the edit menu or e click on the paste speed button on the Edit Tool Bar or e press CTRL V The new Component s will be placed next to the copied cut one If you changed pages before pasting it will appear in the same position as the copied cut Component s but on the new page To delete one or more components select them then e click on the delete item from the edit menu e click on the delete speed button on the Edit Tool Bar or e press the delete key Paint Format Once the format of a Component has been set to achieve some kind of visual effect the format itself may be copied to other similar Components in the project This is called Painting Format The Paint Format will copy the format border and background styles of the copied component to the second one If the copied component is the same type as the painted component s more than just the border and background will be painted depending upon the component type To paint the format of one or more Components Copy a component with the desired format Select the component s to be changed Click on the paint format item from the edit menu or Click on the paint format speed button on the Edit
8. In built System IO In built System IO Variables provide interaction with things like Scenes Schedules and Irrigation The following in built System IO Variables can be used Schedule In Built System IO Scene In Built System lO Irrigation In Built System lO Access Control In Built System lO Logic In Built System lO Date and Time In Built System lO Security App In Built System IO Telephony App In Built System IO Error App In Built System lO Measurement App In Built System lO HVAC App In Built System lO Audio In built System IO Labelling In Built System lO E Mail In built System IO Load Monitor In Built System lO Other It is recommended that the Tool Select function be used for adding In built System IO Components as it semi automates the process and it also shows related Special Functions Various templates are supplied with the PICED software to quickly add sets of related components such as for editing Scenes Schedules or Irrigation Scene In Built System IO Scenes can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 155 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Scene Number Number of the selected Scene integer__ Yes Seeda e nur of Seones_ _futeger_fo___ Scene Current Level C Bus level of the selected Integer Scene used for setting all Scene Components to a particular level Scene Locked Is the Scene loc
9. Project Toolbar Da E The Buttons functions are respectively e Project Details e Add Page e Open a Project e Save the Project Place Components Toolbar GLEAN G be A K O m Hss The Buttons functions are respectively Select which Shape to place Place a Shape Component Place a C Bus Button Component Place a button Component e g for a Page Link Place a Text Component Place an Image Component Place a Level Indicator Component Place an Indicator Component Place a Clock Component Place a Slider Component Place a Bar Slider Component Place a Monitor Component Place a Selector Component Place an HTML Component Place a Web Cam Image Component Place a Graph Component Place a Calendar Component Place a Component using a Tool Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 38 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Page Select Toolbar Page New Page v This allows you to select which page you wish to view The order of the pages is set with the Program Options form Access Control Toolbar amp Anonymous The button allows you to Log in Log out The text shows you to current Access Level Edit Toolbar GMS oe TA T T The Buttons functions are respectively Cut Component Copy Component Paste Component Paint Format of Component Undo last action Select All Components Align Components Set Component s Height to match selected Component S
10. User Manual generate a User Manual automatically Resources Report shows a report on how much memory has been used by a C Touch or PAC project Error Report show a report of the error states in the project Cascaded Scene Summary shows a report of the Cascaded Scenes Save Screen save a JPEG or Bitmap of the PICED screen image Save Screen with Border as above but with a border around the image Save All Screen Images as above but for all Pages JPEG only Images Refresh Images re load all images used by the project Open Image open the image of the currently selected component using the image editor selected in Program Options Convert Image Colours change the colours of an image Create Animation open the Create Animation form Convert Animated GIF convert an animated GIF to an animated Bitmap Re Scale All Images re scale all images used by the project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 45 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Re Scale Selected Images re scale the selected image s Re Scale Page Background Image re scale the page background image Convert Levels allows you to convert between percent level and Hexadecimal Auto Create automatically create Scenes Schedules Components etc Change Networks Change the Project Networks Change Colours change the colours of Components and Pages Create Desktop Shortcut create a shortcu
11. 11 4 68 Reduce the number of Irrigation Zones used or attempt to combine some together Error 14066 Message Can not add any more Irrigation Master Loads Maximum is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of Irrigation Master Loads which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Irrigation Master Loads used or attempt to combine some together Error 14067 Message Scene must have one or more actions Cause The Scene doesn t have any actions ie it doesn t do anything Solution Add some Actions to the Scene Error 14068 Message Pulse Timer Duration must be greater than 0 Cause The Pulse Timer Duration is currently set to 0 which will not do anything Solution Change it to be more than 0 Error 14069 Message Two or more Irrigation Programs have the same trigger Cause Two or more Irrigation Programs have the same trigger Group Address and Level This would cause two Irrigation Programs to be triggered at the same time Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 360 Home Management Series 11 4 69 11 4 70 11 4 71 11 4 72 Solution Change the trigger for one or more Irrigation Programs Error 14070 Message Two or more Irrigation Zones are the same Cause Two or more Irrigation Zones have the same Application and Group Address Solution Change the Application and or Group Address for one or more zones Error 140
12. 2 2 1 2 2 C Bus Concepts About C Bus C Bus is a microprocessor controlled wiring system that uses Unshielded Twisted Pair cable UTP cable as its communication medium C Bus is intended to be used mainly as a lighting management system although it has the capability of interfacing with other services such as security systems and air conditioning C Bus may be integrated as part of an overall energy management system C Bus is highly flexible in the way it operates because each device on the Bus has its own in built microprocessor These devices can be programmed in the field to provide optimum energy management conditions in any installation Information comes from Input Units such as Key Units Light Level Sensors and Infrascans Messages are sent via the Bus to Output Units such as Relays and Dimmers Connections between Input Units and Output Units are defined by Group Addresses GA thus GA can be considered as virtual wires C Bus Installation Software the C Bus ToolKit allows the user to modify GA as well as other parameters All parameters including GA are stored in each unit s non volatile memory C Bus is a truly distributed system It does not have a central processing unit C Bus intelligence is distributed across entire network For further details about C Bus see the Schneider Electric Australia web site at http www clipsal com cis or the C Bus Concepts document in the PICED manuals folder Networks W
13. 4 16 2 3 4 16 2 4 There are two basic techniques to generate mutually exclusive schedules ie only one will run at a time These are both illustrated in the Schedules CTD example provided with the PICED software The first of these techniques is to assign all Schedule Enable Groups the same Group Address and use a different level for each Schedule Since a Group Address can only have one level at a time only one Schedule can be in effect at one time Alternatively separate Group Addresses can be used to enable different Schedules Scenes can be used to set the Group Address levels to enable a different Schedule The designer is fully responsible for ensuring that the activity is mutually exclusive and so there is a potential for errors The Mutually Exclusive page of the Schedules CTD project illustrates this See also Power Failure Recovery Schedule Time The time that the Schedule is to occur is set on the Schedule Editor Time tab Schedule Type Schedule Time C Fixed Time HOURS MIN SEC wy fi J fb JF bp Sunrise HOURS MIN SEG A Sunset starting 19 0 0 Repeat HOURS MIN SEC Ending 23 0 6 O 6 C Random There are several options e Fixed Time The Schedule time is set in 2400 hour time eg 5PM 1700 Sunrise The Schedule time is sunrise plus or minus a fixed offset Sunset The Schedule time is sunset plus or minus a fixed offset Repeat The Schedule occurs at a regu
14. Access Levels provide a means of limiting access to the PICED software Access Levels can be defined using the Access Control Manager To open the Access Control Manager either e Click on the Project Edit Access Control menu item or Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 212 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Click on the Access Control button on the Tool Bar Access Levels Tab This allows Access Levels to be added deleted and edited The list columns can be rearranged or have their widths changed To sort by a column click on the top of that column Access Levels Users Access Features Options Auto Create Add Level Insert Level Edit Level Delete Level AccessLevel Name Anyone User 1 User 2 User 3 Supervisor Administrator pne wuna To automatically use the default Access Levels click on the Auto Create button To add a new Access Level click on the Add Level button To Insert a new Access Level in the list select an Access Level then click on the Insert Level button To delete an Access Level in the list select an Access Level then click on the Delete Level button To edit an Access Level either e select an Access Level then click on the Edit Level button or e double click on an Access Level This will allow the user to edit the name of the Access Level Users Tab This allows you to add Users and assign them Access Levels The list columns can be
15. Component Groups menu item Each Component Group will have a unique number Running Programs When a component is activated it can cause some Special Functions to be executed If you are creating a project for Colour C Touch you can use a Special Function to play a sound file wav format Colour C Touch does not currently support running other programs On the Special Functions tab when the Run Program option is selected there are two boxes to enter data e Program or File This is the wav file to be played e Parameters This can be ignored Notes The files selected will be copied to the project directory when it is saved If the path to a program or file contains spaces it may be necessary to enclose the path and executable name within double quotes eg C Program Files Internet Explorer IEXPLORE EXE If you are having problems getting the selected program to run it is recommended that you test that you have the details correct From the Windows Start menu select Run Copy the data from the Program or File and Parameters edit boxes into edit box on the Windows Run form and click on the OK button Grid It can be difficult to get Components to line up exactly when they are placed onto a Page To make this easier the components are placed on a grid which is set by default to be every 8 pixels This means that a component can only be placed every 8 pixels making them easier to line up When Copyright 2014 Sc
16. e Only reverse cycle plant is supported e Schedule control is ignored e Heating and cooling fan speeds are assumed to be the same e It is assumed that all operating types are allowed e The default temperature range is assumed Refer to the C Bus ToolKit documentation for additional details of the meaning and usage of the various options HVAC Zone Form The HVAC Zone form allows you to enter the details for an HVAC Zone It can be opened from the HVAC Application Manager The details which can be edited are e Monitor this selects whether you want to monitor this HVAC zone Only zones which are monitored can be used in the project e Zone Name the name of the HVAC Zone e Zone Group Number the Zone Group e Zone the Zone number All other data applicable to the Zone is displayed but it can not be edited Measurement Application C Bus devices can broadcast data via the Measurement Application The PICED software can monitor the Measurement messages and show the status using the Measurement Application Manager For more details on the use of the Measurement Application with specific device types refer to the documentation for the specific device See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Measurement Application Manager The Measurement Application Manager can be used to select Measurement Channels to be used To open the Measurement Application Manager either e select the Project C Bu
17. 11 4 123 Error 14125 Message You can not edit the details of users with higher access levels Cause You can only edit the details of users of your level or below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 375 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Solution Only someone with a higher access level can change the details of the selected user 11 4 124 Error 14126 Message Error in Location data Cause There is an error in the data entered for the location Solution Enter valid data 11 4 125 Confirmation 14127 Message Do you want to close the PICED software Cause Your action will close the PICED software Solution To close click on the Yes button otherwise click on the No button 11 4 126 Error 14128 Message Please select a file Cause A file has not been selected Solution Select a valid file name 11 4 127 Information 14129 Message The PICED program will be minimised It can be maximised from the Task Bar Reason The PICED software is about to be minimised Action Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 376 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on OK to continue To maximise the software again click on the PICED icon on the Windows task bar 11 4 128 Error 14130 Message Please enter a unique page name Cause The page name entered is not unique Solution Enter a unique page name 11 4 129 Error 14131 Message The x function is not supported f
18. Cause Some characters are not allowed in the Wiser password Solution Enter the correct password without the illegal characters 11 4 257 Warning 14643 Message If the Wiser Home Control is enabled as a LAN device the Wiser Home Control DHCP needs to be disabled and a static IP Address needs to be used Cause When the Allow Access from Wiser LAN Ports option is selected it is important to disable the Wiser DHCP server and ensure that the Wiser has a static IP Address compatible with the rest of the user s Ethernet network Solution Check the Wiser configuration Refer to the Wiser Installation Guide for details 11 4 258 Information 14644 Message The project has been refreshed from the unit A back up file was saved Reason You have transferred user updates from a C Touch C Touch Mark 2 Colour C Touch PAC or Wiser unit to the Project A back up of the Project was saved in case you need to return to it Action Click on OK 11 4 259 Error 14645 Message Unit memory is full Cause The Project being transferred to the unit it too large to fit in the unit Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 416 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide You will need to remove or optimise aspects of your project Refer to C Touch Resources C Touch Mark 2 Resources or PAC Resources for details 11 4 260 Error 14646 Message Name name is too long for use with Wiser Cause The length of
19. Cause There was a problem editing a Group Address tag Solution Use the C Bus Tool Kit to edit the Group Address tag Error 14031 Message Level Tag could not be added Please close this program and use the C Bus Tool Kit Cause There was a problem creating a new Level tag Solution Use the C Bus Tool Kit to add the Level tag Error 14032 Message Level Tag could not be edited Please close this program and use the C Bus Tool Kit Cause There was a problem editing a Level tag Solution Use the C Bus Tool Kit to edit the Level tag Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 349 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 32 11 4 33 11 4 34 11 4 35 Confirm 14033 Message This file is for a different project type screen size The project will be converted to suit Reason The page s being added to the project are for a different project type Action Click on OK to continue The pages will be resized automatically to suit Any features present in the imported pages which are not supported by the project type will be removed automatically Error 14034 Message Error reading file Reason Project file may be corrupted or too large Cause There was an error in the file being read The reason should provide clues as to the cause Solution Check that the file exists and you have read access rights Check that the file has not been corrupted A PICED project file can be loaded
20. Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 15 6 2 Select Components which control the desired groups 3 Open the Scene Manager 4 Click on the Auto Create button 5 Enter a name and the trigger details in the Scene Editor When you click on OK to close the Scene Manager checks are made to ensure that if scenes trigger each other there are no circular references For example if scene 1 triggers scene 2 which then triggers scene 1 these scenes will trigger each other indefinitely If there are circular references you will be alerted Scene Naming To simplify the management of large numbers of Scenes it helps to apply a structured naming scheme for the Scenes For example all Scenes for the first floor of a building may start with L1 and so forth When the scenes are sorted by name then they will be grouped together An example of well named Scenes might be as follows L1 All Off L1 All On L1 Cleaning L1 Night L2 All Off L2 All on L2 Cleaning L2 Night etc Large Scenes In large buildings there will be typically be a series of scenes to switch on and off parts of the building To switch on and off the whole building it can be easier to create a scene which triggers the other scenes rather than creating huge scenes Scenes which can not be edited If the Scene Locked option is selected then e f the current logged in user only has partial access for editing Scenes then the Scenes which can not be
21. Master Unit Is this the Master Unit Metric Units Are Metric Units used Time out Page The project Time out Page User System IO User System IO Variables are used by the Logic Engine to provide monitoring and control of the Logic Engine User System IO Variables can be controlled or monitored by Components User System IO is not available in Black and White C Touch no logic projects For Black and White C Touch and the Wiser Home Control e There can be no more than 10 string User System IO variables e String User System IO variables are limited to 30 characters in length Refer to the Logic Engine help file for details Scenes A scene is used to control several loads at once in a coordinated action A Scene is a pre determined set of Levels for particular Group Addresses Scene Components A scene can be used to set a series of lights to particular levels rather than setting them individually Common examples of uses of scenes are e Setting all of the lights in a building on or off e Setting the lights in a room for a particular use for a presentation or for a meeting e Controlling a series of loads for a particular use eg to set up for a video presentation a Scene could dim the lights close the curtains lower the projector screen start the VCR and start the projector Scenes can be created with the Scene Manager Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 183 Home Management Series PICED Programmer
22. Misc Tab Metric Units can be selected to display Temperature in Centigrade rather than Fahrenheit The Master Unit setting controls whether the unit will be the C Bus Master The Master Unit can also vary by Profile The Date Order option allows for the selection of the default order Day Month Year or Month Day Year or Year Month Day The Time Format option allows for the selection of the default time format 12 hour or 24 hour These options will be used when a new clock Component is placed on a Page and will be used by the unit when displaying system date time information Location Tab The Location tab of the Options page box allows you to select the location of the project installation which is used for sunrise sunset calculations The essential data is the Longitude and Latitude of the installation The easiest way to select this is to select the Country from the first drop down list then the city from the second drop down list This will enter the Longitude and Latitude for you If the Country and or City is not in the list s then type them in and type in the Longitude and Latitude If you click on the Add to Database button this city will be added to your database of cities and will be available for the next time you use the software installer Pages Alarm C Bus Media Internet Misc Location Daylight Savings Location Country Jaustralia 7 Add to Database City adelaide Save as Default L
23. Note that the names have changed Most Recent errors used to be referred to as Current errors Most Severe errors used to be referred to as Latched errors Acknowledged Errors An error can be acknowledged to confirm that an operator is aware of the error state using the Error Manager Error Data The data accompanying an error report depends on the unit type Typically it will have details of the nature of the fault and the relevant channel Using the Error Application The Error Application functions can be used via e Error Manager e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic Note that only errors which are monitored by the Error Manager are reported using the In Built System IO Variables The C Bus Error Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the device instructions for specific details of the operation of the device and the C Bus Error Application Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 26 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 8 2 3 9 2 3 10 Date Time Application The C Bus Date Time Application is used to synchronise the date and time between different devices on C Bus This process is automatic and does not require any input from the installer When the date or time is changed it will be broadcast onto C Bus The date and time can be changed using e Special Functions e In built
24. Scene Components The Scene Components are the C Bus events that the Scene will execute The Scene Components list shows the properties for each of the Scene Components The columns can be sorted by clicking on top of the column or they can be rearranged and have their widths changed by dragging them To add a new Scene Component 1 Select the desired Group Address from the Available Groups list 2 Select the desired level using the spin edit slider On and Off buttons or nudge buttons 3 Click on the gt button to add the Group Address to the Scene OR 1 Right click on the Scene Components list 2 Select the Add item 3 The Scene Component Editor will open Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 190 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 Enter the desired properties for the Scene Component and click on OK when complete or click on Apply to add the Component and leave the Scene Component Editor open to allow another Scene Component to be added Selecting Scene Components e To select a Scene Component click on a row in the Scene Components list e To select additional Scene Components hold down the CTRL key and click on the other Scene Components To select all Scene Components right click on the Scene Components list and select the Select All item e To de select all Scene Components right click on the Scene Components list and select the De select All item To delete a Scene Componen
25. Set up the Irrigation Control if required Set up the Access Control if required Add Logic if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit Transferring a C Touch Mark 2 Project to the Unit There are two types of information that you may want to transfer to the C Touch Mark 2 Unit The Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 284 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide more common requirement is to transfer the user configuration data that you have created Occasionally you may wish to transfer new firmware into the unit to add new features There are two alternative means of transferring data to the C Touch Mark 2 unit directly va a USB cable or va C Bus You can select which option you wish to use in the Program Options form Transferring via the USB Cable To transfer the Project follow the steps below 1 Connect your PC to the C Touch Mark 2 via the supplied USB cable The USB driver should recognise the fact that the C Touch Mark 2 has been connected and a virtual serial port will be created This allows the PICED software to use the USB
26. Solution Select Continue to ignore the error and import the data regardless Select Cancel to stop the import Update the Scene data file and import again 11 4 270 Error 14908 Message Error during file import Reason Cause An error occurred during the file import Refer to the reason for more information Solution It may be necessary to contact Schneider Electric Australia Technical support if the reason description is not self explanatory 11 4 271 Error 14999 Message Error Message Cause An unexpected error has occurred Solution If this is causing problems for the use of the PICED software please contact Schneider Electric Australia technical support You may need to provide Error Details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 420 Home Management Series Index A About PICED 4 Access Control 212 Auto Create 267 In built System IO 163 Level Editor 216 Levels 212 Limits 7 Log in 217 Log out 217 Old File Versions 218 Passwords 218 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 Tools 133 Users Editor 216 Access Levels 212 Editor 216 Limits 7 Action Selectors Labels 16 239 Activating Components 32 93 Add Page 48 Adding Components 132 Adding Page Links 126 Adding Pages 83 85 90 Additional Files 86 Adjusting Scenes 185 Adobe Flash 300 304 Air Conditioning Application 236 241 logging 319 Manager 242 Tools 133 Zone 245 Zone Group 243 Alarm 53 63 70 235 Tools 133 A
27. The Audio Source Control Editor is used for entering details of an Audio Source Control for use with Wiser Home Control projects It is accessed from the Audio Source Editor The details which can be selected for an Audio Source Control depend on the type All controls have the following e Icon this is the image displayed on the button for the Control e Short List Position this is the position to display the Control within the short list of Controls For a Media Transport Control Source the Control also has a Function which is the Media Transport Control function which will be sent when the Control is pressed Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 252 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 11 For a Trigger Control Source Control you can also select the Network Application Trigger Group and Action Selector This is typically used to trigger an Infra Red IR transmission to control a piece of audio equipment but may be used to trigger anything required Monitor Manager A Monitor is used to retrieve data from a C Bus unit The data can be e Light Level e Temperature e C Bus Voltage This data can be used by Monitor Components or by Logic The Monitor Manager provides a means of viewing all of the Monitors used in a project and to edit their properties To display the Monitor Manager select the Project Monitors menu item The Monitor Manager shows the following details for each monitor
28. e Name e Network e Unit Address e Type Light Level Temperature or C Bus Voltage e Refresh rate in seconds e Value if you are connected to C Bus and the value has been retrieved The Monitor Manager also shows the average rate at which the monitors occur This is very important because Monitors must send messages to C Bus devices to retrieve the data This is quite different to displaying for example Lighting level data which does not require C Bus devices to be polled If there are too many Monitors used or their Refresh Rate is too fast it can cause congestion on the C Bus network It is preferred that Monitor messages do not get sent more often than every few seconds In general you should select the longest period possible 5 to 255 seconds which will give satisfactory performance The Monitors can be manipulated as follows e To add a new Monitor click on the Add button The Monitor Item Form will be shown e To edit an existing Monitor select a Monitor Item in the list and click on the Edit button The Monitor Item Form will be shown e To delete an existing Monitor select a Monitor Item in the list and click on the Delete button e To refresh the Monitor data click the Refresh button or select the Auto Refresh check box to allow the data to be updated on a regular basis If there are Monitors which have been used by a Monitor Component but which are not present in the Monitor Manager the Auto Create button will be
29. lf you want a menu page created with page links to each page select the Create Menu item If you want each page labelled with its name select the Label Pages item If you want a theme page used for each of your pages select it from the Theme Page list If you want to add a tools or other template page select the Add Template Page button and select the required template page from the list or click the Browse button to select a page which is not listed Click on the Finish button when complete Saving the Project To save the project either click on the Save button of the tool bar or select the Save item from the File menu To save the project with a different file name select Save As from the File menu and enter the desired name If you are saving the project for the first time or saving with a different file name you will be prompted to enter a file name Select the directory where your project will be stored and enter a file name The default file extension is CTD which does not need to be entered To encrypt the project file to make it secure against tampering select Secure Project File cte from the Save As Type drop down list in the Save As form When you save the project all associated files images etc are copied into the project directory This is to ensure that all of the necessary files are collected together to prevent any of them from being inadvertently deleted and to simplify archiving the Project Once the proj
30. the first Shape Component on the Theme Components Page which has a C Bus type set e Clock the first Clock Component on the Theme Components Page Slider the first Slider Component on the Theme Components Page which is a Slider type Bar Graph the first Slider Component on the Theme Components Page which is a Bar Graph type Monitor the first Monitor Component on the Theme Components Page Selector the first Selector Component on the Theme Components Page HTML the first HTML Component on the Theme Components Page Graph the first Graph Component on the Theme Components Page Calendar the first Calendar Component on the Theme Components Page Notes If you have more that one of a particular type of theme component for example C Bus Buttons only the first one will be selected when placing a component To change which one is to be used as the default select the required one and click on the Move to Back tool bar button or menu item or the Edit Use as Theme Component menu item This will then make it the first one and hence it will be selected in the future To highlight the Components used as the Theme Components select the View Highlight Theme Components menu item If you want the automatic labelling of buttons to work based on what they control you will need to leave the text on the Theme button components as text If you edit a Theme Component you can change all similar Components in the project by 1 Sel
31. the new level will be shown on PICED after the network comes back on line again If a Network goes off line and a Group Address changes state on PICED during the time it is off line the new level will be transmitted to C Bus after the network comes back on line again this has priority over changes on C Bus while off line 7 2 Options The C Gate Config file can be used to configure various aspects of the C Gate behaviour These are discussed in detail in the C Gate documentation but a few are of significant relevance to the PICED software The table below shows these properties To change any of them 1 Close C Gate if running 2 Open the C Gate Config File C Clipsal C Gate2 Config C GateConfig txt assuming C Gate is installed in the default location 3 Change the value after the sign 4 Save the file 5 Start C Gate allow fast start To speed up the start up process the fast start option can be used This should not be used until a site is fully commissioned and there are to be no more changes to unit programming Set the allow fast start option to yes for the fast start to be used command port This is the TCP IP Port C Gate accepts commands on This should only be changed if there is a conflict with other software load change port This is the TCP IP Port C Gate sends status updates on This should only be changed if there is a conflict with other software global event level This should be left at 5 unless debuggin
32. A to F to stand for digits In the decimal system once the number 9 the last digit is reached a symbol has to be placed in the next column the tens column to create a number with two digits In the hexadecimal system in exactly the same way once the number F the last digit is reached a symbol must be placed in the next column the sixteens column A comparison between the two is shown below decimal hexadecimal 0 00 1 01 2 02 3 03 4 04 5 05 6 06 7 07 8 08 9 09 10 0A 11 0B 12 0C 13 0D 14 0E 15 OF 16 10 17 11 18 12 19 13 20 14 21 15 22 16 23 17 24 18 25 19 26 1A 27 1B 28 1C 29 1D 30 1E 31 1F 32 20 33 21 A complete list is provided in the PICED help file The PICED software has a Convert Levels form to allow you to convert between percent level and Hexadecimal values There is a Program Option to display C Bus related numbers Networks Applications and Group Addresses as hexadecimal if required Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 30 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 3 3 1 3 2 Configuring the PICED Software Starting the Software The simplest way to start the PICED software is to use the start menu item If you have installed the software using the defaults then click on the Start button click on Programs then Clipsal then PICED then PICED When the program starts you will see the Project Details wizard
33. An image with the name FILE NAME is already being used Only one image with a given name can be used in a project Do you want to use the existing image or the new one Cause There is already an image being used with the name FILE NAME For example you may have already used an image c Clipsal lmageLibrary clock bmp and you have just added the image c temp downloads clock pmp When the project is saved image files will be copied into the project directory hence it is not possible to use two different images with the same name You can look at the Project Summary for a list of all images used by the Project Solution Click on the Existing button to use the existing image instead Click on the New button to use the new image Note that this new image will be used everywhere in the project where this image name is used Error 14020 Message There is no C Bus Project selected Open the Project Details form and select a C Bus Project Cause There is currently no C Bus Project file selected Solution Open the Project Details form and select a C Bus Project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 345 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 20 11 4 21 11 4 22 Error 14021 Message Please save the Project first Cause The Project files need to be saved before they can be archived Solution Save the Project then archive the Project Error 14022 Message Program PROGRAM NAME co
34. Australia Page 148 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 12 2 2 Click on the Profile to select it then click on the Delete button Profile Groups Adding a Profile Group To Add a new Profile Group you will need three or more Profiles created See above then 1 Select the Profiles Groups tab 2 Click on the Add button 3 The Profile Editor will open 4 Enter the name of the Profile Group 5 Select the Profiles which are part of the Group 6 Click on OK Profile Group Name First Floor Rooms Notes This Profile Group is for all units on the first Floor V Room 14 V Room 1B Room 24 Room 28 See also adding Profile Groups Editing a Profile Group To edit an existing Profile Group 1 Select the Profile Groups tab 2 Either e Double click on the required Profile Group or e Click on the Profile Group to select it then click on the Edit button 3 The Profile Group Editor will open 4 Alter the details of the Profile Group 5 Click on OK Deleting a Profile Group To delete an existing Profile Group 1 Select the Profile Groups tab 2 Click on the Profile Group to select it then click on the Delete button Profile Values Integer Properties In places where an integer property can vary depending on the Profile you will see an edit button next to a drop down list box Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 149 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Tim
35. Australia Page 260 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 Add the power value e Open the Tools form Select the Power Meter category Select Power Click on OK and place the Component on the form Example 2 Daily Energy Usage kWh 40 30 10 0 21Jul 22 23 24 25 26 27 To display the daily total energy usage over the last week as shown above 1 Add a Graph Component 2 Select the graph In built System IO properties Key Function Status e In Built System IO Variable Power Meter Total Energy e Meter Tariff All Meters e Units Watt Hours e Period 1 day e Offset 0 e Data Type To Date select predicted if you want today s energy bar to show the predicted value 3 Select the Graph properties Graph Type Bar Points 7 Tick Grid Spacing 1 x 1 day Show Tick Marks Show Values Vertical Axis Maximum 40 or select value to suit 4 Scale the data e Select the Value Tab e Select System IO Value Custom e Gain 0 001 converts Watt Hours to kWh 4 25 12 7 Reactive Power In an AC power system there are two components of power e Real Power This is the power that does actual work and is what your energy provider power meter records and you pay for It is measured in Watts e Reactive Power This is power which circulates in the wiring due to inductive or capacitive loads but does no useful work It is measured in VAR The vector sum of the Real Power and Reactive Power is known as t
36. Change the access to C Bus 11 4 155 Error 14157 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 384 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Illegal Module name Can not use in a Module name Cause It is not possible to use a closing brace in a Module name Solution Enter a valid module name 11 4 156 Confirmation 14158 Message Are you Sure you want to store the new settings for this scene Reason You have selected a Component with the Scene Store Special Function to store the current state of a particular Scene This message does not get shown in Simulation Mode Actions Click on Yes to store the new Scene settings Click on Cancel to leave the Scene as it is 11 4 157 Confirmation 14159 Message Would you like to load a copy of the backup project file Reason The project file you have tried to open is corrupted in some way or did not exist If the file was corrupted you would have received Error 14034 with details Fortunately you have a backup file which can be loaded instead Actions Click on Yes to load a copy of the backup file Click on No to create a blank project 11 4 158 Error 14160 Message This Scene name is already used Please enter a unique Scene name Cause It is not possible to have two Scenes with the same name Solution Enter a unique name Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 385 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11
37. Enter the result you want displayed when the level is at its maximum and click OK The gain and offset will be calculated and placed in the boxes for you Alternatively the scaling coefficients can be calculated by knowing what the result is for two different levels If the levels are X1 and X2 and the corresponding results are Y1 and Y2 respectively then Gain Y2 Y1 X2 X1 Offset Y1 Gain X1 Note The Room Control System is an obsolete system for which support has been retained for backwards compatibility 4 9 4 2 10 Alpha Blending Alpha Blending is the process of making something look translucent ie you can partly see through it To select the amount of Alpha Blending and the options click on the Alpha Blend tab of Visible Properties tab on the Component Properties form Alpha Blend Options Border Background Image amp Text IV Alpha Blend Status Indication JV Variable Blending Level Active Inactive Alpha Blend Level feo Alpha Blend Level 40 The amount of blending can be from 0 all component no background to 100 all background component is invisible Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 114 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Depending on the type of Component you can Alpha Blend e Border and Background e Images e Text e Slider slot tick marks and thumb To have the Alpha Blending level show the Component status select
38. The Show on Startup check box allows you to set whether you want it displayed each time the software starts The left and right arrows allow you to scroll through the tips If a tip has an associated Help file entry a button with a question mark will appear Clicking on this will provide more information about the selected tip See also What s New Whats New The Software has many new features introduced with each new release The What s New form is designed to introduce a few of these ideas to you The What s New form will be displayed when you first start a new version of the software You can also display it by selecting the What s New item in the Help Menu The Show on Startup check box allows you to set whether you want it displayed each time the software starts Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 332 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 9 6 9 7 9 8 See also Tip of the Day CIS Web Site From time to time the Schneider Electric Australia Web Site may have PICED software updates and or new Frequently Asked Questions topics posted Click on http www clipsal com cis to go to the Schneider Electric Australia web site The C Bus Forums also contain a lot of useful information http www cbusforums com forums Design Guidance See the Tutorial for ideas on how to make projects quickly which are attractive and usable Example Projects Various example projects are supplied with the
39. To add a new Function Group click on the Add button Enter the name and image then click on OK To edit a Function Group select the Function Group and click on the Edit button Enter the new name or image and click on OK To delete a Function Group select the Function Group and click on the Delete button To change the order of a Function Group in the list select the Function Group and click the Up and Down buttons or just drag it to the new position To save the Function Groups as defaults for use on a future project click on the Save Default button To use default Function Groups created previously click on the Load Default button Widgets lolx Locations Function Groups Widgets Location Function Group amp 33 Ss E n Q t x No Locations x Security Al N gt Service Widget Type Location Function Description _ A C Bus 1 C Bus Lighting General Lighting Dimmer No Locations Lighting Local Lighting KA Lighting 2 C BusjLighting General Lighting Dimmer No Locations Lighting Local Lighting 9 Scenes 3 Surveillance Web Camera No Locations Security Camera at http Climate 4 C Bus Security Homesafe Panel Widget No Locations Security Security Contre a Security E Media N Other M Surveillance IS Logic E Other Filter by Location Ja Locations 7 Function Group Ja Function Groups 7 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia
40. Total number of Irrigation Integer Programs Irrigation Program Name Name of the selected Irrigation String Program Irrigation Zone Count Total number of Irrigation Zones integer oo igati No Irrigation Zone Name Name of the selected Irrigation String No Zone Irrigation Zone Duration The Irrigation duration of the Time selected Irrigation Zone Irrigation Zone Running _ Is the selected Irrigation Zone Boolean running Irrigation Running Zone The name of the currently String Name running Zone Irrigation can controlled via the Selected Program and the Selected Zone Yes No No Irrigation Zone Yes No No The Selected Program is the one corresponding to the Program Number in built System IO variable which can be changed to select the required Program The name of the Selected Program can be displayed using the Program Name in built System IO variable The Selected Zone is the one corresponding to the Zone Number in built System IO variable which can be changed to select the required Zone The name of the Selected Zone can be displayed using the Zone Name in built System IO variable The Irrigation Time in built System IO variable can be used to display and control the irrigation duration of the Selected Zone Some in built System IO marked with a above have an offset which allows the use of more than one of this System IO For example the duration of the Selected Zone can be shown and controlled but
41. an animation of a sprinkler which pops up and then shows water spraying continually you might Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 108 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide have animation frames which look like Repeat l Again pink has been used as the transparency colour In this case a repeating loop is required for the last three frames To create this effect the text file needs to have some extra data in it like this This file contains the animation details for the bitmap with the same file name Frame Count 7 Frame Rate milliseconds per frame 200 Optional frame data order of frames duration and looping F12 F22 F32 F41 F51 F61 F71 L50 The optional data at the end consists of series of instructions for how to do the animation There are two different types of lines e The ones starting with F for Frame number are followed by a frame number to display and a duration multiples of the Frame Rate e The ones starting with L for Loop are followed by an animation step to jump to and how many times to loop 0 means loop forever So the above animation text file means that frames 1 to 3 are to be shown for 400ms 2 x 200ms frame rate Frames 4 to 7 are then shown for 200ms each It then loops back to step 5 in this case showing frame 5 for 200ms This is repeated forever The Tools Images Convert Animated GIF menu item converts an animated GIF
42. displayed Enter the Media Link Group details and click on OK Editing Media Link Groups To edit an existing Media Link Group 1 Select the Media Link Group in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Media Link Group in the list 2 The Media Link Group Form will be displayed 3 Edit the Media Link Group details 4 Click on OK Deleting Media Link Groups To delete an existing Media Link Group 1 Select the Media Link Group in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Showing additional details To see additional details of all Media Link Groups click on the Details button The Media Transport Control Summary form will be displayed Media Link Group Form The Media Link Group form allows you to select the following details for a Media Link Group 1 Media Link Group Number this number is used for everything related to a specific set of media equipment 2 Name a name for the media server 3 Media Server see below Media Server Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 247 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 9 3 4 25 10 It is possible for the unit being programmed by PICED to act as a Media Server Generally this is done by interfacing to a third party device using logic If you are wanting to do this select the This unit is a Media Server option This will allow you to send Category Selection and Track information by setting Media Transport Control In built Sy
43. e For the last 3 months e 450 3000kWh The data can be entered as follows 1 Go to the Power Meter Manager history tab 2 Select Total 3 Select Daily Data 4 Select the start date for the period three months ago Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 258 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 Hold the keyboard Shift key and click on the end date for the period today 6 Click on Edit 7 In Data Type select Total for Selected Days 8 Enter the energy 3000kWh 9 Enter the cost 450 10 Leave Copy to Hourly Data selected 11 Click on OK 12 The daily total energy usage should be around 32kWh 4 80 depending on the number of days in the months 13 The hourly total energy usage should be around 1 3kWh 0 20 14 The per meter energy usage should around be 1 3 of the above figures Example 2 You have e Three pulse power meters e The power meters have been running for a few days so you have some history e An electricity bill as follows e For the last 3 months e 450 3000kWh The data can be entered as follows 1 Go to the Power Meter Manager history tab 2 Select Total 3 Select Daily Data 4 Select the range of dates for the period three months ending just prior to the actual history data you have 5 Edit the data as described in Example 1 6 The daily and hourly data will be in proportion to the recent historical data Example 3 You have e Three pulse power
44. or pulse duration hold the mouse over the Scene Component cell A hint will appear with the details of the Scene Component Adding and Removing Scene Components To add a Scene Component to a Scene Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 196 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Add Scene Component item To delete a Scene Component to a Scene 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Delete Scene Component item Capturing Scene Levels It is possible to capture the levels of Scene Components from the C Bus network and store them in the Scene To capture the levels for all of the Scene Components just click on the Capture button or right click on the Scenes list and select the Capture Capture item To capture just some of the Scene Components levels 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Capture item or right click on the Capture button 3 Select the Capture Selected Capture Network Capture Application or Capture Net and App sub item The meanings of these is discussed below e Capture Selected captures just the selected item s e Capture Network captures all Scene Components for the Network selected in the Available Groups panel Capture Applicatio
45. rx then you could run the log file through the filter filtering on keywords tx OR rx Then run the filtered file through the filter again filtering on the key word c gate Schedule Catch Up When the PC clock is adjusted there is a possibility that a Schedule may have been due to occur in the time that was missed The rules of determining what happens are e If the clock is adjusted back nothing happens It is possible that a scheduled event may occur twice e If the clock is adjusted forward by less than one hour all Schedules that were due in that time are quickly executed Pulsed events will still be executed for the defined duration e If the clock is adjusted forward by more than one hour but less than 24 hours the Schedules are quickly executed but e Commands are sent at the end of the process to set the final level of any Group Address level that needs to be changed e Pulsed Schedules are ignored e Ramping groups will be set the end level of the ramp e Ifthe clock is adjusted forward by more than 24 hours only the Schedules due in the last 24 hours of that time are executed During the Schedule catch up process a progress form will be shown Clicking on the Cancel button will terminate the Schedule Catch up See also Command Line Parameters Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 272 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 15 5 16 5 17 Create Animation To simplify th
46. the logic engine has been stopped Solution Run the Logic Engine again if needed 11 4 107 Warning 14109 Message A combination of AND and OR logic has been used AND has precedence over OR Additional brackets may be required to obtain the desired behaviour Cause Where a combination of AND and OR logic is used the Operator Precedence rules are important Solution Carefully check that the logic code is as required If needed manually enter brackets in the condition code to obtain the correct result 11 4 108 Warning 14110 Message Do you want to add the current condition before continuing Cause The Next button was pressed before the condition was added Solution If you want the currently selected condition to be added click on Yes Otherwise click on No Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 371 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 109 Warning 14111 Message Do you want to add the current action before continuing Cause The Finish button was pressed before the action was added Solution If you want the currently selected action to be added click on Yes Otherwise click on No 11 4 110 Error 14112 Message Theme Pages have too many levels Cause Theme Pages can be based on other Theme Pages Too many levels have been created Solution Remove some levels of the Theme Pages 11 4 111 Error 14113 Message Tag Database Error Error Description Remedy Cause A Tag
47. uses the Carbon Footprint value e Cost per hour uses the energy Tariff For Energy values the data can be expressed as e kWh e kg of CO uses the Carbon Footprint value e Cost uses the energy Tariff Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 181 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e MJ For Energy and Peak Power values the period can be selected e Duration number of hours days weeks months e Offset Offset of 0 is current period Offset of 1 is period before that etc When using a period which is a multiple of days the data is from midnight to the current day and time When using a period which is a multiple of weeks the data is from midnight on a Sunday night 0 00 on Monday morning to the current day and time When using a period which is a multiple of months the data is from midnight on the morning of the first of the month to the current day and time For energy values the data type can be selected e To date energy used during the period so far e Predicted rough estimate for the period e Average average for as far back as data is available Predicted data is based on past history and or the current power level It may give unexpected results in unusual circumstances For the Power Meter Total Power Meter Total Energy and Power Meter Maximum In built System IO Variables the total can be calculated by tariff or for all meters This provides the ability to separately view the
48. 02 2011 X Calculate Sunrise Sunset To find the Longitude and Latitude of cities look in an Atlas or one of the many Internet sites such as http www heavens above com countries asp To verify that the data entered is correct click on the Calculate Sunrise Sunset button and confirm that the data provided is correct The sunrise and sunset times can usually be found in newspapers or on the Internet To use this location automatically each time a project is created click on the Save as Default button To allow the location longitude and latitude to be viewed and selected using a map click on the Map button to open the Location Selection form Daylight Savings Tab The Daylight Savings tab of the Options page allows you to enter various parameters related to your location including e The time zone e The start date and time of Daylight Savings e The finish date and time of Daylight Savings e The amount of time adjustment during Daylight Savings The Daylight Savings settings are used for the calculation of sunrise and sunset times Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 62 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 5 Time Zone GMT 09 30 v Reset to Local Time Zone Daylight Savings Select Other Time Zone No daylight savings Add 1 hour Create Schedules Start of Daylight Savings Day First Sunday in October Time 2 00 00 AM Daylig
49. 08 2006 12 14 09 PM C Gate Rx lighting on nhome 254 56 32 sourceunit 255 OID 22249 72 7081 4bab a1 68 d5a36470e435 sessionld cmd7 commandld 22 This shows the command on 254 56 32 being sent to C Gate C Gate then acknowledges the receipt of this command 200 OK and shortly later says that the command has been sent to C Bus Similarly if a command is seen on C Bus generated by another C Bus device you will see a log entry like 04 08 2006 12 17 50 PM C Gate Rx lighting off nhome 254 56 32 sourceunit 5 OID 22249c72 7081 4bab a1 68 d5a36470e435 In the above command you can see that Network 254 Application 56 lighting Group Address 32 has gone off The unit address of the C Bus unit which sent the command is 5 You can ignore the OID data as it is only of internal use The other commands which you will see in the log which may be of interest are for monitoring network state and reporting the unit data Refer to C Gate Algorithm for details of what is happening Info Messages Information info messages are used to provide general information related to the operation of the PICED software These messages are prefixed with Info Info messages include e When the log first starts a series of info messages provide details of the computer lf a C Bus command is not sent because the network is off line Access Control messages users logging in pages timing out etc Messages related to transferring projects to
50. 1 If PICED is not running e Start PICED e Select Transfer Project From Unit e Select Next 2 If PICED is running e Select File New Project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 297 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 5 3 6 5 4 6 5 5 e Select Transfer Project From Unit e Select Next 3 If PICED is running and you have a PAC project already open e Select the Transfer Transfer Project from Unit menu item The form below will appear 7 Connection Connection Type USB COM2 Change If the Connection Type is wrong click the Change button and select the correct connection Select the C Bus Project which was is used with the PAC project A Before transferring a PAC Project you must have a C Bus Project which contains at least all Networks and Applications used by the PAC project It is preferable to have tags for all Group Addresses used too Click on Next The project will be transferred from the PAC Select a folder to store the project and click OK Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first If you have a PAC Project open and it has been transferred to a PAC unit you can transfer changes made by a user back to the project in your computer 1 Connect the computer to the PAC unit 2 Click on the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item 3 The Transfer Project From
51. 10 5 0 J Show Tick Marks Axis Line Line Colour Line Width 2 v Line Style Solid Line v Graph Line Colour Line Width l2 ba Line Style Solid Line v Show Grid Lines V Show Values Maximum 100 Tick Grid Spacing 20 V Show Tick Marks Show Grid Lines V Show Values eis oid H Vertical Axis Minimum Options The Options group allows you to select e The Graph Type e Line a line joins the data points e Area like a line graph but the area under the line is filled in e Bar each data point is drawn with a vertical bar e The number of Points to be plotted e The data to be plotted e Current Value the value at the time each new point is drawn is used e Average Value the average value over the interval is used e Maximum Value the maximum value over the interval is used e Minimum Value the minimum value over the interval is used Horizontal Axis The Horizontal Axis group allows you to select for the horizontal axis e The time Interval between data points e The spacing between tick marks grid points e Whether to Show Tick Marks e Whether to Show Grid Lines e Whether to Show Values time if this is selected the horizontal axis label will not be shown If displaying Power Meter In built System IO data energy cost or peak power the horizontal time scale is determined by the properties of the In built System IO Variable on the System IO Properties Tab For exampl
52. 123 456 Error 14061 Message Latitude must be between 0 and 90 degrees Cause The Latitude is outside of the range 0 to 90 degrees Solution Change the Latitude to the correct value Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 358 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 61 11 4 62 11 4 63 11 4 64 Error 14062 Message Longitude must be between 0 and 180 degrees Cause The Longitude is outside of the range 0 to 180 degrees Solution Enter the correct Longitude Error 14063 Message Can not have repeat interval less than 10 seconds Cause The Schedule repeat interval has been set to less than 10 seconds If the repeat interval is too short there will be excessive C Bus traffic generated Solution Change the repeat interval to 10 seconds or more Error 14064 Message Can not add any more Irrigation Programs Maximum is imit Cause There is a limit to the number of Irrigation Programs which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Irrigation Programs used or attempt to combine some together Error 14065 Message Can not add any more Irrigation Zones Maximum is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of Irrigation Zones which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 359 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 65 11 4 66 11 4 67
53. 155 Tools 133 Types 218 Special Functions 126 133 143 151 Scheduled 207 Spread Sheets 143 Starting 31 Start up 36 318 Start up Options 32 Start up Page 53 63 70 Status 120 Status Bar 40 Step by Step Guide 48 Story Board 335 Sub Page Frame 99 120 Sub Pages 146 Frame 99 120 Page Change Effect 151 Summary Cascaded Scenes 329 Project 328 Project Errors 324 Sunrise 53 63 70 79 96 111 203 Sunset 53 63 70 79 96 111 203 Symbol Inset 106 129 Sync State 236 Synchronise to Schedules 212 System In built System IO 183 Tools 133 System IO 124 154 Auto Create 267 In built 155 159 163 164 167 168 169 170 171 177 179 180 181 183 In built example 157 Limits 7 User 183 Variables 154 System lO Variables Status 120 Page 432 Home Management Series T Tags 29 Compact Tag File Refresh 274 Tariff 255 TCP IP logging 319 Telephony Application In built System IO logging 319 Special Functions System IO 155 Tools 133 Temperature Monitors 273 24 236 239 168 151 171 97 253 83 85 90 84 85 84 50 Templates Creating Editing Saving Selecting Using 86 Testing 36 93 319 Text 94 Alignment Components Font 106 Justification Symbols Theme 144 Components Page 146 selecting 91 Using 146 Thermostat 27 Threshold 90 Time 27 53 63 70 111 151 236 281 286 289 298 Adjustment Change 272 In built System IO setting 164 Special Functions Sys
54. 20 on a remote network C Touch will indicate that GA 20 on the local network is also on Note that it will not have sent a command to the Local Network If you want a command to go to the local network as well as other networks at the same time you will need to use scenes It is best to avoid using indicators showing the state of Group Addresses on Remote Networks i e that are more than one bridge away C Touch can not monitor the state of Group Addresses on remote networks unless Message Tunneling is used see below If C Touch sends a command to Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 12 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 2 3 1 a remote network the indicator may or may not be showing the actual state If the state is changed by something on the remote network the command may not appear on the local network and hence the C Touch will again not show the correct state Message Tunneling If the bridges are set up to send messages from remote networks back to the local network you can monitor the state of the remote networks Networks that are adjacent to the Local Network can send messages back to the Local Network using Application Connect Mode Networks that are further away can use Message Tunneling to send messages back to the Local Network If Application Connect Mode Message Tunneling is not enabled it is best to avoid using indicators showing the state of Group Addresses on Remote Net
55. 4 Select All Ctrl 4 IZE Component Order The menu items are Activate Component this Activates the currently selected Component Undo cancels the previous action s Delete delete the selected component s Cut cut the selected component s Copy copy the selected component s Paste paste a copy of the copied component s Paint Format paint the format of the copied component Component Properties set the properties of the selected component Align align the position of the selected component s Select All select all of the components on the page Size Height Adjusts the height of the secondary selections to the primary selection Width Adjusts the width of the secondary selections to the primary selection Both Adjusts the width and height of the secondary selections to the primary selection Component Order change the drawing order of the selected component Move Back move selected Component back one position Move to Back move selected Component to the back Move Forward move selected Component forward one position Move to Front move selected Component to the front If you wish to have the Component Properties editor open when a component is first placed on a Page select the Open Automatically When Placing Components check box If you want the Component Properties editor to automatically select the same tabs as when you last opened it if possib
56. 4 159 Confirmation 14161 Message There are duplicate Groups in this Scene Do you want to continue Reason The Scene has two or more Group Addresses which are the same This is usually not desirable Actions Click on Yes to save the Scene as it is Click on No to change the Scene 11 4 160 Confirmation 14162 Message There is no prefix text selected Do you want to continue Reason There is no prefix text entered This will make it hard to distinguish the re coloured image from the original Actions Click on Yes to continue Click on No to enter a prefix 11 4 161 Confirmation 14163 Message This schedule may not operate as expected because reason Do you want to continue Reason The Schedule Time is based on sunrise or sunset but there are some days of the year when it may not work as expected for the reason given The various causes and solutions are listed below Schedule Due on Next Day If you have a Schedule which is set to be at Sunset 5 hours then on days where the sunset is after 7PM the Schedule will actually occur on the following day If this is not what you want the alternatives are to reduce the offset or to make the Schedule be at a fixed time such as 11PM Schedule Due on Previous Day If you have a Schedule which is set to be at Sunrise 6 hours then on days where the sunrise is before 6AM the Schedule will actually occur on the previous day If this is not what you want the alternatives a
57. A page is a set of components that are displayed together A Project may contain many pages linked together so that user can navigate between them See also Software Limits and Good Design Practices Selecting Pages To select a particular page either e Select the required page from the drop down list on the tool bar e If the required page has a link from the current page activate the component that links to it e Use the CTRL Page Up Down keys to move forward or back a page When the page changes it will use the selected Page Transition to change from one page to the next Adding Pages A project can have multiple pages each of which contains various components To add a new page e click on the New Page speed button on the Tool Bar OR select the Page New Page menu item e enter the name of the new page and set any other Page Properties e click on OK To make a copy of a page e Select the desired page e select the Page Duplicate Page menu item Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 90 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 8 3 4 8 4 e enter the name of the new page e click on OK To add a Template page or pages with its components to the current project e select the File Add Template Contents menu item select which parts of the Template you want to load select the desired file click on OK if the name of the Template page has already been used a new one will be
58. Actions If you want to close C Gate click on Yes otherwise click on No 11 4 189 Error 14192 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 395 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide You do not have sufficient privileges to perform task Cause You do not have sufficient privileges to perform a specific task hence it has not been performed Solution Click on OK If you are running Windows Vista refer to the Use With Windows Vista topic of the FAQ 11 4 190 Error 14193 Message Can not add any more Widgets Maximum is value Cause There is a limit to the number of Widgets which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Widgets 11 4 191 Error 14194 Message Can only add files which are in the project directory Cause Only files which are in the project directory can be included in the transfer package Solution Click on OK Copy the required file to the project directory and try again 11 4 192 Warning 14195 Message The use of HVAC Application in built System IO variables has changed since this file was created If these have been used with logic it will be necessary to update the logic code Cause You have loaded an older file which handles HVAC Zones in a superseded way The HVAC App lIn Built System IO variables used to control just a single HVAC Zone As of PICED version 4 4 they may control multiple zones Copyright 2014 Schneider E
59. App 168 Indicator Kill 185 186 Indicators Scenes 23 Input Unit 6 Insert Symbol 129 Page 426 Home Management Series Installation 7 Internet Connection 53 63 70 images 98 Options 53 63 70 Proxy 53 63 70 Introduction 4 iPod 58 63 70 151 330 iPort 53 63 70 330 Irrigation 13 Auto Create 267 Control 222 225 Edit 225 Enable 225 In built System IO 163 Latched Solenoids 222 225 Limits 7 Manager 225 Master Loads 222 225 Master Unit 329 Programs 222 225 Rain Delay 222 225 Solenoids 222 225 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 Time 96 Timer 111 Tools 133 Valve Types 222 225 Zone Delay 222 225 Zone Durations 222 225 Zones 222 225 JPEG 98 107 K Key 7 Key Functions 122 262 Custom 263 264 Keyboard Shortcuts 41 L Labelling In built System IO 179 Labels 16 239 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia logging 319 Special Functions System IO 155 Tools 133 Latched Solenoids Latitude Level 266 Level Indicator Levels 14 15 Adding Editing Selecting 18 Licences 7 Light Level Monitors Lighting Audio bridge 28 Lighting Application Limits 7 Lines 101 132 Links 126 Lists 47 Moving Items 47 Load Alarm Reset 316 Load duration 316 Load Monitor 316 In built System IO Special Functions System IO 155 Tools 133 Location Locations Lock Components Log 319 filter 271 Printing 89 Logic 4 7 235 Control Examples 333 Files 8
60. Australia Page 112 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Value to Display C Bus Group Address Percent C Bus Group Address Level C Bus Group Address RCS Temperature C Bus Group Address Level Tag Description C Bus Group Address Tag Description seessusenssesssessensesssscessensesssssensecssnssnsensssssnsensoesey C System I O Yalue Default System I O Value Custom Custom Prefix Text Postfix Text fo Gain fp Calculate Offset booo Decimal Places 0 For a Component displaying or controlling C Bus the options are e C Bus Group Address Percent display Group level as a percentage of full load e C Bus Group Address Level display Group level e C Bus Group Address RCS Temperature display Group level as an RCS Room Control System Temperature if the Group Address is used to broadcast RCS Temperature e C Bus Group Address Level Tag Description display Group level as a Tag Description if there are Level Tags for the Group does not apply to Graph Components e C Bus Group Address Tag Description display Group tag does not apply to Graph Components e C Bus Group Address Custom display Group level as a custom value see below For a Component displaying or displaying or controlling System IO the options are e System IO Value Default display System IO value with default settings e System IO Value Custom display System IO value as a custom value see below Cu
61. Bus component can be set to any of the following types ON this switches the load on OFF this switches the load off ON OFF this toggles the load on and off If the load level is greater than 0 it is regarded as being on DIMMER a short press will toggle the load on and off A longer press will dim the load up and down UP apress will dim the load up ON UP a short press will switch the load on A longer press will dim the load up DOWN a press will dim the load down OFF DOWN a short press will switch the load off A longer press will dim the load down TIMER Resettable this will switch a load to a particular level for a particular time When the time expires the load will return to a specified level The timer time can be shown with a Clock component Pressing again while the timer is running will start the timer again TIMER Toggle this will switch a load to a particular level for a particular time When the time expires the load will return to a specified level The timer time can be shown with a Clock component Pressing again while the timer is running will stop the timer PRESET this will set the load to a preset level 0 100 This is often used for triggering Scenes in a different unit BELL PRESS this will set the load to a particular level while the component is being pressed When the component is released the load will return to a specified level SCENE This will set a scene Note that pressi
62. C Touch projects The HTML Component can be used to show any HTML page including e pages on the hard disk for example instructions Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 97 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 3 11 4 9 3 12 e web pages for example a weather forecast e video camera web cam images e web based control panels The properties which can be selected for an HTML Component are e Border e URL web address e Refresh Rate Notes The HTML Component is unique in several respects e The user can only click on the Border to Select or Manipulate it e The Background is not drawn by the PICED software but by the operating system and is always on top of the Drawing Order e Some Keyboard Shortcuts will not work if the mouse is over the HTML component Note that if an Internet page is to be displayed the computer running PICED needs to have an Internet connection It is recommended that a firewall and virus scanner are used for security See also HTML Properties and FAQ topics Problems with displaying HTML and Using Web Cams Web Cam Image A Web Cam Image Component is very similar to an Image Component except that it displays a JPEG image retrieved from a Web Camera or from the Internet The properties which can be selected for an HTML Component are e URL web address e Refresh Rate how often the image is updated A Web Cam Image has no border or background The im
63. COM Port being selected in the Program Options form Cause 1 The connection could not be made to C Bus because the serial port was being used by another program Solution 1 Close down any other programs that are using the serial port Cause 2 The connection could not be made to C Bus because an operating PC Interface could not be found Solution 2 Check that the right serial port is selected in the Program Options Check that a PC Interface is connected Check all Cables Check that C Bus power is applied Check that the PC Interface has power the LED s should be lit Error 14024 Message One or more used networks do not exist in project PROJECT NAME Please select another project or close this program and edit the selected project Cause The PICED Project uses networks which do not exist in the C Bus project The PICED software can not use or control networks which do not exist in the project database Solution Click on Show to see e alist of the networks in the PICED Project e alist of the networks in the C Bus Project e alist of where each network is used Click on Change to change the networks used by the project Click on Continue to return to selecting a C Bus project Click on Close to close the PICED software and edit the C Bus Project To resolve the problem e Select a different C Bus Project or e Remove any use of the networks which are not supported or e Edit the C Bus project to include t
64. Control Application e Level When a C Bus message with matching Network if required Application Group Address and Level is received the Scene will be set triggered Note that the ramp rate of the received message is ignored If a Scene is to be triggered from a remote Network it is necessary to ensure that the message will be routed back to a Connected Network so that it will be seen If several different Scenes need to be triggered and they are mutually exclusive ie only one will run at a time have them all on the same Group Address but triggered at different levels Since a Group Address can only be at one level only one scene will be triggered at a time Notes A To trigger a scene the group address needs to be set to the trigger level not merely ramp through it AN Ifthe trigger group ramps to the trigger level ie not instantaneously the Scene will Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 184 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 15 2 4 15 3 NOT be triggered at the end of the ramp It will be triggered as soon as the command is received See also Cascaded Scene Report Triggering Scenes With Other Units Triggering a Scene from another unit To Trigger a Scene in the PICED software Black and White C Touch Colour C Touch or PAC from another unit 1 Make sure the Scene has a Scene Trigger 2 Configure the unit to set the Scene Trigger When a Scene key is pressed on th
65. Database error has occurred Solution Apply the suggested remedy normally involves closing PICED and running the C Bus Tool Kit 11 4 112Error 14114 Message Theme components page can not be deleted while there are other Theme Pages Cause The first of the Theme Pages is always the Theme Components page This can not be deleted while there are other Theme Pages present Solution Delete the other Theme Pages first then delete the Theme Components Page Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 372 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 113 Error 14115 Message The Identifier name has already been used for another identifier type Please select another name Cause The selected name has already been used for another Module Procedure or Function Solution Enter a different name 11 4 114 Confirmation 14116 Message Are you sure that you want to delete ALL of the Logic Cause You have requested to clear all of the logic code Solution Click on Yes to delete the code otherwise click on the No button 11 4 115 Warning 14117 Message Please Note You are entering the Logic Programming Engine of the Schedule Plus software Logic programming extends the use of Schedule Plus using logic statements defined by the installer Schneider Electric Australia cannot control the contents of program modules written in this Logic Engine and as such will not be held responsible for any loss or damages th
66. Host enter the IP address of the server you wish to connect to Folder enter the folder name you wish to access on the samba server ZigBee ZigBee Project ZigBee ZigBeeProject 001 bad Network Selected Transparent Port Interface 4 My Network iM 10010 usBOethernet En P The Wiser2 can communicate directly with a ZigBee wireless network A ZigBee network must first be created and commissioned next a project must be created using the Zoolkit software Enable ZigBee select to use ZigBee within the Wiser2 project ZigBee Project select the project that was created using the Zoolkit software Network all networks in the Zoolkit project will be listed Selected the Wiser2 can communicate to one ZigBee network only the first network will be selected by default Transparent Port the Wiser2 will allow its ZigBee interface to be accessed on IP network on this port Interface select the ZigBee network interface if you select Ethernet you will need to enter the IP address and port number of the ZigBee ethernet interface USB is the on board interface Ethernet IP if you selected Ethernet as the ZigBee interface you must enter the IP address of the ZigBee Ethernet interface Port if you selected Ethernet as the ZigBee interface you must enter the port number of the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 77 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide ZigBee Ethernet interface
67. Media Cntr siiis ss cteccescstageettcteeecses sue cvanebawetadteneaenintewunsdhenethanctdeesacebadeesaneescecntens 330 8 11 C Bus Fault Dlagnosl Suisse cca sossssescecessecececs in ce thee dds cess busdenpeneccenense hse ennn nn nnmnnn ennnen 331 9 Other Help Sources lt scccesiescecctisccceasccecesesasdtacecvenchcessbsacsansaveadndnstaceasonsdeectnsnnendeves 332 9 1 bel 23g Bape creer pee cn ace eect ee cea er cee re oey Pec ore ets Meee eee cee ear 332 9 2 Ma n lS iiien op ne oe Se ee aE Om ee eee eee ema aaea EE 332 9 3 Ta e E E nde piteanach tose ee ie te ech E E eae ne Ge eee 332 9 4 Tip Of th Day siae anaran aoaaa repa ea aeaaea apaan raia 332 9 5 Whats NeW ria a ae ee ee ee eda bed es Rapti 332 9 6 CIS Web Sle ich eka a ee ie eee ee re 333 9 7 Design Guidance iira aarti iE e aeaea a a aa aa eaaa aeaa aa ae e 333 9 8 Example Projects ticc3 ce tai eee en ee ells 333 10 Documenting the Installation ccscssssessesseseecsseeseseseeseseeseseseenensesnneeeesenousnneenes 334 10 1 Story Board Pro Forina aaee a aad ee eis 335 10 2 Scene Pro FOrniac 1ic0 ie titel eee tide 336 10 3 SCHEGUS P o Forma sscece a oeche dees ehcecc st etee nected cee idenana hi meinaa NE conse see ted eveteetectverceelen 336 10 4 Saving the Screen IMAGES wiaccisccccccsececseceeceentecdnecesseececsnectentecnsceenceenneedsteeeseeenecenee 337 10 5 Us r MANNA a cscs oh ce weeds cas aapna aeaaea aap aiaa sede Apere a E aaea ha Gant cde encceets Hennes 338 11 Err
68. Message Do you want to refresh this project from the unit to get user changes before editing the project e Click on the Never button if you don t want to be asked for this project again Cause You have opened a project which has the project Option set to remind you to refresh the project from the unit before editing the project When updating unit Projects it is important to retrieve any changes made by the user first Solution Click on Yes to refresh the project Click on No to edit the project without refreshing first Click on Never to not be reminded for this project again this disables the Refresh project from unit before editing option 11 4 264 Error 14651 Message The short list has values missing Please add additional controls or renumber the existing controls Cause The short list value of each control is used to place the control in the correct position of the short list There must be no gaps in the list This error is raised when there are values missing For example if you have controls with short list positions 1 2 4 and 5 then there is a gap at position 3 and an error will be raised Solution Add acontrol at the missing short list position or renumber the other controls using the Audio Source Editor 11 4 265 Confirmation 14806 Message Special Day occurs in the past Do you want to continue Cause You have attempted to add a Special Day which is for a date prior to the current date This
69. Network selection list will just be used to select the network for the required tags If you want to have a Scene triggered only from a particular network de select the Trigger from any Network option and select the required network in the list This option is not available for Black and White C Touch or PAC projects Black and White C Touch and PAC always trigger from any network If the Scene does not need to be triggered from another input unit leave the Group Address as unused Typically a particular Group Address on the Control Application number CA hex will trigger the Scene when it is at 100 It is preferable to define level tags for any Scene triggers to make it very clear exactly what is happening Scene Components Tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 189 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Scene Name Night Scene Live Changes Scene Trigger Scene Components Sliders Available Groups Scene Components c apture Network Local Network sw levoj ko 2j o _on as All Networks m pO Application lighting x ER ae ar A A M All Applications gt gt Show All Groups Show Groups not in Scene Ramp Rate instantaneously z Select All Group Lighting Basement Ligh 1 Local Network Lighting Basement Light 1 0 Local Ne Lighting Basement Ligh 2 Local Network Lighting Bathroom Exhaust Fan 0 Local Ne Lighting Bathroom Exh gt 3 Local N
70. Networks are to be used and opened Refer to the Project Summary to determine where the Networks have been used Error 14058 Message Network s NETWORK NAME are not supported by C Gate Please update the C Bus Project file Cause One or more networks used in the project are not supported by C Gate Solution 1 Remove some networks from the project Refer to the Project Summary to determine where the Networks have been used Solution 2 Update the C Bus project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 357 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 58 11 4 59 11 4 60 Warning 14059 Message There appears to be a discrepancy between the selected Longitude and the selected Time Zone Cause The Longitude that has been entered on the Location Tab is more than 4 hours from the Time Zone selected on the Daylight Savings tab Solution Change the Longitude and or the Time Zone if one or both is in error If both are correct then ignore this message Error 14060 Message Invalid Longitude Latitude Must be 1 to 3 numbers separated by spaces or a number followed a decimal point and the fractional part of the number Cause The Longitude or Latitude data has been entered incorrectly Solution Enter the data as one of the following formats e Degrees e Degrees Minutes e Degrees Minutes Seconds e Degrees Fraction Valid examples are e 123 e 12330 e 1233012 e
71. Otherwise if the error reason is The version of C Gate could not be found or is not compatible with this version of PICED the problem is caused by the versions of C Gate and PICED being incompatible with each other You will need to either e Install a version of C Gate which is compatible with PICED OR e Change to a different version of PICED Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 394 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Note that C Gate is installed as part of the C Bus ToolKit To obtain or update C Gate it is necessary to install or update the C Bus ToolKit Refer to the Schneider Electric Australia web site for software updates and software version compatibility details 11 4 186 Error 14188 Message Printing failed Please check that the printer is connected and switched on Cause There was an error when trying to print Solution Click on OK Check the following e There is a printer connected e The printer is switched on e You can print from other applications 11 4 187 Error 14189 Message COM Port Error It may be necessary to re start the PICED software Cause There was an error with a COM port Solution Click on OK Re start the PICED software if the problem has not been resolved 11 4 188 Confirmation 14191 Message Do you want to close C Gate Reason You are closing the PICED software and you have the Close C Gate when program closes Program Option selected
72. Page 230 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Tools At the top of the page are buttons to allow you to control various aspects of the Project Edit Project details Save the Project Edit Schedules Edit Scenes Edit Logic Edit User System IO Edit E Mail Edit RSS Feeds Edit HVAC Air Conditioning Make Projector see below View User Manual for selected skin Transfer the Project Run _Simulation Mode There are also some buttons for editing Widgets e To add a new Widget click on the Add button The Widget Editor will appear Enter the Widget details then click on OK To edit a Widget select the Widget and click on the Edit button The Widget Editor will appear Enter the new Widget details then click on OK To delete one or more Widgets select the Widgets and click on the Delete button To duplicate one or more Widgets select the Widgets and click on the Duplicate button To sort the Widgets click on the Sort button This will sort them by Location then by Function Group This will help them to be displayed in a suitable order on the Wiser user interface Service Type Selection The Tree on the left allows the Service Type to be selected This allows Widgets of particular types to be viewed by themselves At the bottom of the tree is a Filter By box These can be used to select which Locations and Function Groups you wish to vew Widgets for Widgets All Node When the All node is selecte
73. Preview button If no image file is selected you will see bands of colours like that shown below If an image is selected you will see how the image will be re coloured 5 Select the image s required Click on the folder button next to the Image File s edit box 6 Select the folder where the files will be copied to Click on the folder button next to the Output Folder edit box 7 To avoid ending up with multiple images with the same name enter a prefix in the File Name Prefix edit box This text will be placed in front of the new file name and should normally be the name of the colour If you leave this blank a unique 6 digit character colour identifier will be used automatically 8 If you wish to re scale the image s at the same time select the new scale with the re scale edit box 9 Click on the Save button 10 All of the re coloured and re scaled if selected images will now be in the selected folder with their new names Example of the effect of re colouring an image showing the original colours and the colours they get transformed to with the various re colouring options Original Normal Inverted Shades of White to Non white to Black to Hon black to selected selected selected selected selected colour colour colour colour i colour An example of a converted image using the normal setting is shown below Original Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 265 Home Management Serie
74. Pulse Power Meters used by the project The format of the report can be set to HTML or Text in the Program Options form The report will be saved in the same directory as the project for later inspection See also Check Project Printing Cascaded Scene Report A cascaded Scene is one which is triggered from another Scene Care must be taken when cascading Scenes as it can cause a lot of Groups to be set It can also cause unexpected things to happen A report listing all Scenes and show which Scenes are cascaded can be generated by selecting the Tools Reports Cascaded Scene Summary menu item This lists all Scenes and which Scenes are triggered by those Scenes and so on In the example extracted from a Cascaded Scene Summary below Scene 3 is triggered from Group 1 being set to 100 It also triggers Scene 5 and Scene 6 Scene 6 in turn triggers Scene 7 and Scene 8 Scene Scene 3 Scene Trigger Application Trigger Group Address Group 1 Level 100 Triggers Scene Scene 5 Any Network Lighting Group 11 100 Triggers Scene Scene 6 Any Network Lighting Group 12 100 Triggers Scene Scene 7 Any Network Lighting Group 21 100 Triggers Scene Scene 8 Any Network Lighting Group 22 100 Note that only Scenes within the PICED project will be considered Scenes contained in other C Bus devices could also contribute to Scene cascades but these are not considered Master Unit If you have more th
75. Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 2 4 7 5 3 C Bus Project The C Bus Project page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select the C Bus project A C Bus project must be selected from the list in order for C Bus Tags to be available C Gate Server Location Local Machine Remote Machine IP Address Load Projects Command Port 20023 Status Change Port 20025 C Bus Project Most of the time you will want to use the C Gate on your Local Machine the computer which PICED is running on In this case the Local Machine option needs to be selected If you want to connect to C Gate on a remote machine e select the Remote Machine option e enter the IP Address of the remote machine e click on the Load Projects button e select the required C Bus Project If you have C Gate configured to use a non standard Command Port or Status Change Port the port numbers should be entered AX Note that the details on this page can not be changed while C Bus is connected When complete click on the Next button C Bus Project Wiser2 The C Bus Project page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select the C Bus project A C Bus project must be selected from the list in order for C Bus Tags to be available Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 52 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 4 C Gate Server Location gosososceseseecsoosceseossossesesg Csasesss
76. Start amp End Time Does the Schedule have a start and end time This is only true for repeat and random Schedules Schedule Day me es es es No No o ede i B Variable Name Schedule Day Text Text describing which days String the Schedule occurs on Schedule Day of Week oes the Schedule occur on a Boolean particular day of the week Schedule Day of Week Type Day of week the Schedule occurs 0 Custom 1 None 2 Every day 3 Week days Monday to Friday Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 160 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name 4 Weekend Saturday and Sunday 5 Work day Week days plus holidays 6 Non work day 7 Special day 8 Non special day Schedule Day of Week _ Bit mask controlling the day of Integer Yes Mask the week the Schedule occurs on See notes Schedule Day of Month Does the Schedule occur on a Boolean Yes particular day of the month Schedule Day of Month Day of month the Schedule Integer No Type occurs 0 Custom 1 None 2 First week of month 3 Second week of month 4 Third week of month 5 Fourth week of month 6 Last week of month 7 Odd days 8 Even days 9 Repeat Schedule Day of Month Bit mask controlling the day of Integer Yes Mask the month the Schedule occurs on See notes Schedule Day Type Day of month the Schedule Integer Yes occurs 0 Normal 1 Last Week o
77. Sunday To enter something different select Custom from the list and select the required days The Schedule will run on the days of the week selected Sunday Saturday and also on any Special Days selected in the Also On list but not on any Special Days selected in the Not On list In the example below the Schedule will occur on Weekends Saturday and Sunday and also on Public Holidays For many people these are non working days MV Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday MV Saturday Also On Normal Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Not On Normal F Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 In the example below the Schedule will occur on Week Days Monday to Friday but not on Public Holidays For many people these are working days Sunday v Monday MV Tuesday v Wednesday MV Thursday v Friday Saturday Also On Normal Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Not On Normal Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 If you want a Schedule to occur on just normal days any day that is not one of the Special Days Copyright 2014 Schneider Electr
78. Title Bar this shows the name of the software and the loaded Project if any Tool Bars the Tool Bars provide quick access to the common software functions Scroll Bars these allow you to select which part of the work space you wish to look at Work Space this is where you create and edit the project only used for testing with PAC and Wiser Home Control projects Status Bar the Status Bar shows various aspects of the software status Before a project can be created the design environment provided by the Software can be configured to operate in a way most convenient to the user The following sections describes these preliminary configuration settings Program Options The PICED Software can have various options configured by selecting the Program Options item from the Options menu Auto Save When Auto Save is enabled the project will be saved at regular intervals The interval can be set to between 5 and 60 minutes I Auto Save Enabled Duration 15 minutes Connections The connections tab allows you to select options for connections to the PICED software Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 32 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide PC Connection to Unit via Serial Port com Serial Communications Port o 28400 default via C Bus When connecting to a C Touch or PAC unit you have two options connecting directly via a serial port or connecting via C Bus I
79. Unit form will be displayed 4 Select the correct Serial Port 5 Click on Next 6 Click on Finish Note that PICED will Save a Back up of the Project in case you need to revert to it later Firmware Update To update the PAC firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a PAC Project to the Unit At step 5 make sure you select the new Firmware file You must transfer a project with the firmware update It is not possible to update the firmware without transferring a project Firmware update can not be done via C Bus Controlling the PAC There are several things that you can do once you are connected to the PAC Unit Under the Transfer menu there is a Control Unit sub menu Under this there are the following menu items Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 298 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 5 6 6 5 7 Reset This allows you to reset the PAC unit Set Date Time This sets the PAC date and time to the same as the computer Log Logic Messages Selecting this option results in any error messages from the PAC being written to the PICED log It also allows the logic usage to be monitored The PAC usage as a of the maximum scan time will be logged every minute or when it exceeds the previous maximum PAC Resources The following details apply to PAC firmware 3 0 or later Memory The PICED software generates a file which is transferred to a PAC unit The PAC units have limited
80. a C Touch or PAC Messages related to time changes initiated by the user via C Bus or start end of daylight savings Setting Scenes Executing Schedules Running Irrigation Control Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 323 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 6 e Starting closing opening and saving projects Entering exiting Simulation Mode Connecting and disconnecting from C Bus Logic engine starting and stopping Executing Special Functions C Touch PAC Messages If you are transferring a project to or from a C Touch or PAC you can see the communications between the computer and the unit These messages are prefixed by either C Touch or PAC These messages will not be of any use to the user but may be of use for Schneider Electric Australia Technical Support for diagnosing problems related to transferring projects Logic Debug Messages If you are using the LogMessage function in Logic you can see the messages in the log prefixed by Logic Any serial commands sent from logic are shown along with the COM Port number and the line of logic code which sent the command The serial receive buffer for each COM Port will be shown on each scan unless it is empty If the serial data is not being read the length of this will grow over time Error Messages When some errors occur details will be put in the log These messages are prefixed by Error Usage and Debug Messages When th
81. a component on the PICED Software right mouse click on the component see note below If PICED is running on a Touch Panel PC and it is running in Simulation Mode pressing a component with your finger will activate it Note that the component which is on top will be the one activated Any components which have no action when pressed will be ignored when determining which component to activate For example in the example below there is a button controlling C Bus with an image on top of the button and another button controlling C Bus with a C Bus Timer Display on top on Garage Light Outside Light 00 00 02 If the user clicks on the image of the car then the image will be ignored assuming that there are no actions associated with it and the click will go through to the component below the button In a similar way if the user clicks on the C Bus Timer Display it too will be ignored because its C Bus action is status and hence it performs no action Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 93 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Note that when a Component is activated its status indicator will change immediately but there may be a delay in the command being executed on C Bus If you have selected the option to show the pop up menu when you right click on the software the Components will not be activated on a right mouse click You will need to select the component first then right click and
82. allow you to edit the Program s properties 3 To delete an existing Program select the Program in the list and click the Delete Program button Click the Next button when complete Times Page The Times page shows the selected duration of each Irrigation Zone for each Irrigation Program The Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 227 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide irrigation Zones are listed down the left side of the table and the irrigation Programs are listed across the top The durations can be entered in seconds or minutes by selecting the Seconds or Minutes buttons To change a duration click on the cell for the desired Zone and Program Click again to edit the value The Up and Down arrows can be used to change the number otherwise type in a number Durations Add Zone Add Program Seconds Minutes The values in the Manual column are used when manually running a single irrigation zone using a Special Function Click the Next button when complete Schedules Page The Irrigation Schedules can be set up using the Schedules page Alternatively the Schedule Manager could be used This page shows the properties of irrigation related Schedules ones which control Irrigation Zones Programs or the Master Enable Group e Number This is the number of the Schedule Note that since this is only showing irrigation related Schedules there may be Schedules missing from the list Descript
83. allows the size and position of the component to be entered manually The position is specified by the coordinate of the left and top corner of the rectangle bounding the component and the width and height of the component When a triangular round or oval shaped component is placed on a page the component is bounded by an imaginary rectangle The coordinates on this tab refer to this bounding rectangle Position Border Background Text Images Left Z Top 272 Width 88 Height 32 Border The border of a component is the shape and style of the outline of the component The Border tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to enter the appearance of the border of the component You can select the following border properties e shape rectangle ellipse triangle etc line style solid dotted raised lowered etc border width colour Shadow Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 101 Home Management Series Position Border Background Text Images Alpha Blend Border Shape Round Rectangle v Border Width 3 prsesescesesoeoseesososoecesoesssesceoesoeessssesessesesseg Nsensssssessnessssnsensesnensssessnsssssnssnsensensensenes PICED Programmer s Guide Border Style Solid Line s lt Border Style Solid Line x Copy Colours To Background Shadow fo Border Shape The border shape may be Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Triangle Circle ellipse Pointer Capsul
84. amounts of memory so you are limited in the size of the configuration file that you can transfer To see the exact amount of memory used by your Project select Resources Report from the Transfer menu A file resources txt is created in the project directory which has further details of the memory usage The 5000PACA has 128K of memory for the user configuration data This is used to store the logic Scenes and Schedules There is an additional 8K of memory to store user settings which includes changes made to Scenes and the levels of C Bus Group Addresses Processor Capacity The PAC also has limits on how much logic can be run in one scan There are various methods of determining how much logic can be run in a PAC e The Logic Resources form shows a scan by scan estimate of how much the PAC is using e The How Much Logic Is Possible in the Logic help file shows how to estimate the amount of code which is possible e The actual PAC usage can be logged e The PAC status indicator will indicate if there is too much logic The average scan duration is not allowed to exceed 150ms This is reported as 100 However a scan is allowed to occasionally take up to 500ms 333 as long as this does not bring the average over 150ms Recover Unit If you have problems connecting to a PAC unit to transfer a project to the unit or from the unit it may be necessary to stop the unit from running first To do this 1 Physically disconnect the PAC
85. and are disabled To create a project for a Black and White C Touch unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add pages and add components to each page with the desired properties Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Set up the Access Control if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit The following sections cover aspects of the software which are unique to the Black and White C Touch For more details on the installation and use of the Black and White C Touch refer to the installation guide and user manual respectively Transferring a C Touch Project to the Unit There are two types of information that you may want to transfer to the C Touch Unit The more common requirement is to transfer the user configuration data that you have created Occasionally you may wish to transfer new firmware into the unit to add new features There are two alternative means of transferring data to the C Touch unit directly via a serial cable or via C Bus You can select which option you wish to use in the Program Options form Transferring via the Serial Cabl
86. application group Turning the group on or off There are two buttons for turning the group on and off This is useful for checking to see if the group virtual circuit is operational 1 To turn the group on click the Set On button 2 To turn the group off click the Set Off button Add Level The Add Level form allows you to specify a group address level and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 Select the level using the Level drop down list It will list the remaining 256 levels which have not been assigned a level tag name 2 Specify the level name in the Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes If you want to change the level tag name see_Edit a application group level Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 20 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 6 4 2 3 1 6 5 2 3 1 6 6 Edit Level The Edit Level form allows you to edit a group address level tag To change the level tag name follow the procedure below 1 Edit the level tag name in the Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes If you want to add a new group level see Add an application group level Add Lighting Group The Add Lighting Group form allows you to specify a group address and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 Select the group address using the Group Address drop down list It will list the remaining 256 add
87. appropriate properties set Depending on the tool placed you may need to edit some of its properties for example a zone number The Components which can be placed depend on the Project Type and include buttons for e Schedules Colour C Touch only U oe o o o Count show the total number of Schedules Edit open the Schedule Manager Day of Month select the day of the month for the Schedule Day of Week select the day of the week for the Schedule Day Type select the Schedule day type normal Repeat Last Week of Month Details show the details of when the Schedule is due and what it does Is Enabled show if this Schedule is enabled Level show the C Bus level of the Schedule Level Select nudge the selected Schedule C Bus level up and down Month select the month for the Schedule Name show the name of the selected Schedule Number show the number of the selected Schedule Pulse Duration Select select the Schedule pulse duration Repeat Due show the next due date of the selected Schedule if it is a repeat Schedule Repeat Interval show the repeat interval of the selected Schedule Repeat Select select the repeat interval and day Schedule Select select a Schedule Start End Select select the Schedule start end time for repeat time and random time Schedules Synchronise synchronise to the Schedules Time show the time of the selected Schedule Time Select change the Schedule time Time Type
88. as if it was another serial port To find which serial port number has been allocated for the USB open the Windows Device Manager e Click Start Settings Control Panel then select System OR right click the My Computer icon on your Desktop and select Properties e Select the Hardware Tab e Click Device Manager e Expand the Ports node and you will see the C Touch Mark 2 listed 2 Inthe Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item and the Transfer to Unit form will appear Alternatively click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar 3 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 4 Select the action to perform e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to transfer a different configuration file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file mot e f you want to prepare a configuration file but not transfer it yet select Prepare Configuration Data File 5 lf you want to transfer new firmware select the Transfer Firmware check box and enter the desired file mot The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICED Firmware 6 To set the C Touch time to match the PC time select the Set Unit Time to PC Time check bo
89. assigned See also Software Limits Deleting Pages To delete a page e Select the desired page e select the Page Delete Page menu item e click on OK All components on the page will be deleted Any Component page links will be automatically adjusted Page Properties To change the properties of the currently displayed page either e Select the Page Page Properties menu item or e Double click on the page where there are no components A form will appear which will enable the user to change The name of the page The Access Level for the page The Theme for the page Whether components are locked on this page The Time out duration for the page The background style Single Colour Colour gradient from left to right blend between two colours Colour gradient from top to bottom Centred image image is drawn in the centre of the window Tiled image image is drawn many times to fill the window Stretched image image is stretched to fill the window e The background colour s if applicable e The background image if applicable e Notes applicable to the page Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 91 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Page Name Kitchenl Access Level JLevel 1 Theme Page None T Lock Components Page Time out Use Project Default Never Time out D S seconds Other time 20 Page eae Style Gradient Top to Bottom Selec
90. be displayed on a page using In built System IO The Auto Refresh check box allows the data to be refreshed if Telephony Application C Bus messages are received while the form is open Click on the Copy button to copy the data to the Windows clipboard for copying into other applications Labels Form The Labels Form can be used to monitor the status of C Bus Labels To open the Labels form either e select the Project C Bus Applications Labels menu item or e click on a component with the Labels Show Form Special Function Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 239 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 6 4 25 6 1 The Labels form lists the following e The currently selected language e For each Network and Application any Group labels which have been observed e For each Network and Trigger Group any Action Selector labels which have been observed The above information can also be displayed on a page using In built System IO The Auto Refresh check box allows the data to be refreshed if Labeling C Bus messages are received while the form is open Click on the Copy button to copy the data to the Windows clipboard for copying into other applications C Bus Error Application C Bus devices can monitor and detect error conditions in the devices and report those conditions using the C Bus Error Reporting Application The PICED software can monitor the Error Application messages and show
91. card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to the Wiser Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 8 A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed Select the desired Wiser unit from the list If the Wiser unit has out of date firmware the Firmware tab will be displayed Enter a password admin by default and click on Transfer Firmware Wait for the Wiser unit to re start then repeat steps 3 to 6 The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICED Firmware If the Wiser firmware is up to date the Transfer tab will be selected Click on Start Wait for the Wiser unit to re start 9 Open a web browser and enter the IP Address of the Wiser unit You should be able to see your project and control it Notes Prior to transferring a project to Wiser you will need to log into the Wiser user interface and enable the Project Update option refer to the Wiser user manual for details When complete the Project Update should be disabled again The above process assumes your computer is on a network using DHCP Refer to the Wiser Installation Manual for more information If you select the Transfer Other Configuration File option the archive file selected must not be one created using the Archive Export as the format is slightly different When you go to transfer the project to the Wiser if the Transfer Utility
92. combine some together 11 4 119 Confirmation 14121 Message Access Levels have not been defined Do you want the default levels created Cause There are no Access Levels defined The default Access Levels can be created for you Solution Click on Yes to create the default Access Levels otherwise click on No Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 374 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 120 Error 14122 Message Version x build y or later of C Gate is required Cause An old version of C Gate has been found Solution Install the latest version of C Gate supplied with the C Bus ToolKit 11 4 121 Confirmation 14123 Message Do you want a default description to be given to this component Cause The Component does not have a meaningful description A default description based on the C Bus Group Address name Scene name or Special Function can be added to the Component automatically Solution Click on Yes to have the default name applied otherwise click on No 11 4 122 Confirmation 14124 Message Controlling Group Addresses on this Application may cause unexpected behaviour Are you sure you wish to use this Application Cause Some C Bus Applications are reserved for specific purposes Using these Applications for other purposes can cause problems for a C Bus installation Solution Click on the Yes button to continue If you are not sure what you are doing click on the No button
93. control the Backlight See also Special Functions and Tool Select Sub Page Links If a Component is on a Sub Page it is possible to select a Sub Page link to change the Sub Page displayed in the Sub Page Frame displaying the Sub Page To do this 1 Select the Page Link tab 2 Select Parent Sub Page Frame from the frame drop down list 3 Select the desired Sub Page A Component can also be used to change the Sub Page displayed by a Sub Page Frame elsewhere on the same page To do this 1 Select the Page Link tab 2 Select the Sub Page Frame from the frame drop down list 3 Select the desired Sub Page Remote Control Component Activation via C Bus A Component can be Activated by means of a C Bus event To do this open the Component Properties form and select the Remote Control tab 1 C Bus Syste Component Activation via C Bus Don t Activate Component via C Bus C Activate Component for any C Bus Level C Activate Component For Specific C Bus Level The C Bus Group Address to be used to activate the Component is selected on the C Bus tab of the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 127 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Component Properties form To activate the component for this Group Address being set to any level select the Activate Component for any C Bus Level button To activate the Component only if the Group Address is set to a particular level as se
94. dragged and the order of the columns can be changed by dragging the column to where it is required The Schedules can be sorted by any column by clicking on the top of that column Double clicking on a Schedule in the list will show the Schedule Editor form To display all of the days in the year in which the selected schedule will occur click on the Year View button RUNNING SCHEDULES Note that Schedules will not be executed unless the Scheduler is running To run the scheduler select the Run check box The scheduler can also be set running by clicking on the Options Run Scheduler menu item using the Command Line Parameters or double clicking on the Status Bar The state of the Run Scheduler item is remembered The next time that PICED is run the state will be the same NAMING SCHEDULES To simplify the management of large numbers of Schedules it helps to apply a structured naming scheme for the Schedules For example all Schedules for the first floor of a building may start with L1 and so forth When the Schedules are sorted by name then they will be grouped together An example of well named Schedules might be as follows L1 Workdays Finish L1 Workdays Night L1 Workdays Start L2 Workdays Finish L2 Workdays Night L2 Workdays Start etc REFRESHING GROUPS The state of Group Addresses shown on the Schedule Tree can be refreshed to show the current state on C Bus by clicking on the Refresh button This will also update t
95. driver should recognise the fact that the PAC has been connected and a virtual serial port will be created This allows the PICED software to use the USB as if it was another serial port To find which serial port number has been allocated for the USB open the Windows Device Manager e Click Start Settings Control Panel then select System OR right click the My Computer icon on your Desktop and select Properties e Select the Hardware Tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 295 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Click Device Manager e Expand the Ports node and you will see the PAC listed 2 Inthe Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item and the Transfer to Unit form will appear Alternatively click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar 3 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 4 Select the action to perform e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to transfer a different configuration file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file mot e f you want to prepare a configuration file but not transfer it yet select Prepare Configuration Data File 5 lf you want to
96. edited unless there is a C Bus Project selected Cause An Application Group Address Level tag can not be edited or added unless the C Bus Project tags are loaded Solution Select a C Bus Project Warning 14097 Message There is a compile error in the logic Cause The Logic Code has an error Solution Review the Errors and the Logic Code Fix any errors and re compile Error 14098 Message name is an invalid Identifier Use only letters numbers and underscore Cause Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 368 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 98 11 4 99 Pascal Identifiers may only contain Letters Numbers and the underscore _ character Additionally they must start with a letter Solution Re enter the name Error 14099 Message Invalid Value Cause The valid entered is invalid Solution Re enter the value Warning 14100 Message Can not add any more System IO Variables Maximum is value Cause No more System IO Variables can be added Solution Reduce the number of System IO Variables used or attempt to combine some together 11 4 100 Warning 14101 Message The value was outside of the allowable range It has been changed to x Cause The System IO Variable value was outside of the range specified by the minimum and maximum values Solution Either 1 Use the value selected for you or 2 Change the minimum or maximum 11 4
97. edited will be hidden e Otherwise there will be an icon next to those that can not be edited e Attempting to change these Scenes will raise a confirmation message See also Software Limits Project Summary and Printing Scene Editor The Scene Editor allows the user to edit a Scene in a project The Scene Editor is accessed via the Scene Manager Each Scene has several main properties e A name description e An triggering Group Address e A series of Scene Components General Tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 188 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Each Scene needs a unique name The Scene Locked option controls whether the user is able to edit this Scene If it is selected then 1 It will have an icon next to it in the Scene Manager 2 When selected the Scene Locked In Built System IO variable will be true 3 It will be ignored when using a Scene Store Special Function You can add information related to the Scene by entering it in the Notes box Scene Trigger Tab Use the Scene Trigger C Bus Properties to select the Scene Trigger Scene Trigger JV Trigger From any Network Network Local Network Application contra sss Group Address scenes i A 2 Action Selector OFF alloffscene gt 2 In most cases you will want scenes to be triggered regardless of which network the C Bus message comes from In this case select the Trigger from any Network option The
98. enabled Clicking on this button will automatically create any Monitors needed Monitors are also listed in the Project Summary report Notes Monitors should never be used to retrieve data from a unit which has the capability of broadcasting that data For example if a temperature sensor or light level sensor has the ability to broadcast its data on a regular basis that should always be used in preference to using a monitor PICED projects from versions prior to V4 only had Monitor information attached to Monitor Components There was no ability to name a Monitor If you load one of these projects it will automatically create the Monitors and assign a default name to each Monitor Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 253 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide If a unit is not responding it will be shown in the Value column This information is available using the GetUnitStatus Logic function See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO 4 25 11 1 Monitor Item Form 4 25 12 The Monitor Item form is shown by the Monitor Manager to allow the properties of a Monitor Item to be edited The Monitor Item Form allows you to enter or edit the data for a Monitor Item e Name e Network e Unit Address e Type Light Level Temperature or C Bus Voltage e Refresh rate in seconds Power Meters The Power Meter Manager can be used to select Power Meters to be used in the Proj
99. es Send Telephony App Messages es iii Send Media Transport Control 4pp Messages Yes Send Measurement App Messages Yes All Yes All No The C Bus Network Properties form allows the following properties of a C Bus Network to be changed e Whether to use the Network in this Project only selected Networks will be displayed in the lists etc e Whether to open the Network when connecting to C Bus e Whether to send C Bus messages to this Network for e Date Time Application e Security Application e HVAC Application e Telephony Application e Media Transport Control Application e Measurement Application e Audio Application Select either yes or no from the drop down lists If there are multiple networks selected in the C Bus Network Manager some of the drop down lists may be blank indicating that this property is different on different Networks Only properties which are changed will be changed in the Networks To select yes for all properties click the All Yes button To select no for all properties click the All No button Security Application Form The Security Application form can be used to monitor the status of C Bus messages on the Security Application To open the Security Application form either e select the Project C Bus Applications Security App menu item or Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 238 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 4 4 25 5 e click
100. example of a use for this would be to have PICED display a page reminding the user to put out the garbage on a particular night Special Functions You can also have the Schedule execute a Special Function by selecting the required one from the Special Function tab The most common use for Special Functions being executed from a Schedule is to raise an alarm at a particular time or enabling a Logic Module Note that not all Special Functions can be executed from a Schedule you will only be given a choice of some of them Year View Selecting the days for which a Schedule is to occur can be complex The Schedule Year View displays every day on which the selected Schedule will occur to enable you to confirm that you have set up the Schedule correctly To open the Schedule Year View In the Schedule Editor Day tab click on the Year View button or In the Schedule Manager select a Schedule and then click the Year View button on the Tool Bar The days highlighted are the ones on which the Schedule will occur Click on the Previous button to go back a year or on the Next button to go forward a year Special days are marked with a PH for public Holiday or S1 S6 for Special Days 1 through to 6 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 208 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Schedule Irrigation Due Days lt q Previous 2003 Next p 25 26 22 23 PHPH Special Days 4 16 4 Sche
101. from C Bus Connect the PAC to the PC via a USB cable Select the Transfer Recover C Touch or PAC menu item Connect the PAC to C Bus Wait for 5 seconds for the PAC to just start up Click on the OK button PICED will connect to the unit and immediately stop it from running N oF amp WO PO Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 299 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 6 6 6 1 8 Transfer the firmware and or project as normal A It should not normally be necessary to do this This is only intended for emergency use It may require several attempts to get the timing correct Wiser Home Control The Wiser Home Control can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the Wiser Home Control and are disabled To create a project for a Wiser unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add Widgets Most functions for the Wiser can be accessed from the Widget Manager Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Add E Mail Accounts if required Add RSS Feeds if required Add Logic if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit Test the project Simulation Mode To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any
102. have been made in the connection to C Bus These can not be implemented while C Bus is still connected Solution 1 Disconnect from C Bus 2 Make the changes to the C Bus connection 3 Connect to C Bus Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 352 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 42 11 4 43 11 4 44 Warning 14043 Message Triggering a scene on the Lighting Application may cause it to be activated by other scenes and cause circular scene triggering Cause A Scene is triggered on the Lighting Application A series of scenes within this software and externally may directly or indirectly trigger each other If any one of these scenes gets triggered it will cause enormous amounts of C Bus traffic indefinitely Solution Change the Scene trigger to the Trigger Control Application unless it must be on the Lighting Application Warning 14044 Message Setting levels on the Control Application may trigger other scenes and cause circular scene triggering Cause A Scene is controlling the Trigger Control Application A series of scenes within this software and externally may directly or indirectly trigger each other If any one of these scenes gets triggered it will cause enormous amounts of C Bus traffic indefinitely Solution Change the Scene item from the Trigger Control Application unless you are certain that it can not trigger any scenes Error 14045 Message Coul
103. image matching this colour will not be displayed ie will be transparent The effect of transparency on an image is shown below where pink is used as the transparency colour Animated Images Animated images in the form of bitmap strips can be displayed A bitmap strip has a series of frames in the bitmap These get displayed one after the other to give an animation effect A text file with the same name as the bitmap is used to provide the details of the animation Refer to the provided sample animated images in c Clipsal PICE D lmage Library Animated to get a better understanding of how these work For example the bitmap image below is called fan omp It has three frames of a rotating fan Pink has been used as the transparency colour To provide the necessary information about the animation an accompanying file called fan txt contains the following information This file contains the animation details for the bitmap with the same file name Frame Count 3 Frame Rate milliseconds per frame 200 The lines starting with a are just for information The only data actually used is the number of frames 3 in this case and the animation rate 200ms in this case The animation rate must be a multiple of 100ms It is also possible to have slightly more sophisticated animations where you can control the order and duration of each frame shown and control the looping of the animation For example if you want
104. images into an animated bitmap Alternatively use a tool such as Alchemy GIF Animator Frames Button components can also select a frame of a bitmap depending on the C Bus level This allows almost any customised effect to be created to display the level of a C Bus Group Address To do this select an animated image as the Active Image Select the Select Frame Using Level check box The number of frames in the bitmap will be divided across the range 0 to 255 Hence if there are 10 frames the first will be shown for levels 0 to 25 255 10 the second from 26 to 51 and so on Negative Images If you have selected one of the standard images you can select to display it as a negative image black is shown as white and vice versa To display the negative image select the Negative Image check box Aspect Ratio If you are editing an Image component there will be an option to Keep Aspect Ratio If this option is selected when you re size the component the original aspect ratio the ratio of the width to Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 109 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide height will be maintained preventing the image from looking distorted See also Re scale Images Refresh Images Change Image Colours and Create Animation 4 9 4 2 6 Slider The Slider tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you set the appearance of a slider component A Slider consists of a border background slot thu
105. in the URL box Web Cam Image Component URL In a Web Cam Image Component the relevant URL is the one which retrieves a single JPEG image from the camera This will be different for every type of camera For example for an IP Box IP 200 camera server at IP Address 192 168 0 5 the URL will be http 192 168 0 5 Jpeg Camlmg jpg Generally the web cam manual will give information about the URL required If not then to determine the relevant URL for a given camera use a web browser to view the camera There will usually be link somewhere which takes a snap shot image The URL used to take the snap shot will probably be the one needed Enter this URL in your browser and check that just a single image is shown If there is more than just a single image shown for example text or other links you will need to view the HTML source in Internet Explorer select View Source to find the URL of the single image To automatically generate a URL for the display of web cams click on the Web Cam Wizard button This will open the Web Cam wizard Enter the necessary data including the camera type and IP Address and click on OK The URL will appear in the URL box Note that any source of JPEG images can be used not just web cams If you are displaying images from the Internet you may need to set your Proxy Server Settings If your camera uses HTTP Authorisation you will need to set the user name and password Weather Wizard An HTML page can
106. interface To test Logic Scenes Schedules User System IO and E Mail you will need to Transfer the project to the Wiser Home Control first See also Program Options Logging Command Line Parameters Logging Events An event log can be used to monitor the events which have occurred This can be very useful for debugging a project To show the event log select the View Log menu item or click on the Log button on the Tool Bar Log Tab The text shows details of the last 200 events which have occurred in the software Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 319 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To see all of the events which will occur log to a file see below then open the file You can not save the displayed events which have already occurred to a file Log Options 18 11 2009 12 38 35 PM Start Log H V Remember Setting fans i c t Log To File Append To File C Gate The Log To Window check box can be used to enable and disable the logging of events to the Event Log dialog The Log To File check box can be used to enable and disable the logging of events to the log file specified via the Options tab s Select Log File The Log To Window and Log To File check boxes enables the logging of events to both the Event Log dialog and the selected log file There are two radio buttons which determine the state of the logging to the log file e Write This starts a ne
107. interface the Local Source will be displayed 3 Add or auto create Local Sources for the Zones which use Local Sources see above Set the properties of each Local Source as required 4 25 10 2 Matrix Switcher Editor The Matrix Switcher Editor is used for entering details of a Matrix Switcher It is accessed from the Audio Application Manager The details which can be selected for a Matrix Switcher are e Matrix Switcher Number this is the number assigned to the Matrix Switcher in MARPA e Name this is a name for the Matrix Switcher to identify it e Ripple IP Address This is the IP Address of the Ripple software if used for use with Wiser e Ripple Port This is the port for Ripple if used for use with Wiser 4 25 10 3 Audio Zone Editor The Audio Zone Editor is used for entering details of an Audio Zone It is accessed from the Audio Application Manager The details which can be selected for an Audio Zone are e Matrix Switcher this is the Matrix Switcher used by the Zone e Zone Number this is the number assigned to the Zone in MARPA e Name this is a name for the Zone to identify it e Enable Local Source for Wiser projects this selects whether the local source is displayed for this Zone 4 25 10 4 Audio Source Editor The Audio Source Editor is used for entering details of an Audio Source It is accessed from the Audio Application Manager The details which can be selected for an Audio Source are e Matrix Switche
108. into Internet Explorer to verify whether it is corrupted Error 14035 Message Project could not be saved Please check directory write privileges file read only attributes Cause The project file could not be written Solution Check the following e The file name is valid e The file path is valid You have write rights to the file directory The file is not read only The file is not being used by another program The Hard disk is not full Confirm 14036 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 350 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 36 11 4 37 11 4 38 There are duplicate Scene Triggers These scenes will trigger each other Do you want to change a Scene Trigger Click Show to see a list of duplicates Reason Two or more scenes have the same trigger conditions If this trigger is received all of these scenes will be executed Action Click on Yes to go back to editing the scenes Click on No to leave things as they are Click on Show to see a list of the duplicates Error 14037 Message There are circular Scene Triggers These scenes will trigger each other Please change a Scene Trigger or the scene item which is doing the triggering Cause A series of scenes directly or indirectly trigger each other If any one of these scenes gets triggered it will cause enormous amounts of C Bus traffic indefinitely Solution Change a scene tr
109. is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 6 Select the action to perform e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to transfer a different configuration file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file mot e f you want to prepare a configuration file but not transfer it yet select Prepare Configuration Data File 7 Click on OK The transfer process will start It may take up to an hour or two depending on the size of your file and the amount of C Bus traffic Note The 5000CTA units manufactured prior to 2005 have a limit of 100 reprogramming cycles new ones have a 1000 cycle limit If this limit is exceeded reprogramming may no longer be possible It is recommended that as much testing as possible should be conducted using Simulation Mode as possible before transferring the project The Log can be used to identify the cause of problems during transfer See also Transferring a Project from the Unit Transferring a C Touch Project from the Unit To transfer a project stored in a C Touch unit to the PICED software follow the steps below Firstly Connect the computer to the C Touch unit Either 1 If PICED is not running e Start PICED Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 277 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Select Transfer Project From Unit e Select N
110. is selected this page will allow you to select the following details Skin Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 72 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide default hd The skin controls the appearance and functionality of the Wiser Home Control user interface A preview image of the selected skin is shown For details of the skin select Help Wiser Home Control Skin or Help Wiser Home Control User Guide Properties Wiser Properties Unit Name My Unit C Bus Properties C CNI Direct Connection CNI Port 10001 The Wiser Properties group allows you to select various properties of a Wiser unit e Unit Name used so that the unit can be recognised when connected C Bus Properties e CNI Direct Connection use the on board PCI for connection to C Bus or use a remote CNI e CNI IP Address this is the IP Address of the CNI used by the Wiser Home Control By default it is one greater than the Wiser Home Control IP Address e CNI Port this is the port number used by the CNI The Wiser Home Control must be on the same subnet as the PC in order to be able to transfer the project The Wiser Home Control and CNI must also be on the same subnet as each other See http en wikipedia org wiki Subnetwork for an explanation of network masks and subnets Access Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 73 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Permit Access to Wiser Home
111. item from the Options Menu 4 Inthe Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item and the Transfer to Unit form will appear Alternatively click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar 5 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 6 Select the action to perform e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to transfer a different configuration file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file mot e f you want to prepare a configuration file but not transfer it yet select Prepare Configuration Data File 7 Click on OK The transfer process will start It may take up to an hour or two depending on the size of your file and the amount of C Bus traffic Note The PAC units have a limit of 1000 reprogramming cycles If this limit is exceeded reprogramming may no longer be possible For this reason it is recommended that all testing be done in the PICED software before download See also Transferring a Project from the Unit Transferring a PAC Project from the Unit To transfer a project stored in a C Touch unit to the PICED software follow the steps below Firstly connect the computer to the PAC unit Either
112. language and e Enter the name of the language in the language name tag and use a unique shortcode e Use a new language id number wherever it is used e Change the text to suit Wiser 2 Home Control The Wiser Home Control can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the Wiser Home Control and are disabled To create a project for a Wiser unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add Widgets Most functions for the Wiser can be accessed from the Widget Manager Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Add E Mail Accounts if required Add RSS Feeds if required Add Logic if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit Test the project Simulation Mode To update the project at a later date Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 304 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 7 1 e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit Notes For more details on the installation and use of the Wiser Home Control refer to the Wiser Installation Guide in the PICED Manuals folder and the User Guide in the PICED Templates Wiser folder For more details on the use of the s
113. manual for details When complete the Project Update should be disabled again The above process assumes your computer is on a network using DHCP Refer to the Wiser Installation Manual for more information If you select the Transfer Other Configuration File option the archive file selected must not be one created using the Archive Export as the format is slightly different AX When you go to transfer the project to the Wiser if the Transfer Utility detects that the Wiser firmware needs to be updated then this will happen and you will need to transfer the project again Transferring a Wiser Home Control Project from the Unit To transfer a project stored in a Wiser unit to the PICED software Connect to the Wiser unit Select the Transfer Transfer Project from Unit menu item The Project Details Wizard will be shown Click on Next Select Wiser Click on Next The archive file will be transferred using the Transfer Utility The Transfer Utility will be opened for you If you have more than one Network card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to the Wiser Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 6 A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Wiser unit from the list e 7 Te ON ON Select Retrieve Project From Wiser Enter a folder for the project Click on Start The Import Ar
114. message to a Connected Network this message will be automatically sent to adjacent Networks if the C Bus Bridge has Application Connect mode selected This means that C Bus messages do not normally need to be sent to these adjacent Networks To edit the properties of a C Bus Network 1 Double click on the Network in the list or select one or more networks in the list then click on the Edit Network button 2 The C Bus Network Properties form will then be displayed 3 Select the desired properties 4 Click on OK To set the default properties for all Networks click on the Set To Default button This will set the Use and Open properties to yes for all Networks which can be used It will also select the destination of C Bus messages to just the local network see note above To refresh the network states on the form press the Refresh button To automatically update the form when new data is received select the Auto Refresh check box Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 237 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide See also C Bus Network States 4 25 2 1 C Bus Network Properties 4 25 3 The C Bus Network Properties form is opened from the C Bus Network Manager when a Network is edited Network Number 254 Network Name Local Network Use in Project Yes he Open When Connecting to C Bus Yes Send Date amp Time App Messages Yes Send Security App Messages Yes Send HVAC App Messages
115. need e An Internet connection to your PC e An Internet connection at the remote site where the Wiser is e Appropriate remote access settings set in Project Details Wiser PC 2 Save the project if any changes have been made 3 In the Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item or click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar The Transfer Project to Wiser Home Control form will appear 4 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 5 Select the required action e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 306 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 7 2 Current Project e f you want to just open the Transfer Utility program select Do Not Transfer Configuration Data and click on OK e If you want to prepare a data file for transfer at a later date select Prepare configuration data file but do not transfer e f you are wanting to transfer a different file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file O Click on OK N The archive file is now ready to be transferred using the Transfer Utility The Transfer Utility will be opened for you If you have more than one Network
116. network is being synchronised the progress will be shown OK the network has been synchronised and is ready for use Error the network has an error the cause of the error condition will be shown Closed network has not opened usually caused by a failure to open the network Operational the network is open and can be used but there are units not responding see C Gate Options Note that this was previously referred to as the degraded state For the Sync and Error states it will show unit x of y This refers to the xt unit out of a total of y units It does not refer to the unit addresses A Any units which are in error state will be listed If any units are in error state this should be investigated If too many units are in the error state the whole network will be put into the error state and it will be unable to be used C Bus Network states are also listed in the C Bus Network Manager See also C Gate Algorithm C Gate Options and Status Bar C Bus Network Manager To view the C Bus Network Manager 1 Select the Project C Bus Network menu item or 2 Use the Network Manager Special Function Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 236 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Edit Network Select All Set to Defaut Name L Tipe Stere use Open Tine Ser HVAC Tal 243 Network 12 Bridge from Closed no no 244 Network 11 Bridge from Closed no no no
117. next Source for this Zone Audio Previous Source select the previous Source for this Zone Backlight Off switch the backlight off Backlight On switch the backlight on Contrast Down lighten the screen Contrast Up darken the screen Contrast Reset reset contrast to the default setting Date Day Down decrease the day Date Day Up increase the day Date Month Down decrease the month Date Month Up increase the month Date Year Down decrease the year Date Year Up increase the year Date Time Cancel cancel the adjustment of the date time Date Time Set set the time to that selected using the in built System IO Daylight Savings Start start daylight savings Daylight Savings Finish stop daylight savings Error Application Clear Most Severe clear any Most Severe errors HVAC Refresh refresh the data for the HVAC Air Conditioning Application monitored Zone Groups only Labels Set Language set a new language for C Bus Labels Log in this shows the log in page Log out this logs the user out and returns to the start up page Media Transport Control Next Category select the next Category Media Transport Control Next Selection select the next Selection Media Transport Control Next Track select the next Track Media Transport Control Previous Category select the previous Category Media Transport Control Previous Selection select the previous Selection Media Transport Control Previo
118. no no no 245 Network 10 Serial COMI Closed no no no no no no 246 Network9 Bridge from Closed no no no no no no 247 Network8 Bridge from Closed no no no no no no 248 Network Bridge from Closed no no no no no no 249 Network6 Bridge from Closed yes yes yes yes yes yes 250 Network5 CNI192 16 Closed no no no no no no 251 Network 4 Bridge from Closed no no no no no no 252 Network3 Bridge from Closed yes yes yes no no no 253 Network2 CNI192 16 Closed no no no no no no 254 Network1 CNI19216 Closed yes yes yes yes yes yes The C Bus Network Manager allows the following properties of a C Bus Network to be displayed Address number Name Connection type CNI Serial C Bus Bridge etc State Closed Sync OK Error etc Whether to use the Network in this Project only selected Networks will be displayed in the lists etc Whether to open the Network when connecting to C Bus Whether to send C Bus messages to this Network for e Date Time Application e Security Application e HVAC Application e Telephony Application e Media Transport Control Application e Measurement Application e Audio Application The columns can be sorted by clicking on top of the column or they can be rearranged and have their widths changed by dragging them When selecting Networks to send C Bus messages to it is best to only select Networks which are really needed in order to minimise C Bus traffic if you send a C Bus
119. number not found Likely causes are e missing begin statement e error in previous module Cause The selected error message corresponds to a line of logic code which could not be located The most common causes of this situation are e missing begin statements in the logic code e an error in a previous module or section of code Solution Check backwards from the position of the cursor looking for end statements which have no corresponding begin statements If the cursor it at the start of a module look in the previous module for errors 11 4 143 Confirmation 14145 Message Do you want to enable disable the access of all levels above below Cause You are about to change the access for a particular software function It is recommended that all access levels have access to at least all of the functions of the access levels below it Solution Click on Yes to change the access of the levels above below the one selected Click on No to not change any other levels 11 4 144 Confirmation 14146 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 381 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide All changes made to the Project will be lost if you continue Do you want to continue Cause You are about to go back to the first page of the Project Wizard To do this any changes to the current project will have to be deleted Solution Click on Yes to delete any changes and return to the first page of the Proje
120. on OK Log File Data All messages written to the log contain a prefix with the type of log message The categories and examples are listed below Log Header At the start of the log is information related to the version of the program the name of the project and any Command Line Parameters C Bus Messages All C Bus log messages are prefixed with C Bus All sent C Bus commands in the log will be prefixed by Tx which is short for transmit All received C Bus commands in the log will be prefixed by Rx which is short for receive The PICED log shows the source of all transmitted C Bus lighting commands which will be one of e User click a user has clicked on a component e Schedule e Scene triggered by external source e Logic If the command was sent as part of a Scene this will be shown For example a log line showing 09 05 2005 12 16 31 PM C Bus Tx Set Kitchen On User Click means that at 12 16 31 PM on 09 05 2005 the Kitchen group was switched on and the source of the command was a user click Similarly 09 05 2005 12 19 01 PM C Bus Tx Ramp Porch to 60 over 4s Schedule Night Time Scene Welcome Home means that this command was originated by Schedule Night Time which triggered Scene Welcome Home And 09 05 2005 12 21 12 PM C Bus Tx Set Basement Light 1 On Logic Line 40 means that the command was initiated by line 40 of the logic code C Gate Messages Commands to and from C G
121. on a component with the Security Form Special Function The Security Application form lists the status of the following aspects of the security system if it is used in the system Armed status Password status Alarm status Panic amp Tamper status Low Battery Battery Charging and Mains Failure status Line cut status Arm failed status Fire Gas and Other alarm status Arm Not Ready status Zone name and status sealed short open etc The above information can also be displayed on a page using In built System IO The Auto Refresh check box allows the data to be refreshed if Security Application C Bus messages are received while the form is open Click on the Copy button to copy the data to the Windows clipboard for copying into other applications Telephony Application Form The Telephony Application form can be used to monitor the status of C Bus messages on the Telephony Application To open the Telephony Application form either e select the Project C Bus Applications Telephony App menu item or e click on a component with the Telephony Form Special Function The Telephony Application form lists the status of the following aspects of the Telephony system if it is used in the system e On hook off hook e Whether the phone is ringing Whether the phone is diverted Last dial in dial out failure Last incoming outgoing number Whether the secondary connection is isolated The above information can also
122. or just the Selected ones A form will be displayed Select the Special Day type for this date Click on OK NOOR WOOD This does the following things for you automatically for all Schedules or just the selected ones 1 It sets all of the current Schedules for that date to not occur on the selected Special Day type 2 It creates a copy of each Schedule for that date and e gives it a unique name current name date e sets it to occur on just that date and Special Day type 3 It sets the Special Day type for the selected date If you have the Auto Delete One Off Schedules option in the Project Details selected the one off Schedules will automatically be deleted after they have been run Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 211 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 6 4 17 4 17 1 Synchronising to Schedules When PICED starts up or following a Power Failure the Group Addresses will not necessarily be at the levels that they should be for the time of the day The Group Addresses can all be set to their correct levels for the time of the day by e Selecting the Tools Sync to Schedules menu item e Clicking a Component with a Sync to Schedules Special Function e Using a Command Line Parameter The Synchronising process is the same as doing a Schedule Catch Up for the last 24 hours All Schedules for the last 24 hours are executed in quick succession Access Control Access to the PI
123. power energy and cost e Tariff the Tariff which applies to this meter e Offset the no load Reactive Power Media Transport Control Application C Bus devices can broadcast data via the Media Transport Control Application The PICED software can monitor the Media Transport Control messages and show the status using the Media Transport Control Application Manager Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 246 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 9 1 4 25 9 2 For more details on the use of the Media Transport Control Application with specific device types refer to the documentation for the specific device See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Media Transport Control Application Manager The Media Transport Control Application Manager can be used to select Media Link Groups to be used To open the Measurement Application Manager either e select the Project C Bus Applications Media Transport Control Manager menu item or e click on a component with the Transport Control Show Form Special Function The columns of data presented in the Media Transport Control Application Manager include e Index this is the order in the list e Name the name of the Media Link Group e MLG Number the Media Link Group number e Server is this a media server Adding Media Link Groups To add a new Media Link Group click on the Add button The Media Link Group Form will be
124. project templates with different styles see also the Theme Selector example project Wiser these are the skins used by Wiser and are not able to be used in the same way as other templates See also Tutorial Creating Templates To save a whole Project as a Template 1 Select the Save As Template item from the File menu 2 Select which parts of the Project you want to have saved in the Template 3 Click on OK 4 Enter a File Name 5 Click on OK To save just the current page as a Template 1 Select the Save Page As Template item from the File menu 2 Select which parts of the Project you want to have saved in the Template 3 Click on OK 4 Enter a File Name 5 Click on OK Project Templates Templates can be used to save the user from having to re enter the same data each time a new project is started To create a project template follow these steps e Create a new Project In the Project Details form enter your name and company details In the Project Details form enter your location and time zone Create a standard start up page if you want one Create any other pages that you want to use regularly you can always delete them later if you don t use them Place any specific components that you regularly use on a page so that you can copy and paste them later Set up any common Scenes that you may need Set up any common Schedules that you may need Set up any Access Levels that you may need Set up the grid
125. rearranged or have their widths changed To sort by a column click on the top of that column Access Levels Users Access Features Options Add User Edit User Delete User User No Name Access Level__ Password 1 Fred User 3 2 Barney User 1 ama 3 John Administrator To add a new user click on the Add User button To delete a user select the user then click on the Delete User button To edit a User either e select a User then click on the Edit User button or e double click on a User Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 213 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The User Editor will appear allowing you to set the user properties Access Features Tab The Access Features allows you to set which Access Levels can access which PICED software features This is only available for Colour C Touch projects To change whether an Access Level has access to a particular feature click on the appropriate cell in the array and it will change between e None no access e Full full Access e Partial partial access Access Levels Users Access Features Options Default All Full Access All No Access Task Anyone User 1 User 2 User 3 Supervisor Administrator Control C Bus Full Full Full Full Full Full Edit Schedules None Full Full Full Full Full Edit Irrigation None Full Full Full Full Full Edit Scenes None Full Full Full Full
126. selection you will need the page with more detail click on the Advanced button Day of Week Day of Month Month Year Custom Custom sa V Sunday Mi v it fv 21 MV January V Monday jv 2 v 12 M 22 V February v ee MV Tuesday MV3 v 13 Iv 23 J March V Wednesday M4 v 14 v 24 v April V Thursday v5 Mis v 25 v May V Friday M v 16 M26 MV June MV Saturday M7 v 17 v 27 v July Also On Not On vs Mis lv 2 lv August Normal Normal Vs fv 19 v 29 V September 3 j 10 M 20 M 30 m P Public Holiday Public Holiday V 31 7 Special Day 1 Special Day 1 iw Special Day 2 Special Day 2 Repeat Schedule Special Day 3 I Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Special Day 3 I Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Year View Simple ut Day of the Week If you want the Schedule to occur on particular days of the week or on Special Days select the days required The drop down list at the top allows you to select various combinations including Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 204 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e None this clear the lists for you You must then select one or more days otherwise the Schedule will never run Any Day i e you don t care which day of the week it is Weekdays Monday Friday Work Days Monday to Friday but not Public Holidays Non work Days Saturday Sunday and Public Holidays e Weekends Saturday and
127. series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Telephony Dial In Fail Reason for dial in failure Integer No Reason 1 stopped ringing Telephony Dial In Fail Reason for dial in failure text String No Reason Name string Telephony Dial Out Fail Reason for dial out failure Integer Reason 1 no dial tone 2 no answer 3 no acknowledgement 4 number unobtainable 5 number busy 6 internal failure Telephony Dial Out Fail Reason for dial out failure text String Reason Name string as above Telephony Diverted Is the telephone diverted Telephony Diverted Diverted telephone number text String Number string Telephony Last Incoming Last received telephone number String Number text string Telephony Last Outgoing Last dialled telephone number String Number text string Telephony Off Hook Is the telephone off hook Boolean No oo Telephony Off Hook The off hook telephone number String Number text string Telephony Off Hook The reason for being off hook No No No No No No No o Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 168 Home Home Management Series 2 PICED Programmer s Guid Series PICED Programmer s Guide Reason 1 incoming voice 2 incoming data 3 incoming other 16 outgoing voice 32 outgoing data 48 outgoing other 64 setting diversion 80 internal failure Telephony Off Hook The reason for being off hook String Reason Name te
128. state will be the state of the first group in the Scene Scene Manager The Scene Manager allows the user to see all scenes in a project It also allows you to add copy edit and delete scenes To show the Scene Manager form click on the Project Edit Scenes menu item or click on the Scenes button on the tool bar Number _ gt Name Trigger Components 1 Party Trigger Control Scenes Party 3 2 TY Trigger Control Scenes TV 5 3 Bedtime Trigger Control f Scenes Bed Time 7 4 All OFF Trigger Control Scenes All OFF 10 The Scene Manager shows the Scene number name Trigger Group and number of Components in the Scene for each Scene in the project The columns can be sorted by clicking on top of the column or they can be rearranged and have their widths changed by dragging them To create a new scene click on the Add button The Scene Editor form will appear To delete a scene select the required scene from the list and click on the Delete button To edit a scene select the required scene from the list and click on the Edit button or double click on the required scene To copy a Scene select the required Scene and click on the Duplicate button To change the order of the Scenes use the Move Up and Move down buttons To automatically create a Scene 1 Before opening the Scene Manager set the levels of the Group Addresses to their desired levels Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 187
129. the URL IP Address for the Wiser Home Control at the remote site The Port is fixed at 8336 Options Options Language English Se V Use NTP to Maintain Time F Show Full Screen e Language select the language to be displayed on the Wiser User Interface e Use NTP to Maintain Time use the NTP time service to set the Wiser Home Control time e Show Full Screen select this if you want the Flash Projector to show full screen Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 67 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide LAN Use Wiser as LAN Device Allow Access From Wiser LAN ports LAN Properties The Allow Access From Wiser LAN ports option allows for access to Wiser via the LAN side Normally the Wiser Home Control is accessed remotely via the WAN connection of the Wiser Home Control There are some circumstances where it may be necessary to access it remotely from one of the LAN ports In this case select Allow Access From Wiser LAN ports and enter the Gateway Address and one or more Domain Name Server DNS IP addresses For details of the usage of the Wiser Home Control properties particularly with how they apply to different network configurations please refer to the Wiser Home Control Installation guide Misc Tab Metric Units can be selected to display Temperature in Centigrade rather than Fahrenheit The Master Unit setting controls whether the unit will be the C Bus Master The Master Unit can also
130. the colour form as a custom colour See also Add colour by Hex Code Add colour by Hex Code Colours on web pages are often referred to by their Hex Code This is a six character string representing a colour Examples are e Pure red is FF0000 Pure green is 00FF00 Pure blue is OOOOFF White is FFFFFF Black is 000000 A colour can be added to the custom colours for use anywhere in the project by selecting the Tools Add Colour by Hex Code menu item Enter the hex colour code and click on OK Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 270 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 13 See also http www webmonkey com webmonkey reference color_codes Log File Filter The PICED software can generate Log files for debugging purposes Unfortunately these log files can get quite large and hence can be difficult to review or e mail The Log File Filter allows you to extract just the needed part of a log file To run the log filter select the Tools Filter Log File menu item The Filter Log form will be displayed To use the log filter select the options described below and click on OK The new file will be created and displayed Log File Type You need to select whether the log file to be filtered was created by C Gate or PICED HomeGate Schedule Plus as the file formats are different Files The Log File box allows you to enter the log file to be filtered The log files can be found in the rel
131. the project Errors are reported by units when a failure condition occurs Multiple error conditions can be in place at once in a single unit generally related to different channels It is not possible to show the error state for a single channel in a unit using In Built System IO Variables If you use an In Built System IO Variable to show the error data at the unit level it will show the highest severity error condition applicable to that unit If you show error data at the Network level it will show the highest severity error condition in any unit on that Network If you show error data at the Project level it will show the highest severity error condition in any unit on any Network in the Project A Only monitored errors are reported using In Built System IO Variables See also Special Functions for Error Application functions 4 14 1 11 Measurement App In Built System IO C Bus Measurement Application can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System JO Variables Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 170 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Measurement App The boolean value of the Boolean Yes see below Boolean Value selected channel Measurement App The integer value of the Integer Yes see below Integer Value selected channel Measurement App Real The real floating point value of Yes see below Value the selected channel Measurement App Valid D
132. the sound one per audio zone Each Matrix Switcher in a system has e up to 8 sources radio tuners streamer or other audio inputs e up to 8 zones one zone per room or area The Media Transport Control Application functions can be used via e Audio Application Manager form select Project C Bus Applications Audio Manager menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the Audio Application messages will be sent to The C Bus Audio Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the C Bus Multi Room Audio System instructions for details of the operation of the C Bus audio devices The Audio Application is typically used in conjunction with the Media Transport Control Application to provide a complete audio control solution Note that C Touch Mark 1 and PAC units do not support the Audio Application Lighting Bridge The C Bus audio matrix switchers and amplifiers can also be controlled via lighting groups if configured to The matrix switcher and amplifiers bridge between the audio application and the lighting application so that events on one application are mapped to the other This results in twice as many C Bus messages but does allow for devices which do not support the C Bus Audio Application like DLT switches to control the C Bus MRA system C Bus Tags All C Bus Ap
133. the special function from the list e Enter any other information applicable to that special function Schedule Number Scene Number Irrigation Zone Program Details Module Number System IO Variable Special Function Schedule Edit v Schedule All Schedules Specific Schedule sa See also Controlling the Touchscreen and Tool Select Page Links When a component is activated it can cause another page to be displayed To do this a link to the page needs to be added to the component To add a link e Open the Component Properties form then e Select the Page Link tab page e Select the destination page from the list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 126 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 7 Page Link User Page Special Page Page If the Project Type is for a Black and White C Touch links can be either to a user created page or to one of many special pages BACK if the user clicks on the component the previous page will be displayed CALIBRATION this allows the C Touch unit touch panel to be calibrated DIAGNOSTICS this shows some diagnostics information STARTUP PAGE this displays the start up page CLEANING MODE this puts the unit in cleaning mode TIME SET this allows the user to set the time DATE SET this allows the user to set the date CONTRAST SET this allows the user to set the C Touch unit contrast BACKLIGHT SET this allows the user to
134. the status using the Error Application Manager For more details on the use of the Error Application with specific device types refer to the documentation for the specific device See also Special Functions In built System IO Error Application Manager The Error Application Manager can be used to monitor the status of error messages on the C Bus Error Application and to print reports To open the Error Application Manager either e select the Project C Bus Applications Error Manager menu item or e click on a component with the Error Manager Special Function The columns of data presented in the Error Application Manager include e Monitor does the error message need to be monitored see below e Network the C Bus Network which the unit is installed on e Type the category of error message currently only DALI Gateway or Universal Dimmer are supported Device ID a number identifying the device sending the message Name a name for the particular error condition see below Most Recent the present severity of the error Most Severe the Most Severe severity of the error since last cleared Data 1 amp Data 2 additional data about the error condition Time the time at which the error severity was last changed Acknowledged has the error been acknowledged or not Items are added to the list either if e You have previously selected them to be monitored e An error message is received from C Bus Error Monitori
135. this network or change the unit to be on a different network For more information on C Bus networks see http wwws3 clipsal com cis pdf_files C Bus Networks pdf 11 4 247 Confirmation 14632 Message This project has large stretched images THIS MAY CAUSE PERFORMANCE ISSUES IN COLOUR C TOUCH Would you like to re scale them before transfer this is recommended Cause The project has large images which have been stretched This will cause the Colour C Touch software to run slowly and possibly run out of memory It is strongly recommended that the images be re scaled before the project is transferred Solution Click on Yes to re scale stretched images and save the project before transferring Note that this does not affect the original images New stretched image files are created and used Click on No to continue with the transfer 11 4 248 Warning 14633 Message Note that this archive file will not be suitable for transfer to a Colour C Touch Cause You are archiving a Colour C Touch project file The project archive file does not contain the same information as the file which is transferred to the Colour C Touch unit hence this message Solution If you are wanting to transfer a Colour C Touch project to a Colour C Touch unit you should follow the normal process to Transfer a Colour C Touch Project to the Unit 11 4 249 Error 14634 Message Archive is too large to transfer to the Wiser Home Control unit Cause
136. to This is only used if you are sending commands from one network to another In this case the device needs to know which network it is on so that it can send the message with the correct path information Device is on network Local v Default Application Lighting Unit Address Unused v The Default Application is used when creating new Components Scenes and Schedules The Unit Address is necessary if you are going to be programming a Black and White C Touch or PAC over C Bus Refer to the C Bus Networks document which can be found in the Manuals folder for more details on the modelling of C Bus networks C Bus Control C Bus Control Ramp Groups to Level 1 then send Off r Ramp Groups to Off When a group address is ramped to level 0 the command is received by all C Bus Units on the network On some old C Bus input units the status indicator will go off as soon as this message is seen even though the level is still above 0 for some time For this reason many devices send a ramp to level 1 command followed by an off command when the level gets to 1 In this case the input unit status indicators will show the state correctly To select this behaviour select the Ramp Groups to Level 1 then send Off check box If this check box is not selected then ramping to level 0 will be done with a single ramp to level 0 command Nudge Ramp Scene disabled All of the Groups in the Scenes will be controlled
137. to your preferred setting Set any other preferences Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 84 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 7 2 4 7 7 3 e Select the Save As Template item from the File menu and follow the steps described above To use a template in the future select the Open Template item from the File menu Component Templates Components or groups of Components can be saved as a Component Template This allows you to create Components or groups of Components for easy re use at a later date To create a Component Template 1 Create the Components 2 Select the Components 3 Select the File Save Components as Template menu item Adding Template Contents To add a Template to a project 1 Select the File Add Template Contents menu item 2 Select which parts of the Template you want to import using the Template Options form 3 Click OK 4 Select the Template file 5 Click on OK If you have used a particular Template before you can select it from the File Re Add Template Contents menu item Screen Size When a template with Pages is saved the Project screen size is also saved If you load a template which contains Pages you have the option to use the template screen size or to keep the screen size of the Project If the Template screen size is different from the Project screen size a warning will be raised If the template page is larger than the Project screen si
138. total power cost energy or peak for a set of meters which use the same tariff Most of the time it is desirable to use the total for all meters rather than by tariff Examples For today s total energy usage so far use e Variable Power Meter Total Energy e Period 1 day e Offset 0 e Units Watt Hours e Data Type To Date For the cost of last month s energy usage use e Variable Power Meter Total Energy e Period 1 month e Offset 1 e Units Cost Data Type To Date For the average three monthly energy cost use e Variable Power Meter Total Energy e Period 3 month e Offset 0 e Units Cost e Data Type Average Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 182 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 1 18 Other In built System 10 4 14 2 4 15 Variable Name Settable Alarm Sounding This shows whether the alarm Boolean No is currently sounding ringing alerting going off like bucket of prawns in the hot sun Alarm Cancel Next This cancels the next alarm Boolean Yes only C Bus State The state of the C Bus Boolean a a a Monitor o The value of a Monitor value of a Monitor System Processor The percentage of the Usage processor currently being a System Free Memory The amount of free memory Special Day Type Mi name of the current Special Page Name ae name of the current Page Page Transition in Is a page transition in Boolean fe Progress progress
139. valid See details Boolean below HVAC Error Number HVAC Error Name Name of the error HVAC Error State HVAC Fan Speed The speed of the fan Integer Yes 0 Auto HVAC Fan Speed Text Text description of the fan Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 171 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name speed Auto 1 2 3 HVAC Mode The mode of operation Integer Yes 0 Power is off 1 Manual 2 Program Schedule Control 3 Override temporary override of schedule control 4 Auto option for evaporative cooling only to control comfort level HVAC Mode Name Description of the above HVAC Operating Type Controller operating type see __ Integer details below 0 off 1 heat only 2 cool only heat amp cool automatic fan vent ae ee Name type as above HVAC Plant Busy Is the HVAC controller busy Boolean usually this is caused by the plant changing operating type cooling HVAC Plant Equipment HVAC Plant Equipment type Integer No 1 furnace 2 evaporative 3 reverse cycle 4 heat pump heat only 5 heat pump cool only 6 furnace evaporative cooling 7 furnace heat pump cooling 8 hydronic or fan coil 9 hydronic heat pump cooling 10 hydronic evaporative HVAC Plant Equipment Name of the HVAC Plant String Name Equipment as above HVAC Plant Fan isthe fan running ssi the fan running isthe fan running ssi HVAC Plant H
140. which will allow you to create a New Project Open a Project or re open an existing project Create a New Project Based on a Theme Template Open an Existing Project File Example E Open a Recent Project Project l Create a New Blank Project Preview Import Project Archive Transfer Project From Unit If this is the first time you have used the software select the Open an Existing Project button select one of the example projects click on the OK button then click on the Finish button Note that the PICED software should not be run at the same time as the C Bus Tool Kit They use C Gate in different modes and also there can be problems caused by the two programs simultaneously accessing the C Bus tag database Software Screen The PICED Software is a Windows application that uses a graphical representation of various controls and objects associated with the programming of the PICED Software When the PICED Software is opened you will see a screen something like that below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 31 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 3 3 Menus Title Bar Tool Bars ioj x SOSA B E A K OO me ED H Poefen Pave I amp Level BEFORE SSeS OR 6 BABS OF O amp 06 01 2005 5 03 20 P Scroll Bars Workspace Status Bar The features are Menus the menus provide access to the software functions
141. with things like Scenes Schedules and Irrigation e User these are customisable to allow control and monitoring of logic System IO Variables are one of the following types Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 154 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 1 4 14 1 1 Type Meaning Component Usage Integer A whole number 2147483647 to 2147483647 Level Indicators to show value 99999 to 99999 for Wiser Home Control Buttons to nudge or preset Sliders to show or set value Selectors to show or set value A number including a fractional amount 1 5 x 10 Level Indicators to show value to 3 4 x 10 Buttons to nudge or preset 0 1 to 99999 for Wiser Home Control Sliders to show or set value Boolean Either true on or false off Level Indicators to show value Buttons to toggle or preset String Some text maximum of 50 characters for User Level Indicators to show value System IO variables A number representing the number of seconds since Level Indicators or Clocks to show value Buttons to nudge or preset A number representing the number of days since Level Indicators or Clocks to show December 30th 1899 value for the PAC can only use dates since January 1st Buttons to nudge or preset 2000 Not all components can display or control all system IO variable types For example it is not possible for a clock to display a boolean system IO value
142. would be the songs on the selected CD The Media Transport Control Application functions can be used via e Media Transport Control Application Manager form select Project C Bus Applications Media Transport Control Manager menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the Media Transport Control messages will be sent to The C Bus Media Transport Control Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF The Media Transport Control Application is typically used in conjunction with the Audio Application to provide a complete audio control solution Refer to the C Bus Multi Room Audio System instructions for details of the operation of the Media Transport Control Application Note that C Touch Mark 1 units do not support the Media Transport Control Application Audio Application The C Bus Audio Application is used for transmitting audio control information and for the control of audio devices via C Bus Typical uses include Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 28 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 4 e Controlling amplifier volume bass and treble e Selecting the audio source for a zone The C Bus audio devices of interest are e Matrix Switchers these switch an audio source input feed to an audio zone room or area e Audio Amplifiers these amplify
143. you will need fully connected networks where every network is connected to every other network via a bridge as shown below Fully Connected Networks In the case of fully connected networks in the Project Details form Options Tab you should set the Model Networks Independently to off If you have the same Group Address on the same Application used on different networks they will be treated as being the same Hence if you send a command to switch on Group Address 20 ona remote network you will see that GA 20 on the local network is also on Note that it will not have sent a command to the Local Network If you want a command to go to the local network as well as other networks at the same time you will need to use scenes Notes regarding use of networks which are not fully connected If you have networks that are not fully connected and you want to send a command to control a Group Address on another network you can select the destination network for the command in the Component Properties form When the command is sent the path through the various bridges to the remote network will be included In order to construct the path it is necessary to know which network the Touchscreen will be installed on This can be set in the Project Details form If you have the same Group Address on the same Application used on different networks C Touch will treat them as being the same Hence if you send a command to switch on Group Address
144. you to reset the Contrast to the default setting Set Backlight This sets the backlight threshold to the current light level Set Date Time This sets the C Touch date and time to the same as the computer C Touch Resources The following applies to C Touch firmware 3 0 or later The PICED Software generates a file which is transferred to a C Touch unit The C Touch units have limited amounts of memory so you are limited in the size of the configuration file that you can transfer To see the exact amount of memory used by your Project select Resources Report from the Transfer menu A file resources txt is created in the project directory which has further details of the memory usage The 5000CTA has 128KB of memory for the user configuration data This is used to store all aspects of the Project including Pages Fonts Scenes Schedules and other Project settings There is an additional 8KB of memory to store user settings which includes e Changes made to Scenes and Schedules since the last project transfer e Levels of C Bus Group Addresses e User settings for the backlight screen calibration screen contrast daylight savings and so forth In order to minimise the size of the transfer file follow these hints e Minimise the number and size of bitmaps A full screen bitmap will use 10k Bytes of C Touch memory e Minimise the size of Buttons Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 281 Home Management Ser
145. 014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 266 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Level Conversion x Percentage 0 la Level 0 z Hexadecimal jo A Percentage 0 100 Level 0 255 or Hexadecimal 0 FF number can be entered and will be immediately converted to the other numbers 5 5 Auto Create The Auto Create form can be opened by selecting Tools Auto Create It allows you to quickly create large Projects for test purposes It should never be used for creating real projects as some of the normal safeguards are not applied during the auto create process To automatically create parts of a project enter the details as described below and click on OK Scenes To automatically create Scenes Select the Scenes tab e e Select the Auto Create Scenes check box e Select the number of Scenes to create in the Scene Count box e e e Select the number of Scene Items in the Scene Item Count box Select the starting Group Address for the Scene Items in the Min Group Address box If you want a Scene Trigger used select the Set Trigger check box This will create the selected number of Scenes each given the name Scene x where x is the number of the Scene Each Scene will contain the selected number of Scene Items The first Scene Item will have the selected Group Address and the subsequent ones will increment from there All Scene Items will have a level of 100 If the Trigger option was selected the fir
146. 101 Error 14102 Message The minimum must be set to be less than the maximum Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 369 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Cause The minimum value was greater or equal to the maximum value Solution Change the minimum or maximum value 11 4 102 Error 14103 Message Error in parameter Cause The specified parameter has been entered incorrectly Solution Enter a valid value for the parameter 11 4 103 Error 14104 Message Logic run time error Error Rxxx Error Description Cause A run time error has occurred in the Logic Engine Solution Review the Run Time Error list and fix the problem in the logic code 11 4 104 Error 14105 Message Please select a System IO Parameter Cause A System IO Variable has not been selected Solution Select a System IO Variable 11 4 105 Error 14106 Message There are duplicate System IO names Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 370 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Cause Two or more System IO variable have the same names Solution Change the name of one or more System IO variable 11 4 106 Warning 14107 Message This will stop the logic engine from running Cause The action performed will stop the logic engine from running Certain actions such as re arranging Scenes or System IO variables mean that the logic which is currently running may be invalid To prevent unexpected behaviour
147. 12 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 40 seconds 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 minutes 3 minutes 5 minutes 7 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 17 minutes Note that the ramp rate is the time to change the level from 0 to 100 or vice versa If the level is at 50 and you execute a ramp to 100 with a 4 second ramp rate it will only take 2 seconds Labeling Group Addresses on the Lighting Applications Trigger Control Application and Enable Control Application can have Dynamic Labels applied to them These labels are designed to allow keys on C Bus input units to update their status to show what they are controlling Labels are broadcast onto C Bus so that all devices supporting Dynamic Labels can show the new label Labels can be updated by the C Bus ToolKit software or by devices such as the C Bus Multi Room Audio system Dynamic Labels can be applied to a Group Address for Lighting Applications or to an Action Selector for Trigger Control Application Labels can be stored in multiple languages to facilitate rapid changing of the language displayed on a Dynamic Label device The languages and their code numbers are shown below Language Code hex Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 16 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide English 01 English Australia 02 English Belize 03 English Canada 04 English Caribbean 05 English Ireland 06 English Jamaica 07 English New Zealand 08 Engli
148. 2 Event 207 Examples 209 HVAC 243 In built System IO 159 Limits 7 Logic 207 Manager 198 Master Unit 329 Notes 202 one off 211 Page Link 207 Printing 89 Pro Forma 336 Random 203 Repeat 202 203 Special Days 218 Special Function 207 Special Functions 151 Start stop 202 status 40 sunrise or sunset 386 Synchronise 212 System IO 155 Time 96 111 203 Tools 133 Year View 208 Screen 31 Image 337 Page 431 Home Management Series Screen 31 magnify 270 Printing 89 Saving 337 Size 51 283 294 Type 51 Scroll Bars 31 Scroll Lock 319 Secondary Selection 139 Security Application 23 236 238 In built System IO 167 logging 319 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 Tools 133 Select Component 139 Selecting Pages 90 Selector Component 97 Serial logging 319 Services 229 230 232 Shadow 101 Shape Components 95 Shapes 94 101 arbitrary 132 Lines 132 polygon 132 Shortcuts Desktop 270 Keyboard 41 Shutter Relay Tools 133 Simulation Mode 36 319 time out 7 Size 140 screen 283 294 Skin Customising 304 308 Language 304 308 Slider 94 110 122 Slider Components 95 Slim Serer 53 63 70 SMTP 234 Software Limits 7 Starting 31 Solenoids 222 Sorting 47 Sound 143 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Source 28 Special Days 218 Auto delete 53 63 70 Editor 220 In built System IO 183 Limits 7 Manager 218 Schedules 203 System IO
149. 20 Widgets snicker ned eine een eee ees 229 4 21 E Mail annaia a a erie en erences 233 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 1 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 RSS FOCUS essa ccc csc sccces des aaepe aaa aaa aa west Aa a AA ETEEN Eae aa aa aaa TERNE an ESEE 234 Alarms e eap onara ee te eda tiene eda eh ata 235 LOQIG O r ee eee ee ee eee 235 LO 2 aimee nee renee Remarc a cine ee eis at centr we Pent aPC ere an Eaa aee r nner Sheree aaa 235 ROOSA f aaa rea Ea sana lac ot aunt names ation 265 Change Image Colours iii he scot scetates seca sa bn caevbedecued tvaes sdeetews eects tines tease 265 Fe scale Mages isch a a Anite eed eects aa Paaa aa reha da ee eed eee eee 266 Refresh Inge cic ate oi orl Rie ee 266 Conveft Levels siana ariera lea aiaee Tecan tee cee lea heat aaa ecient 266 PUNO Creat ciinei sestescccctacteae A ceteees cakrak arenen adtbid an ri Kaanaa im pa aau Erap ENEE aalsederecceane 267 Change NeiWoOr KS 12055 rm aa eile a ea ee bie ieee eee 269 Change COMOUIS areara e e rrarena aaaea aa aeaaea ae Ea Eaa daaa EEE E aa Eaa aeaea iaaa 269 Creating a Desktop Shortcut 20 cc ccceseeesecencesenseeeeennerenneesesescerceneenneatsceeenserene
150. 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 146 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 12 To add a new Sub Page 1 Select the Page New Sub Page menu item 2 Select the Page Properties and Sub Page Properties 3 Click on OK You will see that only part of the work area is the selected background colour of the Sub Page The rest of the area is grey This shows the size of the Sub Page relative to a regular page You can now add Components to the Sub Page You will only be able to place Components within the Sub Page area To use the Sub Page on a Page 1 Place a Sub Page Frame on the Page When a Sub Page Frame Component is first placed on a page it will be invisible unless you have selected the View Show Sub Page Frame Border menu item option 2 Edit the Sub Page Frame properties to select the Size should match the size of the Sub Page and the Default Sub Page The Sub Page Frame component will initially display the Default Sub Page The Sub Page displayed in the frame can then be changed using Sub Page Links For additional details on the use of Sub Pages see the Sub Page example project Profiles Profiles Sometimes is it useful to have several Projects which are almost identical except for some minor details To support this requirement Profiles can be used A Profile is used to provide selection of properties of a Project based on where the Project is to be used A typical example would be where a project i
151. 255 Graph 117 History 257 Manager 255 Measurement Application 255 Pulse 255 Reactive Power 261 Power Meters 254 Limits 7 Tools 133 Power Usage 316 Power up 318 Preset 122 Press 120 Primary Selection 139 Printing 89 Privileges 395 Processor usage 319 Profiles Adding 147 Groups 147 Manager 148 Selecting 149 Selecting for unit 275 284 288 291 Using 147 Values 149 Program File 36 Irrigation 222 Options 32 36 Run 143 Start up 32 Project 48 Archiving 86 attractive 333 C Bus 52 Check 324 cloning 311 Converting Files 49 copying 311 design guidance 333 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Details 51 53 63 70 Documenting 334 Editing 310 File Types 49 Installer 53 63 70 Location 53 63 70 New 50 Open 48 50 Printing 89 Printing Details 89 Refresh 53 63 70 Refresh from Unit 280 286 288 293 298 303 308 310 Save 82 89 Save Backup 89 Screen Size 51 Summary 328 Transfer from Unit 277 286 288 293 297 Transfer to Unit 275 284 288 291 295 Updating 310 Projector 230 Projects Copying data 86 Examples 333 Templates 83 84 85 86 Proxy 53 63 70 Public Holidays 218 Pulse 122 Pulse Power Meter 254 Editor 260 Pulse Power Meters Limits 7 R Rain Delay 222 Ramp Rates 16 Read File From Unit 311 Reconciliation 312 Recover C Touch 284 Recover PAC 299 Recovery 316 318 Refresh C Bus Tags 274 Refresh Images 266 Re
152. 270 Magnify SO EO nein ong oie ie eens 270 Image Editor cryos ata aa ee eas es 270 Pick COIQUIS i aar rantre anette eee ere tite eaten ott eel ame cae te 270 Add colour by Hex Code viscisetsssccssctecceccne cent iesecdscenenteccnazsncedanesueeesusecdeeensmereceeneeceace 270 Log File FIET spiidi na iaraa aE aap aada Da a aaea aE a aaa daana adaa EE Eaa na 271 Schedule Catch Up viaii aa dairi iain aioe een th eceseets atone drata 272 Create ANIMALION cie itinkcaide Aarne lan ren neat 273 Create Compact Tag File cn hincinnncd iene iene an 273 POU GROIN siisii irn leat eter teak att teeta lan astecttadsinet etbteantedh araea aN aana a daaa aariaa iaiia 273 Refresh C Bus Tags 4 22 aia eninin aa hee ee tees 274 Mage SQV CN ss cco wrasse sce ras ch crntntaccees seas aa aaea reaa aE PEE Eaa eer erties eee 274 G BusUniHS Sominas aaaeaii annar roaa aoa a iaa anes 275 Black and White C TOUCH s ssssssussunsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnn nunnunum nunnan nnana na 275 Black and White C Touch Mark 2 sssssssnssunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan 284 CTU I SpectrU M acess oes raene tees ewe ccc aaea aa eaa OVEA aa peda AEEA a Pa Ee te enneeexeretinecence 288 Colour C TONG H ee shoe nama rera cco oe aaa Tata ae he ce geese hee ona 290 PAC catia ace cee areca nein ee nee Pao SEACA adh Aa daei EAEra eee 295 Wiser Home Controlia a eee iaaea aea aaa aaa 300 Wiser 2 Home Control sssssasssnssunnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnn
153. 55 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 Enabling 339 Help 339 Purpose Reporting Suppressing 234 180 151 23 257 255 260 180 181 316 169 151 339 339 339 Error Reporting logging 319 Error State 236 Errors 324 Event Logging Examples 333 Excel Plot Graph 319 273 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Export to Archive 86 F Fan Speed FAQ 332 Feed 28 File Project 48 Types 49 Files 97 115 Additional HTML 86 Logic 86 271 275 284 288 295 Reload 286 288 Update 280 286 288 294 298 304 308 Flash 300 304 Folder New 82 Font 86 106 283 Selection 129 171 243 86 Filter log file Firmware Fonts Colour C Touch Frames 107 Frequently Asked Questions Front 141 Function Groups 294 332 229 230 232 Gain 112 Graph 98 117 Energy 260 Excel 273 Plot 273 Power 260 Grid 143 Group Address Ramp Rate 16 Group Addresses 14 Adding 18 20 21 22 Copy 141 Editing 18 20 21 22 Labels 16 239 Selecting 18 Tags 29 Group Components 143 Page 425 Home Management Series H Hardware Key 7 Heating 13 27 Help 332 C Bus f
154. 6 In built System IO Limits 7 logging 319 Master Unit 329 Modules limit 7 124 154 183 Monitoring 18 20 22 18 21 22 23 Power Failure Recovery 97 253 PICED Programmer s Guide 151 222 53 63 70 80 94 112 Components 96 316 318 13 180 151 53 63 70 80 229 230 232 143 124 154 183 164 Page 427 Home Management Series Logic 4 7 235 Special Functions 151 status 40 System IO 155 System lO limit 7 Timers limit 7 Tools 133 Log in 217 Log out 217 Longitude 53 63 70 80 Magnify 270 Manual 332 User 338 Map 80 MARPA 248 Master Loads 222 Master Unit 53 63 70 329 In built System IO 183 Matrix Scene Manager 195 Matrix Switcher 28 Matrix Switcher Editor 251 Maximums 7 Measurement Application Controlling 170 In built System IO 170 Item Form 246 logging 319 Manager 245 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 24 245 246 254 255 Tools 133 Media 28 iPod 53 63 70 iPort 53 63 70 Options 53 63 70 Slim Server 53 63 70 Media Control Client 330 Media Player 151 330 Media Transport Control Special Functions 151 Tools 133 PICED Programmer s Guide PAC 299 usage 319 Menu 31 Menu Items 6 42 Menus Using Sub Pages 146 Messages Confirm 340 341 342 350 352 357 363 366 367 368 380 381 383 384 385 386 390 391 395 400 401 402 403 404 405 409 413 414 415 417 418 419 Confirmation 345 373 374 375 376 377 378 Err
155. 71 Message Zone duration s are too short Must be at least 15 seconds Cause One or more Zone durations are less than 15 seconds Solution Increase any short Zone durations to be more than 15 seconds Error 14072 Message Please select a Schedule Cause No Schedule is selected Solution Select a Schedule from the list Error 14073 Message PICED Programmer s Guide Schedule has no Event set Schedule must execute C Bus Action select Page or execute Special Function Cause The Schedule has no event set ie it doesn t do anything Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 361 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 73 11 4 74 11 4 75 Solution Change the Schedule so that it executes a C Bus Action selects a Page or executes a Special Function Warning 14074 Message Rain Delay Schedule already exists Cause The Rain Delay Schedule already exists and can not be created Solution Edit the Rain Delay Schedule if desired Warning 14075 Message This Schedule will never be executed because there are no Days of the Week Days of the Month Months selected Cause The Schedule has no Days of the Week Days of the Month and or Months selected Hence there are no days on which it will be executed Solution Edit the Schedule days to make sure that at least some days are selected in each of the group boxes Day of Week Day of Month Month and Year S
156. Australia Page 66 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide CNI Properties e CNI IP Address this is the IP Address of the CNI used by the Wiser Home Control By default it is one greater than the Wiser Home Control IP Address e CNI Port this is the port number used by the CNI The Wiser Home Control must be on the same subnet as the PC in order to be able to transfer the project The Wiser Home Control and CNI must also be on the same subnet as each other See http en wikipedia org wiki Subnetwork for an explanation of network masks and subnets Access Permit Access to Wiser Home Control Enable Projector Control Enable Project Update Remote Wiser Properties This controls whether the following Wiser features are to be allowed to be accessed by a user e Enable ToolKit Control allows the Wiser Home Control s CNI to be connected to remotely using the C Bus ToolKit or other programs via the Wide Area Network WAN side of the Wiser Home Control ie via the Internet e Enable Projector Control this enables a Flash Projector PC and mobile clients to control the Wiser Home Control via the WAN URL IP Address specify the URL or IP address in order to access the Wiser unit over the internet for remote project firmware trasnfer Remote Port specify the port number in order to access the Wiser unit over the internet Enable Project Update this allows PICED to transfer a new project to the unit via the WAN Enter
157. Auto Create form has been opened This is warning about the potential problems with using this software function Solution Click on OK If you choose not to proceed close the Auto Create form See also Auto Create 11 4 133 Confirmation 14135 Message Are you sure you want to capture this Scene This will change some or all of the stored Scene levels Cause You have selected a Scene Capture menu item or button This will capture the Scene Levels from C Bus Solution Click on the Yes button to capture the Scene Click on the No button to leave the Scene as it is 11 4 134 Confirmation 14136 Message Do you want to create a one off copy of these Schedules Cause You have clicked on the One Off Copy button which creates one off Schedules Solution Click on the Selected button to create a one off copy of all selected Schedules Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 378 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on the All button to create a one off copy of all Schedules for this date Click on the Cancel button to cancel this operation 11 4 135 Error 14137 Message C Gate disconnected unexpectedly PICED can not operate without a C Gate connection and needs to be closed Cause C Gate has stopped responding Solution 1 Check whether C Gate is still running 2 Save any changes to your work and close PICED 3 Re start C Gate and PICED There is also an option to automatica
158. Bus Installation Software In the Trigger Control Application the Group Addresses are referred to as Trigger Groups In the Enable Control Application the Group Addresses are referred to as Enable Groups The generic term for Group Addresses Trigger Groups and Enable Groups is Network Variables A Network Variable is something that stores a value and is synchronised across the Network ie all devices on the Network store the same value for the Network Variable Note that the output unit logic is not modelled The group addresses are controlled not the output terminals Levels Levels Every Group Address has a level or value between 0 0 and 255 100 How Levels are Used In the Lighting Applications the level corresponds to the lighting intensity or brightness In other Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 14 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 3 Applications the level is used in other ways In the Trigger Control Application the Levels are referred to as Action Selectors because they are selecting some sort of action to be performed In Trigger Control setting a Trigger Group to a particular Action Selector Level can be used to trigger a Scene or start an Irrigation program Note that the EXACT Action Selector Level must be set and ramping the Trigger Group through this Level will have no effect You must also set the ramp rate to zero i e an inst
159. C Bus as they change If a label for a particular Group or Action Selector has not been transmitted on C Bus or the labels have been cleared then the C Bus Tag will be displayed If the language is changed a C Bus command will be sent to change the language in all other C Bus devices The command will only be sent to C Bus Networks which are used with labels in the Project See also e Labels form select Project C Bus Applications Labels menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic e C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Selecting C Bus Properties In various parts of the PICED software you will need to select C Bus properties Networks Applications Group Addresses Levels and Ramp Rates Generally you will see a set of controls like those below Network Local Network he Application Lighting Group Bedside Lights Level ON Z EJEA Ramp Rate lover 4 seconds The icons shaped like a plus are used to add new tags The icons shaped like a pencil are used to edit tags Network To select the desired Network click on the Network drop down list Changing the Network will cause the Application Group Address and Level information to be updated Networks can only be added and edited using the C Bus ToolKit software Application Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 18 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To select the desired Appli
160. C Bus C Gate has to be running and correctly configured to communicate with C Bus before it can be used by PICED The PICED Software can control C Bus if it is connected This is used mainly for testing purposes but can also be used for establishing the current group address levels when setting scenes To connect to C Bus select the Connect to C Bus sub menu from the Options menu This will connect you to C Bus using the method set up in the C Bus Project The software will take several seconds to read the current state of the C Bus network Once connected all C Bus buttons on the software will show and control the state of C Bus Group Addresses Note that the PICED will disconnect from C Gate at a random time between 2 and 3 days after connecting Using C Touch as a PC Interface You can also use the Black and White C Touch unit as a PC Interface Connect your PC to the C Touch serial connector using the cable supplied Follow the above steps to connect to C Bus C Touch will display a message that it is in PC Interface Mode When you have finished remove the cable and C Touch will reset itself A Note that you will not be able to use C Touch while it is being used asa PC Interface It is necessary for any software that is using the PC Interface to set the handshaking lines correctly as they are used to power the C Touch serial output driver If you are having problems using C Touch as a PC Interface ensure that the sof
161. C Bus Error Application Manager Security App show a summary of the Security Application status Telephony App show a summary of the Telephony Application status Measurement App show a summary of the Measurement Application status HVAC Manager show the HVAC Application Manager Labels show the C Bus Labels form Clear Labels clear all C Bus labels Media Transport Control App show the Media Transport Control Application Manager Audio Manager show the Audio Application Manager PAGE MENU New Page add a new page Edit Page Properties set the page properties Delete Page delete the current page Duplicate Page make an exact copy of the existing page New Theme Page create a new Theme Page Show Theme Page show the theme page of the currently displayed page New Sub Page add a new Sub Page Show Sub Page show the Sub Page for the currently selected Sub Page Frame Lock Components all pages this prevents any components from being moved or resized Lock Components this page this prevents any components from being moved or resized Negative Colours this page change all colours on this page to be their negative white becomes black and vice versa Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 44 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Negative Colours all pages change all colours on all pages to be their negative white becomes black and vice versa COMPONEN
162. C Client program select Do Not Transfer Configuration Data and click on OK e f you want to prepare a data file for transfer at a later date select Prepare configuration data file but do not transfer e f you are wanting to transfer a different file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file 6 If you have used non standard fonts they will automatically be copied to the fonts folder under the project folder see Export to Archive If the CTC Server finds any fonts in this folder in the archive it will automatically install them and re boot 7 lf any additional files are required for example for Logic or HTML Components add these files 8 Select the Profile for the unit 9 Click on OK and the C Bus Project is exported to a compact format suitable for the Colour C Touch and then the Project is archived 10 The archive file is now ready to be transferred using the Transfer Utility e The Transfer Utility will be opened for you e f you have more than one Network card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to the Colour C Touch e Options for connecting to the Colour C Touch unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 11 A list of Colour C Touch units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Colour C Touch unit from the list e f the Colour C Touch unit has out of date firmware the Firmware tab will be displa
163. CED a zone is a C Bus Group Address representing one or many loads connected to a C Bus output unit All the lights in your dining room might be in one zone Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 6 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 A scene is defined as the combination of loads distributed in various control zones with different levels The scene can be set up with the PICED Software and assigned to soft keys on the PICED Software Ramp Rate The ramp rate indicates the length of time it takes for a load to ramp to a desired level Input Unit An input unit is a C Bus unit which the user interacts with to make things happen on a C Bus Network PICED itself a key input unit or passive infrared sensor are examples Output Unit An output unit is a C Bus unit which delivers power to loads a relay and dimmer are examples C Bus related definitions which are useful when discussing PICED programming are given in the following sections Installation To install the PICEDsoftware 1 Prior to installation install the latest C Bus ToolKit software This installs the C Gate software for you 2 Insert the CD in the computer and the installer will run automatically If you do not have a CD run the setup exe file 3 Follow the instructions in the installer See also Computer Requirements in the FAQ Important Information Licences For the PICED software there a
164. CED project pages and to most of the PICED software functions can be limited based on a user s Access Level Each project Page has an Access Level If the currently logged in user has an Access Level equal or greater than a page s Access Level then they can view that page If not then they will need to log in first Similarly most functions of the PICED software also have an Access Level If the user does not have access to a function then it will either appear as being disabled or will be invisible depending on the configuration of the Access Manager The default Access Levels are Level 0 Anyone Level 1 User 1 Level 2 User 2 Level 3 User 3 Level 4 Supervisor Level 5 Administrator A user can access anything which has an Access Level equal or lower than the user s Access Level The lowest level is available without having to log in Using Access Levels To use Access Control with a project follow these steps 1 Create the desired Access Levels 2 Add the users 3 Assign which Access Levels have access to which features 4 Assign Access Levels to pages which are to be restricted 5 Add buttons with Log in and Log out Special Functions where necessary Note User passwords are encrypted in the Project file however it is recommended that if security is critical then the project should be saved as an encrypted file See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Access Control Manager
165. Control V Enable Toolkit Control iV Enable Projector Control V Enable Project Update Remote Wiser Properties URLJIP Address mywiser no ip org Remote Access Port Remote Port feo This controls whether the following Wiser features are to be allowed to be accessed by a user Enable ToolKit Control allows the Wiser Home Control s CNI to be connected to remotely using the C Bus ToolKit or other programs via the Wide Area Network WAN side of the Wiser Home Control ie via the Internet e Enable Projector Control this enables a Flash Projector PC and mobile clients to control the Wiser Home Control via the WAN e Enable Project Update this allows PICED to transfer a new project to the unit via the WAN Enter the URL IP Address for the Wiser Home Control at the remote site URL IP Address specify the URL or IP address in order to access the Wiser unit over the internet for remote project firmware trasnfer e Remote Port set the port that you wish to access the wiser2 unit from over the internet port 80 may be blocked by some internet service providers Options Options Language Show Full Screen Firmware Update URL Wiser2 LED s V Enable Wiser2 LED s e Language select the language to be displayed on the Wiser User Interface Show Full Screen select this if you want the Flash Projector to show full screen e Firmware Update URL optional specify a URL for the wiser to automatically look for firmwa
166. Control Displaying the Category Name String Yes Category Name Media Transport Control Stopping the music Boolean Yes Stop Media Transport Control Selecting the track Integer Yes Track Media Transport Control Integer Yes Track Count Media Transport Control Displaying the Track Name String Yes Track Name Only settable if Media Link Group has the Media Source option selected The Category Selection and Name In built System IO variables also require an offset They can display the current next next 1 previous or previous 1 data See also e Special Functions for Media Transport Control functions e The Media Transport Control Template which shows how the Media Transport Control Application can be used with In built System IO y 4 14 1 14 Labelling In Built System IO C Bus Labels can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 179 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Label Action Selector The label for a selected Action String Yes Text Selector Label Group Text The label for a selected Group Label Language The number of currently Integer selected language Label Language Name The name of the ape String selected language See also Special Functions for Labelling functions AY Labels only get sent to C Bus when they change This is done to prevent excessive C Bus traff
167. DNS senices are available e Host Name specify the URL you wish to use for access over the internet e User Name DDNS account user name e Password DDNS account password Ripple Ripple Server Enable Ripple Server Matrix IP 192 168 2 9 The Wiser2 has a ripple music server built in This will stream music directly to an MRA version 3 matrix switcher and that has an inbuilt ip streamer and provide control via wiser2 Ul s and C Bus transport control Further configuration is required in the audio manager before adding an MRAV3 widget e Enable Ripple Server enable the Wiser2 ripple server e Matrix IP IP address of the matrix switcher to stream content SAMBA Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 76 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide SAMBA Server V Enable SAMBA Server Work Group WORKGROUP SAMBA Client NV Enable SAMBA Client User Name jjohndoe Password Preeti Domain WORKGROUP Host 192 168 210 Folder mediamusic The Wiser2 unit can share files with other networked devices either as a server or a client using the SAMBA protocol Enable SAMBA Server enable the wiser2 to act as a server Work Group specify the work group that the server will operate on Enable SAMBA Client enable the wiser2 to act as a client User Name enter the samba account user name Password enter the samba account password Domain enter the domain name OR the work group name you wish to access
168. Data from Existing Project To add aspects of an existing Project to a new Project in PICED 1 Select the File Add Template Contents menu item 2 Select which parts of the existing Project you want to import using the Template Options form 3 Click OK 4 Change the Files of type option from template files to project files 5 Select the Project file 6 Click on OK Archiving the Project Archiving consists of collecting together all files related to a Project and compressing them into a single compact file When a Project is complete installed and tested you should consider archiving the project files The purpose of archiving the files is so that if when you need to make changes at a later date the files are guaranteed to be available If you keep the files on your hard disk and there is a failure you may lose many hours of work if you have to re create the project again Ideally a copy of the archive file should be given to the customer for safe keeping See also Saving the Project Exporting to an Archive Importing from an Archive Saving a Backup Exporting to an Archive A new archive is created by the File Archive Export to Archive menu item This opens the Export Project to Archive form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 86 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Files to include in the archive Additional Files Just files used by the Project Add
169. ENT YEAR this decrements decreases by one the year date System I O only System IO variables can be displayed and or controlled using components as shown in the table below Control Control Sliders Display and Control Display and Control evel Indicators System IO Variable The System IO Variable box allows you to select a User System IO variable or an In built System lO variable Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 125 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 5 4 9 4 6 Value The Value is used when the Key Function is preset nudge up or nudge down Properties When some in built system IO variables are selected additional properties need to be set These will appear at the bottom of the form when required For example if you select the Irrigation Zone Running variable you will need to select which Irrigation Zone applies It is recommended that the Tool Select function be used for adding In built System IO Components as it semi automates the process and it also shows related Special Functions Various templates are supplied with the PICED software to quickly add sets of related components such as for editing Scenes Schedules or Irrigation Special Function Properties When a component is activated it can cause a Special Function to be executed To add a Special Function to a component e Open the Component Properties form e Select the Special Function tab e Select
170. Error 202 Error 204 Error 205 Error 206 Error 207 Error 208 Error 209 Error 213 Error 214 Error 215 Error 216 Error 218 Error 219 Error 220 Master Unit The project has scenes which trigger each other Once one scene has been triggered the scenes will trigger each other indefinitely The average update rate of the Monitor components it more than once per second This will cause excessive C Bus network traffic Project does not have Schedules for Daylight Savings The project has no provision for setting the contrast The project has no provision for setting the backlight A page can not be reached from the start up page or from the time out page Two or more components on a page have the same IR code Only one will be activated One component is completely hidden by another Part of the component is off the screen A component has an Application of 255 FF hexadecimal which is invalid Edit the scenes to change the triggers Reduce the number of monitors or increase the update periods Add a Schedule to set the clock at the start and end of Daylight Savings This can be done with a single button click from the Project details form Add a page link to the contrast setting page Add a page link to the backlight setting page Add a page link to the page or delete the page if it is not required Change the IR codes on one or more components Move or d
171. Full Edit Special Days None Full Full Full Full Full Edit System I O None Full Full Full Full Full Edit Project None None None None None Full Edit Logic None None None None None Full Show Log Load Monitor None None None None None Full Miscellaneous None None None None None Full ExitfOpen None None None None None Full Remote Access None None None None None Full Edit Access Control None None None None None To give all Access Levels access to all features click on the All Yes button To give all Access Levels access to none of the features click on the All No button To give all Access Levels typical access to features click on the Default button The features controlled by the various options are NoAccess Partial Access _ Full Access Control C Bus No control of C Bus using N A Full Control Components or Load Monitor form Edit Schedules Can not Edit time day and GA e Start stop scheduler level only e Open Schedule Manager or Schedule Properties e Use Schedule In Built System IO Edit Irrigation Can not Edit zone times only Edit all e Open Irrigation Manager e Use Irrigation In Built System IO Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 214 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Option No Access Partial Access Full Access e Open Scene Manager or Scene Editor e Use Scene In Built System lO e Use Scene Special Functions Edit Special Days Can not open Special Day Man
172. HVAC Temperature In built System IO variable gives the current temperature for a zone or set of zones The temperature will be reported in C or F according to the Metric selection in the Project Details Form Set Level The HVAC Set Level system IO variable represents the current set point for the system Depending on the settings of the HVAC system this value could be a e Temperature e Comfort Level for evaporative cooling only e Fan Speed when using fan only operating type The variables related to this are e The HVAC Set Level provides the numeric value of the Set Level e The HVAC Set Level Text provides a text description of the HVAC Set Level including the temperature symbol C or F when required This is generally more useful than the HVAC Set Level e The HVAC Set Level Type system lO variable will tell you what is currently being controlled by the Set Level temperature Comfort Level or fan speed e The HVAC Set Level Type Name system IO variable provides a text description of what is being controlled by the Set Level This is useful for labelling Components which are being used to change the Set Level Operating Type The HVAC Operating Type In built System IO variable controls the zone operating type off heat cool auto fan only Certain Operating Types are not applicable for some Plant Equipment types For example with combined evaporative cooling other heating plant it is not recommended to set t
173. II CLIPSAL by Schneider Electric x ICED PROGRAMMING INTERFACE FOR C BUS EMBEDDED DEVICES PICED Programmer s Guide Version 4 13 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Copyright Notice Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia All rights reserved Trademarks Clipsal is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Australia Pty Ltd C Bus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Australia Pty Ltd PICED is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Australia Pty Ltd Home Management Series is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Australia Pty Ltd Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other logos and trademarks are the property of their respective owners Disclaimer Schneider Electric Australia reserves the right to change specifications or designs described in this manual without notice and without obligation Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Table of Contents Section Page 1 introd ctioh 9 aar ie aana a aara a Oaai aa amaa anaana aia eeetraecdeeeeeed 4 1 1 Product Range aaraa raan cenit ek ei aes asi a sees eee 4 1 2 Aboutthe PICED SoftWare aia aeaieie cess ce aed ee coca ei iah dipana anaa 4 1 3 Typographic Conventions sicciccccn nici diene hanes net 6 1 4 DETIMIMIONS niece tide raaneentetiiecstecdea ciel hg teauceee cheat davceusden eels here aeeniclonitarns 6 1 5 Installat ON aetna aranma aaa e raaa aA E ma na s
174. If you wish to have the text and or font style change to show the status of the associated C Bus group address click on the Font Status Indication check box and select the active and inactive text and fonts You can insert symbols into the text boxes as follows 1 Select the required font 2 Select the position where you want the symbol inserted 3 Right click on the text box and select the Insert Symbol item or click on the Insert Symbol button 4 The Insert Symbol form will appear 4 Click on the desired symbols they will appear at the top of the form 5 Click on OK For Clocks Level Indicators and Monitors a sample of the text is displayed The actual text Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 106 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide displayed will depend on the actual value of the data displayed Automatic Labelling For Button and Text components the text can be automatically generated based on what the component controls Click on the Use Control Name button to generate the active and inactive text based on e the C Bus Group Address Tag if the component controls C Bus or e the Scene name if the component controls a Scene or e the System IO variable name if the component controls System IO or e the Special Function name if the component controls a Special Function or e the Page name if the component has a page link 4 9 4 2 5 Image The Images tab of the Visible Properties tab allo
175. Image Library Frames Moon Phase bmp image frame 5 Select the Select Frame Using Level option 6 Select the status System IO Key Function 7 Select the Moon Phase In built System IO Variable Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 166 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 1 8 Security App In Built System IO C Bus Security Application can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Settable Security Alarm Sounding ls the alarm sounding i e is it Boolean No making a noise or raising some other sort of warning Security All Zones Are all security zones secure Boolean No Secure sealed Security Arm Failed Did the arm sequence fail Security Arm Ready Is the system ready to arm Security Armed Level Armed level Integer No 0 Disarmed 1 Fully Armed 2 Partially Armed Other Armed Custom Security Armed Level Description of the armed level Name Security Armed State Is the system armed Security Battery Is the battery charging Boolean Charging Security Entry Delay Is the entry delay in progress Boolean Security Exit Delay Is the exit delay in progress Security Fire Alarm Is the fire alarm sounding Boolean Sounding Security Gas Alarm Is the gas alarm sounding Boolean Sounding Security Line Cut Alarm ls the line cut alarm sounding Boolean Sounding Security Low Battery Is the battery charge low Security
176. Mains Failure ls there a mains power failure Boolean Boolean Security Normal Is the operation normal no Boolean Operation alarms or warnings Security Other Alarm Is there another alarm sounding Boolean Sounding Security Panic Is the system in the panic Boolean No state Security Password OK Was the last password Boolean No correct Security Password Status of the password entry _ Integer No Status 1 password succeeded 2 password failed 3 password disabled 4 password re enabled Security Password Description of the password String No Status Name status Security Tamper Is the system in the tamper Boolean No state Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 167 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Security Zone Isolated Is a security zone isolated Boolean No disabled Security Zone Name Name of a security zone PN Security Zone Secure Is a security zone secure Boolean No sealed Security Zone Status Security zone status Integer No 0 sealed 1 unsealed 2 open circuit 3 short circuit Security Zone Status Description of the zone status Name See also e Special Functions for various security related functions e The Security Application Template which shows how a security panel interface can be made 4 14 1 9 Telephony App In Built System IO C Bus Telephony Application can be controlled and or monitored via a
177. P port and update rate to their default values RSS Feeds The Wiser Home Control can display one or more RSS feeds The RSS Feed Manager allows you to select the RSS feeds you require The intention is for this to be used with news feeds RSS feeds which have large images may not be displayed properly RSS Feed Manager The RSS Feed Manager allows you to select the RSS Feeds required for use with a project To open the RSS Feed Manager click on the RSS Feed button on the Widget Manager The RSS Feed displays a list of the selected RSS Feeds To add a new RSS Feed click on the Add button enter the RSS Feed URL and click on OK To edit an RSS Feed select the RSS Feed click on the Edit button enter the new RSS Feed URL and click on OK To delete an RSS Feed select the RSS Feed click on the Delete button To change the position of an RSS Feed in the list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 234 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 23 4 24 4 25 1 Click on the RSS Feed and hold down the mouse button 2 Drag it to its new position 3 Release the mouse button Notes The RSS Feed URL will be for an XML file For example http feeds news com au public rss 2 0 news_mostpopular_topstories_403 xml These can usually be found on web sites by looking for the RSS icons ETIN Alternatively use an RSS Aggregator Reader to obtain the RSS Feeds then copy the link into the Add RSS F
178. PICED exe C Clipsal P ICED Projects MyHouse ctd will load the file MyHouse ctd at start up C Clipsal PICED exe C Clipsal PICED Projects MyHouse ctd cgate log save will load the file MyHouse ctd at start up and connect via C Gate with logging enabled See also Desktop Shortcut and the Use With Windows Vista topic in the FAQ Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 37 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Using the PICED Software Tool Bars All program functions are available via menu items Many of the commonly used functions are also available on the tool bars which are the panels with a series of buttons on them The tool bars are at the top of the screen by default but the tool bars can be configured to suit personal preference by e moving them onto any position on the screen click on the vertical bar on the left of the toolbar and drag it e docking them to another place on the screen drag a toolbar to the top bottom left or right of the screen e closing them by dragging them onto the screen then clicking on the close button In addition to manipulating individual tool bars they can be modified together e Hide close all tool bars by selecting View Toolbars Hide Toolbars e Show all hidden tool bars by selecting View Toolbars Show Toolbars e Restore the original position of all tool bars by selecting View Toolbars Restore Toolbars The Main Form toolbars are shown below
179. PICED software These show how various aspects of the software can be used as well as how to solve various common customer requirements The projects can be found in the PICED Projects Examples folder Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 333 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 10 Documenting the Installation Planning the Project The designer of the PICED project must capture the requirements of the user before commencing the actual creation of a PICED project Some useful pro forma forms are shown in this section The Story Board Pro Forma can be used for sketching out the pages required for the Project The Scene Pro Forma has two parts the triggering and the actions part Any scene can be triggered by a Group Address being set to a Level The actions section specifies what is to be turned on to what level and how fast To use the Scheduling Pro Forma fill in the area to be controlled and draw a line from the start to finish time required This list is used in the Scheduling editor accessed via the Project Edit Schedules menu item See the Tutorial Project for examples of how the Pro Formas are used Documenting the Results The Screen Images can be saved so that they can be put into your project documentation The overall project can be summarised with the Project Summary A User Manual can be generated automatically to provide to the user of the PICED Project Copyright 2014 Schneider Elect
180. Pulse Power Meters and Analogue Power Meters using the Measurement Application Pulse Power Meters The Pulse Power Meters tab displays all Pulse Power Meters in the project The columns of data presented are e Index this is the order in the list e Name the name of the power meter e Description the C Bus Group Address e Power the current power level e Tariff the Tariff which applies to this meter At the bottom of the tab there is a message showing how many of the possible Pulse Power Meters have been used It also shows the maximum expected pulse rate based on the data entered for the Pulse Power Meters Adding Power Meters To add a new Pulse Power Meter click on the Add button The Pulse Power Meter Editor will be displayed Enter the power meter details and click on OK Editing Power Meters To edit an existing Pulse Power Meter 1 Select the Pulse Power Meter in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Pulse Power Meter in the list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 255 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 The Pulse Power Meter Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the power meter details 4 Click on OK Deleting Power Meters To delete an existing Pulse Power Meter 1 Select the Pulse Power Meter in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Analogue Power Meters The Analogue Power Meters tab displays all Analogue Power Meters in the project The colum
181. Room Audio MRA system Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 27 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 10 1 2 3 10 2 The Media Transport Control Application is used to control devices which are supplying an audio source like tuners or MP3 streamers whereas the Audio Application is used for controlling where the audio signal is sent to and the volume etc Media Transport Control Application The Media Transport Control Application is used for transmitting media related information and for the control of media devices via C Bus Typical uses include e Displaying the currently playing music e Selecting music tracks e Play pause stop next control of music tracks Each set of Media equipment is associated with a Media Link Group number The Media Link Group is used in each of the Transport Control Application messages to identify which set of equipment is being controlled Each set of equipment a Media Link Group can have one or more Categories of music These include things like e Radio tuners e CD players e Music streaming For each category there is one or more Selection The usage of selections differs for each type of Category For a radio tuner the Selections might be the radio stations For a CD player the Selection might be a particular CD For each Selection there will be one or more tracks The usage of tracks differs for each type of source For a CD player the tracks
182. Special Day will never get used Solution Click on Yes to add the Special Day Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 418 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on No to not add the Special Day 11 4 266 Error 14901 Message There are no users who can edit the Access Control Cause There are no users who can edit the Access Control function of the PICED software This can cause all users to be permanently locked out of the software Solution Either e Add a user with the appropriate Access Level e Edit the features of an Access Level to make Access Control available 11 4 267 Confirm 14905 Message Do you want to monitor the selected load s Reason You have requested that selected load s have their Load Monitor status changed Action Click on Yes to monitor the selected load s Click on No to not monitor the selected load s Click on Cancel to not change anything 11 4 268 Confirm 14906 Message Are you Sure you want to import Scenes Reason You have requested the Scenes to be replaced with Imported Scenes Action Click on Yes to clear all Scenes and replace them with imported Scenes Click on No to cancel the import 11 4 269 Error 14907 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 419 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Error in imported file e Reason Cause The imported file contained an error Refer to the reason for more information
183. System IO e Date Time form activated by a Special Function When the date or time is changed a Schedule Catch Up may be executed The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the Date Time Application messages will be sent to The C Bus Date and Time Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF See also C Bus Unit Clocks in the FAQ HVAC Application The HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Application is used for monitoring and controlling Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning systems Typical uses include e Emulating a thermostat control panel e Monitoring the Air Conditioning system e Advanced control of an Air Conditioning system The Air Conditioning Application functions can be used via e HVAC Application Manager form select Project C Bus Applications HVAC Manager menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the HVAC Application messages will be sent to The C Bus HVAC Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the C Bus thermostat instructions for details of the operation of the Air Conditioning Application Note that C Touch Mark 1 units do not support the HVAC Application Audio The Media Transport Control Application and Audio Application are both used to control the C Bus Multi
184. T MENU Place Shape place a Shape Component Place C Bus Button place a C Bus Button Component Place Text Button place a Text Button Component Place Text place a Text Component Place Image place an Image Component Place Level Indicator place a Level Indicator Component Place Indicator place an Indicator Button Component Place Clock place a Clock Component Place Slider place a Slider Component Place Bar Graph place a Bar Graph Component Place Monitor place a Monitor Component Place Selector place a Selector Component Place HTML place an HIML Component Place Web Cam place a Web Cam Image Component Place Tool place a Tool Component OPTIONS MENU Connect to C Bus connect to C Bus to allow control of the network Run Scheduler start or stop the Scheduler Run Logic start or stop the Logic Engine Default Font set the Default font to be used when placing components Program Options set the options Enable Error Messages enable all Error Messages JPEG Quality sets the quality of the image for saving the screen image Low Small File lowest setting worst image Medium medium setting High good quality image with moderate file size Best Large File highest setting best image TOOLS MENU Reports Check Project check the project for errors Project Summary generate a Summary of the project Logic Report generate a report on the Logic
185. The Project is too large to be stored in the Wiser Home Control Solution 1 Reduce the size of the project by deleting Widgets Scenes Schedules Logic etc Solution 2 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 413 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Select a different skin which uses less memory 11 4 250 Error 14635 Message The skin does not match the project widgets Reason Select a different skin or edit the widget properties Cause There is a discrepancy between the Project Widget data and the data in the Wiser Home Control skin Solution 1 Select a different skin Solution 2 Proceed but be aware that some of the project Widgets may contain invalid data It is recommended that any Widgets of the type given in the error message be opened in the Widget Editor and checked 11 4 251 Warning 14636 Message A long location name may cause problems It is recommended that no more than 20 characters are used in the name Cause The location name may be too long to be displayed correctly on the Wiser Home Control user interface Solution Use Simulation Mode to see how it looks or just shorten the name 11 4 252 Confirmation 14637 Message Could not connect to unit Reason Select Change Port to change the port and try again Cause A connection could not be made to the C Touch PAC unit A reason for the failure is given Solution Click on Change Port to open the Prog
186. Tool Bar or Press CTRL F Copy Group Address To copy the controlled Group Address from one component to another 1 Select the component to be copied from 2 Select one or more other components to be copied to 3 Press CTRL G or select the Edit Copy Group Address menu item 4 The Group Address will be copied from the Primary Selected to the secondary selected components Note that if a component controls a System IO Variable this will be copied instead Component Order Components are drawn on the page in the order in which they are placed Sometime it is desirable to change the order so that a particular component will be drawn behind another one for example To change the order in which components are drawn e Select the component which is to change e Select the Order menu from the Edit menu and select e Move Back e Move to Back e Move Forward e Move to Front or e Select one of the order speed buttons on the tool bar Note that the component that is on top will be the one activated when clicked Any components which have no action when clicked will be ignored when determining which component was activated Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 141 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 6 8 Component Alignment Components are drawn on the page where they are placed Sometime it is desirable to move one or more components so that they line up with each other or with the page o
187. Unit menu item Solution Click on OK to continue with the update Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 392 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on Cancel to cancel the update 11 4 181 Error 14183 Message Please select a folder containing a valid skin Cause You have selected a folder which does not contain a valid media skin Solution Click on OK to continue Select another folder containing a valid skin 11 4 182 Warning 14184 Message Minor Major changes have been made to the project Do you want to see details Cause A new project type has been selected This has required some changes to the project as not all features are supported by all project types See Software Limits and Unit Differences for details Solution Click on Yes to see the details of the changes Click on No to continue 11 4 183 Warning 14185 Message Some Network Properties are invalid Click on Change to edit the Network properties Click on Default to set the default Network properties Click on Continue to ignore the error Cause Some of the C Bus Network properties appear to be invalid Solution Click on Change to open the C Bus Network Manager and change the Network properties to correct any errors Click on Default to set the default properties for all C Bus Networks Click on Continue to ignore this error Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 393 Home Management Series PICED Prog
188. Units on the network On some old C Bus input units the status indicator will go off as soon as this message is seen even though the level is still above O for some time For this reason many devices send a ramp to level 1 command followed by an off command when the level gets to 1 In this case the input unit status indicators will show the state correctly To select this behaviour select the Ramp Groups to Level 1 then send Off check box If this check box is not selected then ramping to level 0 will be done with a single ramp to level 0 command Nudge Ramp Scene When a Scene is Adjusted nudged up and down or ramped up and down it is usually desirable to just control the group addresses in the Scene which are already on To select this behaviour select the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes check box This will result in the following occurring e Nudge Up On Up and Dimmer will only increase the level of Group Addresses which are already on e Nudge Down Off Down and Dimmer will only decrease Group Addresses which are on and only to a minimum level of 1 To have all of the Groups in the Scenes controlled regardless of their level de select the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes check box Indicator Kill To use the C Bus Indicator Kill messages to show the status of Scenes select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status check box If this is not selected the Scene group levels will be used for showing the
189. Windows to use them Click on the Finish button The project is restored to the selected directory and the user is offered the option of opening up the newly restored project 4 7 8 3 Saving a Backup It can be a good idea to save a backup copy of your Project at various phases of development This will allow you to go back to a particular version of the Project in case you should change your mind about changes you have made to the Project To save a backup of the Project select the File Archive Save Backup menu item This will save a copy of the project with the date and time included in the file name which guarantees that each backup file will have a unique identifiable name To save all aspects of a project including images Export to an Archive instead 4 7 9 Printing This software does not support printing directly but it is quite simple to print out most things that may be of interest To print out any of the following details e Project Details installer location etc e Schedules e Scenes e Network Application and Group Address usage e Images used e Access Control details e Irrigation Control details create a Project Summary file it can be set to HTML or plain text in the Project Details which can then be printed directly To print screen shots save the Screen Image s Open the file s with an image manipulation program and print from there To print the log open the log file with a suitable program
190. a Matrix Switcher click on the Add button The Matrix Switcher Editor will be displayed Enter the Matrix Switcher details and click on OK Editing a Matrix Switcher To edit an existing Matrix Switcher 1 Select the Matrix Switcher in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Matrix Switcher in the list 2 The Matrix Switcher Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the Matrix Switcher details 4 Click on OK Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 248 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Deleting a Matrix Switcher To delete an existing Matrix Switcher 1 Select the Matrix Switcher in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Loading data from MARPA To read the MRA configuration data from a MARPA project file 1 Click on the Read from MARPA Project button 2 Select the MARPA project file caf 3 Click on OK 4 The following will be created automatically e Matrix Switcher e Audio Zones e Audio Sources Media Link Groups Zones Tab The Zones tab shows a list of the audio Zones The columns of data are e Matrix Switcher e Zone Name e Zone Number this is their Audio Zone number Adding a Zone To add a Zone click on the Add button The Audio Zone Editor will be displayed Enter the Zone details and click on OK Editing a Zone To edit an existing Zone 1 Select the Zone in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Zone in the list 2 The Aud
191. a Special Function Notes If you are using Master Units make sure that if Scenes Schedules Irrigation or Logic is edited it is done on the Master Unit On Colour C Touch the Master Unit can be selected using the Project Edit Details Special Function On Black and White C Touch the Master Unit can be selected by selecting Diagnostics Unit Data On PAG the Master Unit can not be changed from the unit but Mastering is not generally used with the PAC Media Control The PICED software and Colour C Touch comes with 1 Media Control Client which is a remote control for a Media Server 2 Two Media Servers which can be controlled via the Media Control Client e Windows Media Player version 10 or later plug in e iPod Control Server operates with an iPort docking station Installing the Media Player Plug in To install the plug in for Windows Media Player version 10 on your computer e Run Windows Media Player Click the menu Tools Plug ins Options menu item Click the Add button Locate the WMPCTouchControl dll file on your PC s hard disk this will be in the folder where the software is installed which is c Clipsal PICED by default Click the Background category Check the box next to Colour C Touch Control Click OK Connecting the iPod The iPod needs to be plugged into an iPort docking station The iPort docking station is connected to a serial port on the computer or Colour C Touch which is to hav
192. a good idea to get any changes to the Project first If you have a Colour C Touch Project open and it has been transferred to a Colour C Touch unit you can transfer changes made by a user back to the project in your computer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 293 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 1 Connect the computer to the Colour C Touch unit 2 Click on the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item 3 The Transfer Utility will be displayed Options for connecting to the Colour C Touch unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 4 A list of Colour C Touch units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Colour C Touch unit from the list e Enter a folder for the project if you want it saved elsewhere this is only a temporary file Click on Start Note that PICED will Save a Back up of the Project in case you need to revert to it later Firmware Update To update the Colour C Touch firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a Colour C Touch Project to the Unit At step 10 make sure you select the new Firmware file You can not transfer a project with the firmware update this must be done afterwards Colour C Touch Screen Size The Colour C Touch unit has a screen size of 640 pixels wide x 480 pixels high Installed Fonts Colour C Touch includes the following fonts install
193. a re nn vn Teme OO Ono eaaa Eea ne Dente a rene Mn er Tt 40 4 3 Keyboard SMOMCUtS sriid nehre tae niaan heen atedidene deans ear eee 41 4 4 Menu MOINS rrara raae aar aaa cteeenetepetecvasinanccedlbacetscatente annA Annaa Rani nAaR Nnnna Kanana in aiian 42 4 5 Gol UT a nY aeaa a E E E E T 47 4 6 Moving hems in Lists s cies cesctcciccscccasccccesseteanesencee ceeseceesepedencucesdee cess naaie dai easi areais 47 4 7 Creating and Saving Project cceiccescneersneceseneenseenseesnecenceecttestaeesceeesteesneren 48 4 8 Pages sehen teenie hei ei ee aes 90 4 9 CUTIE INES nae see eee ieee sei 93 4 10 TheM S OO eaman Cites anana ectdace tease ence conde nnetbterttted eee eh tetneteeeaes 144 4 11 SUN PASS aaeeea aera aeaea Er aae a aaa a aea cee atecetecgnentenn se atte eenmeceeneeneceine 146 4 12 PRGTIIGS a E E E E edavenhouety aie sues 147 4 13 Special FUNCONS a2 ans aunida eaeee nana nna ha aha 151 4 14 System lO Variable S a Aara aat ied eeear nadia aa pana eae 154 4 15 SCENES f ici tAnen ene eee ere eee re ee ace 183 4 16 Schedules sateen Sst ed iertarea anara erae Maana awa Aaaa KEA Ea aaaea haaa idarra staatie 198 4 17 Access COM resets a ces tectteceed ee ceed tec en ct asec nide anette cee tee narina AE anhaa i i danaa E aaaea h iE 212 4 18 Special DAYS are ose cc esse chs canes cece nets ewadhacanneedueecicesnsmenececgnecedsaevaa aa Pa Ae ten csnsexecsdeneecce 218 4 19 IPRIGQGUION 3 coin ete eee eee a ae a eee ete ee et AE 222 4
194. abcdefgh 1234567890 1 8 Select Other Fonts Cancel Help To change to another font which is in the list just click on the desired font If you wish to use a different font click on the Select Other Fonts button and select the required font The default font can be set so that all components which are placed will use this font To set the default font select the Options Default Font menu item or use the button on the tool bar If you are using Theme Components the font for the Theme Component will be used not the default font NOTES The font selection form is used to minimise the number of different fonts which are used in a project for several reasons e Each font used requires additional memory in the Black and White C Touch unit The amount of memory used by fonts can be seen with the Resources Report e Projects look much better with a minimal number of different fonts used consistency makes it easier to understand e For Colour C Touch it is easiest to use the Installed Fonts Using fonts which lean over such as italics can cause problems when transferred to the Black and White C Touch units You need to select fonts where the characters do not overlap each other See also Colour Conversion See also Good Design Practices Colours The colour of various things can be set to almost any colour desired e Page background colour e Component background and border e Slider thumb slot and
195. age is limited to the size of the screen Web Cam Images can be stretched in the PICED software but this will add to the processor load It is recommended that web cam images be displayed at their normal size In a Web Cam Image Component the relevant URL is the one which retrieves a single JPEG image from the camera This will be different for every type of camera The Web Cam Wizard can be used to automatically generate the required URL for selected web cameras See also FAQ topic Using Web Cams Web Cam URL and Image Server Graph A Graph Component is used to show data graphically over a period of time The properties of a Graph Component are e Border and background e Header and X axis label text e Header and other text font e Value to display e Alpha Blending e Graph Properties Examples Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 98 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide System IO Level To give the appearance of two lots of data plotted on the same graph the simplest method is to place a graph on top of another one The top one needs to be the same size and needs to have a transparent background so that the bottom graph will be visible 4 9 3 13 Calendar A Calendar Component is used to show a calendar for a selected month usually the current month The properties of a Graph Component are e Border and background e Header and other text font e Alpha Blending e Calendar Prope
196. ager Add delete Special Days Edit all only Edit System IO Can not Edit values only e Open User System IO Manager e Use Components to change User System IO values Edit Project No editing of pages components or When Project details is Edit all Project details opened from a Special Function many aspects can not be set Edit logic Can not open Logic Editor Edit all Show Log Load Can not show various forms N A Full Control Monitor e Lo e Load Monitor e Error Manager e HVAC Manager e C Bus Network Manager e Measurement Manager Miscellaneous Can not N A Full Control e Create Desktop Shortcut e Convert Files e Create Logic Report Exit Open Can not N A Full Control e Close PICED e Open a Project e Change Simulation Mode Edit Access Can not Edit users only Control e Change File Encryption e Open Access Control Manager Options Tab This is only available for Colour C Touch projects The options for displaying disabled components and features menu items and tool bar buttons are e Show display them as normal e Hide hide disabled Components and features e Show as Disabled show disabled Components with greyed out text Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 215 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 17 2 4 17 3 Access Levels Users Access Features Options Disabled Components and Features C Show C Show as Disabled Notes At least one user must always have acc
197. alia Page 228 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide already have a Schedule controlling the Irrigation Master Enable Group the Create Rain Delay Schedule button will be disabled Click the Finish button when complete See also Software Limits Clock showing the Irrigation Timer and Rain Delay tool 4 20 Widgets A Widget is a graphical component displayed on the Wiser Home Control which is used to control and or display the state of something Widgets are created using the Widget Manager The Wiser Home Control displays the widgets using the skin selected in the Project Details form The skin defines the appearance of the background and the Widgets as well as the way the user interface operates The Wiser Home Control automatically arranges the Widgets onto pages according to their Location and or Function Group Locations are defined by the user and are used to arrange Widgets according to their physical location in a site Typical Locations in a Home might include e Lounge e Dining e Bedrooms e Outside Function Groups are defined by the user and are used to arrange Widgets according to their usage Typical Function Groups in a Home might include e Lighting e Security e Climate Control e Media Audio Video The exact details of the function of each Widget depend on the selected skin and the particular Widget Widgets are grouped by Service type to make them easier to find and use The Services
198. ame general purpose pages Page 1 Page 2 and so on e Name other pages such as tools something meaningful not Page x so that their purpose is clear To edit the Theme Page of the currently displayed page either 1 Use the Page Show Theme Page menu item 2 Use Ctrl Shift P 3 Hold Alt key while double clicking on the page Using Themes Once a Theme Page has been selected for a Project Page you will see the Theme Page in the background You can not Select or edit the Theme Page components without Selecting the Theme Page first You can Activate the Theme Page components however Theme Pages can be based on other Theme Pages In this way a hierarchy of Theme Pages can be created where changing the properties of the parent Theme Page will affect the appearance of the child Theme Pages and any Project Pages based on either the parent or child Themes can be loaded as Templates To get a better understanding of Themes create a New Project using one of the supplied Theme Templates and e add some new Pages and set the Theme Page e add some components to the new Pages e change the Theme Pages and observe what happens to the new Pages Sub Pages Sub Pages are Pages which can be re used like Theme Pages in multiple places in a Project They are generally smaller than a normal page and can be displayed within a Sub Page Frame ona page They can also be used for pop out menus and other dynamic effects Copyright
199. ame of the selected month e Calendar Year the selected year Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 165 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To change the displayed month of a calendar use Components to nudge up and down the Calendar Month Offset by 1 To change the year nudge by 12 To allow the month for a calendar to be adjusted 1 Place a Calendar Component and select the Selected Month plus offset option 2 Place Components to decrement and increment the Calendar Month Offset In built System IO variable see Tool Select 3 Place a Component to display the Calendar Month Name In built System IO variable Calendar Calendar Month Offset Month Name See also e Special Functions for editing Date Time e Date and Time editing Templates which show how the date and time can be changed Moon Phase In built System IO variables to provide details of the phase of the moon are listed below Variable Name Moon Phase Current phase of the moon Integer No Value is 0 to 7 0 New Moon Moon Phase Day Current day of the moon s 29 53 No day cycle New Moon is day 1 Moon Phase Name Name of the current phase of String No the moon The Moon Phase In built System IO Variable can be used with an Image Frame to display the phase of the moon 1 Place a Button Component 2 Remove the background border and text 3 Click the custom image button 4 Click Select Active Image and select the PICED
200. ammer s Guide Solution Make the changes recommended by the error message 11 4 196 Error 14199 Message Can not add any more E Mail Accounts Maximum is value Cause There is a limit to the number of E Mail Accounts which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of E Mail Accounts 11 4 197 Error 14200 Message The file filename already exists Cause Files are being extracted from an archive The listed file already exists Solution Click Overwrite to overwrite just this file Click Overwrite All to overwrite this and any other files which already exist Click Skip to skip this file and leave the existing file in place Click Skip All to skip this and all other existing files 11 4 198 Error 14201 Message Widget needs a Location and or a Function Group otherwise it will not be seen Cause Widgets are displayed in the Wiser Home Control according to their Location and their Function Group If neither are selected the widget will not be displayed at all Solution Select a Location and or a Function Group for the Widget Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 398 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 199 Error 14202 Message Please select item Cause An item has not been selected The form can not be closed unless this item is selected Solution Select the requested item 11 4 200 Information 14203 Message Type of file has been created Fi
201. ample copy C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser Go Green 4 3 to C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser MySkin 2 Edit the bkgd jpg file in the new folder 3 The next time PICED is run you will see the new skin in the Skin selection list 4 If you want to you can also make the skin preview work e Do a screen grab of Wiser displaying a project with your new background e Shrink the image to 160 x 120 pixels e Save as preview jpg in the new folder If you need to customise the language in the skin you can edit the skin definition file The easiest way is as follows 1 Copy one of the skins to new folder For example copy C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser Go Green 4 3 to C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser MySkin Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 308 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 Open the skin_definition xml file in the new folder using a program like Notepad 3 Find the text for the language you are using and change as required 4 If you want to add a new language you will need to make a copy of each section of the file which contains language related content they all start with lt language and e Enter the name of the language in the language name tag and use a unique shortcode e Use a new language id number wherever it is used e Change the text to suit 6 8 Unit Differences The PICED software is used for configuring the following devices e C Touch Touchscreen e Colour C Touch Touchscreen e Pa
202. an one unit on a network containing the same Scenes Schedules Irrigation Control or Logic you may get duplicate C Bus messages sent For example if you had three touch screens containing the same scene with the same trigger then if that trigger was set by a user pressing a button on a wall switch then three lots of the Scene would be sent out with unpredictable results There are two solutions to this problem 1 Create different projects for the different units with only one of them containing the Scenes Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 329 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 10 Schedules Irrigation Control and Logic 2 Use the same project for each unit but only select the Master Unit option in one unit The unit which is the Master Unit will operate normally The other units the slave units will operate a little differently 1 If the user presses a button which controls a C Bus group or directly executes a scene with no trigger then the C Bus commands will be sent 2 Button presses which directly set a Scene which has a trigger or indirectly set a scene via a trigger will send out the trigger but not trigger the scene 3 Scenes can not be externally triggered 4 Schedules can not set groups or scenes but will still execute Special Functions and Page Links 5 Logic can not set groups or scenes 6 Irrigation can t set groups individual zones can still be manually run via
203. antaneous change rather than ramping to the Level Ramping to the Action Selector Level may still cause the event to be triggered but it will happen when the message is sent NOT at the end of the ramp In the Enable Control Application the Levels are called values In Enable Control setting an Enable Group to a particular value level can be used to enable a Schedule or to enable the Irrigation controller In the Trigger and Enable Control Applications C Bus Tags should be used to reference the Action Selectors and Values ie Levels Do not set the Action Selectors and Values in Percent because the value you are trying to set may be in between two percentage levels in fact in these Applications the concept of percent does not make sense To use a Network Variable value Level as a trigger or to enable something it is essential that the C Bus message that set the value must reach the Local Network If a switch on a remote network is used to set a value then there will need to be a C Bus bridge to get the message onto the Local Network Note that it is also necessary to ensure that the Tag for the value is created on both the Local Network and on the remote network Notes The level of the Group Address associated with a Component controls the Visible Properties of the component The PICED software has a Convert Levels form to allow you to convert between percent level and Hexadecimal values See also Load Monitor Perc
204. ap Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 222 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The zone delay is the delay between zones which may be needed to give the valves time to close properly The Zone Overlap is when the next zone starts before the previous one has completed This can be used to reduce water hammer Zone Duration This is how long a zone is to be run for a particular program Different zones will require different durations The duration may vary from Program to Program as well Running a Program When an irrigation program is started triggered it runs each zone in order for the selected duration If a particular zone has zero duration for that program it will be skipped The selected zone delay overlap is applied between each zone Some of the above terms are illustrated in the diagrams below In these examples each which show a single Irrigation Program there is a Master Load and three Irrigation Zones being switched on and off one after the other In the first example there is a delay between the zones MASTER LOAD ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE DURATION MASTER LOAD ZONE MASTER LOAD DELAY DELAY DELAY In the second example the zones overlap and are on at the same time briefly MASTER LOAD ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE OVERLAP The Irrigation Controller allows the set up of Irrigation Programs and Zones to perform the tasks required for irrigation of g
205. arance Page Links Special Functions Remote Control C Bus Properties System IO Properties Status Indication Options It is possible to have the Component Properties editor appear automatically when a Component is placed by selecting the option in the Program Options See also Good Design Practices General Properties The General tab of the Component Properties form allows you to select the following details for a component e An optional name This is used in reports and for logic e The visible property see below e Notes to record any relevant information about the Component The visible property of a component is normally selected It can be de selected to make the component invisible This is useful during project development if a component is not complete It can also be used in Logic to control the appearance of components on a Page The Component visibility can also vary by Profile Visible Properties To change the visible properties physical appearance of a particular Component open the Component Properties form then select the Visible Properties tab The options on the Visible Properties tab depend upon the type of component and may include e Position e Border e Background e Text e Image e Clocks F Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 100 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 2 1 4 9 4 2 2 Position The Position tab of the Visible Properties tab
206. ardens and lawns Rain Delay Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 223 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide When it rains you may want to disable the Irrigation Controller for a number of days to avoid wasting water A rain delay is a Schedule which is used to enable the Irrigation Control using the Enable Group at some time in the future To use the Rain Delay feature add a component with the Rain Delay Special Function to a page When the Component is clicked the Irrigation Controller will be disabled by setting the Master Enable group to off and a form will be opened to allow you to enter the delay until the Rain Delay Schedule will re enable the Irrigation Controller Manual Control It is possible to run a single Irrigation Zone for a pre determined amount of time using a Special Function The time for the zone to run is set in the Irrigation Manager Using Irrigation Control The steps for using Irrigation Control are Select a Master Enable group if required Select zone delay overlap Select any Master Loads which have to be controlled Select the Irrigation Zones which have to be controlled Enter the Irrigation Programs required Enter the time for each Zone in each Program Enter Schedules to trigger the Irrigation Programs Add any Components to pages for e manual control of Irrigation Zones e manual triggering of Irrigation Programs e enabling the Irrigation Control via the Master Enab
207. are e C Bus e Lighting e Scenes Climate Security Media Other e Non C Bus e Surveillance e Logic e Other The Services are fixed whereas you can use Function Groups in any way you wish For example the Security Function Group may hawe a security keypad security service some security lighting Lighting service and some security cameras surveillance service Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 229 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 20 1 Widget Manager To open the Widget Manager either click on the Project Widget Manager menu item or click on the Widget Manager button on the tool bar The Widget Manager allows you to create Locations Function Groups and Widgets There is a page for each of these Locations Locations can be managed as follows To add a new Location click on the Add button Enter the name and click on OK To edit a Location name select the Location and click on the Edit button Enter the new name and click on OK To delete a Location select the Location and click on the Delete button To change the order of a Location in the list select the Location and click the Up and Down buttons or just drag it to the new position To save the Locations as defaults for use on a future project click on the Save Default button To use default Locations created previously click on the Load Default button Function Groups Function Groups can be managed as follows
208. ast Start 313 Log 313 logging 319 Network States 236 NOOP _ 538 63 70 Options 52 53 63 70 313 Page 422 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide C Gate 5 52 312 Ports 313 Reconciliation Process 312 Reconnect 314 Selection 52 Sync Time 313 Test 53 63 70 Tree 53 63 70 Change Colours 269 Changing image colours 265 Changing image sizes 266 Changing images 266 Characters Symbols 129 Check Project 324 City 53 63 70 Click 120 Clock Adjustment 198 Clock change 272 Clock Components 96 Clocks 94 111 Cloning units 311 Closed State 236 CO2 255 Colour 40 283 add by hex colourcode 270 colourcode 270 custom 270 Gradient 91 Hex colourcode 270 pick 270 select 270 Translucency 53 63 70 Transparency 53 63 70 Colourcode 270 Colour C Touch 290 Firmware Update 294 Fonts 294 Refresh Project 293 Selecting Profile 291 Slow Operation 294 Transfer Project 293 Transfer Project to Unit 291 Colours 265 changing 130 269 Copying 130 Custom 130 Selection 130 Columns 47 Comfort Level 171 243 Command Line Parameters 36 Communication Group 242 243 Components 93 Actions 93 Activating 32 93 Activating via C Bus 127 Adding 132 Alignment 142 Alpha Blending 114 applying theme style 145 Auto Create 267 automatic labelling 106 Background 104 Bar 110 Border 101 Button 95 Calendar 99 119 C Bus Properties 122 Clock 96 Clocks 111 Copying 140 Deleting 140 De select
209. at may result from incorrect Logic Engine programming Schneider Electric Australia recommend that only Schneider Electric Australia or Approved Installers with the appropriate level of training and accreditation use this part of Schedule Plus Manufacturer s warranties may be void if this is not complied with Please contact your C Bus specialists for further details Please click on the I Accept button if you understand the above and wish to use the Logic Engine Cause You are opening the Logic Engine for the first time Logic needs to be used with caution and should only be used by trained installers Solution Click on the I Accept button to accept the conditions of use and open the Logic Engine otherwise click on I Don t Accept Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 373 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 116 Warning 14118 Message Logic can not be edited while the Logic Engine is running Cause It is not possible to edit the Logic code while the Logic Engine is running Solution Stop the Logic from running then make changes 11 4 117 Warning 14119 Message Please add a comment Cause A comment has not been entered Solution Enter a descriptive comment 11 4 118 Error 14120 Message Can not add any more Modules Maximum is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of Modules which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Modules used or attempt to
210. at some alignment options are not available with Grouped Components Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 142 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 6 9 4 9 6 10 4 9 7 4 9 8 Lock Components The Lock Components items in the Page menu can be used to prevent the Components on the Pages from being moved or re sized If they are locked they can still be selected and edited Use Page Lock Components all Pages to lock the components on all pages Use Page Lock Components this Page to lock just the components on the current page You can also control this by editing the Page Properties Grouping Components Component Groups are used to manipulate Select Copy Paste Delete or Move a group of Components as if they were a single Component When a Component in a Component Group is selected all Components in its Component Group will also be selected Once the Components are selected all other actions copy paste delete move are the same as normal Components can be grouped together to give a Component Group as follows e Select the Components to be in the Group e Select the Edit Group Components menu item Components in a Component Group can be removed from the Component Group as follows e Select the Components to be removed from their Component Group e Select the Edit Un Group Components menu item To view the numbers of the Component Groups select the View Component Labels
211. ate as well as status messages related to C Gate are all prefixed by Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 322 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide C Gate in the log There are dozens of C Gate messages so only a few of the most common are listed here For further details of specific C Gate messages refer to the C Gate documentation When C Gate is first connected a series of commands are issued to set various C Gate parameters These are generally of no interest to the user All commands to C Gate are prefixed by an identifier number in square brackets This identifier is used by C Gate for the reply messages to enable you to match replies with the original message For example one of the first messages sent to C Gate is to determine the number of networks in the project An example of this command and the reply is shown below 04 08 2006 12 04 33 PM C Gate_ Tx 15 show cbus networks 04 08 2006 12 04 33 PM C Gate Rx 15 300 home cbus networks 254 253 252 In the above case you can see that command number 15 requested a list of networks and the reply was that there are three networks numbered 254 253 and 252 The most common C Gate message of interest is setting C Bus group address levels For example switching on Group Address 32 will result in the following 04 08 2006 12 14 09 PM C Gate Tx 22 on 254 56 32 04 08 2006 12 14 09 PM C Gate Rx 22 200 OK home 254 56 32 04
212. ate of the Group Address On Off The Show Groups item on the tool bar allows you to select whether to display all of the Groups on the tree It is faster to not have them displayed particularly when there are a lot of Schedules SCHEDULES BY DATE Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 199 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To view all Schedules for a particular date select the Date node Only the Schedules for the current date will be displayed To change the date click the lt or gt buttons or drop down the calendar as shown below The One Off Copy button can be used to Create One Off Schedules Bl a cy July 2005 El an 1 to 10d n 1 tosoqMon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun n 2 to 50 6 7 an2to0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 g1to1009 18 19 20 21 SCHEDULE COLLECTIONS The Schedules are automatically arranged into Schedule Collections which are groups of related Schedules All of the Schedules in a Schedule Collection will be executed under the same conditions ie they are executed on the same day s and have the same enabling group The enabling conditions under which the Schedule is executed are shown at the bottom of the Schedule Manager form Selecting a Schedule Collection from the Schedule Tree will display only the Schedules in that Schedule Collection Selecting All Schedules will display all Schedules If you double click on a Schedule Collection in the list it will open the Sched
213. ate the power level not the energy used The faster the pulses occur the higher the power level is To use these pulse meters with PICED Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 254 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 Add pulse power meters using the Power Meter Manager 2 The measured power can be displayed using Power Meter In built System IO The C Bus Auxiliary Input Unit or C Bus Bus Coupler needs to be programmed so that there is one C Bus message per power meter pulse The recommended set up is to either toggle the C Bus group for each pulse or to send an On command The key function for these are Short Press Toggle or Recall 1 Short Release Long Press ee eee Long Release pole k 4 25 12 2 Analogue Power Meters The Power Meter Manager can keep track of analogue power meters These are any meters which broadcast their power level using the Measurement Application The only requirements are 1 The Measurement Application Channel data must be in Watts 2 The Measuring Power option must be selected for the channel 4 25 12 3 Power Meter Manager The Power Meter Manager can be used to manage the Power Meters to be used in the Project To open the Power Meter Manager either e select the Project Power Meter Manager menu item or e click on a component with the Power Meter Manager Show Special Function The Power Meter Manager form has two tabs to enable the management of
214. ation is running System IO Time this displays the value of the associated System IO variable e Logic Timer Time this displays the time of the selected Logic Timer If displaying the current time date you can select e whether seconds are displayed e whether 24 hour format is used or AM PM If displaying the day of the week you can select whether the full or abbreviated day name is used If displaying the date you can select Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 111 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 2 8 4 9 4 2 9 e Date order e DD MM YY Day Month Year e MM DD YY Month Day Year e YY MM DD Year Month Day e 2or 4 digit year e Month number or name e Whether the separator is used A sample of the time date is displayed at the bottom in the format selected Monitor The Monitor tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of a Monitor Component Text Monitor Alpha Blend Monitor Corridor Light level Add Edit KGGUrAGY 0 decimal places You must select e the Monitor to be displayed e the data accuracy precision for Temperature and C Bus Voltage only To add or edit a Monitor click on the Add Edit button to open the Monitor Manager Value The Value tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of a Level Indicator or Graph Component Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric
215. atitude a4 5507 C North O Soth Map Longitude fiss3646 00 C West East Verify Sunrise and Sunset Time Zone GMT 09 30 Change Time Zone Date 02 02 2011 v Calculate Sunrise Sunset To find the Longitude and Latitude of cities look in an Atlas or one of the many Internet sites such as http www heavens above com countries asp To verify that the data entered is correct click on the Calculate Sunrise Sunset button and confirm that the data provided is correct The sunrise and sunset times can usually be found in newspapers or on the Internet To use this location automatically each time a project is created click on the Save as Default button To allow the location longitude and latitude to be viewed and selected using a map click on the Map button to open the Location Selection form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 78 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 7 Daylight Savings Tab The Daylight Savings tab of the Options page allows you to enter various parameters related to your location including e The time zone e The start date and time of Daylight Savings e The finish date and time of Daylight Savings e The amount of time adjustment during Daylight Savings The Daylight Savings settings are used for the calculation of sunrise and sunset times GMT 09 30 v Reset to Local Time Zone Daylight Savings Select Other Time Zone No daylight saving
216. ault diagnosis 332 C Touch 275 284 290 332 C Touch Spectrum 288 Design Guidance 333 FAQ 332 Manuals 332 PAC 295 332 Tips 332 Web Site 333 What s New 332 Wiser Home Control 300 304 Hex colour code 270 Hexadecimal 30 266 Holidays 218 Home Gateway RSS Feeds 234 HTML 97 115 Files 86 HVAC Application 236 241 242 In built System IO 171 Item 245 logging 319 Manager 242 Schedules 243 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 Tools 133 Zone 242 245 Zone Group 242 243 HVAC Application 27 396 Hyperlinks 143 Image Server 274 Images 94 107 281 282 283 287 289 Animated 107 Animation 273 Centred 91 change 266 changing 265 changing sizes 266 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide colour change 265 Components 94 Create Animation 273 Editor 270 internet 98 missing 48 refresh 266 Re Scale 266 Stretched 91 Tiled 91 Transparent 107 web cam 98 Import Page 48 Importing 49 Archive 88 In built System IO 155 Access Control 163 Alarm 183 Audio App 177 C Bus Connection State 183 C Bus Network State 183 Date and Time 164 E Mail 180 Energy 181 Error App 169 Example 157 HVAC App 171 Irrigation 163 Labelling 179 Load Monitor 180 Logic 164 Master Unit 183 Measurement App 170 Metric Units 183 Monitors 183 Other 183 Page Name 183 Power Meter 181 Scenes 155 Schedules 159 Security App 167 Special Day 183 System 183 Tariff 181 Telephony
217. ave components too close together the shadow of one component may be on top of another component e Shadows can not be used with the Black and White C Touch Background The background of a Component is the style used to paint the component inside the border Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 104 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The Background tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to enter the appearance of the background of the component The following properties can be set e Background Colour e Background Style none solid stripes etc Position Border Background Text Images Alpha Blend IV Background Status Indication Colour Blending Active Inactive Background Colour gt hz Background Colour Background Style Solid lt Background Style Solid M Copy Colours To Border The background style may be set to None this will make it transparent Solid i e a plain colour Light Shaded Medium Shaded Dark Shaded Back Diagonal Forward Diagonal Cross Diagonal Cross Horizontal Vertical Note that if the shading is set to Light Medium or Dark Shaded the colour can only be black For the other shading options it can be any colour on a transparent background The possible background styles are shown below A Y N Op If you wish to have the background style or colour change to show the status of the Co
218. be created to display a weather forecast by clicking on the Weather Wizard button and selecting the required properties Refresh Rate The refresh rate can be set if the page needs to be refreshed on a regular basis This is useful for web pages such as weather forecasts which change on a regular basis Do not set this to be more often than is absolutely necessary as it consumes Internet bandwidth and processor power For Web Cams the refresh rate can be as little as 0 1 second 10 frames per second This does not apply if you are displaying a web cam using an HTML component In this case the refresh rate is controlled by the settings of the web cam Aspect Ratio If you are editing a Web Cam component there will be an option to Keep Aspect Ratio If this option is selected when you re size the component the original aspect ratio the ratio of the width to height will be maintained preventing the image from looking distorted See also Image Server and FAQ topics Problems with displaying HTML and Using Web Cams Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 116 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 2 12 Graph The Graph tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of a Graph Component Position Border Background Text Value Alpha Blend Graph Options Graph Type Line nd Points 24 Plot Current Yalue ki Horizontal Axis Point Interval Tick Grid Spacing
219. be read using POP3 and sent using SMTP Only unencrypted accounts can be used within PICED Wiser 2 can send and receive emails using secure communications on SMTP TLS port 587 and POPS port 995 To implement secure email in a Wiser 2 project simply set the account SMTP port to 587 and the POPS port to 995 Note Wiser 2 does is not able to send email using secure Yahoo or secure Hotmail accounts E Mail Manager To open the E Mail Manager either e click on the Project E Mail Manager menu item or e click on the E Mail Manager button on the tool bar e click on a Component with the E Mail Manager Special Function E Mail Accounts can be managed as follows e To add a new E Mail Account click on the Add button The E Mail Editor will be shown Enter the E Mail Account details and click on OK e To edit an E Mail Account select the E Mail Account and click on the Edit button The E Mail Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 233 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 21 2 4 22 4 22 1 Editor will be shown Enter the new details and click on OK To delete a E Mail Account select the E Mail Account and click on the Delete button To change the order of an E Mail Account in the list select the E Mail Account and click the Up and Down buttons or just drag it to the new position e To show the current data from an E Mail Account click on the Show Account Status button The list of E Mail Ac
220. by default If you do not want to include this file de select Include Power Failure Recovery File Select the C Bus Project file usually in the C Clipsal C Gate2 Tag directory if the displayed one is incorrect Fonts If you use a non standard font i e One which does not come with Windows it would be advisable to save a copy of the font with the project The font files which have either a ttf or fon extension reside in the Windows Fonts directory or the Winnt40 Fonts on some versions of Windows Normally these fonts would be those which have been downloaded specially for use in the project For example if you use a non standard font called My Font in your project and your project is stored in C Clipsal PICED Projects MyProject PICED will copy the font file for example C Windows Fonts MyFont ttf to the project fonts folder C Clipsal PICED Projects MyProject Fonts for inclusion in the archive Once all the files have been specified the archive file is named The extension for PICED software archive files is cta Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 87 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide When complete click on the Finish button Note that the archive file created by the Export to Archive process can not be transferred to a Colour C Touch as the format is slightly different to that used by the Colour C Touch See also Importing from an Archive 4 7 8 2 Importing from an Archive
221. by using an offset of 1 the next one can be shown and controlled and so forth See n built System IO Example for details of this concept See also e Special Functions for editing Irrigation and Rain Delay e The Irrigation editing Template which shows how irrigation editing can be done Access Control In Built System IO Access Control can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 163 Home Management Series 4 14 1 6 4 14 1 7 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Access Level The current Access Level Integer No number Access Level Name The current Access Level name user Access Logged In Is a user logged in Access Password Currently entered password String converted to See also e Special Functions for editing Access Control e The Access Control Template which shows how access control can be used Logic In Built System IO Logic can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name pe pmet Logic Running Is logic running Boolean Logic Module Enabled Is a particular logic Module Boolean enabled Logic Timer Time The time for a selected logic n timer See also Special Functions for editing Logic and enabling disabling Modules Date and Time In Built System IO Date Time can be control
222. cation click on the Application drop down list Changing the Application will cause the Group Address and Level information to be updated Applications can only be added and edited using the C Bus ToolKit software Group Address To select the desired Group click on the Group drop down list Changing the Group will cause the Level information to be updated See also Add an application group Edit an application group Add a lighting group Edit a lighting group Add enable application group Edit enable application group Level To select the desired Level click on the Level drop down list The contents of the list level percent and or level tag will depend on the selected Application For the Lighting Application you will see OFF 0 and ON 100 at the top followed by a list of all levels in percent If any level tags have been defined they will be listed too If you have selected an application on which percentage is meaningless such as the trigger control application then the list will contain a list of levels 0 to 255 with any level tags OFF All OFF Scene z DFF All Off Scene a 0 All OFF Scene 1 Scene 1 2 Scene 2 If you wish to change what is shown in the list right click on the combo box and select the desired option v Show Level Show Percent v Show Tag To add a new Level tag click on the Add button To edit the currently selected Level tag click on the Edit button See also
223. ching an individual zone on and off When a zone is switched on it takes on the Operating Type Mode and Set Level of the other zones To control the state of the whole HVAC system use the HVAC Zone Group State in built system IO variable Status Flags The status of the HVAC system is indicated by various In built System IO variables including e Plant Busy is the plant busy usually changing from one operating type to another e Plant Cooling is the plant cooling e Plant Fan is the plant fan running e Plant Heating is the plant heating e Zone Damper is air being delivered to the zone These are used purely to indicate what is happening within the HVAC system They can not be controlled by the user The Zone Damper variable should only be used with a single zone The others are usually associated with all of the zones in the HVAC system HVAC Error The HVAC Error In Built System IO variables are used to show if there is an error in the system If the HVAC Error In Built System IO variables are associated with more than one zone they will show if any of the zones have an error condition If there is more than one error in the system then the error condition for the first zone in error will be reported Sensor Status The HVAC Sensor Status In Built System IO variables are used to show if there is an error in the temperature sensor If the HVAC Sensor Status In Built System IO variables are associated with mor
224. chive Wizard will be displayed 8 Select the transferred archive file Click on Next 9 Select a folder to store the project Click on Next 10 Click on Next Click on Finish 11 Select the project file Click on OK Before transferring a Wiser Project you must have a C Bus Project which contains at least all Networks and Applications used by the Wiser project It is preferable to have tags for all Group Addresses used too Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first If you have a Wiser Project open and it has been transferred to a Wiser unit you can transfer changes made by a user back to the project in your computer 1 Connect the computer to the Wiser unit 2 Click on the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item 3 The Transfer Utility will be displayed Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 4 A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 303 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 6 4 6 6 5 6 7 e Select the desired Wiser unit from the list e Enter a folder for the project if you want it saved elsewhere this is only a temporary file Click on Start Note that PICED will Save a Back up of the Project in case you need to revert to it later Firm
225. ckgrounds If a white or black is selected for a background it will be displayed correctly Any other colour will be converted to a pattern of shading which is closest to the grey level of the selected colour Hence light colours will be converted to white dark colours will be converted to black and others in between will be shaded Fonts If a white is selected for a font it will be displayed as white Any other colour will be displayed as black Images Colour images are converted to a pattern of dots to give the appearance of shades of grey by a process called dithering If the dithering is not satisfactory for an image it is best to use one of the many commercially available drawing packages to convert your image to black and white before using it with the C Touch Configuration Software In built Pages The C Touch has a series of in built pages which allow the user to perform various functions They can be displayed through the use of Special Functions Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 283 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 1 12 6 2 6 2 1 Refer to the C Touch User s Guide for details of the screens and their use This document can be found in the manuals folder select the Help Manuals menu item then open the 5000CT User s Guide The appearance of these screens can not be changed It is possible to build custom versions of some of these pages by creating pages with components
226. clear all C Bus Labels Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 151 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Labels Set Language set a new language for C Bus Labels Labels Show Form show the C Bus Labels form Load Monitor Show Show Load Monitor Log Show Show Log Logic Edit show the Logic Editor Log in this shows the log in page Log out this logs the user out and returns to the start up page Measurement Manager Show show the Measurement Application Manager form Media Player Control control a remote Media Player or iPod Server Media Transport Control Next Category select the next Category Media Transport Control Next Selection select the next Selection Media Transport Control Next Track select the next Track Media Transport Control Previous Category select the previous Category Media Transport Control Previous Selection select the previous Selection Media Transport Control Previous Track select the previous Track Media Transport Control Show Form show the Media Transport Control Application Manager Module Disable disable a Logic Module to stop it from running Module Enable enable a Logic Module Monitor Form Show show the Monitor Manager Networking Setup Set the computer networking properties Network Manager Show the C Bus Network Manager form Page Transition sets the Page Transition effect The new effect will apply until it is changed again or the softwar
227. counts will be shown along with details of received E Mail messages e To send a test E Mail message select an E Mail Account and click on the Send Test E Mail button E Mail Editor The E Mail Editor is shown when an E Mail Account is added or edited in the E Mail Manager Each E Mail Account has the following properties Account Name this is the name used in the PICED software to refer to this account Your Name this is the name used when sending an E Mail E Mail Address this is the return address used when sending an E Mail Incoming Server and Port these are the details of the POP3 account Outgoing Server and Port these are the details of the SMTP account User Name and Password these are used to log in to your E Mail Account Update Rate this is how often in minutes the contents of your E Mail in box is to be read Data to be Read this is the data to be read from your in box e Number of E Mails Only select this if you only need to know how many E Mail messages are present e Number Sender and Subject select this if you need to know the E Mail sender and subject e Number Sender Subject and Body select this if you need to know the details of the E Mail message body not for Wiser Home Control Generally the body of the E Mail is only necessary if you are reading and processing E Mail messages with Logic Note that attachments will not be retrieved Click on the Default button to reset the POP3 port SMT
228. creen images will be saved in the Project directory as Page1 jpg Page2 jpg etc Note that if you are saving the image as a JPEG file the JPEG image quality can be selected with the Options JPEG Quality menu items User Manual To automatically create a basic User Manual for the PICED Project select the Tools Reports User Manual menu item This will automatically generate an HTML manual with the following details Page Images with each Component numbered List of Components and their functions for each page List of Scenes if used List of Schedules if used List of Access Control Levels and Users if used List of Irrigation Control details if used Notes e only Components which have an action associated with them will be listed Other Components are generally of no interest to the user e Theme Pages are listed separately from the Project Pages e Theme Page Components are not listed on the Project Pages e the manual JPEG image quality can be selected with the Options JPEG Quality menu items The manual will be saved to the file User Manual htm in the Project directory To provide the manual to a user you will need the User Manual htm file and the page images Page1 jpg etc The manual can be edited to suit your requirements using any HTML editor Alternatively the manual can be opened with a word processor edited and saved as another format if required for example Microsoft Word allows you to open as HTML t
229. ct Wizard Click on No to stay on the current tab of the Project Wizard 11 4 145 Warning 14147 Message Please select a folder to store the images Cause You have not specified a folder to store the images in Solution Select a valid folder name 11 4 146 Error 14148 Message Amount of Logic code exceeds limits Cause There is a limit to the amount of logic code which can be compiled and you have entered more that this limit Solution The logic code needs to be reduced See the Efficient Code topic of the logic help file FAQ for details on reducing the size of code and making it run faster 11 4 147 Error 14149 Message This Schedule name is already used Please enter a unique Schedule name Cause The name you have entered for a Schedule already exists You can not have two Schedules with the same name Solution Enter a new unique Schedule name Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 382 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 148 Confirmation 14150 Message Do you want to refresh the images Cause Changing the image on the disk does not change the images on the screen until the images have been refreshed Solution Click on Yes to refresh the images in the project Click on No to leave them as they are 11 4 149 Error 14151 Message Please enter a valid unique name for the user Cause You have entered a user name which is either blank or is a duplicate on an exist
230. ct in a unit back to the computer before you start editing the project see Updating Unit Projects This is the same as using the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item There are two properties which are displayed on the Project tab and can be changed if required e Project has been transferred to unit this shows if the project has been transferred to the unit in the past It is automatically set by PICED e Refresh project from unit before editing this selects whether you want to be reminded to refresh the project the next time you open the project The reminder will only be given if the project has been transferred to a unit and the Refresh project from unit before editing option is selected Installer Tab The Installer tab allows you to enter the details of the C Bus Installer Name Company Address City State Postcode Country Phone Mobile Fax E mail Web site Click on the Save Default Details button to save the entered data for use in the future Click on the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 54 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Load Default Details to load previously saved data Pages Tab This tab is not applicable to PAC or Wiser Home Control projects Time Out Details Time Out Details Time out Page Main Page z Dark Time out Page defaut Time out after 300 Seconds The following Time Out parameters can be set e Time out Page this is
231. cuts There are various actions which can be performed using the keyboard which can be much faster than using a mouse to select a menu item These Keyboard Shortcuts are listed below Shortcut Action Page Selection CTRL Page Up Select the previous Page CTRL Page Down Select the next Page CTRL Home Selects the Start up Page CTRL SHIFT P Selects the Theme Page for the currently displayed page can also use ALT double click on page CTRL SHIFT S Selects the Sub Page for the currently selected Sub Page Frame can also use ALT double click on Sub Page Frame Component Selection CTRL A Select all of the Component s on the Page CTRL E De select all of the selected Component s CTRL Left Click Toggle selection of a Component SHIFT Left Click Drag to select all Components in an area Component Editing CTRL Move selected Components up by one Grid spacing CTRL Vv Move selected Components down by one Grid spacing CTRL Move selected Components left by one Grid spacing CTRL gt Move selected Components right by one Grid spacing SHIFT Decrease height of selected Components by one pixel SHIFT Vv Increase height of selected Components by one pixel SHIFT Decrease width of selected Components by one pixel SHIFT gt Increase width of selected Components by one pixel CTRL C Copy the selected Component s CTRL X Cut the selected Component s CTRL V Paste the selected Compon
232. d AX Firmware update can not be done via C Bus Reloading C Touch Mark 2 Firmware The Black and White C Touch Mark 2 can have its firmware erased by pressing the Unit Reset button To replace the firmware 1 Select the USB port used to connect to the C Touch in Program Options 2 Open a C Touch mark 2 project 3 Select the Transfer Recover C Touch 2 menu item 4 Select a firmware file 5 Click on OK Note to update the firmware in an operational unit use the Transfer Project to Unit menu item Controlling The C Touch Mark 2 There are several things that you can do once you are connected to the C Touch Unit Under the Transfer menu there is a Control Unit sub menu Under this there are the following menu items Beep This will make the C Touch unit beep This can be used as a test to verify that you have connected correctly to the C Touch unit Reset This allows you to reset the C Touch unit Reset Calibration This allows you to reset the calibration of the Touchscreen if it has been set incorrectly Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 286 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 2 7 Reset Contrast This allows you to reset the Contrast to the default setting Set Backlight This sets the backlight threshold to the current light level Set Date Time This sets the C Touch date and time to the same as the computer Log Logic Messages Selecting this option results in any error
233. d Your energy provider should be able to provide this value Alternatively a rough value can be determined if you know the type of energy sources used Some approximate figures are given below Energy Source kg CO per kWh O Natural Gas Pp Nuclear OH 4 25 12 4 Power Meter History The history tab of the Power Meter Manager shows recorded power meter historical data This data is used by Power Meter In built System IO Variables to show energy usage and peak power usage The data is recorded for every hour over the last 48 hours and for every day over the last 2 years and Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 257 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide is stored in the Power Failure Recovery file To show the history data 1 Open the Power Meter Manager 2 Select the History tab 3 Select the meter or total from the Meter list 4 Select Hourly Data or Daily Data It is possible to enter or edit the historical data To do this 1 Select the hourly or daily data for a single meter or total as above 2 Select one or more entries in the list use CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items in the list or click on Select All 3 Click on the Edit button 4 Enter new values for e Energy used e Peak Power during the period e Cost 5 Click on OK A value for the Average Tariff is displayed When you enter an Energy value the Cost will be calculated and vice versa If you enter both th
234. d select Active Colour and Inactive Colour the colour blending can be used to change the colour of the bar as the C Bus level changes e Image select an image to use as the bar There is a folder in the Image Library with suitable bar images e Appearance of the Thumb if it is a Slider Style Shape Border Style Border Width Thumb Width Thumb Length Border Colour Background Colour e The Tick Marks e Style none one side or both sides e Colour e Width e Length 4 9 4 2 7 Clock The Clock tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of a clock component Time Date Displayed Current Time Date v Time Date V Show Time V Show Date F Show Seconds DD MMiY 24 Hour C MM DDIY C iMMIDD Day V 4 digit Year M Show Day of Week Month Name a Use Separator 20 Dec 2004 04 55 PM There are several options for the time information which will be displayed The Time Date Displayed drop down list allows the following types to be selected e Current Time Date this displays the current time and or date Sunrise Time this displays today s sunrise time Sunset Time this displays today s sunset time Schedule Time this shows the due time for the schedule in the adjacent drop down list C Bus Timer this shows the remaining time left on the timer for the associated Group Address Irrigation Timer this displays the amount of time left in the current Irrigation Zone if irrig
235. d select the Auto Refresh check box To only show data for monitored Zones select the Just Show Monitored check box Adding New Zones To add a new Zone click on the Add button The HVAC Zone Form will allow you to enter the necessary details Note that Zone Groups need to exist before zones can be added If there are Zones which have been used by a Component with In built System IO but which are not present in the HVAC Application Manager the Auto Create button will be enabled Clicking on this button will automatically create any Zones needed Editing Zones To edit an existing Zone 1 Select a zone in the list and click the Edit button or 2 Double click on a Zone in the list The HVAC Zone Form will allow you to edit the necessary details Deleting Zones To delete an existing Zone 1 Select a zone in the list 2 Click the Delete button HVAC Zone Group Form The HVAC Zone Group form allows you to enter the details for an HVAC Zone Group also known as a communication group It can be opened from the HVAC Application Manager The details which can be edited are listed below The C Bus thermostat supports many different modes of operation In order for the PICED software Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 243 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide and C Touch etc to be able to simulate the operation of a C Bus thermostat it is necessary for the following properties to be entered exact
236. d not create file FILE NAME Reason reason Cause The file could not be created The reason code should provide some clues as to the exact cause Solution Check the following e The file name is valid The file path is valid e e You have the right to write to the file directory you may need to be an administrator e The file is not read only Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 353 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 45 11 4 46 11 4 47 11 4 48 e The file is not being used by another program e The Hard disk is not full Error 14046 Message Archiving Failed Cause The archive file could not be created Solution Check that the file name is valid Check that the file path is valid Check that you have write rights to the file directory Check that the file is not read only Check that all of the files to be archived exist Information 14047 Message The Archive will be copied to the Project directory Reason An archive file is about to be placed in the Project directory Action Click on OK Error 14048 Message Please select a project directory Cause A directory to store the archive file has not been selected Solution Select a Project Directory Error 14049 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 354 Home Management Series 11 4 49 11 4 50 11 4 51 Please select an archive file Cause Ther
237. d on the Widgets tab all Widgets are displayed with the following properties e Number e Service Type e Location e Function Group e Description this differs according to the Service Type e Label If a Widget has been selected to be a Template there will be an icon on the left of the Widget number Widgets Other Nodes Alternatively one of the service nodes on the tree can be selected to make it easier to work with particular types of Widgets If the other nodes are selected the information displayed and the means of adding Widgets will differ according to the selected Service Type Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 231 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 20 2 Widget Properties At the top of the form there are drop down lists for selecting Location and Function Group When Lighting or Scenes is selected Type and Icon can be selected too These drop down lists can be used in several ways e When one or more Widgets are selected these will show you properties of the Widgets e When one or more Widgets are selected these will allow you to change properties of the Widgets e When a new Widget is added these properties will be used for the new Widget The use of these is much quicker than opening and editing individual Widgets They do however only allow a limited set of properties to be viewed and changed Projector The Wiser Home Control user interface can be controlled v
238. d select the Select All item 4 To de select all Scene Components right click on a Group edit box and select the De select All item To nudge particular Scene Components 1 Select the Selected button 2 Select the required Scene Components 3 Click on the nudge buttons If the Live Changes check box is selected any changes made to Scene Components will be broadcast onto C Bus immediately To view additional details of a Scene Component Network and Application hold the mouse over the Scene Component Group Address A hint will appear with the details of the Scene Component To change the order in which the Scene Components are displayed select the desired order using the Scene Components list in the Scene Components tab Scene Components which can not be edited If the Scene Component Locked option is selected then the slider will not be able to be changed Notes Pressing a scene Component for more that 10 seconds will show the Scene Editor form This only applies if the button triggers the scene directly not if it sets the trigger for a scene See also Software Limits Printing and Special Functions Scene Component Editor The Scene Component Editor allows the user to edit a Scene Component The Scene Component Editor is accessed via the Scene Editor The Scene Component Editor allows you to enter the following details of the Scene Component Controlled Group Use the Controlled Group C Bus Properties controls to sel
239. d sets of related components such as for editing Scenes Schedules or Irrigation Manipulating Components Before a Component can be manipulated it must be selected If you are wanting to manipulate several components at once select the required components first then manipulate them together Components may be manipulated in the following ways e Moved e Stretched e Copied e Deleted e Painted Most of the above functions can also be accessed from the Tool Bars Component Selection Before a Component can be manipulated it must be selected by clicking on it with the left mouse button You will see the component highlighted with black dots at the corners and sides Clicking outside of the component will de select it If you are wanting to manipulate several components at once select the first component by clicking on it Hold down the CTRL key while you select subsequent components Clicking on a component a second time will deselect it You will notice that subsequently selected components have grey dots rather than black ones The component with the black dots is known as the primary selection the others are secondary selections They are treated slightly differently for some actions To select all components in an area hold down the Shift key then click with the left mouse button and drag around the area of the components that you wis
240. de ide ide OmOff ___ Ramp Toggle Ide lde ide ide ide Up UpKey EndRamp Idle EndRamp Ide End Ramp On Up ide OnKey UpKey EndRamp dle _ End Ramp Down DownKey End Ramp Ide End Ramp Ide End Ramp OffDown Ide OffKey Down Key End Ramp Ide End Ramp Dimmer _ Ide Toggle Down Cycle End Ramp Idie _ End Ramp Preset Ramp lde OffKey ide ide f ide Timer Resettable Start Timer Idle Stop Timer Ide ide ide Timer Toggle Toggle Timer Ide lde ide ide ide Bell Press Store Level Stop Timer Ide Stop Timer __Idle__ Stop Timer Scene SetScene Ide ide ide ide ide Nudge Up Nudge Up Ide OnKey ide ide ide Nudge Down Nudge Down Ide OffKey Ide ide ide Staus ide ide ide ide ide ide Custom Key Functions Customised key functions can be created with the Custom Key Function Manager They can be saved as a Template for later use 4 25 13 1 Custom Key Function Manager The Custom Key Function Manager is used to 1 View the microfunctions used in standard key functions and custom key functions 2 Create and edit custom key functions To show the Custom Key Manager select the Project Custom Key Manager menu item or click on the edit button next to the Key Function button on the Component Editor Standard Key Functions Key Functi
241. der Electric Australia Page 271 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 14 25 07 2006 4 45 46 PM C Gate Rx lighting off HOUSE 254 56 33 Filtering with a time of 4 00 00PM to 4 30 00PM would result in 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Bus Tx Set Group 32 On User Click 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Tx 14 on 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate_ Rx 14 200 OK HOUSE 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 43 PM C Gate Rx lighting on HOUSE 254 56 32 Filtering with keyword of 32 ONLY would result in 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Bus Tx Set Group 32 On User Click 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Tx 14 on 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate_ Rx 14 200 OK HOUSE 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 43 PM C Gate Rx lighting on HOUSE 254 56 32 Filtering with keywords of 32 OR 33 would result in the original file Filtering with keywords of 32 AND on would result in 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Bus Tx Set Group 32 On User Click 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Tx 14 on 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 43 PM C Gate Rx lighting on HOUSE 254 56 32 Filtering with keywords of 32 AND on with Match Case selected would result in 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Tx 14 on 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 43 PM C Gate Rx lighting on HOUSE 254 56 32 If you need a more complex filter you can run the log file through the filter multiple times For example if you wanted lines that contain the word c gate and either tx or
242. details and click on OK Editing a Local Source To edit an existing Local Source 1 Select the Local Source in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Local Source in the list 2 The Audio Source Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the Local Source details 4 Click on OK Deleting a Local Source To delete an existing Local Source 1 Select the Local Source in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Automatically Creating Local Sources To automatically add a Local Source for each Zone which uses Local Sources click on the Auto Create button Using Local Sources The Local Source audio input is different for each Zone unlike the other Sources which are shared va the Matrix Switcher On the Wiser user interface you can have the Audio Widget for each Zone Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 250 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide show the same Local Source information for example they could all just show the name Local or iPod or it can be customised for each individual Zone To use local sources 1 When adding a Zone see above select the Enable Local Source option 2 Add a Source not a Local Source see above with Source Index of 1 the Local Source is always index 1 The properties of this Source will be used when displaying the Local Source on Wiser unless you create additional Local Sources This Source also controls where in the list on the Wiser user
243. detects that the Wiser firmware needs to be updated then this will happen and you will need to transfer the project again Transferring a Wiser 2 Home Control Project from the Unit To transfer a project stored in a Wiser unit to the PICED software 1 Connect to the Wiser unit 2 Select the Transfer Transfer Project from Unit menu item 3 The Project Details Wizard will be shown Click on Next 4 Select Wiser Click on Next 5 The archive file will be transferred using the Transfer Utility e The Transfer Utility will be opened for you e f you have more than one Network card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 307 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 the Wiser e Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 6 A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Wiser unit from the list e Select Retrieve Project From Wiser Enter a folder for the project Click on Start 7 The Import Archive Wizard will be displayed 8 Select the transferred archive file Click on Next 9 Select a folder to store the project Click on Next 10 Click on Next Click on Finish 11 Select the project file Click on OK A Before transferring a Wiser Project you must have a C Bus Project which contains at lea
244. displayed e Custom Levels when this is selected the minimum and maximum levels can be selected for which the Active state will be shown For all other levels outside of this range the Inactive state will be shown e Scene Indicator when this is selected the status will show when the Scene is set ie the levels of the Group Addresses in the Scene all match the levels of the Scene or are ramping towards those levels A Ifthe Component is controlling the groups in a Scene other than just setting the Scene the first Group Address in the scene will be used for showing the status C Bus Timer Option If the C Bus Timer option is selected the component will show as active if the associated C Bus Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 121 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 3 4 9 4 3 1 Group Address timer is running System IO Level Option If the System IO Level option is selected the component will show as active if the associated System IO Variable is Active For a boolean on off System IO Variable this means that the System IO Variable is on For an integer or real System IO Variable this means that the System IO Variable level is not zero Click Option If the Click option is selected the Component will show as active if the Component is currently being clicked or touched on a touch screen Page Link Option If the Page Link option is selected the Component will show a
245. dule Examples Schedules are set with the Schedule Editor This section provides guidance on how to set up the days of some of the more complex Schedules Standard Schedules The due days for most Schedules can be set using the Day tab of the Schedule Editor with the More option selected Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 209 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Day of Week Day of Month Month Year Custom Custom i z MV Sunday Mi v il fv 21 M January v V Monday V2 M12 M22 February SAG Mos V Tuesday M3 v 13 v 23 lv March v Wednesday lv 4 v 14 Iv 24 v April MV Thursday v5 Mis v 25 lv May V Friday jv 6 v 16 M26 MV June MV Saturday M7 M17 v 27 lv July Roce Not On vs v 18 M28 V August Normal Normal M9s fv 19 v 29 V September j 10 M 20 v 30 lv Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 J Special Day 6 Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Iv 31 Repeat Schedule E E Year view ut Simple Sets of days can be selected with the Day of Week Day of Month Month and Year group boxes For a particular day to be included in a Schedule it must be present in each of these sets of days Another way to look at is any day which does not belong in any one of the sets ie it is the wrong day of the week Special Day type day of the month
246. e To transfer the Project follow the steps below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 275 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 Connect your PC to the Touchscreen via the supplied serial cable 2 Inthe Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item and the Transfer to Unit form will appear Alternatively click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar 3 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 4 Select the action to perform e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to transfer a different configuration file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file mot e f you want to prepare a configuration file but not transfer it yet select Prepare Configuration Data File 5 lf you want to transfer new firmware select the Transfer Firmware check box and enter the desired file mot The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICED Firmware 6 To set the C Touch time to match the PC time select the Set Unit Time to PC Time check box 7 Select the Profile for the unit 8 Click on OK The transfer process will start It may take up to five minutes depending on the size of you
247. e Polygon Star Line for Shape Components only Arbitrary shape for Shape Components only Some of the possible border shapes are shown below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 102 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Line Style Rectangles Capsules and Ellipses Pointers m N D A AAUJOJ Triangles ASIA V Polygons and Stars CLN E DOO OERE A oU OOL A00 The available border style options depend on the border shape The options are Raised Lowered Raised Edge Lowered Edge None this will make the border transparent in which case it will not be seen Solid Line of different thicknesses Outline Dotted 1 pixel wide dotted line Outline Dashed 1 pixel wide dashed line Outline Solid 1 pixel wide solid line Border Lines Styes are shown below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 103 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 2 3 at AL The border Colour can also be selected Colour If the border colour or style is to change to show the status of the Component the Border Status Indication check box is ticked and the active and inactive styles and colours are both selected The colours can be chosen from a palette or specified by hue saturation and luminance The colour status indication is selected from a palette in the same way for both the border and the background Colour blending is the process of
248. e if the energy data is being displayed with a scale of one week then each data point on the graph will be one week The Grid Tick Spacing can be set to select how Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 117 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide many data points are between each tick A value of 1 means every data point will have a tick A value of 2 means every second data point will have a tick and so forth Vertical Axis The Vertical Axis group allows you to select for the vertical axis e The Minimum value e The Maximum value e The spacing between tick marks grid points e Whether to Show Tick Marks e Whether to Show Grid Lines e Whether to Show Values level on the graph Axis Line The Axis Line group allows you to select properties for the vertical and horizontal axes e The Line Colour e The Line Width e The Line Style e none this will make the axes transparent in which case it will not be seen e a solid line of different thicknesses e a dotted line line width must be 1 e a dashed line line width must be 1 Graph The Graph group allows you to select properties for the graph area and line e The Line Colour e The Line Width The Line Style e none this will make the axes transparent in which case it will not be seen e a solid line of different thicknesses e a dotted line line width must be 1 e a dashed line line width must be 1 The Background Colour The Background Style
249. e save and re open the Project Page 327 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 7 Critical The project has an invalid number of Use the Widget Manager to add or remove Error 312 Locations Function Groups and or Locations Function Groups and or Widgets Widgets Critical The Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Use the Scene Manager to give all Scenes Error 313 Status option is selected but one or more a Trigger Group Scenes has no Trigger Group Critical Too many groups have Power Failure Use the Load Monitor form to remove Error 314 Recovery selected groups which do not need to use Power Failure Recovery Critical A Widget has an error Use the Widget Manager to edit the Widget Error 315 and correct the problem The Tools Template has a button for this function This error can be removed by adding the Tools page If an error message refers to a Component number on a particular page the Component can be found as follows e select the page e select the Edit Select Select Component No item e enter the number of the component wanted e click on OK Alternatively the View Component Label Show Numbers menu item can be used to display the Component number of all Components which have an action Hiding Error Messages You can click on hide next to an error message so that you will not see this error message in the next Check Project report To hide all error messages of the same type click on h
250. e you will see the name and number of the selected Scene change as you click on the up and down arrows Step 2 Selecting a Scene Component In a similar way place components using the Tool Select form to display and select the Scene Component Select Select Nudge Up Scene Component Scene Component Number J LX Scene Component Name Night Scene Main Bedroom eet Nudge Down Scene Component Number Scene Component Count Scene Component Number You will now be able to click on the Scene Component up and down arrows and see the Scene Component number and name change Step 3 Editing the Scene Component In a similar way place components using the Tool Select form to display and select the Scene Component Level Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 158 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Select Select Nudge Up Scene Component Scene Component Level AAS Scene Component Level ee Night Scene Main Bedroom Level 40 l l i Nudge Down Scene Component Level 1 of 6 1 of 7 You will now be able to select a Scene select a Component within that Scene and adjust the level of that Scene Component Step 4 Optional Features There is nothing else necessary to have a fully functional Scene editor If you wish to add some extra functionality you can allow the display and editing of several Scene Components at once or to allow the Scene to be set so that you can see how it loo
251. e C Bus Telephony Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the telephone interface instructions for details of the operation of the telephone interface and the C Bus Telephony Application Error Reporting Application The Error Application is used for monitoring error conditions on C Bus devices such as the DALI interface and universal dimmer The Error Reporting Application is only used by the Colour C Touch unit Devices which use the C Bus Error Application can report their error status onto C Bus for other devices to monitor An error message contains the following information e The Device ID this is used to identify the particular unit e The System Category Product Type for example DALI Gateway or Universal Dimmer The Error Severity see below Whether the error is Most Recent and or Most Severe see below Whether the error has been acknowledged see below Additional error data see below System Category Product Type Each error application message relates to a specific Product Type or System Category The currently supported types are Type Category Number Relay o ooo evice Controller ir Conditioning System N RIO 2 2 IV 109 199 X L 109 09 o N gt 0 0 ii 7 0 3 4 5 6 00 JN IN N S 0 00 fee gt Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 25 Home Management Series PICED Programmer
252. e Component select the required one and click on the Duplicate button To copy Scene Components from one Scene to another 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Copy item 3 Click on the OK button 4 Open the new Scene with the Scene Manager 5 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Paste item When all changes to Scene Components are complete click on the OK button To exit without making changes to the Scene click on the Cancel button Scene Component Order To change the order in which Scene Components occur 1 Make sure that the Scene Components list is sorted by the Scene Component number first Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 191 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide column 2 Select the required Scene Components s from the list 3 Click on the Up or Down buttons until it is in the correct position Capturing Scene Levels It is possible to capture the levels of Scene Components from the C Bus network and store them in the Scene To capture the levels for all of the Scene Components just click on the Capture button or right click on the Scene Components list and select the Capture Capture item To capture just some of the Scene Components levels 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Capt
253. e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit Notes For more details on the installation and use of the Wiser Home Control refer to the Wiser Installation Guide in the PICED Manuals folder and the User Guide in the PICED Templates Wiser folder For more details on the use of the selected Wiser Home Control skin refer to the skin help file Help Wiser Home Control Skin menu item The PICED software requires the use of Adobe Flash plug ins when creating Wiser Home Control projects The first time you create a Wiser Home Control project you may be prompted to install Flash This is normal and you should allow Flash to be installed There are limitations for Simulation Mode with the Wiser Home Control The following sections cover aspects of the software which are unique to the Wiser Home Control Transferring a Wiser Home Control Project to the Unit A Wiser project is transferred via Ethernet using the Transfer Utility Software The steps in transferring your project are listed below 1 First connect your PC to the Wiser via Ethernet The Wiser can be either connected directly via an Ethernet Network or via the Internet Refer to the Transfer Utility help file and Wiser Installation Guide for more details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 300 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 1 Direct connection For a direct connection the PC is connect
254. e None this will make it transparent Solid i e a plain colour Light Shaded Medium Shaded Dark Shaded Back Diagonal Forward Diagonal Cross Diagonal Cross Horizontal Vertical Notes If the value of the data being plotted is not between the specified minimum and maximum the line will be drawn in a fainter colour to show that it has gone out of range A title for the graph can be selected on the Text tab A label for the Horizontal axis can also be selected on the Text tab but this will only be shown if the values are not shown on the horizontal axis Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 118 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 2 13 Calendar The Calendar tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of a Calendar Component Position Border Background Text Alpha Blend Calendar Options Divider Line J Show 5 rows wrap around Line Colour Day Order Sunday to Saturday Z Line Width fi g Highlight Today Rectangle X Line Style Solid Line v Special Day cel Colour and Text g Cell Colours Header Month hal Day Colour Month to display Today Colour Current Month plus offset Selected Month plus offset a Weekend Colour Offset 0 la Lo Special Day Colour Show Moon Phase J Show public holidays with weekend colour Show Schedule Due Options The Options
255. e Usage and Debug Messages option is selected the following events are logged e The amount of free memory RAM e Processor usage e Screen Draw time milliseconds and number of re draws per minute e Page changes e Saving project file and Power Fail Recovery File e Changes to System IO variable values e HTTP Image requests The log can slow down the operation of the PICED software particularly when there are a lot of events such as setting a large Scene See also Command Line Parameters Load Monitor and Log File Filter Checking the Project A check of the project can be performed by selecting the Tools Reports Check Project menu item This verifies that there are not any problems which may cause the project to behave in a manner that is not intended Any problems found are classed as Warnings or Errors Warnings are generally not critical but time should be taken to read them Errors are more severe and should be corrected before use Critical Errors must be fixed before the project can be transferred to the unit The format of the report can be set to HTML or Text in the Program Options form The report file is saved to the Project directory for later reference Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 324 Home Management Series The messages and their meanings are given below Item Warning 100 Warning 101 Warning 102 Warning 103 Warning 104 Warning 105 Warning 106 Wa
256. e are numbered starting from 0 e The data which can be e integer whole number e boolean true or false e real a number with a fractional part e The data unit type such as Volts or degrees Centigrade The Measurement Application functions can be used via e Measurement Application Manager select Project C Bus Applications Measurement Manager menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Measurement Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the General Input Unit instructions for details of the operation of the device and the C Bus Measurement Application Telephony Application The Telephony Application is used for monitoring and controlling devices which support telephony messages such as the C Bus Telephone Interface Typical uses include Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 24 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 7 e Monitoring incoming and outgoing telephone numbers e Controlling lights when the telephone rings e Re directing the phone The Telephony Application functions can be used via e Telephony Application form select Project C Bus Applications Telephony App menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the Telephony Application messages will be sent to Th
257. e creation of Animated Images select the Tools Images Create Animation menu item The Create Animation form allows you to create a blank animation template or to create an animation from an existing image Blank Animation To create a blank empty animation 1 Select the Create Blank Animation option 2 Enter how many animation frames are required 3 Enter the height and width of the animation frames 4 Select an output file name the name of the completed animation file This needs to be a bitmap bmp extension 5 Select a Transparency colour 6 Select an animation rate multiple of 100ms 7 Click on OK 8 The newly created animation frames image will be opened in your selected Image Editor 9 Use the Image Editor to create the animation images 10 Edit the animation text file if needed Animation From an Image To create an animation from an existing image 1 Select the Create Animation From Image option 2 Enter how many animation frames are required 3 Select the animation effect required 4 Select an input file name the name of the image to be animated 5 Select an output file name the name of the completed animation file This needs to be a bitmap bmp extension 6 Select a Transparency colour 7 Select an animation rate multiple of 100ms 8 Click on OK 9 The newly created animation frames image will be opened in your selected Image Editor to allow changes if desired 10 Edit the animation
258. e drawn with no background in the Sub Page Frames The Colour will still be shown when Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 92 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 8 5 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 editing the Sub Page Page Transitions When a Page changes it is possible to have a transition effect as the page changes from one to another The transition can be selected as follows e The default Page Transition can be selected on the Options tab of the Project Details e The default Page Transition can be set using Special Functions e The next Page Transition to be used can be selected using Special Functions Components A Component is an item that can be placed on a page It may be a button text image clock slider monitor or other type of component Components can be used to display information control C Bus or to navigate the Project pages See also Good Design Practices and Software Limits Component Actions When a component is activated it can perform an action The types of Actions which a component can perform include e Selecting another page e Executing a C Bus command e Executing a Special Function or e Controlling a System IO Variable Components do not have to have an Action They can be used purely for visual effect or to display some sort of data Activating Components Activating a Components causes it to perform the action which it is intended to do To activate
259. e energy and the cost a new average tariff will be displayed If you have selected multiple hours or days then you have the option to enter data per hour day or a total If you enter the total the amount you enter will be divided evenly among the selected hours days On the Power Meter Manager if you are displaying the history data for the total of all meters and you click on Edit then the data you enter will be divided among all power meters If all power meters have historical data within the last 30 days then the total you enter will be divided among the power meters in proportion to their historical values If one or more meters has no historical data then the total you enter will be divided evenly among the meters Data will not be distributed to meters which are generators or which do not have the Include in Total option selected If you are editing hourly data and you select the Copy to Daily Data check box then the data from the last 48 hours will be copied into the daily data for the last two days If you are editing daily data and you select the Copy to Hourly Data check box then the data from the last 3 days will be copied into the hourly data for the last 48 hours To clear all historical data graph data and power meter history select the Project Clear Historical Data menu item Example 1 You have e Three pulse power meters e The power usage of the three meters is roughly the same e An electricity bill as follows
260. e is no valid archive file name Solution Enter the file name of the archive to open Warning 14050 Message Image IMAGE NAME is missing Cause An image file could not be found Solution 1 Obtain the missing image file and put a copy in the project directory Solution 2 Delete the image from the project Error 14051 Message File FILE NAME could not be opened Cause There was an error while trying to open the file Solution Check that the file exists Check whether you have read rights to the directory PICED Programmer s Guide Check to see that the file is of the correct file type If it is an image file check to see that it is a supported format Check to see whether the file has been corrupted If possible try to open the file with another program Error 14052 Message Can not add any more pages Maximum is imit Cause Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 355 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 52 11 4 53 11 4 54 There is a limit to the number of pages which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of pages used or combine several together Error 14053 Message Can not add any more Components Maximum is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of components which can be stored on each page and that limit has been reached Solution Remove some components or move some components to another pa
261. e name Page x where x is the number of the Page Components To automatically create Components e Select the Pages amp Components tab e Select the Auto Create Components check box e f you want to create the components using the same style as the currently selected Component select the Copy Style of Selected Component e Select the starting Group Address in the Min GA box and the final Group Address in the Max GA box This will create a series of C Bus Components on the currently selected page with their text being the C Bus Tag for the controlled Group Address The first Component will control the Min GA Group Address the next will control the Group Address after that and so on The Components will be placed in rows over the top of any existing Components If there are too many Components to fit on the page then some of them will be on top of each other Access Control To automatically create Users e Select the Users tab e Select the Auto Create Users check box e Select the number of Users to create in the Users Count box This will create the selected number of Users each given the name User x where x is the number of the User Each user will have a password of 00000n where n is the number of the User minus one So User 1 will have password 000000 User 2 will be 000001 and so forth Irrigation Zones To automatically create Irrigation Zones e Select the Irrigation tab e Select the Auto Create Zones check b
262. e of software the PICED software will not know about the changes until next time it opens the project If you want to get any changes made to C Bus tags immediately select the Tools Refresh C Bus Tags menu item 5 19 Image Server The PICED software comes with an Image Server for use with Web Cam Image components The image server can be used to provide images for any number of Colour C Touch units HomeGate or Schedule Plus This can be used for photo screen savers or for providing information in a commercial environment The Image Server can be run from the Start Menu under PICED or from PICED Media lmageServer exe The Image Server icon can be seen on the System Tray bottom right corner of the screen 1 37 PM Click on the Icon and select Show to set the properties The Help button provides additional information on how to use the Image Server Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 274 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 6 1 C Bus Units The PICED software can be used to configure the following C Bus Units e Black and White C Touch e Black and White C Touch Mark 2 e Colour C Touch e PAC e Wiser Home Control There are differences between the software features available for each unit Black and White C Touch The Black and White C Touch can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the Black and White C Touch
263. e out Page Page 1 z If the property is the same in all profiles you will see the value displayed as above If the property varies with different profiles it is not possible to display the value so you will see something like this Time out Page Selection varies by Profile Pi Clicking on the edit button will open the Profile Value form Select alue for Profile E xj E Add All Default Page 1 x Profile Romia S 2 Value poet o Profile Romis S Value Pae O o a O Profile Roms S Value as2 H This form allows you to select different values for different Profiles or Profile Groups In the example above the time out page for Profiles Room 1A and Room 1B is Page 1 and the time out page for Profiles Room 2A and Room 2B is Page 2 ERENCE To add a new Profile Value pair click on the Add button To add a Profile Value pair for all Profiles click on the Add All button To delete a Profile Value pair click on the delete button X next to the Profile If a particular profile is not listed then the value will be the Default value So in the example above if there was a Profile called Room 3A then the time out page for that Profile would be Page 1 because that is the Default value Boolean True False Properties In places where a Boolean ie either true or false property can vary depending on the Profile you will see an edit button next to a drop down list box instead of
264. e re starts Password Character enter a character of the user password Password Clear clear the currently entered password Password Edit edit the user password Password Enter enter the password and log in if successful Power Meter Manager Show show the Power Meter Manager Program Run run a Program Project Edit Options opens part of the Project Details form Project Details shows a form with details of the Project Project Save File save the Project file Region language Set the computer Region date time formats etc Re Start re starts the Colour C Touch Re Start HomeGate re starts HomeGate only Colour C Touch keeps running Save Settings saves any changes made to Calibration or sound level in Colour C Touch Scene Edit If All Scenes is selected then the Scene Manager will be opened If Specific Scene is selected then the selected scene will be opened Scene Store store the current settings for the selected Scene e Scene Set Selected set the Scene selected using In built System IO e Scene Store Selected store the Scene selected using In built System IO only stores levels of lighting groups e Schedule Edit If All Schedules is selected then the Schedule Manager will be opened If Specific Schedule is selected then the selected schedule will be opened Schedule Synchronise Synchronise to Schedules Security Alarm raise an alarm activate the security system Security Arm arm the secur
265. e than one zone they will show the most severe error condition in the zones Data Valid For a short period after start up the HVAC data will not be available The HVAC Data Valid in built system IO variable can be used to show whether all of the HVAC Data temperature set level operating type etc has been received from the thermostat yet Note that once this gets set to true it will stay that way It does not mean that the HVAC System is currently operating correctly just that data has been received at some time in the past The C Bus messages which need to be received before the Data Valid for a Zone will be true are e Zone HVAC Plant Status contains the Status Flags and Error e Zone HVAC Mode contains the Operating Type Set Level and Fan Speed e Zone Temperature contains the Temperature and Sensor Status Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 175 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Example The diagram below shows the in built System IO Variables which would be used to control the HVAC Operating Type Fan Speed and Set Level The buttons controlling the HVAC Operating Type use the preset key function to set the required Operating Type The buttons adjusting the fan speed and Set Level use the Nudge Up and Nudge Down key functions HVAC HVAC HVAC Fan Speed Set Level Set Level Type Name HVAC Operating Type HVAC HVAC Fan Speed Set Level Text Text The diagram below shows how the HVAC Syst
266. e the iPod Server software running on it Refer to the iPort manufacturer s website http www iportmusic com for more details Using the Media Player Control Create a Colour C Touch project with a Media Player Control Special Function to show the Media Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 330 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Player control on the colour C Touch Download the project to your colour C Touch The PC running Windows Media Player must be on the same Ethernet network as the Colour C Touch Run Windows Media Player on the computer Select the Tools Plug ins Colour C Touch Control menu item if it is not already selected On the Colour C Touch click the button with the Media Player Control special function It will display a Media Player control panel which allows e selection of play lists e selection of songs e play pause stop etc The Program Details Wizard allows you to e select a skin for the Media Control Client e select the option to automatically start the iPod Server software e select the media server address 8 11 C Bus Fault Diagnosis See the Advanced C Bus Fault Diagnosis document in the Manuals folder Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 331 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 Other Help Sources Help Files The PICED help files provide some additional information about the PICED softwa
267. e unit the Trigger message will be sent onto C Bus and received by the PICED software Black and White C Touch Colour C Touch or PAC which will set the Scene If one of the Groups in the Scene changes the PICED software Black and White C Touch Colour C Touch or PAC will send an Indicator Kill message onto C Bus which will cause the indicator on the unit to go off Note that this happens regardless of the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option Triggering a Scene in another unit Is a Scene is stored in another unit and you want to trigger it from the PICED software Black and White C Touch Colour C Touch or PAC you need to set the Scene Trigger Group to the correct level aka Action Selector If you are using a Component to trigger the Scene use the preset Key Function To correctly show the state of the Scene you need to use the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option See Scene Status Indication for more information Adjusting Scenes The most common way of using Scenes is to just Trigger the Scene required There are times however when it is desirable to adjust the levels of all of the Scene Components Groups up or down a bit To set up a Component to adjust a Scene e Open the Component Properties form e Select the Nudge Up Nudge Down On Up Off Down or Dimmer Key Functions e Select the Scene Groups to be modified It is usually desirable to just control the group addresses in the Scene which a
268. eason Cause The selected form could not be created This is generally due to a shortage of Windows resources The reason should provide additional information about the nature of the problem Solution If the cause is related to Windows resources close down any other applications that are running to make more Windows resources available Warning 14008 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 341 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 8 11 4 9 11 4 10 Screen type has been changed Some components may be affected Cause The size of the project screen has been changed If the screen has been made smaller components that were near the edges may have been moved to fit them onto the new screen Solution Check pages to ensure that the placement of components is still suitable Error 14009 Message Could not open Clipsal web site Cause The Clipsal Web Site could not be opened This may be due to a fault with your web browser or with your internet connection Solution Check your web browser and Internet connection to make sure they operate correctly Warning 14010 Message This image is too large to fit on the screen It will be reduced in size automatically Cause The selected image is larger that the project screen size Solution There are several solutions e Do nothing the image will automatically be reduced in size e Use an image editing program to cha
269. eating Is the HVAC system currently Boolean heating HVAC Sensor Status Status of the temperature Integer sensor 0 OK 1 relaxed accuracy 2 out of calibration 3 failure HVAC Sensor Status Name of the temperature String Name sensor status as above Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 172 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable HVAC Set Level Set point level Either Y e Temperature e Comfort level e Fan speed see details below HVAC Set Level Text A text representation of the HVAC Set Level The text varies as follows e f the Zone Operational Type see above is off then the text will be blank e If the Zone Set Level Type see below is a temperature then it displays as C or F e Otherwise it shows a number for a Comfort Level or Fan Speed es No No HVAC Set Level Type The type of data the HVAC Set Integer Level is expressing 0 Temperature 1 Comfort Level for evaporative cooling 2 Fan Speed HVAC Set Level Type Name of the HVAC Set Level String No Name Type see above HVAC Setback Enabled Is the setback enabled HVAC Temperature Current zone temperature Real o O HVAC Zone Damper Is the zone damper open Boolean Open HVAC Zone Enabled The state of the Zone enabled Boolean Yes or disabled This will be true if the operating type is not off HVAC Zone Group State The state on off of a Zone Gr
270. ect The meters can be either e Pulse Power Meters e Analogue Power Meters The total power values are calculated and can be accessed using Power Meter In built System IO Power Meters are only supported for C Touch Mark 2 C Touch Spectrum Colour C Touch and Wiser projects Energy Accumulation On a regular basis the energy used for each power meter is recorded At the same time the cost is calculated using the current Tariff and recorded The energy cost and peak power is recorded for every hour for the past 48 hours and every day for the past 2 years This data is stored in the Power Failure Recovery File The calculated energy data will only be as accurate as the meters and the tariff data The data should be considered to be approximate and for purposes of providing relative information to encourage behavioural change related to saving energy It is not intended that this data will exactly agree with the bill received from the energy supplier See also Software Limits 4 25 12 1 Pulse Power Meters Some power meters Such as the Schneider EN40 have a pulse output where one pulse is generated for each energy unit passing through the meter for example 10Wh If the pulse output of a pulse power meter is connected to a C Bus Auxiliary Input Unit or a C Bus Bus Coupler then there will be a message on a C Bus Group Address for each energy unit measured The interval between the pulses is measured by PICED to calcul
271. ect All as a shorthand description of this operation Certain menu items offer several options any one of which may be selected In this case the range is specified with square brackets and ellipses For example the width of a tick mark can vary from 1 to 5 this would be denoted by 1 5 Button Names When the name of a form button drop down list or check box is referred to the name is in bold Topic Cross References All topics are cross referenced A cross reference looks like this Clicking on a cross reference aka hyper link will take you to that topic unless this document is printed 1 4 Definitions The following definitions are useful in discussing the PICED Software Component A graphical object displayed on a PICED page Components include soft keys buttons images text clocks temperature sensors web camera images web pages and other items Page A page is an assortment of related components that represents something understandable to the user Page Link A page link is a property of a component which causes the display to jump to another page Schedule A schedule is a sequence of events that are to occur at particular times or dates in the future Load A load is an electrical device controlled via a C Bus output unit Most loads are lights but may be any device such as sprinklers AC Power points heaters projection screen motors AV equipment via IR etc Lighting Zone Refers to an illuminated area In PI
272. ect Archive is best used for this purpose Creating a new Project When the software first starts the Project Details Wizard will be displayed Create a New Project Based on a Theme Template v Open an Existing Project File Example E Open a Recent Project Project Y Create a New Blank Project Preview Import Project Archive Transfer Project From Unit To create a new project at any other time select the New Project menu item from the File menu The Project Details Wizard will allow you to e Create a New Project Based on a Theme select a theme or other template from the drop down list or click on the Browse button to load a Template or Theme for the Project A preview will be shown of the selected template if available e Open an Existing Project click on the Browse button to select the Project click on the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 50 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 4 7 5 1 Example button to select one of the supplied example projects Open a Recent Project select the Project from the drop down list Create a New Blank Project create a new project which doesn t use a theme or template Import an Archive import an Archive Transfer Project From Unit transfer a Project from a C Touch PAC or Wiser Home Control If you are creating a new project click on the Next button to set the rest of the Projec
273. ect has been saved it will start using the saved files not the original ones that were selected To keep the files for a project together and to prevent them from being confused with files for other projects it is recommended that you create a separate directory folder for each project To do this either e If you are saving the Project file in the recommended Projects directory the PICED software will ask if you want a separate directory created This will be created with the same name as the Page 82 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 7 Project if you click on the Yes button or e Create a new folder before you start using Windows Explorer or similar product or e When you save for the first time or select Save As from the File menu the Save File form will appear If you click on the new folder icon a new folder will be created You can then change the name and select the folder New Folder Icon img To save just the currently displayed page to a file select Save Page As Template from the File menu Note that when a file is saved a backup copy is created with the same name but with a back up file extension This will be over written the next time the file is saved To save a project as a template select the Save Template item from the File menu See also Saving a Backup Templates Templates can be used to store various aspects of a Project which are used on a regular basis A Template can
274. ect report click on Yes otherwise click on No 11 4 205 Confirmation 14208 Message This item is not supposed to be edited Are you sure you want to edit this Reason You have tried to edit a Schedule Scene or Scene Component which is locked Locked items are not intended to be changed and should only be changed with caution Actions Click on Yes to continue with editing the item Click on Cancel to leave the item as it is 11 4 206 Error 14209 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 400 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The Name has already been used Please select a different name Cause You have entered a name which has already been used Names need to be unique Solution Click on OK then enter a different name 11 4 207 Confirmation 14210 Message Do you want Media Link Groups to be automatically created for you Reason Media Link Groups exist in the Transport Control Application in the selected C Bus Project Actions If you want to automatically copy the Media Link Groups from the C Bus project into the PICED Project click on Yes otherwise click on No 11 4 208 Confirmation 14211 Message Scene Components which are not on a Lighting Application should be locked Do you want to lock them Reason You have added one or more Scene Component to a Scene which is using a G Bus Application which is not a Lighting Application Generally these should not be able t
275. ect the Network Application and Group Address Controlled Group Network Local Network z Application Lighting r Group Address Bathroom 1 Action This allows you to either ramp a group to a level or to pulse a group to a level for a particular duration The parameters entered are Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 194 Home Management Series C Bus Level Ramp Rate Pulse duration if applicable pulse duration is complete PICED Programmer s Guide Pulse return level if applicable this is the level that the Group Address will be set to when the Editing Option Action Ramp Group Pulse Group Level Level OFF hd 2 Current Level Ramp Rate over 4 seconds x Pulse Duration 0 iH P wim 1 vis Final Level Level OFF v The Scene Component Locked option controls whether the user is able to edit this Scene Component If it is selected then 1 There will be an icon next to it in the Scene Editor 2 When selected the Scene Component Locked In Built System IO variable will be true 3 It will be ignored when using a Scene Store Special Function 4 15 8 Scene Matrix Manager The Scene Matrix Manager provides an overview of all Scenes and the ability to edit several Scenes at once To open the Scene Matrix Manager click on the Matrix View button on the Scene Manager Set Scene Add Scene Edit Scene Capture Delete Scene Duplica
276. ect to the unit Archive the files for later use Project A PICED Project consists of the following things created for the end user to use e Pages of Components Not required by PAC or Wiser Home Control projects e Widgets Wiser Home Control projects only e Scenes e Schedules e Irrigation Control e Access Control e Special Days e Logic e E Mail Accounts All of this data is saved in the Project File There are other things which are also stored in the directory with the Project file e any images sounds or other files used by the project e Log files e Project Details Reports and Error Reports e Load Monitor data Opening a Project To open a project either click on the Open button of the tool bar or select the Open item from the File menu Select the directory where your project is stored and select the file name The default file extension of a project file is CTD Click on OK Project files with the extension cte are secure project files which have been encrypted to protect against tampering Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 48 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 3 1 To open a project which has been recently opened select Reopen from the File menu To add pages from a project to the one which is currently open select File Add Template Contents or File Re Add Template Contents Notes If an image file is missing when a project is opened an error mes
277. ected component Select Select All select all of the components on the page Deselect All de select all of the components on the page Select Component No select a component by its number Select Hidden Components select any components on the page which are invisible Size Height Adjusts the height of the secondary selections to the primary selection Width Adjusts the width of the secondary selections to the primary selection Size Adjusts the width and height of the secondary selections to the primary selection Align Align align the position of the selected component s Align Left align the left sides of the selected components Align Top align the top sides of the selected components Align Right align the right sides of the selected components Alight Bottom align the bottom sides of the selected components Component Order change the drawing order of the selected component Move Back move selected Component back one position Move to Back move selected Component to the back Move Forward move selected Component forward one position Move to Front move selected Component to the front Group Components put the currently selected Components into a Group Un Group Components remove the currently selected Components from a Group Move onto Page move all components onto the page if they are off the page Label Components this automatically places a label u
278. ecting the Theme Component on the Theme Components page then 2 Selecting the Edit Apply Selected Theme Style to All menu item Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 145 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 10 2 4 10 3 4 11 To change Components on a Page to match the Theme style 1 Select the Components to be changed 2 Select the Edit Apply Theme Style to Selected menu item To apply the theme style for all Component types to all Components on all Pages select the Edit Apply Theme Style to All menu item Theme Pages To add a Theme Page select the Page New Theme Page menu item Enter the name of the page or use the default and click on the OK button It is recommended that the name of the page starts with the word Theme in order to distinguish that this is a Theme Page rather than a regular Page The first of the Theme Pages is used for the Theme Components The rest of the Theme Pages can be used as a background for the other pages in a Project A Theme Page can have its background Colour set and have any other Components placed on it When this Theme Page is used by another Page the Theme Page will be drawn as a background for the Page and then the Page s components will be drawn on top If the theme template has multiple pages in it to make the Theme Page work automatically with the Project Wizard Auto Page Creation process e Name the menu page if used Menu e N
279. ed If a Schedule Locked option is selected then it will not be able to be edited and the Schedule Locked variable will be true Displaying and Controlling Schedule Properties Components can be used to control various properties of the selected Schedule The Schedule time day and event can all be displayed or controlled using a combination of Buttons and Level Indicators The Schedule editing Template shows how Schedule editing can be done This can be edited to suit the needs of a particular project It may be desirable to only allow the time for a Schedule to be changed for example Schedule Due dates can be displayed on a Calendar Component Bit masks Bit masks are really only of use for logic The following In built System IO Variables are only of relevance when used with logic e Schedule Day of Week Mask e Schedule Day of Month Mask e Schedule Month Mask See also e Special Functions for editing Schedules Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 162 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 1 4 4 14 1 5 Irrigation In Built System IO Irrigation can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Settable Irrigation Running Is the Irrigation running Irrigation Time The amount of time left inthe Time No Remaining currently running Zone Irrigation Program Number of the selected Integer Number Irrigation Program Irrigation Program Count
280. ed at the factory Arial Courier New Marlett Microsoft Sans Serif Tahoma Times New Roman Verdana Webdings Wingdings Other fonts can be added when Transferring a Colour C Touch Project to the Unit Slow Operation If the Colour C Touch is not very responsive it is possibly due to excessive processor usage This can be checked using 1 The Show Usage option in the log or 2 The System Processor Usage ln built System IO Variable The majority of processor usage is related to graphics use e Ifa page has a clock on it it will be re drawn every second If a page has an animated image on it it will be redrawn as often as 10 times per second e Images which have been re sized require more processing it is best to re size the image with a graphic editing program and use the re sized image in lt SOFTWARE NAME gt e The number of components on a page determines how long it takes to draw e Large polygons with many sides or 3D ellipses require more processing e Large areas of Alpha Blending require a lot of processing Other factors include e Having the Log running e Logic e How busy C Bus is this will affect how often the screen re draws too e Number of Scenes and Schedules minor affect KKK Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 294 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 5 6 5 1 PAC The Pascal Automation Controller PAC can be configured through the use of the PICED soft
281. ed directly to a Wiser LAN port Wiser A networked connection will require an Ethernet hub switch or router to connect the PC and the Wiser The exact configuration depends on the site design Wiser 1 2 Networked connection 1 3 Remote Connection To connect to a Wiser at a remote site via the Internet you will need e An Internet connection to your PC e An Internet connection at the remote site where the Wiser is e Appropriate remote access settings set in Project Details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 301 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 Wiser PC Save the project if any changes have been made In the Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item or click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar The Transfer Project to Wiser Home Control form will appear 4 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 5 O N o 9 Select the required action If you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project If you want to just open the Transfer Utility program select Do Not Transfer Configuration Data and click on OK If you want to prepare a data file for transfer at a later date select Prepare con
282. ee the Schedule Examples for guidance on setting up complex Schedules When you have set up a Schedule use the Year View to confirm that you have it correct Warning 14076 Message Non instantaneous Ramp Rates are not supported on the selected C Bus Application Unexpected behaviour may occur in a C Bus System Cause The selected C Bus Application does not support setting a Group Address to a Level with anything other than an instantaneous Ramp Rate Solution Change the Ramp Rate to 0 instantaneous Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 362 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 76 11 4 77 11 4 78 11 4 79 Error 14077 Message Special Days must have a unique non blank name Cause A Special Day name has been entered which is either blank or is the same as another Special Day Solution Change the name of one or more Special Days Error 14078 Message Could not create Directory Cause A directory could not be created Solution Check that the directory name is valid Check that the directory path is valid Check that you have write rights to the directory Check that the directory or path is not read only Confirm 14079 Message Do you want a directory created for this project Reason There is no directory for this Project It is recommended that each project be placed in its own directory Action Click on Yes to have a directory created automatically for yo
283. eed form Alarms An Alarm can be used to alert the user This operates very much like an alarm clock Like a regular alarm clock the Alarm e can be started at a certain time usually via a Schedule e can be switched off usually using a Component with a Special Function e there is a Snooze option which will switch the alarm off temporarily for a certain period An Alarm can be started by e a Schedule with the Alarm On Special Function e pressing on a Component with the Alarm On Special Function set e a Group Address triggering a Component with the Alarm On Special Function by Remote Control e logic executing a Special Function An alarm will normally be stopped or snoozed by the use of a component with the Alarm Off or Alarm Snooze special functions respectively There are two in built System IO variables for use with alarms e Alarm State this shows whether the alarm is currently on making a noise e Alarm Cancel Next this cancels the next alarm only This can be used when the user is aware that the alarm is about to go off and wants to cancel it without switching the alarm off permanently The Project Options can be used to set how often the Alarm beep is played how long the alarm will continue once it starts how long the Snooze period is the alarm sound if no sound is selected the default Windows sound will be used The black and white C Touch alarm sound is the same as the screen press beep which page
284. efault Sub Page is the Sub Page which will initially be displayed in the Sub Page Frame The Sub Page displayed in the frame can be changed using Page Links If the Select on Parent Page Change option is selected then the default sub page will be selected when the page that the sub page frame is on gets displayed If this option is not selected then the sub page in the frame does not change when the parent page changes If you want the Default Sub Page to be displayed after a certain amount of time select the Select Default Page after time out option Select the time out duration in seconds and the Sub Page Transition if required 4 9 4 2 15 Status The status of a Component refers to whether the function being controlled by the Component is Active on or not The functions which can be indicated by the Component s status include e C Bus Group Address Level on or off e C Bus Scene state set or not set e C Bus Timer running or not running e Click whether the Component is being clicked by the user or not e Page Link whether the page linked to is currently being displayed The status of a Component can be displayed by a variety of means depending on the Component Type e Border e Background e Images Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 120 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Text To select which function controls the Component s status select the Status tab on the Componen
285. eider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Night Light 53 63 70 Recover 284 Refresh Project 280 286 288 Selecting Profile 275 284 288 Spectrum 288 Stop 284 Transfer Project 275 277 284 286 288 Updating project 310 Custom 112 Custom colours 270 Custom Key Functions 262 263 264 D DALI 240 241 Date 27 111 151 236 281 286 289 298 In built System IO 164 setting 164 Special Functions 151 System IO 155 Tools 133 Date Time Application 27 Daylight Savings 53 63 70 79 Default Network 53 63 70 Definitions 6 Delete 140 Demonstration Mode 7 Description 4 Design guidance 333 Desktop Shortcut 270 Differences 309 Dimmer 122 Directory New 82 Dithering 283 DIY editor 157 DLT 16 239 In built System IO 179 Documenting Installation 334 Documents 143 Dongle 7 Download 275 284 288 Download size 299 C Touch 281 287 289 Dynamic Labels 16 239 E Mail Page 424 Home Management Series E Mail Account Accounts 233 Editor 234 In built System IO Manager 233 POP3 233 234 SMTP 233 234 Special Functions Tools 133 Enable Control Application Enabling 14 Energy Bills Cost Display Graph 117 260 History 255 257 In built System IO Meters 254 Tariff 255 Tools 133 Energy Usage Error Application 7 25 240 241 Categories 25 In built System IO Special Functions System IO 155 Tools 133 Error Messages 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 3
286. eir levels immediately do not use their ramp rates If the Live Changes check box is selected any changes made to Scene Components will be broadcast onto C Bus immediately To identify a particular Group Address 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Flash Group item Automatically Creating Components to Control Scene Groups To automatically create a series of Components on the current Page to control the Scene Components 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 192 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Auto Create Components item To create Components with a particular style for example a slider 1 Select a Component on the current page with the desired style 2 Open the Scene Manager 3 Open the Scene Editor 4 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 5 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Auto Create Components item At the bottom of the form there is some text showing how many scene components have been used In the above case there are 6 out of a possible 250 used There is also some information about the approximate time needed to execute the Scene The time taken will depend a lot on how busy C Bus is at the time so this figure
287. elease the mouse button After a component has been placed you can select it and adjust the size by placing the cursor over one of the selection dots The cursor will change to show which way the size will be adjusted left right up down or diagonally Click on the dot and drag to the required size Release the mouse button when the size is right A component s size can also be adjusted precisely by editing it and typing in the required size To change the size of components to match the size of another component select the component that you want the others to match the primary selection Then select the other component s these are the secondary selections The height width or both can be set by either clicking the size speed buttons on the tool bar or selecting the Edit Size menu then selecting Height Width or Both Some components have a minimum size If you try to set the size too small it will be automatically adjusted If you are unable to resize Components it may be because the Components are Locked See also grid Copying and Deleting Components To copy one or more Components select them then e click on the copy item from the edit menu e click on the copy speed button on the Edit Tool Bar or e press CTRL C To cut one or more components select them then e click on the cut item from the edit menu e click on the cut speed button on the Edit Tool Bar or e press CTRL X
288. elect the level using the Level drop down list It will list the remaining 256 levels which have not been assigned a level tag name 2 Specify the level name in the Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes If you want to change the level tag name see Edit a lighting application group level Edit Lighting Level The Edit Lighting Level form allows you to edit a Lighting Group Address level tag To change the level tag name follow the procedure below 1 Edit the group tag name in the Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes If you want to add a new group level see Add a lighting application group level Add Enable Group The Add Enable Group form allows you to specify an enable network variable address and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 Select the enable network variable address using the Enable Network Variable Address drop down list It lists a set of group addresses It will list the remaining 256 addresses which have not been assigned a tag name If you requires an address which is already in use you can reassign the variable address 2 Specify the tag group name in the Enable Network Variable Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes 2 3 1 6 10 Edit Enable Group The Edit Enable Group form allows you to edit an enable network variable group tag name To do so follow the instruction below 1 Edit the group name in the Enable Net
289. elected Wiser Home Control skin refer to the skin help file Help Wiser Home Control Skin menu item The PICED software requires the use of Adobe Flash plug ins when creating Wiser Home Control projects The first time you create a Wiser Home Control project you may be prompted to install Flash This is normal and you should allow Flash to be installed There are limitations for Simulation Mode with the Wiser Home Control The following sections cover aspects of the software which are unique to the Wiser Home Control Transferring a Wiser 2 Home Control Project to the Unit A Wiser project is transferred via Ethernet using the Transfer Utility Software The steps in transferring your project are listed below 1 First connect your PC to the Wiser via Ethernet The Wiser can be either connected directly via an Ethernet Network or via the Internet Refer to the Transfer Utility help file and Wiser Installation Guide for more details 1 1 Direct connection For a direct connection the PC is connected directly to a Wiser LAN port Internet 1 2 Networked connection A networked connection will require an Ethernet hub switch or router to connect the PC and the Wiser The exact configuration depends on the site design Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 305 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Wiser PC 1 3 Remote Connection To connect to a Wiser at a remote site via the Internet you will
290. elete the one or more components See Transferred Images Change the position or size to bring it back onto the screen Change the Application number or change the component to have a C Bus type of Unused A component has a Group Address of 255 Change the Group Address or change the FF hexadecimal which is invalid It is not possible to navigate to all pages from a particular page Two or more users have the same password Two or more Access Levels have the same name Two or more Schedules have the same name A Group Address does not have Power Fail Recovery set The value of this Group Address will be lost after a power failure If this is enabling a Schedule the Schedule will be disabled following a power failure component to have a C Bus type of Unused Add some buttons to the page with page links to appropriate pages or add a back button Change one or more user passwords Change one or more user Access Level names Change one or more user Schedule names Enable the Power Failure Recovery for this Group Address Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 326 Home Management Series Error 221 Error 222 Error 223 Error 224 Error 225 Error 226 Error 227 Error 228 Critical Error 300 Critical Error 304 Critical Error 305 Critical Error 306 Critical Error 308 Critical Error 309 Critical Error 310 Critical Error 311 Project does not have pr
291. elow You can also filter C Bus messages by selecting the appropriate option e Show Sent C Bus Commands This enables the logging of commands sent from the software e Show Received C Bus Commands This enables the logging of commands received from C Bus e Lighting Compatible Applications This enables the logging of Lighting and Lighting Compatible C Bus Messages Labels This enables the logging of Label Messages Security Application This enables the logging of C Bus Security Application Messages Telephony Application This enables the logging of C Bus Telephony Application Messages Measurement Application This enables the logging of C Bus Measurement Application Messages Error Application This enables the logging of C Bus Error Application Messages e HVAC Application This enables the logging of C Bus HVAC Application Messages e Date amp Time Application This enables the logging of C Bus Date Time Application Messages e Media Transport Control Application This enables the logging of C Bus Media Transport Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 321 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Control Application Messages e Monitors This enables the logging of Monitor messages e Pulse Power Meters This enables the logging of Pulse Power Meter data Log Font The log font can be changed by clicking on the Edit Font button selecting the new font then clicking
292. els or voltage It has a border and background and can have its text font set Examples 23 5C 29 0V A If the value for the Monitor is unknown because it has not yet been read the value displayed will be e C or F for temperature depending on the Metric Units setting e lux for light level e V for voltage See also Monitor Properties Monitor Manager and In built System IO Selectors A Selector component is used to allow the selection of an item from a list in much the same way as a Windows Radio Group A Selector Component consists of a border background text and an image All of these parts can be used to indicate C Bus status e The border and background can change colour according the Group Address level not for Black and White C Touch projects e The text font can change according the selected item the text is fixed for each item e The image can toggle between any two images to indicate the selected item e The selected item in the list indicates the current Group Address level Example O Scene1 M Scene2 O Scene3 O Scene4 The first item in the list will be selected when the Group Address Level is 0 The second item will be selected when the level is 1 and so on When setting the Selector properties add one line of Text for each option you want in the list HTML An HTML Component consists of a border and an HTML web page HTML Components are not available in Black and White
293. em state and zone state can be controlled as well as how various properties can be viewed HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC Zone Group Plant Plant Plant Plant State Heating Busy Cooling Fan ees HVAC Zone Enabled Temperature All of the components in the diagrams above can be placed simply using Tools Handling Complex Installations Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 176 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The PICED software is designed to handle the majority of situations likely to be used The C Bus Thermostat does support additional complexity which is not supported by the PICED software at this time The most significant problem is if different zones have different capabilities For example it is possible for some zones to have cooling and heating but others to have only heating In situations like this it may be necessary to have multiple sets of components Contact Schneider Electric Australia Technical Support for help with these types of systems Notes C Touch Mark 1 units do not support the HVAC Application Please refer to the C Bus Thermostat documentation for additional details on the HVAC terminology and usage See also e Special Functions for HVAC Application functions e The HVAC Application thermostat Template which shows how the HVAC Application can be used with In built System IO 4 14 1 13 Audio In built System IO The C Bus Multi Room Audio MRA system can be con
294. ement Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 1 8 6 1 10 6 1 11 C Touch Screen Size The Black and White C Touch unit has a screen size of 320 pixels wide x 240 pixels high Backlight Control The C Touch unit contains a backlight to enable the screen to be seen in dark conditions The backlight control is automatic The backlight comes on whenever the screen is touched The backlight goes off after the time out duration set on the Project Options page The backlight can also be switched on and off from the Backlight Setting page of the unit To access the backlight setting page create a Page Link to the Backlight Set special page The backlight can also be controlled using buttons with Special Functions The automatic Backlight control is disabled when the backlight control page is displayed Note that the Electro Luminescent Backlights have a limited life and should not be run continuously This will happen if there is no time out set Colour Conversion With the monochrome Black and White Touchscreen colours are not able to be displayed The C Touch Configuration Software will also be used for colour Touchscreens in the future so although it allows colours to be selected for lines backgrounds and fonts they are converted to Black and White for the Monochrome screens as described below Borders If a white is selected for a border it will be displayed as white Any other colour will be displayed as black Ba
295. emulate a keypad Vacation key press Line Cut Alarm Sounding show if there is a line cut alarm Low Battery show if there is low backup battery charge Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 135 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Mains Failure show if there is a mains power failure Normal Operation show if there is normal operation no alarms Other Alarm Sounding show if there is an other alarm Panic State show if the system is in a panic state Password Entry Status show the password entry status Password OK show if the password is OK Raise Alarm raise an alarm Show Form show the Security Application form Tamper State show if the system is in a tamper state Zone Isolated show if a zone is isolated Zone State show the state of a zone secure or not Zone Status show the status of a zone text e Telephony Dial In Fail Reason show the reason for the last dial out failure Dial Out Fail Reason show the reason for the last dial in failure Divert divert the telephone Divert Clear clear the telephone diversion Diverted is the telephone diverted Diverted Number show the diverted telephone number Last Incoming Number show the last received telephone call number Last Outgoing Number show the last dialled telephone number Off Hook is the telephone off hook Off Hook Number show the off hook telephone number Off Hook Reason show the off hook reason Rejec
296. ent s CTRL F Paint the format to the selected Component s CTRL Delete or Delete Delete the selected Component s CTRL Z Undo the last action CTRL G Copy the group address from the Primary Selection to the Secondary Selection s Esc Cancel the Placement of a Component Component Alignment and Size Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 41 Home Management Series 4 4 CTRL H Primary Selection CTRL W Selection CTRL B the Primary Selection CTRL Shift A CTRL Shift L Selection CTRL Shift T Selection CTRL Shift R Selection CTRL Shift B Selection Other CTRL S F1 Alt F4 CTRL Shift E PICED Programmer s Guide Make the height of Secondary Selection s the same as the Make the width of Secondary Selection s the same as the Primary Make both height amp width of Secondary Selection s the same as Align the Secondary Selection s to the Primary Selection Align the Left of the Secondary Selection s to the Primary Align the Top of the Secondary Selection s to the Primary Align the Right of the Secondary Selection s to the Primary Align the Bottom of the Secondary Selection s to the Primary Simulation Mode Help Exit the PICED software Raise a deliberate error message for test and training purposes This is not a real error Do NOT report to Schneider Electric Australia Menu Items FILE MENU New Project create a new project Ope
297. entage C Bus Group Address Levels are expressed as a number decimal or hexadecimal or as a percentage 0 100 The conversion between the level and percent is Level Percent 255 100 0 0 1 2 2 5 3 7 4 10 etc Percent 100 Level 2 255 0 0 1 0 2 1 3 1 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 15 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 5 4 1 5 2 etc Example If level is 41 then Percent 100 41 2 255 16 784 and we keep the whole number 16 and hence level 41 16 Because there are 256 discrete levels 0 to 255 but only 101 different percentages 0 to 100 not all levels have a unique corresponding percentage If you are setting a group level as a percent there will be some levels which you are unable to set For example if you want to set to a level of 5 you can set the level as 2 see above If you want to set to a level of 6 you will be unable The next closest in this case will be 7 3 A full list of conversions is provided in the PICED help file and in the C Bus Concepts document The PICED software has a Convert Levels form to allow you to convert between percent level and Hexadecimal values Ramp Rates A C Bus Group Address can be set to ramp to a Level over a certain amount of time This time is called the Ramp Rate Ramp Rates supported by C Bus are e 0 seconds instantaneously e 4 seconds e 8 seconds
298. entered using the Special Day Manager See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Templates and Calendars Special Day Manager To open the Special Days manager either e click on the Project Edit Special Days menu item e click on the Special Days button on the tool bar e click on the Special Days button in the Schedule Manager Calendar Tab The Calendar Tab allows you to add or delete Special Days Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 218 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Calendar pay Types 44 vear 4 morth December 2010 Month gt Year gt Public Holiday Remove Old Days Remove All 4 250 Special Days used Help To add a Special Day e select the required month using the Month and Year buttons e double click on the required day e the Special Day Editor will appear which can be used to select the desired Special Day s To delete a Special Day repeat the above process and set the Special Day type to Normal To delete all Special Days before the selected month click on the Remove Old Days button If you have the Auto Delete Special Days option in the Project Details selected the Special Days will automatically be deleted after they have occurred To delete all Special Days click on the Remove All button Day Types Tab The Special Day Types are Normal Public Holiday and Special Day 1 to Special Day 6 Special Days 1 to 6 can be a
299. ep 281 286 289 Bitmap 107 Black and White Colour Conversion 283 Black and White C Touch 275 Black and White C Touch Mark 2 284 Reload Firmware 286 288 Border 101 283 colour 101 line style 101 shadow 101 shape 101 Borders Lines 132 Bottom 141 Bridges 10 Buttons 94 Component 95 C Calendar 99 119 164 Calibration 281 286 289 Carbon Footprint 255 Cascaded Scene Summary 329 C Bus Active 120 Applications 13 Bridges 10 Connecting to 316 Connection State 183 Default Application 53 63 70 Default Network 53 63 70 Error Application 25 169 240 241 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Fault diagnosis 331 332 Forms 235 Group Addresses 14 Introduction 10 Key Functions 122 Labels 16 239 Levels 14 Logging 319 Managers 235 Master Unit 329 Network Manager 236 Network Properties 238 Network State 183 Networks 10 Options 53 63 70 Percentage 15 Power Failure Recovery 53 63 70 Project Selection 52 Properties 122 Ramping 53 63 70 Selecting 18 Status 40 120 Tags 14 29 Time Application 53 63 70 time out 7 ToolKit 5 29 274 Unit Address 53 63 70 Voltage Monitors 253 C Bus Key Functions 262 Custom 263 264 C Bus Networks Limits 7 States 236 C Bus Timer 96 C Gate 5 52 312 Algorithm 312 Auto connect 36 Auto Reconnect 314 Config File 313 Connection Process 312 Error 314 Error State 313 Event Level 313 Fail 314 F
300. er a unique name for the Schedule The description should be something meaningful to you so that it makes sense when you see it ina list The Schedule Locked option controls whether the user is able to edit this Schedule If it is selected then 1 It will be hidden or have an icon next to it in the Schedule Manager 2 It will be skipped when using Schedule In Built System IO variables The Schedule can be enabled for just selected Profiles by selecting the required Profiles from the Used in Profiles list You can add information related to the Schedule by entering it in the Notes box Schedule Enabling A Schedule can be turned on or off If the schedule is turned on the Schedule proceeds as programmed If it is off the Schedule is ignored This effect is achieved by means of an enabling Group Address This Group Address and the Level determine whether a Schedule is to run If the Schedule does not need to be turned on or off the Group Address is left as unused Typically a particular Group Address on the Control Application number CA hex will enable the Schedule when it is at 100 The Schedule Editor Enable Tab allows you to select how you want to enable disable the Schedule Enable Time Day Event nabled By Application Enable X Group Sprinkler 1 Schedule Fd vValue ON Enabled v 7 J Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 202 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide
301. er s Guide 11 4 84 11 4 85 11 4 86 11 4 87 Password length must be between x and y Cause The Password length is either too short or too long Solution Enter a password with the correct number of digits Error 14085 Message Can not add any more Users Maximum is limit There is a limit to the number of Users which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Users by deleting any that are no longer required Error 14086 Message User x and y have the same password Cause Two Users have the same password which will make it impossible to determine who is logging in Solution Change the password for one or more users Error 14087 Message Two or more Access Levels have the same name Cause Two or more Access Levels have the same name which will make it difficult to determine which level is selected Solution Change the name of one or more Access Levels Error 14088 Message Can not add any more Access Levels Maximum is limit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 365 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 88 11 4 89 11 4 90 Cause There is a limit to the number of Access Levels which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Access Levels by combining several together Error 14089 Message This Access Level will never be enabled because reason Cause The Access Level w
302. ernet Cross over Cable Colour C Touch 1 2 Networked connection A networked connection will require an Ethernet hub switch or router to connect the PC and the Colour C Touch This is the preferred connection type as it is generally the simplest Ethernet Cable Colour C Touch 1 3 Remote Connection To connect to a Colour C Touch at a remote site via the Internet you will need e An Internet connection to your PC e An Internet connection at the remote site e Port forwarding or port mapping set in the Router to enable connection to the Colour C Touch TCP IP ports 8336 and 8081 e Remote Access settings set in Project Details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 291 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Internet Router Colour C Touch 2 Save the project if any changes have been made 3 In the Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item or click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar The Transfer Project to Colour C Touch form will appear 4 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project is done To see details click on the Show Errors button 5 Select the required action e f you want to transfer the configuration data for the project that is already open select Transfer Current Project e f you want to just open the CT
303. esired size or use the Re scale Images function Add a Component with the Networking Special Function Edit the Scene to add some Scene Components Open the Project Details form and select a wav file The project has a compilation error or uses Open the Logic Editor and fix any invalid tags An invalid C Bus Network has been used This is a Network which can not be accessed from the Network which the unit is installed on An invalid C Bus Application has been used for lighting control Valid Applications are 1 127 136 202 and 203 01 7F 88 CA CB hexadecimal The C Bus Properties for a component can only use Lighting Applications There is an error with the usage of the C Bus Networks Project uses too many C Bus Applications See Software Limits for details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Compilation Errors You will need to compile not run the logic to see warning messages Remove the use of this Network or change the unit to another Network See the Project Summary for details of what uses the invalid networks Remove the use of this Non Lighting Compatible Application Refer to the Project Summary for details of where the Applications are used When complete save and re open the Project Use the Network Manager to correct the error Remove the use of some C Bus Applications Refer to the Project Summary for details of where the Applications are used When complet
304. ess described above Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 318 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 4 8 5 If you are transferring a project to a Colour C Touch which is already installed you may not want to include the Power Failure Recovery file with the Project Archive as this will overwrite the existing settings See the Exporting to an Archive topic for details The Colour C Touch has an option to broadcast the group levels onto C Bus after the Power Failure Recovery is complete See also Schedule Catch Up Simulation Mode To disable editing functions the PICED software can be placed in Simulation Mode by either e selecting the Simulation Mode item from the View menu e by pressing CTRL S To get out of Simulation Mode you can either e press CTRL S or e Simulation Mode will be exited automatically after 2 to 3 days Simulation Mode does the following things e Components are activated by a left or right mouse click this is useful for running on Touch Panel PCs e The menus and tool bars are hidden e The Window is set to the same size as the Project Screen Size Note that the Simulation Mode cursor image can be set in the Program Options form Usage with Wiser Home Control The Wiser Home Control runs Simulation Mode in a web browser on a separate form This may require the installation of Adobe Flash to run Simulation Mode for the Wiser Home Control only simulates the user
305. ess to the Access Control feature otherwise it is possible to be permanently locked out of the software The lowest Access Level default name Anyone and the highest Access Level default name Administrator must always be enabled otherwise it is possible to be locked out of the software for some time See also Software Limits Access Level Editor The Access Levels Editor is accessed via the Access Control Manager and allows the editing of the name of an Access Level Users Editor The Users Editor is accessed via the Access Control Manager and allows the editing of the properties of a user The properties which can be set for each user are e Name this is the name of the User e Access Level this is the Access Level for the User e Password this is the password for the User Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 216 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 17 4 User Name 1 2 ohn ABC DEF Access Level administrator v Password Numbers Only Enter Password a Verify Password free ao m io Boa 2 IN 2 Note that the password must be a number and can be entered by clicking on the Password boxes and typing numbers or by clicking on the numeric buttons on the right The buttons have letters on the bottom which may be useful in remembering the password See also Software Limits Log in Log out To gain access to the PICED software it may be necessar
306. essage Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 391 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide A valid licence for this software could not be found licence Details Consequences To purchase a full version contact Schneider Electric Australia e Click on OK to continue e Click on View Licence to see licence dongle details e Click on Close to close the PICED software Cause The PICED software requires a Licence Key to operate A valid key has not been found Solution Click on OK to continue The consequences of the missing licence are listed and will apply Click on View Licence to see the licence dongle details Click on Close to close the PICED software Obtain a valid licence from Schneider Electric Australia to operate the PICED software fully 11 4 179 Information 14181 Message Licence dongle details Details Reason You have requested details of the Licence Key Action Click on OK 11 4 180 Warning 14182 Message This will only update the firmware in a unit which has had the firmware erased with the Unit Reset fo update the firmware in an operational unit use the Transfer Project to Unit menu item Cause The Transfer Recover C Touch 2 menu item has been selected This will only update the firmware in a Black and White C Touch Mark 2 unit which has had the firmware erased with the Unit Reset button To update the firmware in an operational unit use the Transfer Project to
307. et Component s Width to match selected Component Set Component s Size to match selected Component Move Component Back Move Component to Back Move Component Forward Move Component to Front Group Components Un Group Components Tools Toolbar B3 s AABS e2eascorae The Buttons functions are respectively Open Schedule Manager Open Scene Manager Open Irrigation Manager Open Special Day Manager Open Access Control Manager Open Logic Editor Open Load Monitor Open E Mail Manager Open Profile Manager Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 39 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 2 Open Widget Manager Open Log Set default Font Transfer project to unit Set Simulation Mode Time Toolbar 18 05 2003 5 23 18 PM This shows you the current date and time Double clicking on the toolbar allows you to set the computer date and time To see the function of any item on a toolbar hold the mouse over the item in the PICED software and you will see a hint pop up Status Bar The status bar is shown at the bottom of the screen unless it has been moved and shows the status of the C Bus connection see below the status of the C Bus network synchronisation see below details of the selected Component the status of the Schedules an S means the Schedules are running the status of the Logic Engine an L means the Logic is running the current mouse coordinates if the mo
308. etwork Lighting Bedside 1 20 Local Ne Lighting Bathroom Ligh 4 Local Network Lighting Bedside 2 20 Local Ne Lighting Bed 1 Light 5 Local Network Lighting Dining 1 20 Local Ne Lighting Bed 2 Light hs 6 Local Network Lighting Kitchen 2 0 Local Ne Lighting Bedside 1 7 Local Network Lighting Lounge 0 Local Ne Lighting Bedside 2 Local Ne Lighting Bedside Lights lt Local Ne Lighting Blinds 1 Local Ne Lighting Blinds CLOSE lt lt Local Ne Lighting Blinds OPEN lacal a linhtina Cantra linhk 2 i lt gt 7 250 Scene Components Used OK ae Help Scene execution 0 4 seconds approximately Available Groups The Available Groups list shows all Group Addresses which could be used in the Scene There are several controls which allow the display of just the Group Addresses of interest Network combo box this allows the display of the Group Addresses for a particular Network All Network check box this allows the display of the Group Addresses on all Networks Application combo box this allows the display of the Group Addresses for a particular Application e All Network check box this allows the display of the Group Addresses on all Applications Show All Groups this displays all Group Addresses in the selected Network s and Application s Show Groups not in Scene this displays all Group Addresses in the selected Network s and Application s which are not already in the Scene
309. etworks this connection process may take some time C Gate can also be automatically closed when PICED closes using an option on the Program Options form See also e Command Line Parameters e Project C Gate Options e C Gate Options e Automatic Reconnection e Advanced C Bus Fault Diagnosis document in the Manuals folder C Gate Algorithm The PICED software uses C Gate to communicate with C Bus The initialisation process of C Gate is as follows 1 Connect to C Gate at the selected IP Address 2 Set the C Bus project to use 3 Set any operation modes required by PICED 4 Open each network selected in the C Bus Network Manager in order local networks first then bridged networks 5 Monitor each C Bus Network State to find when they are synchronised 6 As each network is synchronised do a tree to retrieve the current Group Address levels 7 Once all networks are synchronised the state of each network will be monitored on a regular basis and another tree will be performed regularly unless this Option is disabled The above process can be observed using the Log For more information on the usage of C Gate refer to the C Gate documentation See also C Bus Network States Reconciliation Process Generally no C Bus commands will be transmitted to a network until it is fully synchronised Any Lighting C Bus commands sent before a network is synchronised will be queued and the levels will be set once the network is
310. evant software folder e C Gate c Clipsal c gate2 e PICED c Clipsal PICED e HomeGate c Clipsal HomeGate e Schedule Plus c Clipsal SchedulePlus The Output File is the file you want the filtered log to be written to Enter a file name or click on the folder button and select a file Time If you want just the log file entries for a particular range of dates and times select the Filter by Time check box Enter the start time and stop time for the time interval of interest Key Words If you want just the log file entries containing particular key words select the Filter by Key Words check box If the case lower case or UPPER CASE is important select the Match Case check box If you only want to select one keyword enter it in the box and select the Only option If you want more than one keyword enter the first keyword in the first box select the AND or OR option and then enter the second keyword in the second box Examples Original Schedule Plus log file 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Bus Tx Set Group 32 On User Click 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Tx 14 on 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 42 PM C Gate Rx 14 200 OK HOUSE 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 05 43 PM C Gate Rx lighting on HOUSE 254 56 32 25 07 2006 4 45 46 PM C Bus Tx Set Group 33 Off User Click 25 07 2006 4 45 46 PM C Gate Tx 15 off 254 56 33 25 07 2006 4 45 46 PM C Gate Rx 15 200 OK HOUSE 254 56 33 Copyright 2014 Schnei
311. ext 2 If PICED is running e Select File New Project e Select Transfer Project From Unit e Select Next 3 If PICED is running and you have a C Touch project already open e Select the Transfer Transfer Project from Unit menu item The form below will appear Connection Connection Type Serial COM2 Change C Bus Project HOME bad If the Connection Type is wrong click the Change button and select the correct connection Select the C Bus Project which was is used with the C Touch project Click on Next The next page will be shown IV Use Zip File if Present Text Components Create as Text Components Create as Images utton Components Create as default Buttons Create as Buttons with 2 Images hape Components Create as Shape Components f Create as Buttons with 2 Images I Transfer User Settings 5 If you wish to transfer the full C Touch project select the Transfer Project check box then select the options for text buttons and shapes see below 6 If you wish to transfer the user settings for Scenes and Schedules select the Transfer User Settings check box 7 Click on the Finish button 8 If you have selected to transfer the project a new project is then created You will need to e Select where the project is to be stored and enter a file name Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 278 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Gu
312. f Month 2 Repeat Schedule Month Does the Schedule occur on a Boolean Yes particular month Schedule Month Mask _ Bit mask controlling the month Integer Yes the Schedule occurs on See notes any year Schedule sere pee pe of Month week of the month a ee on a particular Special Day on a particular Special Day Schedule Repeat Due Next due date of the selected Yes Schedule if it is a repeat Schedule Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 161 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Schedule Repeat Interval Day repeat interval of the Integer Yes selected Schedule Schedule Event Variable Name Settable Schedule Level C Bus level of the selected Integer Yes Schedule Schedule Pulse Duration The duration of the Schedule da pulse Schedule Event Text describing what the String No Schedule does Schedule Controls C Bus Does the Schedule control a Boolean No Group C Bus Group Selecting a Schedule Schedules are controlled via the Selected Schedule The Selected Schedule is the one corresponding to the Schedule Number in built System IO variable which can be changed to select the required Schedule The name of the Selected Schedule can be displayed using the Schedule Name in built System IO variable The other in built System IO variables can be used to display and control the properties of the Selected Schedule Schedules which can not be edit
313. f the project including e Schedules e Scenes e User System IO Variables e Irrigation Control e Special Days e Group Address Levels saved in Power Failure Recovery File The Power Meter data and Graph data will also change after the Project has been transferred to the unit If you are going to update the Project it is important to retrieve these changes before you start editing the project otherwise they will be lost The steps to follow are 1 Transfer the Project from the C Touch C Touch Mark 2 Colour C Touch C Touch Spectrum PAC or Wiser unit 2 Edit the project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 310 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 10 3 Transfer the edited project to the C Touch C Touch Mark 2 Colour C Touch C Touch Spectrum PAC or Wiser unit The easiest way to get the changes from the unit is to select the automatic reminder in the Project Details form or to use the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item Cloning Units To make an exact copy clone of the project in an existing Black and White C Touch or PAC 1 Connect your computer to the unit to be cloned see Serial for B amp W_C Touch and USB for PAC 2 Select the Transfer Read File From Unit menu item 3 The configuration file from the C Touch PAC unit will be transferred to the computer config mot in the PICED directory 4 Disconnect the unit 5 Connect the second unit must
314. f you are connecting directly just select the COM port number and the speed for C Touch Mark 2 and C Touch Spectrum only If you are connecting via C Bus you will also need to have set the Unit Address of the Touchscreen in the Project Details form The Show COM Ports button with the on it opens the Windows Device Manager to show which COM ports are used by which devices C Gate Project Close When closing a project with open C Bus Networks Leave Networks open Close Networks IF C Bus Project is in use by another application networks will not be closed Ask each time Shut Down behaviour When closing the software Close C Gate Applies only when C Gate is in Console Mode Does not affect a remote C Gate or C Gate as a Service Ask each time JV Automatically re connect to C Gate if connection Fails When closing a project you have a choice of whether to close the C Bus Networks or not If the networks are not closed then the COM Port or CNI will not be available for use by other projects and or other software If the C Bus project is being used by other software it will not be closed until the other software also closes the project When closing the PICED software you have a choice of whether the close C Gate or not Note that C Gate will not be closed if it is remote ie running on a different computer or if it is running as a Service Select the Automatically re connect C Gate if connec
315. figuration data file but do not transfer If you are wanting to transfer a different file select Transfer Other Configuration File and select the desired file Click on OK The archive file is now ready to be transferred using the Transfer Utility The Transfer Utility will be opened for you If you have more than one Network card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to the Wiser Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed Select the desired Wiser unit from the list If the Wiser unit has out of date firmware the Firmware tab will be displayed Enter a password admin by default and click on Transfer Firmware Wait for the Wiser unit to re start then repeat steps 3 to 6 The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICED Firmware If the Wiser firmware is up to date the Transfer tab will be selected Click on Start Wait for the Wiser unit to re start Open a web browser and enter the IP Address of the Wiser unit You should be able to see your project and control it Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 302 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 6 2 6 6 3 Notes A Prior to transferring a project to Wiser you will need to log into the Wiser user interface and enable the Project Update option refer to the Wiser user
316. fresh Project 53 63 70 Refresh Project from Unit 280 286 288 293 298 303 308 Reload Firmware 286 288 Remote Control 127 Page 430 Home Management Series Reports Cascaded Scenes 329 Check Project 324 Project Summary 328 User Manual 338 Re Scale Images 266 Reset 281 286 289 298 Reset Load Alarm 316 Resizing Screen 51 Resources 282 289 C Touch 281 287 289 PAC 299 Right Mouse Click 32 RSS Feeds 234 Manager 234 Run Program 143 S Save 82 89 Auto 32 Save Page As 82 Scenes 183 Adding 187 195 Adjust 185 Auto Create 267 Cascaded Scene Report 329 C Bus Properties 122 Components 194 Deleting 187 195 Duplicating 187 195 Editing 157 187 195 Editor 188 194 Enable Editing 188 194 In built System IO 155 157 indicator 186 Indicators 23 53 63 70 Items 377 Key Functions 122 levels 185 Limits 7 Manager 187 Master Unit 329 Matrix Manager 195 Modify 185 Notes 188 Nudge 53 63 70 Printing 89 Pro Forma 336 Ramp 53 63 70 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Report 329 setting 184 185 Special Functions 151 status 120 186 Summary 329 System IO 155 Tools 133 Trigger 188 triggering from other units 185 triggering in other units 185 Triggers 184 185 Schedules 198 Auto Create 267 Auto delete 53 63 70 Catch up 198 272 C Bus 207 Day 203 Description 202 Due Date 119 Editor 202 Enable Editing 202 Enabling 20
317. from one Network to another To change everything from one Network to another select the Tools Change Networks menu item This displays the Change Networks form From Network To Network 252 Network 3 254 Network 1 253 Network 2 253 Network 2 254 Network 1 X f This enables the Network to be changed in e All Components e All Scenes e All Schedules e All Irrigation Zones e The project Default Network To select the changes to be made select the new Networks in the To Network column In the case above the changes will be e Everything on Network 1 will be changed to Network 3 e Everything on Network 2 will stay on Network 2 e Everything on Network 3 will be changed to Network 1 Change Colours The colours of Component Borders and Fonts and Page Backgrounds can be quickly changed by selecting the Tools Change Colours menu item This opens the Change Colours form To change the colours of the project 1 Select which components you wish to change the colours of Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 269 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 2 Select whether to change the Component border or not 3 Select whether to change the Page background colours or not 4 Select whether to change the font colors or not 5 Select the colour to change from 6 Select the colour to change to 7 Click on Apply
318. g Event Level 9 is useful when resolving serious C Bus communications problems Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 313 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 7 3 sync time This is the period between C Gate doing a background synchronisation This can be increased for busy networks to reduce the amount of C Bus traffic This enables the C Gate log network error commands This is the number of units which need to be in error state for a network to be put into error state If a network has less units in error state the PICED software will show the network as being in Operational State Increasing this value will make it less likely for a network to go into the error state but this should not be done to hide problems on a network with communications problems network retries This is the number of times C Gate re tries a failed command Increasing this will make it more likely for a message to get through and therefore less likely for a unit to go into error state or a network to go into Operational or error state but this should not be done to hide problems on a network with communications problems See also e Project C Gate Options e Advanced C Bus Fault Diagnosis document in the Manuals folder Automatic Reconnection The PICED software can not operate without a connection to C Gate The connection to C Gate can fail for a number of reasons 1 C Gate could not be started applies on prog
319. ge Error 14054 Message Can not add any more Schedules Maximum is imit Cause There is a limit to the number of Schedules which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution 1 Delete some Schedules Solution 2 Use Schedules to set scenes rather than controlling Groups to minimise the number of different Schedules needed Solution 3 Use pulses in Schedules rather than an on and an off Schedule Error 14055 Message Error in Daylight Savings Data Cause There is an error in the data which has been entered for the Daylight Savings data Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 356 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 55 11 4 56 11 4 57 Check each of the parameters on the Daylight Savings tab of the Project Details form Confirm 14056 Message Are you Sure you want to delete the Schedule Collection and all of its Schedules Reason Deleting a Schedule Collection will remove all of its Schedules This action will not be able to be undone Action Click on Yes to delete the Schedule Collection and its Schedules Click on No to cancel the delete operation Error 14057 Message There are too many C Bus Networks used The limit is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of Networks which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Networks being used Use the C Bus Network Manager to select which C Bus
320. ge on a Page as drawing stretched images uses considerable processor time When a image is displayed on a Black and White C Touch the image will be dithered first 4 9 3 3 Shapes A Shape Component has a border and background and nothing else It can be used for displaying Rectangles Triangles Circles and Ellipses Pointers Lines Arbitrary shapes Invisible hot spots which can be activated Examples Cg ge eg eee SS SITTA S25 SESS 5 Note when placing a Shape the border shape can be selected from a drop down list on the Tool Bar 4 9 3 4 Buttons A Button Component consists of a border background text and an image All of these parts can be used to indicate C Bus status e The border and background can change colour according the Group Address level e The text words and font can change according the Group Address state e The image can toggle between any two images to indicate the Group Address state A Slider Component is used to set or show the precise level of a Group Examples 4 9 3 5 Sliders A slider can be either a normal slider or a bar graph Bar graph Components are not available in Black and White C Touch projects A Slider consists of a border background slot thumb the bit that slides up and down or left and right and tick marks the lines along the side The Slider thumb is used to set or indicate the C Bus Level For example if the thumb is 80 of
321. ght click on the Scenes list and select the Print item The Printer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 197 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 4 16 1 Setup allows the selection of the printer Importing and Exporting The data in the Scene Matrix manager can be exported to or imported from a CSV format file These files can be easily used with spreadsheets databases and other software To export the Scene Data 1 Click on the Export button 2 Enter the file name 3 Click on OK To import the Scene Data 1 Click on the Import button 2 Click on the Yes button 3 Select the file name 4 Click on OK Scene Components which can not be edited If the Scene Component Locked option is selected then the cell will have a grey background and will not be able to be edited Schedules A Schedule is used whenever something has to occur at a particular time This can be an event that occurs only once or something that is repeated time and time again The PICED Software has a list of things to do and every second it checks whether one of those things should be done at this particular time Every Schedule creates a new entry in that list Generally Schedules are independent of each other However sometimes one Schedule but not another must be executed depending upon some condition For example the Schedule of watering used in the summer every two days at night might be quite different than
322. gic help file shows how to estimate the amount of code which is possible e The actual Logic usage can be logged e The C Touch status indicator will indicate if there is too much logic The average scan duration is not allowed to exceed 75ms This is reported as 100 However a scan is allowed to occasionally take up to 150ms 200 as long as this does not bring the average over 75ms Transferred Images The C Touch Configuration Software generates a file which is transferred to a C Touch unit The format of the images transferred for each component depends upon the type of component Each component has from none to three images transferred to the C Touch unit so that it can draw the components when needed No Image Completely invisible components Such as a shape with no border background or a button with no border background text or image do not have an image transferred This means that they use very little memory These components are often used to create invisible hot spots on the screen which have a page link and will cause a page change when pressed Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 289 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 4 Single Image Shapes and text only have a single image saved Two Images Buttons generally have two images saved one for the active state and one for the inactive state One of the two images will be drawn by C Touch according to the state of the associa
323. group allows you to select Whether to Show 5 rows if selected some days at the end of the month will be shown on the top row If not selected there will be 6 rows e Day Order the days can be shown from Sunday to Saturday or from Monday to Sunday Highlight Today this selects the method used to highlight today s date e None today is not highlighted e Cell Colour the selected cell colour see below is used e Circle a circle in the selected colour is drawn around today e Rectangle a rectangle in the selected colour is drawn around today Special Day this selects the method used to highlight Special Days e None the Special Days are not highlighted e Cell Colour the selected cell colour see below is used Rectangle a rectangle in the selected colour is drawn around Special Days Text text using the Special Day abbreviations is written in the bottom right corner of the days Cell Colour and Text combination of above Rectangle and Text combination of above Header this selects what is to be written on top of the Calendar e None no heading e Month the name of the selected month e Short Month the short 3 character name of the month e Month and Year the name of the month followed by the year e Short Month and Year the short name of the month followed by the year Month to Display either select the Current Month or the Selected Month Selected with In built System IO Offset the month displa
324. h is controlled by the HVAC plant Typically a zone is a single room Each Zone can be controlled separately if desired The columns of data presented on the Zone tab include e Monitor this selects whether you want to monitor this HVAC zone Only zones which are Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 242 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 7 2 monitored can be used in the project Name the name of the HVAC Zone Group the Zone Group Zone the Zone number Plant Type the type of plant used for this Zone Operating Type the Zone operating type Temperature the current Zone temperature Set Level the set level set point temperature for the Zone Setback the setback limit for the Zone Guard the guard limits for the Zone Status the status of the Zone Error any error states for the Zone Sensor Status the status of the Zone temperature sensor Mode the mode for the zone manual program override or auto Any data which is not currently valid generally because it has not yet been received will be blank Monitoring Zones To Monitor a specific HVAC Zone to allow it to be used in the project either 1 Edit a Zone if it already exists and enable the monitoring or 2 Add a new Zone and enable the monitoring As data is received it will be shown on the form To refresh the data on the form press the Refresh button To automatically update the form when new data is receive
325. h to select If the Primary Selection component is important select that first by clicking on it then select the area You can also select all of the components by using the Select All speed button or selecting the Edit Select Select All menu item Multiple components can be de selected by selecting the Edit Select Deselect All menu item or by clicking somewhere outside of all of the selected components To select a hidden component select the Edit Select Select Hidden Components menu item To select a particular component number select the Edit Select Select Component No menu item See also Component Manipulation and Grouping Components Page 139 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 6 2 4 9 6 3 4 9 6 4 Moving Components To move one or more Components select them then move by dragging them with the mouse or using the CTRL Arrow Keys If you have selected more than one Component you can click on any of them to drag the entire group While you are moving the components you will see an outline of where they will be placed If you are unable to move Components it may be because the Components are Locked Component Size The size of Components can be set in several ways Some components can have their size set as they are placed When placing these components click on the screen where you want one corner to be drag to where you want the diagonally opposite corner to be and r
326. hat knows the right password or e Do not attempt to perform an action for which you are unauthorized Error 14004 Message This file type can not be loaded Cause The file type you have attempted to load is incorrect The file type is defined by the extension of the file name For example the file c temp test ctd is a PICED project file Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 340 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 4 11 4 5 11 4 6 11 4 7 Select a file of the correct type The file type is shown in the Open File form Confirm 14005 Message File Filename Exists Do you want to replace it Reason The file name that you have selected already exists If you save the file with this name it will over write the existing one and the existing one will be lost Action If you want to replace the existing file click on Yes If you want to save the file as a different name click on No Confirm 14006 Message File Name data has changed Do you want to save the data Reason You have performed an operation that will close the project but the data in your project has changed since you last saved it If you do not save it the data will be lost Action Click on Yes to save the changes to the data Click on No to lose the changes to the data and continue with the operation Click on Cancel to cancel the operation Error 14007 Message Error creating Form R
327. have a page link and will cause a page change when pressed Single Image Shapes and text only have a single image saved Two Images Buttons generally have two images saved one for the active state and one for the inactive state One of the two images will be drawn by C Touch according to the state of the associated C Bus Group Address If the Active and Inactive Images are the same only one is transferred Three Images Sliders have up to three images Two are for the background of the slider active and inactive and the third is for the thumb the bit that slides up and down Dynamic Text Components Clocks Level Indicators and Monitors all have their text generated dynamically ie as required These components have a single image saved for their background and have fonts transferred as required The fonts used for Text components do not need to be transferred as they are saved as an image Care needs to be used when using components which are transparent but not invisible For example a button with no border or background but an image or text When the image for this is saved it is a copy of what is on the computer screen but it is not actually transparent This means that if you put a transparent component over the top of something that changes eg A button with an indicator or a clock you will not see the thing below change state Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 282 Home Manag
328. have the same firmware version 6 Transfer the file to the unit select the Transfer Other Configuration File option and select the config mot file transferred in step 3 To make an exact copy clone of the project in a colour C Touch 1 Connect the Colour C Touch unit to be copied 2 Transfer the project from the Colour C Touch 3 Connect the Colour C Touch unit to be changed 4 Transfer the project to the new Colour C Touch Refer to the C Touch Colour Transfer Utility help file for details Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 311 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 7 7 1 C Gate C Gate must be used for connecting to C Bus It provides a point of control for one or more applications which wish to control and monitor C Bus simultaneously Refer to the C Gate manuals for more details C Gate is installed as part of the C Bus ToolKit which can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric Australia web site To find the minimum version of C Gate required for use with this software click the Help Software Properties menu item Alternatively refer to the software compatibility matrix on the Schneider Electric Australia web site To use C Gate with this software 1 Start C Gate if it isn t already running 2 Select the Connect to C Bus item from the Options menu The C Gate connection progress is shown on the status bar at the bottom of the screen If C Gate has not yet synchronised all n
329. he heat cool operational type These restrictions are implemented in the HVAC Application Manager The HVAC Operating Type Name In built System IO variable is useful for indicating the current Operating Type To display control the on off state of the whole HVAC system use the HVAC Zone Group State in built system IO variable not the Operating Type Mode The Mode of the HVAC system is mainly used to control whether the system is using Program Schedule control or Manual control It can also be used to change to override mode to temporarily override the Program settings If evaporative plant is used for cooling the auto mode is used to allow the temperature to be set using the Comfort Level If the manual mode is selected the fan speed will be controlled by the Set Level Although the mode can show that the Plant is off you can not set it to off using the HVAC Mode in Built System IO variable The HVAC Zone Group State in built system IO variable can be used for this Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 174 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Fan Speed The HVAC Fan Speed In Built System IO variable can be used to control the fan speed A value of 0 corresponds to auto The HVAC Fan Speed Text In Built System IO variable shows the fan speed as text including the word auto when auto is selected Zone Enable The HVAC Zone Enabled In built System IO variable is used for swit
330. he Apparent Power The ratio of Real Power to Apparent Power is known as the Power Factor Power Factor Real Power Apparent Power Some power meters measure Real Power These are ideal because their reading will agree with the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 261 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 13 power meter provided by your energy provider Other power meters measure Apparent Power These typically use a current clamp to measure the current then multiply this by a nominal mains voltage to get the power If you know a typical Power Factor you can use it with the Apparent Power from the meter to get an approximation of the Real Power which is what you are wanting to measure In some installations there can be considerable Reactive Power even with most loads switched off This can result in a very misleading measurement of power in this situation To compensate for this an offset can be used with Analogue Power Meters and Pulse Power Meters This offset value is the Reactive Power of the circuit with everything switched off Measuring this Reactive Power will require an electrician with appropriate instruments C Bus Custom Key Functions The C Bus Key Function for a Component can be either a standard key function or a custom key function Colour C Touch only A C Bus Key Function is a series of actions Microfunctions to be performed when the user presses a key There is one Microfu
331. he Group Address Recover this shows whether the load is to have its level Recovered after a power failure Colour C Touch only Monitor this shows whether the Load is being monitored or not see below Colour C Touch only Power Rating this is the Power Rating in Watts of the load use of this is optional Colour C Touch only Power this is the power being used now eg a 150W load running at 50 will be 75W Colour C Touch only Note that Power values are calculated they are not measured values Selecting a Load To select a Load click on the load in the table To select more than one load select one load then e click on another load while holding down the SHIFT key to select all of the loads in between or e click on individual loads while holding down the CTRL key Monitoring If C Bus is connected the PICED software monitors the state of any loads which are selected these have yes in the Monitor column every 10 seconds and calculates the power for each load and total power Tool Bar The buttons on the Tool Bar are explained below Show Monitored Groups e Monitor Load this activates or de activates the monitoring of the selected load s e Power Fail Recovery this activates or de activates the power fail recovery of the selected load s Power this allows you to set the load power optional Refresh this refreshes the display Auto Refresh this automatically refreshes the display e
332. he Measurement Channel Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 390 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 175 Warning 14177 Message There are Components using the HVAC Application which do not have a corresponding monitored HVAC Zone Cause The project has used a Component with In built System IO with HVAC Zones which are not listed in the HVAC Application Manager or are listed but are not monitored These Components will not work without a corresponding monitored HVAC Zone in the HVAC Application Manager Solution Click Auto Create to create the necessary HVAC Zone or to enable the monitoring in an existing zone Click OK to close the HVAC Application Manager form Click Cancel to leave the HVAC Application Manager form open 11 4 176 Confirmation 14178 Message This HVAC Zone is used by a Project Component Are you sure you want to delete it Reason The selected HVAC Zone is used by a Component through an In built System IO Deleting this HVAC Zone will mean that the Component will no longer work Actions Click on Yes to delete the HVAC Zone Click on No to leave the HVAC Zone 11 4 177 Warning 14179 Message The function does nothing in PICED but will perform an action when used in a unit type unit Cause A Component has been Activated which will perform a function when downloaded to a unit but does nothing in the PICED software Solution Click on OK 11 4 178 Error 14180 M
333. he enable state shown in the Schedule Table View To make the refreshing happen automatically select the Auto Refresh check box The refreshing may take several seconds when there are a lot of Schedules Schedules which can not be edited If the Schedule Locked option is selected then e There will be a padlock icon next to it in the Schedule Manager e Attempting to change these Schedules will raise a confirmation message Schedules which are not used in the current Profile will have an X icon next to them Although they can be edited it will not affect the Project See also Software Limits Project Summary Printing and Schedule Catch Up Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 201 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 2 4 16 2 1 4 16 2 2 Schedule Properties The Schedule Editor allows the user to edit a schedule The Schedule Editor is accessed via the Schedule Manager Each Schedule has several main properties e A name description An enabling Group The time at which it will occur A day or days on which it will occur An event which will be executed Make the necessary changes on each of the tabs When all changes are complete click on the OK button To exit without making changes to the Schedule click on the Cancel button See also Special Functions Schedule Examples Year View and Schedule Catch Up Schedule General The General tab of the Schedule Editor form allows you to ent
334. he necessary networks Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 347 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 24 11 4 25 11 4 26 11 4 27 Error 14025 Message Error using C Bus database Reason Cause There was a fault when using the C Bus data base The Reason information should provide clues as to the cause Solution Click on OK Error 14026 Message Please select a scene Cause The C Bus action has been set to set a Scene but no scene was selected Solution Select the Scene to be executed from the drop down list Error 14027 Message Please select a valid C Bus Application Cause No C Bus Application was selected Solution Select a valid C Bus Application from the drop down list Error 14028 Message Please select a valid C Bus Group Address Cause No C Bus Group Address was selected Solution Select a valid C Bus Group Address from the drop down list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 348 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 28 11 4 29 11 4 30 11 4 31 Error 14029 Message Group Address Tag could not be added Please close this program and use the C Bus Tool Kit Cause There was a problem creating a new Group Address tag Solution Use the C Bus Tool Kit to add the Group Address tag Error 14030 Message Group Address Tag could not be edited Please close this program and use the C Bus Tool Kit
335. he same state as that Preset If the On Off or Preset key functions are used all Components in the Scene get set to the selected level Scene Status Indication There are several methods which can be used to enable a Component to show the status of a Scene The status of a Scene refers to whether the Scene is set or not These methods are e Showing Scene Component Level Status the default option e Showing Trigger Status e Using Indicator Kill Messages The status of a Component is shown using the options selected using the Status Tab Showing Scene Component Level Status If a Component is used to directly set a Scene the Scene Indicator option can be selected on the Status Tab to show if all Scene Components are at or ramping towards their target level To use this option e Select the Scene Indicator option on the Status Tab e De select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option Showing Trigger Status One option is to show whether the Scene Trigger is set This is useful when a Component is used to set the Scene Trigger Group to trigger the Scene The Component status can show whether the trigger is set This will accurately show if a Scene has just been set but it will not show if the Scene has been broken by having one of the Scene Components groups change level To use this option e Select the Preset Level option on the Status Tab e De select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status
336. hen save as a doc file Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 338 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 11 1 Error Messages Purpose Error messages are used to indicate several things e You have attempted to do something wrong or have forgotten to do something essential e To warn that something you have done or not done may cause problems e To get confirmation of something you have requested When an error message appears you can click on the Help button to get more information about the cause and solution to the problem Suppressing Error Messages Some error messages can be suppressed so that they don t appear These error messages will have a check box that can be selected so that the error message is not shown again To re enable all of the error messages select the Options Enable Error Messages menu item Reporting Errors When an unexpected error occurs you may see a form which looks like x An unexpected error occurred Exception EInOutError in module TSConfig exe at OO3ABB7D File access denied Module reports Source reports pas Line 68 Procedure Reports StartReport 4n email containing diagnostic information and a log of recent activity will be sent to Clipsal Integrated Systems Please include your comments below Email To errors cispl com au To report the error to Schneider Electric Australia 1 Enter some comments which describe what you were doing whe
337. here a project exceeds the physical limitations of a single C Bus network the project may need to be segregated into several networks Each network can be connected to one or more other networks via a bridge Some definitions are required for the understanding of C Bus Networks e The computer uses a PC Interface PCI or a C Bus Network Interface CNI to send and receive messages from C Bus e C Bus Networks which the computer is connected to are referred to as Local or Connected Networks The C Bus Network which the device is connected to is referred to as the Default Network All other Networks are referred to as Remote Networks A C Bus Bridge is used to connect two C Bus Networks together and to transmit messages from one Network to the other e A Fully Connected Network has every Network connected to every other Network via a C Bus Bridge and behaves as one large C Bus Network Application Connect Mode is a setting in a C Bus Bridge that can be used to automatically send all messages from one of its Networks to the other This makes the two Networks behave as if they were connected there are some limitations though In the C Bus Toolkit the Send to Adjacent Network setting is used to select Application Connect Mode Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 10 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide C Bus Local Bridges Remote Network Networks Computer interface How the system works depend
338. herwise the Schedule will never run e Any Month i e you don t care which month it is To enter something different select Custom from the list and select the required months Year If you want the Schedule to occur in a particular year de select the Any Year check box and enter the year required Combinations The Days Months and Years can be combined in any way you wish The Schedule will only be executed on days where the Day of the Week Special Days Day of the Month Month and Year ALL match the selection To display all of the days in the year in which the Schedule will occur click on the Year View button See Schedule Examples to see how to set up the more complex Schedules Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 206 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 2 5 The Schedule date can be edited using In built System IO components Schedule Event The Schedule Editor Event tab allows you to set the Schedule Event The Event is the action which will occur at the scheduled time and day C Bus Control For C Bus Control there are three choices e setting a Group to a particular level e pulsing a group or e setting a scene Enable Time Day Event C Bus Page Link Special Function C Bus Event Type Ramp Rate Ramp Groups instantaneously Pulse Group s C Set Scene Pulse Controlled Item Duration Scene Groups 7 Editjdd n
339. hich are displayed on the Project tab and can be changed if required e Project has been transferred to unit this shows if the project has been transferred to the unit in the past It is automatically set by PICED e Refresh project from unit before editing this selects whether you want to be reminded to refresh the project the next time you open the project The reminder will only be given if the project has been transferred to a unit and the Refresh project from unit before editing option is selected Installer Tab The Installer tab allows you to enter the details of the C Bus Installer Name DT Company BT Address moe City Po State PC Postcode BT Country P Phone PC Mobile FO Fax BT E mail BT Web site PO Click on the Save Default Details button to save the entered data for use in the future Click on the Load Default Details to load previously saved data C Bus Tab The C Bus tab allows you to select e The network that the unit is installed on e Various C Bus options The Connection group allows you to select the network that the device will be connected to This is only used if you are sending commands from one network to another In this case the device needs to know which network it is on so that it can send the message with the correct path information Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 71 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Default Network ba Default Application Lighting v
340. hneider Electric Australia Page 143 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 9 4 10 dragging a component you will see it jump from one grid point to the next so that the top left corner is always on a grid point The grid can be set to between 1 and 32 pixels by selecting the Project Grid sub menu and selecting the required value There are two other options under this menu The Snap Size to Grid makes the size a multiple of the grid rather than having the bottom right corner of the component actually on the grid The Snap All To Grid item puts all components on the page back on the grid This is used if you have changed the grid size The grid can be displayed as dots or lines by selecting Project Grid Show Grid Dots or Project Grid Show Grid Lines respectively See also Component Alignment Undo The undo function takes the project back to a previous state If operations are carried out creating a component moving a component re sizing etc then by successive application of the undo action the project can be returned to the state before those operations were performed A maximum of six operations can be undone To undo your last action e select the Undo item from the Edit menu e click on the Undo speed button on the Tool Bar The Undo item in the Edit menu shows what action will be undone Themes Themes can be used to make the pages and components have the same style This helps to produce a
341. ht Saving Starts 4 10 2009 End of Daylight Savings Day First Sunday in April Time 3 00 00 AM Daylight Saving Finishes 5 04 2009 By default these will be set to the values set for your computer To reset these parameters to the default click the Reset to Local Timezone button To select a different time zone click on the Select Other Timezone button It should not normally be necessary to manually change any of the parameters on this tab as they are read from the PC s operating system For the Black and White C Touch Wiser and the PAC you will need to click on the Create Schedules button to create Schedules to control Daylight Savings These Schedules use the Daylight Savings Start and Daylight Savings Finish Special Functions to start and stop Daylight Savings in the units In Colour C Touch the change of the time to and from daylight savings time is done by the operating system When complete click on the Next button Options Wiser The C Bus Project page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select various options of the C Bus Project which varies according to unit type Project Tab The Project tab allows you to enter details of the Project name location etc Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 63 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Project name Fred s House Location Consultant Architect Owner Notes Refresh Project I m a m It is poss
342. ia any web browser which supports Adobe Flash If you want to use a device such as a PDA or mobile phone which does not support Flash you will need to load a projector onto that device The process is as follows 1 Click on the Make Projector button 2 Click on Finish to create the file 3 There will be a self extracting zip file in your project directory containing the projector files same name as your project but with exe file extension 4 Copy this file to your device 5 Run the self extracting zip file and extract the files to a suitable location 6 Torun the projector execute the exe file which was extracted from the zip The method for doing this will depend on the specific device you are using The projectors are stored under the C Clipsal PICED Firmware Projectors folder A readme txt file in each projector folder describes which devices the projector is suitable for Other The Widget Manager also has buttons to provide quick and simple access to other relevant parts of the PICED software including e Scenes on the Scenes service page e HVAC Air Conditioning Application on the Climate service page Widget Editor The Widget Editor is opened when a Widget is added or edited in the Widget Manager Common Properties All Widgets have certain common properties e Service Type e Widget Type e Location e Function Group Custom Properties The custom properties depend on the selected Widget type The
343. ible to have the PICED software remind you to transfer any user changes made to a the project in a unit back to the computer before you start editing the project see Updating Unit Projects This is the same as using the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item There are two properties which are displayed on the Project tab and can be changed if required e Project has been transferred to unit this shows if the project has been transferred to the unit in the past It is automatically set by PICED e Refresh project from unit before editing this selects whether you want to be reminded to refresh the project the next time you open the project The reminder will only be given if the project has been transferred to a unit and the Refresh project from unit before editing option is selected Installer Tab The Installer tab allows you to enter the details of the C Bus Installer Name Company Address City State Postcode Country Phone Mobile Fax E mail Web site Click on the Save Default Details button to save the entered data for use in the future Click on the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 64 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Load Default Details to load previously saved data C Bus Tab The C Bus tab allows you to select e The network that the unit is installed on e Various C Bus options The Connection group allows you to select the network that the device will be connected
344. ic Australia Page 205 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e select Custom from the list e switch off Sunday Saturday e select Normal in the Also On list Day of the Month If you want the Schedule to occur on particular days of the month select the days required The drop down list at the top allows you to select various combinations including None this clear the list for you You must then select one or more days otherwise the Schedule will never run Any Day i e you don t care which day of the month it is The First Week of the Month day 1 7 The Second Week of the Month day 8 14 The Third Week of the Month day 15 21 The Fourth Week of the Month day 22 28 The Last Week of the Month the last 7 days of the month Odd Days 1 3 5 etc Even Days 2 4 6 etc Repeat Days eg every 3 days To enter something different select Custom from the list and select the required days Repeat Days For repeat days you need to select how often you wish the schedule to occur and the next day that it is to occur If you select the Schedule to occur every 5 days then the next day for it to occur will need to be sometime in the next 5 days Month If you want the Schedule to occur in particular months select the months required The drop down list at the top allows you to select various combinations including e None this clear the list for you You must then select one or more months ot
345. ic and to minimise the number of updates required by C Bus devices which use labels Such as DLT switches 4 14 1 15 Load Monitor In Built System IO Load Monitor data can be monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Settable Load Monitor Load Power The mi power used by the load W Load Monitor Total Power The current power used by the No site W The Load Monitor Power variables are only updated while C Bus is connected See also Special Functions for Load Monitor functions 4 14 1 16 E Mail In built System IO E Mail data can be monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Serle E Mail Account Count The number of E Mail Accounts Integer E Mail Account Number The number of the selected E Integer Mail Account E Mail Account Name The name of the selected E Mail Account E Mail Count The number of E Mail Integer messages in a particular E Mail Account E Mail Message Address The E Mail address of the String N sender of the selected E Mail Message E Mail Message Count The number of E Mail Integer No messages in the selected E Mail Account E Mail Message Present Are there any E Mail messages Boolean No in the selected E Mail Account Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 180 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable E Mail Message Number The number of the selected E Integer Yes Mai
346. ich use Lighting Application messages and concepts but have specific Application numbers assigned to them These are referred to as lighting compatible applications These include e Ventilation damper and fan control is Application number 112 70 hex e Irrigation is Application number 113 71 hex e Pool spa pond and fountain control is Application number 114 72 hex e Heating is Application number 136 88 hex There are other C Bus Applications which use some of the Lighting Application messages and concepts but are not completely compatible including e Trigger Control Application e Enable Control Application The above Applications consist of Group Addresses and can be controlled by the PICED software AX Note that you should never use any Application number other than the ones shown above for lighting control otherwise there may be unforeseen consequences There are other Applications which do not use Lighting Application messages at all These are called non lighting compatible applications and include e Security e Measurement e Telephony e Error Reporting Application e HVAC Application e Date Time Application Group Addresses A Group or Group Address is an address of one or more output loads The Group Address is used to match an input device keypad touchscreen etc with an output device relay dimmer etc channel Group Addresses have a number 0 to 255 and can be given names tags using the C
347. ide e Click on Save Notes if you are only transferring the user data you must have a copy of the original project open first The changed Scene and Schedule data will then be transferred The Scenes and Schedules in the project on the PC must be exactly the same as what was transferred to the C Touch If changes have been made the data transferred may cause unpredictable effects Before transferring a C Touch Project you must have a C Bus Project which contains at least all Networks and Applications used by the C Touch project It is preferable to have tags for all Group Addresses used too Project Re Creation If you are going to transfer a project it important to understand that it is not possible to exactly re create the original project as much of the necessary information is not transferred Zip File For versions of PICED later than V4 11 a zipped copy of the project file will be stored in the unit if there is sufficient spare space If the unit has a zipped project file stored in it it can be used by selecting the Use Zip File if Present option This option gives the best results as it contains all project data including logic except for the images When opening the transferred project if there are images missing you will be given the option to find them in the image library If there are still images missing you can transfer the project from the unit again using the option to create components as images The nece
348. ide next to the error number at the bottom of the report There is a link to click at the top of the Check Project report to re enable any error messages which have been hidden AN Error messages can only be hidden when viewing the HTML report in PICED not in a web browser See also Project Summary Good Design Practices and Cascaded Scene Report Project Summary A summary of the project can be produced by selecting the Tools Reports Summary menu item The summary is used to get an overall view of what is in the project to make sure that everything that should be controlled is being controlled The summary contains the following information Project details Installer details List of all Networks and Applications used List of all Groups and which Components they are controlled by List of all Scenes and the actions within each scene See also Cascaded Scene Report List of all Schedules with the time day and event List of all Group Addresses and which Schedules they are controlled by List of all Pages including Theme Pages their Components and what they control Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 328 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 8 8 9 Summary of the Logic List of all Special Days List of all Access Control levels and users List of all Power Failure Recovery Groups List of all images used by the Project List of all Monitors used by the project List of all
349. ier to connect to it Recover C Touch 2 or Spectrum allows the firmware of a C Touch Mark 2 to be reloaded if it has been corrupted Transfer C Touch Display loads the display from the C Touch unit and shows it on the PC screen Note that you can not use the C Touch software while showing the C Touch display Show Remote Display if the C Touch display has been transferred this will continue to be displayed until the Show Remote Display menu item is de selected HELP MENU Main show the contents of the main help file FAQ opens the Frequently Asked Questions help file Logic show the Logic Help file Tutorial open the Tutorial Help file C Bus Concepts open the C Bus Concepts help file Manuals Open the folder with the PDF manuals Fault Finding Open the Advanced C Bus Fault Diagnosis document Wiser Home Control Skin provides details of the usage of the selected Wiser Home Control skin Wiser Home Control User Guide provides details of the usage of the selected Wiser Home Control skin can be printed for user Clipsal Web Site this opens the Schneider Electric Australia web site C Bus Forums Web Site this opens the C Bus Forums web site On line Registration connect to the Schneider Electric Australia on line registration web site Restore Default Settings this restores settings back to how they were when the PICED software Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 46 Home Management Ser
350. ies PICED Programmer s Guide 4 5 4 6 was installed including enabling all Error Messages resetting tool bars and displaying Tip of the Day and What s New Tip of the Day this shows the Tip of the Day form What s New this shows the What s New form Software Properties this shows how many Pages Components Scenes Schedules etc PICED supports Report a Problem this allows the user to e mail details of a problem to Schneider Electric Australia About shows details of the program Note that many of these items are also available on the Tool Bars See also Keyboard Shortcuts Columns Columns of data which look like those below can be sorted or rearranged to suit your preference Any changes made will be remembered for next time you use the PICED software Description Trigger 1 Scene 1 Control 01 an 2 Scene 2 Control 01 3 Scene 3 Lightin To change the order in which the data is sorted click at the top of a column to sort by that column Click again to reverse the order of the sort Description Trigger N Scene 3 Lighting 06 1 2 Scene 2 Control 01 1 Scene 1 Contre To change the width of a column click on the vertical bar and drag To change the width of a column to fit the width of the text double click on the vertical bar To hide a column drag the width until the column disappears Control 01 an 2 Scene 2 Control 01 3 Scene 3 Lightin To change the order
351. ies PICED Programmer s Guide 6 1 7 e Minimise the number of fonts used only the fonts for clocks level indicators and monitors are transferred e Make the appearance of buttons that do the same thing eg sliders or a back button identical Identical buttons are only saved once Anything that you can t see eg the group address or page link details will not affect this If you need lots of large buttons which are the same except for the text use large buttons with no text so they are the same and over lay text over them e Use image compression if necessary Compressed images will make the C Touch slightly less responsive but will make the project file smaller Image Compression can be selected on the Project Details form or on the Transfer to Unit form See also Transferred Images and Good Design Practices Transferred Images The C Touch Configuration Software generates a file which is transferred to a C Touch unit The format of the images transferred for each component depends upon the type of component Each component has from none to three images transferred to the C Touch unit so that it can draw the components when needed No Image Completely invisible components such as a shape with no border background or a button with no border background text or image do not have an image transferred This means that they use very little memory These components are often used to create invisible hot spots on the screen which
352. ies PICED Programmer s Guide Key Function Status v System IO Variable User defined Counter sal pte In built Value Po l Key Function The Key Function list allows the function to be selected with the following options e UNUSED this will not show System IO Variable status or perform any System IO Variable action when pressed ON this switches the System IO Variable to its maximum value OFF this switches the System IO Variable to its minimum value ON OFF this toggles the System IO Variable between its minimum and maximum value PRESET this will set the System IO Variable to a preset level NUDGE UP this adjusts the System IO Variable level up by the amount set in the Value box NUDGE DOWN This adjusts the System IO Variable level down by the amount set in the Value box SLIDER this is used for System IO Variable sliders only e STATUS this will show the System IO Variable status but pressing the component will have no effect e SELECTOR this is used for System IO Variable Selectors only BELL PRESS this sets the System IO Variable to its maximum while the component is held then sets it to the minimum value when released INCREMENT MONTH this increments increases by one the month date System I O only DECREMENT MONTH this decrements decreases by one the month date System I O only INCREMENT YEAR this increments increases by one the year date System I O only DECREM
353. igger or change a scene item which is triggering another scene Error 14038 Message There are duplicate Scene names Please rename one or more Scenes Cause Two or more scenes have the same name Solution Rename one or more of the scenes Error 14039 Message Can not add any more Scenes Maximum is limit Cause There is a limit to the number of scenes which can be stored and that limit has been reached Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 351 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 39 11 4 40 11 4 41 Solution Reduce the number of scenes or store some of the scenes in other C Bus devices Error 14040 Message Passwords do not match Cause The two passwords entered are different Solution Enter the two passwords again carefully Confirm 14041 Message The project has Error Type Do you want to see details Reason The project has been found to have some problems which may cause it to behave in an undesirable or unexpected manner If the Project has critical errors these must be fixed before the Project can be transferred to the unit Action Click on Yes to see a list of the problems Click on No to ignore the problems a Project can not be downloaded with Critical Errors This is not recommended Error 14042 Message Changes can not be made to C Bus Connection while connected Please disconnect from C Bus before making changes Cause Changes
354. ill not ever be enabled due to an error in the set up e There are no Days of the Week selected e The End Time is not later than the Start Time Solution Either e Select some days of the week or e Change the start and or end time Error 14090 Message Lowest and highest Access Levels must be always enabled Do you want them changed for you Cause Lowest and highest Access Levels must be always enabled so that the user can not be temporarily locked out Solution Click on the Yes button to automatically change the lowest and highest Access Levels so that they are enabled on Any Day and Any Time Click on the No button to manually Change the Access Levels Confirm 14091 Message Do you want to convert Project files to the new format Reason The Project files in a selected directory can be converted from the old file format to the new format Currently this just re names the files from xml to ctd but does not actually change the file format as such Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 366 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 91 11 4 92 11 4 93 Action Click on No to exit To change the Project files click on Yes then e select a directory to have all of its files and those in its sub directories converted e click on the Open button e alist of all files converted will then be displayed Confirm 14092 Message This file was created with an old versio
355. images on the Internet via a proxy server Contact your network administrator for details or open the network settings in your web browser to find the details of the proxy server e IP Address the proxy server IP Address e Port the port used on the proxy server e User Name the user name to log into the proxy server e Password the password for the proxy server Remote Connection If you wish to transfer the Colour C Touch project to a unit on a remote site via the Internet the following properties will be needed e URL IP Address this is the URL eg myhouse com or IP Address eg 1 2 3 4 of the Colour C Touch or the router Do not include http in the URL e Port this is the port number The default value is 8336 but may be different if port mapping is used e Password this is the password for connecting to the Colour C Touch unit Local Connection If you are using a static IP Address for the Colour C Touch you can enter it in the Static IP Address edit box This will be used by the C Touch Colour Transfer Utility when connecting to the unit on the Local Area Network LAN This can vary by Profile C Touch Tab Key Press Sounds Black and White C Touch and C Touch Spectrum only Key Press Sounds volume Quiet Beep v pitch Medium Duration Medium z This section allows you to select the volume pitch and duration of the key press beeps on the black and White C Touch The Show Night Light option is
356. ing 230 Editor 232 Function Groups 229 230 232 Help 232 Icons 230 Locations 229 230 232 Manager 230 Services 229 230 232 Types 230 Windows Media Player 330 Windows Vista 395 Wiser Background 304 308 Customising 304 308 Firmware Update 304 308 Options 53 63 70 Refresh Project 303 308 Skin 53 63 70 304 308 Updating Project 310 Wiser Home Control 300 304 Transferring Projects From 303 307 Transferring Projects to Unit 300 305 Widgets 229 Word wrap 106 Work Space 31 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Y Year View Schedules 208 Z Zone 28 Zone Group 242 243 Zones 222 HVAC 242 245 396 Irrigation Delay 222 Irrigation Durations 222 Page 434
357. ing name Solution Enter a name which has not already been used 11 4 150 Error 14152 Message File name needs to be of type html or htm For example WebCam html Cause You have entered an invalid URL Solution Enter a valid URL file name 11 4 151 Error 14153 Message Please enter a valid Data Item Cause You have entered an invalid data item Solution Enter valid data Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 383 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 152 Confirmation 14154 Message Do you want to save as a Project or Template Cause You have a template project open and have selected to save the project If you choose to save as a template you will presented with a choice of options to save If you choose to save as a project the file will be re named to the default project file extension Solution Select Template to save as a template Select Project to save as a project Select Cancel to cancel the save operation 11 4 153 Confirmation 14155 Message Are you Sure you want to action You will not be able to undo this action Reason You have attempted to perform a particular action It is not possible to undo this action Actions Click on Yes to perform the action Click on Cancel to not perform the action 11 4 154 Warning 14156 Message No users can control C Bus Cause There are no users who can control C Bus Solution Either 1 Add new users who can control C Bus or 2
358. io Zone Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the Zone details 4 Click on OK Deleting a Zone To delete an existing Zone 1 Select the Zone in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Sources Tab The Sources tab shows a list of the Audio Sources The columns of data are e Matrix Switcher e Source name e Source Index this is their Audio Source index e Media Link Group Adding a Source To add an audio Source click on the Add button The Audio Source Editor will be displayed Enter Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 249 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide the Source details and click on OK Editing a Source To edit an existing Source 1 Select the Source in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Source in the list 2 The Audio Source Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the Source details 4 Click on OK Deleting a Source To delete an existing Source 1 Select the Source in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Local Sources Tab The Local Sources Tab is only visible for Wiser projects It is used to enter details of the Local Source used for each Zone where required The Local Sources tab shows a list of the Local Sources The columns of data are e Matrix Switcher e Source name e Zone Number e Media Link Group Adding a Local Source To add a Local Source click on the Add button The Audio Source Editor will be displayed Enter the Local Source
359. ion This is the name that has been given to the Schedule Date This is the day s that the Schedule will be executed Time This is the time that the Schedule will be executed Action This is the action that the Schedule will perform Enable This shows under which conditions the Schedule is enabled sen Edit Schedule Delete Scheduie Auto Create 1 Winter Watering Every 14 Days Starting 19 10 2 9 00 00 PM Set A to Winter Watering 2 Irrigation Rain Delay 17th Oct 2006 12 00 00 PM Set Irrigation Enable to Enabled 3 Spring Watering Every 7 Days Starting 19 10 2006 9 00 00 PM Set Irrigation to Spring Watering 4 Summer Watering Every 3 Days Starting 19 10 2006 9 00 00 PM Set Irrigation to Summer Watering Schedules can be set up using this page e To automatically create a default schedule for each of the Irrigation Programs click on the Auto Create button To add a new Schedule click on the Add Schedule button The Schedule Editor will be opened To edit an existing Schedule select the Schedule in the list and click on the Edit Schedule button The Schedule Editor will be opened e To delete an existing Schedule select the Schedule in the list and click on the Delete Schedule button To create a Rain Delay Schedule click on the Create Rain Delay Schedule button This creates a Schedule which enables the Irrigation Controller by setting the Master Enable Group level If you Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Austr
360. ion 139 details 40 Font 106 Graph 98 117 Grouping 143 HTML 97 115 Images 94 107 Irrigation 111 Key Functions 122 Level Indicator 96 112 Limits 7 Lock Position 143 Logic Control 124 183 Logic Monitoring 124 183 Manipulation 139 Monitor 97 112 Moving 41 140 Name 100 Notes 100 Order 141 Paint Format 141 Percent 96 Position 101 Properties 100 Remote Control 127 Schedule 111 Selection 139 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 423 Home Management Series Components 93 Selector 97 Shapes 95 Size 101 140 Slider 110 Sliders 95 Special Functions 126 Status 120 Sunrise Sunset 111 Symbols 106 System IO 124 154 155 183 Templates 83 84 85 Text 94 106 Theme 145 Transparency 114 Types 94 Value 112 Visible 100 Visible Properties 100 Web Cam Image 98 Configuration Data 275 284 288 295 Connecting to C Bus 316 Constraints 7 Contrast 281 286 289 Controlled item Copy 141 Controlling 36 93 319 Controlling C Bus 316 Controlling C Touch 281 286 289 Controlling PAC 298 Convert Levels 266 Converting Project Files 49 Cooling 27 Coordinates show 40 Copy 140 Copy Group Address 141 Country 53 63 70 C Touch 309 Backlight 53 63 70 Black and White 275 Black and White Mark 2 284 286 288 Colour 290 Connect 284 Controlling 281 286 289 Firmware Update 280 286 288 Image Compressions 53 63 70 in built pages 283 Key Press 53 63 70 Copyright 2014 Schn
361. ion in the list 2 Click the Delete button 4 25 13 2 Custom Key Function Editor The Custom Key Function Editor allows the editing of a C Bus Custom Key Function It can be opened from the Custom Key Function Manager Name Short Press Idle z Short Release Idle x Long Press Idle z Long Release Idle s x Long Press fide X Long Release de amp Enter a unique name and select the microfunctions for each Key Press Event Click on OK when complete Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 264 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 5 1 Tools Change Image Colours Images can be re coloured using the Tools Images Convert Image Colours menu item This will open the Image Colour Conversion form The process to convert one or more images is as follows 1 Select the colour to change the image to e Select using the Red Green Blue sliders or e Select using the Hue Saturation Luminance sliders or e Click on the Select button to select a custom colour 2 Select the colour change method to apply see the image below for the effect of the different options e Normal e Inverted negative e Shades of selected colour White to selected colour Non white to selected colour Black to selected colour e Non black to selected colour 3 Select which aspects of the selected colour to apply to the image hue and or saturation 4 To see the effect that the selected option will have click on the
362. is rather approximate and tends to be conservative Scene Components which can not be edited If the Scene Component Locked option is selected then e There will be an icon next to it in the Scene Editor e When selected the Scene Component Locked In Built System IO variable will be true e Attempting to change these Scene Components will raise a confirmation message Sliders Tab Scene Details Scene Components Sliders All C Selected 1 to 9 of 143 rops 0 EE rops o ooo Groups o0 EE roupas oo ae Groups 1o ooo rops o Groups 100 ooo Grops 10 a The Sliders tab shows a series of sliders one for each Scene Component in the same order as listed in the Scene Components list If there are too many sliders for one page the lt lt and gt gt buttons can be used to scroll through the pages of sliders A Scene Component can hawe its level adjusted using the corresponding slider They can also be adjusted using the nudge buttons at the top of the page To nudge all Scene Components 1 Select the All button 2 Click on the nudge buttons Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 193 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 15 7 To select Scene Components 1 Click on the Group Edit box 2 To select another Scene Component hold down the CTRL key and click on the Group edit box for the next Scene Component 3 To select all Scene Components right click on a Group edit box an
363. is to be displayed when the alarm sounds This page will normally have Components using Special Functions to allow the alarm to be switched off or for snooze to be selected See also Special Functions In built System IO Logic Logic can be used to extend the functionality of a Project Refer to the Logic Help File for complete details C Bus Several forms are available for controlling and monitoring aspects of C Bus e C Bus Network States Form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 235 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 1 4 25 2 e C Bus Network Manager e Security Application Form e Telephony Application Form e Error Application Manager e HVAC Application Manager e Measurement Application Manager e Monitor Manager C Bus Network States The status of a Component s network can be displayed using the View Component Label Network Status menu item An X indicates that the Component s Network is off line and can not be controlled A indicates that the Component s Network has been opened and that the state is not known but it may be possible to control the Group Address The status of all of the Networks can be viewed by selecting the View Network States menu item The possible network states are New the network has not been opened yet usually caused by a failure to open the network Open the network has been opened but the synchronisation process has not started Sync the
364. ither select a particular level in percent or a tag To use the current level of the Group Address click on the Get Current Level button Ramp Rate If the component is to be a preset press timer nudge up or nudge down you will need to select the Ramp Rate Select a rate at which the Group Address level is to change Pulse If the component is a timer you will need to select the timer duration and type A toggle timer will start when it is pressed then stop after the time out period or if the timer is pressed again before it has timed out A re settable timer will start the timer again if pressed before the timer has expired Note that a clock component can be used to display the amount of time left on a timer If the component is a press button or a timer you need to select the level to which the Group Address is to return to when the press button is released or the timer expires During the pulse period if a message for the Group Address is received from any source the pulse will be cancelled System IO Properties System IO Variables are used to provide interaction between the user and various elements of the PICED software A Component can control or monitor a System IO Variable in a similar way to controlling C Bus To change the System IO properties of a particular Component open the Component Properties form then select the System IO tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 124 Home Management Ser
365. itti lt lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 KI lt 1 KI This allows you to create multiple special days at once Note that each Special Day item in PICED contains the information for a single day When you use the form to create multiple special days they are all independent and can be edited or deleted later as required To create a series of Special Days for the same date every year e Select the Single Day Every Year radio button e Select the Ending year e Select the Special Day Type s e Click on OK To create a series of Special Days within a range of dates Select the Multiple Days radio button Select the Starting date Select the Ending date Select which days of the week are applicable if relevant Select the Special Day Type s Click on OK Options for setting the Special Day Type Most of the time you will want to set the Special Day Type of the selected day s to be the Special Day Type s which have been selected In this case the Set Day Type radio button needs to be selected and the existing Special Day Types for the selected day s will be replaced with the new ones Sometimes you may want to add a Special Day Type to selected days without removing the Special Day Types already assigned For example you may want to add a School Holidays Special Day Type to a range of days but not erase the Public Holiday Special Day Type from any days in the range In this case the Add Day Type radio button needs to be selected A
366. ity system Security Form Show show the form summarising the Security Application data Security Keypad emulate a security keypad key press Security Status Request send a status request message to any C Bus security panels to get their current status Sound Set Set the computer Sound e Special Day Edit Open the Special Days Manager e Sub Page Transition sets the Page Transition effect for Sub Pages The new effect will apply until it is changed again or the software re starts e System IO Edit if All System IO is selected then the System IO Manager will be opened If Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 152 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Specific System IO is selected then the selected System IO Variable will be opened Telephony Divert divert the telephone to another number Telephony Divert Clear clear the telephone diversion Telephony Form Show show the form summarising the Telephony Application data Telephony Reject Incoming Call reject hang up the incoming telephone call Utilities control backlight and other hardware features colour C Touch only For Black and White C Touch and C Touch Spectrum projects the Special Functions are None no Special Function is used Alarm Off this stops the alarm Alarm On this starts an alarm Alarm Snooze this delays the alarm for a set amount of time Audio All Off switch off all audio zones Audio Next Source select the
367. ked for editing Boolean fo o o e Scene Nudge Level Nudge level of the selected Integer Yes Scene used for nudging the level of a whole scene note that reading this always returns a value of 0 Scene Component Number of the selected Scene Integer Yes Number Component Scene Component Total number Scene Integer No Count Components in the selected Scene Scene Component Name of the selected Scene String No Name Component Scene Component Level Stored C Bus set level of the Integer Yes selected Scene Component Scene Component The current level of the C Bus Integer Yes Current Level Group Address of the selected Scene Component Scene Component Ramp Ramp rate for the selected Integer Yes Rate Scene Component 0 4 8 1020 Scene Component Ramp Text description for the String Rate Text selected Scene Component ramp rate Os As Bs Pea 7m Scene Component Is the Scene Component Boolean Locked locked for editing Scenes are controlled via the Selected Scene The Selected Scene is the one corresponding to the Scene Number in built System IO variable which can be changed to select the required Scene The name of the Selected Scene can be displayed using the Scene Name in built System IO variable The levels of the Scene Components can be controlled via the Selected Scene Component The Selected Scene Component is the one corresponding to the Scene Component Number in built System IO variable which ca
368. ks Select Select Scene Component 5 2 24 preeeceec eee ee eee AALALS Night Scene Main Bedroom Level 40 i Level 0 i Level 0 1 of 6 1 of 7 1 i 2 3 Main Bedroom Dining Spots Pergola ie Set Scene Offset 0 Offset 1 Offset 2 4 14 1 3 Schedule In Built System IO Schedules can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables General Variable Name Settable Schedule Number Number of the selected Integer Yes Schedule Schedule Count Total number Schedules Schedule Name Name of the selected Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 159 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Schedule a Is the Schedule locked for Boolean editing Schedule Enabled Is this Schedule currently Boolean enabled Schedule Locked Schedule Time Variable Name Schedule Time Time of the selected Schedule For sunrise and sunset Schedules this will be the offset For repeat time schedules this will be the interval Schedule Start The Schedule start time repeat time and random schedules only Schedule End The Schedule end time repeat time and random schedules only Schedule Time Text Text describing which times String the Schedule occurs on Schedule Next Due Time Time the Schedule next occurs on Schedule Time Type Time the Schedule occurs 0 Normal 1 Sunrise Schedule Has
369. l Message E Mail Message Sender The name of the sender of the String No selected E Mail Message E Mail Message Subject The subject of the selected E String No Mail Message E Mail Message Body The body of the selected E Mail String No Message first 500 characters only E Mail Present Are there are any E Mail Boolean No messages in a particular E Mail Account See also Special Functions for E Mail functions 4 14 1 17 Power Meter In built System 10 Power Meter information can be monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Energy Tariff Current energy Tariff price per Yes kWh Measurement App Energy Value Recorded energy for an Analogue No Power Meter Measurement App Power Value Current power level for an No Analogue Power Meter Measurement App Power Maximum _ Recorded peak power for an No Analogue Power Meter Power Meter Maximum Recorded peak power for total of No all meters Power Meter Total Total power of all meters Power Meter Total Energy Total energy for all meters Real No Real No Pulse Power Meter Energy Recorded energy for a Pulse No Power Meter Pulse Power Meter Level Measured power for an individual No Pulse Power Meter Pulse Power Meter Maximum Recorded peak power for an No individual Pulse Power Meter For many of the above variables there are options for how the data is to be scaled For Power values the data can be expressed as e Watts e kg of CO per hour
370. l projects Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 55 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Alarm Details Repeat Period k Seconds Alarm Duration 3600 Seconds Snooze Duration 600 w Seconds Alarm Sound P1 Sound Effects Alarm wav wate Alarm Page alarm Page The following details of the alarm can be set e The Repeat Period how often it goes off e The Alarm Duration how long it will continue The Snooze Duration how long the alarm will be suppressed when a Snooze Special Function is executed The Alarm Sound the wav file used for the alarm sound Colour C Touch only If this is not selected the PICED software plays the system default beep when the Alarm is on To set the desired sound use the Windows Control Panel Black and White C Touch makes a regular beep when the alarm is on The Alarm Page is the page which will be selected when the alarm is sounded C Bus Tab The C Bus tab allows you to select e The network that the unit is installed on e Various C Bus options e The network modelling Colour C Touch Projects only The Connection group allows you to select the network that the device will be connected to This is only used if you are sending commands from one network to another In this case the device needs to know which network it is on so that it can send the message with the correct path information Device is on network Local v Default Applicatio
371. lar interval between the Starting and Ending times Random The Schedule occurs at a random time between the Starting and Ending times For random Schedules the time at which the schedule is to occur is calculated when the time gets to the Starting time The Schedule time can be displayed using a Clock and can be edited using In built System IO components Schedule Day The day s that the Schedule is to occur is set on the Schedule Editor Day tab By default the Schedule is set to occur every day Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 203 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide There are two ways of selecting the day By clicking on the Advanced or Simple button you will see more or less detail as required The simple option allows you to select days as follows e Once Only you will need to enter the date or select it from the drop down calendar e Every Day e Every Week Day Monday to Friday e Every Weekend Saturday and Sunday e Every Week you will need to select which day of the week e Every Month you will need to select which day of the month e Every Year you will need to enter the day of the year or select it from the drop down calendar the selected year is ignored e Odd Days e Even Days e Repeat select the number of days in the repeat cycle and the starting date Event Enable Time Day every day once onl every day For more complicated day
372. larms 183 207 Alert 235 Alignment 142 143 Alpha Blending 114 Analogue Power Meter 255 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Animation 107 Create 273 Applications 13 Air Conditioning 27 236 241 Audio 27 28 248 251 252 Date Time 27 Enable Control 23 Error 25 169 Heating 13 HVAC 27 236 241 Irrigation 13 Lighting 13 Lighting Compatible 13 Measurement 24 245 246 254 255 Media Transport Control 27 28 246 247 248 Non Lighting Compatible 13 ponds and spas 13 Security 23 236 238 Selecting 18 Telephony 24 236 239 Time and Date 236 Transport Control 27 28 246 247 248 Trigger Control 23 Ventilation 13 Arbitrary shapes 132 Archive Export 86 files 49 Import 50 88 Project 86 Save Backup 89 Audio 27 Application 28 In built System IO 177 Limits 7 Matrix Switcher 28 Source 28 Special Functions 151 Zone 28 Audio Application 28 248 Audio Feed Controls Editor 252 Audio Source Editor 251 Audio Zone Editor 251 Local Sources 248 251 Manager 248 MARPA 248 Matrix Switcher 248 Matrix Switcher Editor 251 Sources 248 251 Zones 248 251 Page 421 Home Management Series Audio Application Manager 248 Audio Source Controls Editor 252 Audio Source Editor 251 Audio Zone Editor 251 Auto Create 267 378 Auto Page Creation 81 Auto Save 32 Automatic Start up 36 B Back 141 Background 104 283 Backlight 53 63 70 90 281 283 286 289 Backup 89 Be
373. latched solenoids in the irrigation control Most times these are not needed On Off Pulse Duration this sets the pulse duration for pulsed loads latched solenoids Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 225 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The Use Master Loads allows the use of Master Loads in the irrigation project Most times these are not needed Master Load Delay this sets the duration of the Master Load Delay Click the Next button when complete Master Loads Page The Master Loads page is only shown if the Use Master Loads option is selected on the Settings page It shows the details of the selected Master Loads 1 Number 2 C Bus Network 3 C Bus Application It is recommended that the Irrigation Application 71 be used for this purpose 4 C Bus Group 5 Off Group This is the group used to switch the solenoid off This will only be displayed if the Allow Latched Solenoids option on the Settings page was selected Edit Load Delete Load 1 2 Master Loads Used Wired Master Solenoid Irrigation The Master Loads can be selected using this page 1 To add a new Master Load click on the Add Load button The Master Load form will allow you to select the load Group Address If you have selected the Allow Latched Solenoids option on the Settings page you will be able to select the type of load If you are using a latched solenoid pulsed load you will need to
374. le e Enabling the Irrigation control e Triggering an Irrigation Program e Status indication eg showing whether a door is open In this case when power is lost the Level of the Group Address will also be lost In order to recover the levels following a power failure the PICED software can write the Levels of selected Group Addresses to a file on a regular basis and then re load the values when it starts up To select the Group Addresses to recover use the Load Monitor The Power Fail Recovery file is written e every 10 minutes while C Bus is Connected if data has changed e when the Project is Saved e when the Load Monitor form is closed The Power Fail Recovery file is read e when the Project is Opened e when C Bus is connected In addition to storing Group Address levels the Power Failure Recover file stores Colour C Touch only e Graph data e Power Meter History data e Labeling data e HVAC Application data Notes When a Schedule or the Irrigation control is edited the Enabling Group has its Power Failure Recovery set automatically If a Group Address is being pulsed at the time of Power Failure the Return Level will be set when power is reapplied Ifa Group Address is being ramped at the time of Power Failure the ramp end Level will be set when power is reapplied Note that the C Touch PAC unit itself will recover the level of all Group Addresses it uses automatically Colour C Touch uses the proc
375. le single key operation open close and stop 2 Key Open Toggle two key operation open and stop 2 Key Close Toggle two key operation close and stop 3 Key Open three key operation open 3 Key Close three key operation close 3 Key Stop three key operation stop udio Media Transport Control Application and Audio Application control Category Select select a Category Play Pause Stop set the play pause stop mode Power control the power Repeat set repeat option Selection Select select a Selection Shuffle select shuffle Track Select select a track Mute control the audio mute function Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 137 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Source Select Absolute select the audio source using presets e Source Select Previous Next select the audio source using previous and next buttons e Timer start the audio timer e Tone control the audio bass treble and balance e Volume control the audio volume e User System IO control e Date show the date for a User System IO Variable e Date Select select the date of a date User System IO Variable e State show the state of a boolean User System IO Variable e Time show the time for a User System IO Variable e Time Select select the time of a time User System IO Variable down e Value show the value of a User System IO Variable e Value Select select the value of an integer or real user S
376. le then select the Remember Selected Tab option If you wish to display numerical values such as Group Addresses as Hexadecimal Numbers select the Show Hexadecimal Numbers check box The image editor to be used when Editing Images can be selected in the Image Editor box In some circumstances it is desirable to only allow a single copy of the software to run at once To achieve this de select the Allow Multiple Copies of Software to Run Simultaneously check box Select Sort Page Lists Alphabetically to have all page lists shown in alphabetical order If this is Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 35 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 3 4 3 5 not selected the pages will be listed in the order they were created Alternatively you can right click on the page list on the Tool Bar to select the page order Select Show Legacy C Bus Applications if you want to be able to see all C Bus Applications listed Note that displaying all C Bus Applications does not mean you will be able to use them Only Lighting Compatible Applications are able to be used with Components Simulation Mode To disable editing functions the PICED software can be placed in Simulation Mode by either e selecting the Simulation Mode item from the View menu e by pressing CTRL S To get out of Simulation Mode you can either e press CTRL S or e Simulation Mode will be exited automatically after 2 to 3 days Simulatio
377. le Group e displaying the Irrigation zone time 9 Set up a Rain Delay button on a page ONOaARWNH gt Example A house has three zones for watering lawns and four for watering different parts of the garden The watering requirements are e In Summer each of the lawn zones is watered for 20 minutes every two days e In Summer each of the garden zones is watered for 15 minutes every three days e In Spring and Autumn each of the lawn zones is watered for 10 minutes every 5 days e In Spring and Autumn each of the garden zones is watered for 10 minutes every week This means there are four separate Irrigation Programs required A Group Address level tag should be created for each Irrigation Program There are a total of 7 Irrigation Zones A Group Address tag should be created for each Irrigation Zone preferably in the Irrigation Application number 71 hex It will also be necessary to create 4 Schedules to trigger each of the Irrigation Programs on the right days Ait you switch on the Zones including Master Zones by controlling their group address the Irrigation Manager will not switch them off again Only use the methods described above See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 224 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 19 2 Irrigation Manager To show the Irrigation Manager form select the Project Edit Irrigation menu i
378. le Name Reason A new file has been created Action Click on OK 11 4 201 Error 14204 Message Too many groups have Power Failure Recovery selected Maximum is number Cause Too many groups have power fail recovery selected Solution Use the Load Monitor form to deselect any groups which do not need to have their level recovered after power failure 11 4 202 Error 14205 Message Scene needs a Trigger Group because the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option is selected Cause The Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option has been selected When this is used Scenes require a trigger group Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 399 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Solution Either e Select a Trigger Group for the Scene or e De select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option 11 4 203 Error 14206 Message Password can only contain numbers Cause Non numeric characters have been used in a password which can only use numeric digits 0 9 Solution Enter a password which only has numbers 11 4 204 Confirmation 14207 Message Are you sure you want to hide Error Message Hidden error messages can be shown again later if required Reason You have clicked on hide in the Check Project report This allows individual messages or groups of messages to be hidden Actions If you want to hide the error message s in the next Check proj
379. lectric Australia Page 396 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Solution Click on OK Update any logic code which uses HVAC Application in built System IO variables Refer to the Logic Help File for details of how the HVAC Zones are now addressed Note that Components which use HVAC App In Built System IO variables are automatically updated when the project file is loaded There is no need to make any changes to Components unless you now want them to control multiple HVAC zones If you save the project with this version the HVAC data will not be able to be loaded with older versions of the software 11 4 193 Error 14196 Message Please create HVAC Zone Groups and or HVAC Zones first Cause HVAC tools can not be placed if there are no HVAC Zone Groups or HVAC Zones Solution 1 Click on OK 2 Close the Tools form 3 Create HVAC data with the HVAC Application Manager 4 Place the HVAC tools 11 4 194 Error 14197 Message Error opening Excel Reason Cause Excel was not able to be opened The Reason should provide information about why Solution The solution depends on the reason for the error The most common reason is that Excel is not installed 11 4 195 Error 14198 Message Error in Data Recommendation Cause The data entered is invalid The form is not able to be closed until valid data is entered Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 397 Home Management Series PICED Progr
380. led and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Date to be set The new date to be set see Yes below Time to be set The new time to be set see Time below Daylight Savings Is Daylight Savings active Startup Date The date the project was opened Startup Time The time the project was Time No opened The following only applies to Colour C Touch projects There are two In built System IO variables used for setting the date and time Setting the Time To allow the user to set the time using In built System IO variables you need to have nudge up and down buttons to adjust the hour minute and seconds These are all available using the Tool Select Page 164 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide form Note that these do not directly change the clock time they just change the Time To Be Set variable To actually change the clock time to match the Time To Be Set you need to use a button with the Date Time Set Special Function It is also recommended to have a button with the Date Time Cancel Special Function to allow the change to be cancelled For example to create some Components to adjust the time 1 Place a Component showing the Time to be Set In built System IO variable see Tool Select 2 Place Components to increment and decrement the Time to be Set To adjust the hour increment decrement by 3600 To adjust the minute increment decrement by 60 3 Place Components for
381. lenoids option on the Settings page you will be able to select the type of load If you are using a latched solenoid pulsed load you will need to select the Off Group as well 2 To edit an existing Zone select the Zone in the list and click the Edit Zone button Alternatively double click the item in the list The Zones form will allow you to edit the Zone s properties 3 To delete an existing Zone select the Zone in the list and click the Delete Zone button 4 To change the order of the Zones select a Zone in the list and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons Click the Next button when complete Program Page The Program Page shows the properties of the selected Irrigation Programs e Name e Irrigation Program Trigger e C Bus Network e C Bus Application It is recommended that the Trigger Application 6CA be used for this purpose e C Bus Group e C Bus Level Action Selector Add Program Edit Program Delete Program 3 8 Irrigation Programs Used 1 Trigger Control Irrigation 2 Spring Wired Trigger Control Irrigation Spring Watering 3 Summer Wired Trigger Control Irrigation Summer Watering The Programs can be set from this page 1 To add a new Program click on the Add Program button The Program form will allow you to select the trigger 2 To edit an existing Program select the Program in the list and click the Edit Program button Alternatively double click the item in the list The Program form will
382. lly re connect to C Gate if the connection fails To select this 1 Open the Program Options form 2 Select the Automatically re connect C Gate if connection fails option 11 4 136 Error 14138 Message You can not set a user access level to be higher than the logged in access level Cause You have attempted to change a user s access level to one which is higher than the logged in access level Solution Log in with an appropriate access level and try again 11 4 137 Error 14139 Message You can not delete a user with an access level higher than the logged in access level Cause You have attempted to change delete a user whose access level is higher than the logged in access level Solution Log in with an appropriate access level and try again Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 379 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 138 Warning 14140 Message The file being loaded was created with a later version of the PICED software Some aspects of the Project may be incorrect once loaded Saving the file will lose these aspects of the original Project This file should only be loaded with the correct version of software Cause Files of later versions may cause unknown problems when loaded into the PICED software Solution Open the file with the correct latest version of the software 11 4 139 Confirmation 14141 Message This will replace the current access levels with the following leve
383. ls list of access level names Do you want to continue Cause The Access Levels are about to be replaced Solution Click on Yes to replace the access levels Click on No to leave the access levels as they are 11 4 140 Error 14142 Message C Bus Project Project Name has no C Bus networks and can not be used Cause The C Bus Project which has been selected has no C Bus Networks It can not be used by the PICED software Solution 1 Select a C Bus Project which has one or more C Bus Networks or 2 Close the PICED software open the C Bus ToolKit and add some networks to the C Bus Project 11 4 141 Confirmation 14143 Message This project was created with an earlier version of the PICED software Saving it with the new version will mean that it may no longer be able to be opened with the earlier version Do you want to Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 380 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide save it with the new version Cause You are about to save an old version file as a new version file format This will mean than the project may no longer be able to be opened with the earlier version of the software Solution Click on Yes to save as the new version Click on No to cancel the save You can use File Save As to save the project with a different name which will allow you to still open the old file with the older software if needed 11 4 142 Warning 14144 Message Line
384. lternatively you may want to remove a particular Special Day Type from selected days without affecting any other Special Day Types In this case select the Remove Day Type radio button Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 221 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 19 4 19 1 Irrigation Irrigation Control Irrigation can be implemented using Schedules but it is much simpler to use the in built Irrigation Manager The Irrigation Manager provides the same functionality as a regular irrigation controller Typically it is necessary to activate various solenoids for particular times to ensure that everything receives the correct amount of water Different parts of a garden may need different amounts of water which may change depending on the time of the year Zones An irrigation Zone is a load which can be controlled by the Irrigation Controller It is generally a solenoid which controls water flow to sprinklers or drippers Separate zones are generally used to allow different sections zones to be watered for different durations or because there is insufficient pressure or flow rate to allow a whole site to be watered at once Programs An irrigation Program is a sequence of events corresponding to switching on each irrigation Zone for a selected amount of time It may be desirable to have different Irrigation Programs running on different days to allow for different type of plants which need to be watered m
385. ly Date Set show the date setting page Black and White C Touch only Diagnostics show the diagnostics page Black and White C Touch only Name show the name of the current page Colour C Touch only Startup show the start up page Black and White C Touch only Time Set show the backlight setting page Black and White C Touch only e Logic Colour C Touch only e Module Enabled show whether a particular logic Module is enabled e Running show whether logic is running e Timer show the time for a particular logic timer e Security Alarm State show the state of the security alarm All Zones OK show whether all security zones are secure Sealed Arm Failed show whether the arm sequence failed Arm Ready show if the system is ready to arm Arm System arm the system Armed Level Name show a description of the system armed level Armed State show whether the system is armed Battery Charging show if the battery is charging Entry Delay show if the Entry Delay is in progress Exit Delay show if the Exit Delay is in progress Fire Alarm show if there is a fire alarm Gas Alarm show if there is a gas alarm Keypad a security system keypad Keypad Arm emulate a keypad Arm key press Keypad Away emulate a keypad Away key press Keypad Day emulate a keypad Day key press Keypad Fire emulate a keypad Fire key press Keypad Night emulate a keypad Night key press Keypad Panic emulate a keypad Panic key press Keypad Vacation
386. ly as they are in the C Bus ToolKit Zone Group e Communication Group Number the Zone Group also known as a Communication Group this can only be changed when adding a Zone Group not when editing it e Name the name of the Zone Group Plant Equipment e Plant Equipment Type this is the type of air conditioning plant heat pump evaporative etc e Operating types supported e Heat e Cool e Heat Cool Auto e Vent fan The Operating Type properties allow you to select which of the operating types Heat Cool Heat Cool and Vent are supported by the plant equipment and are required for the user interface AN Ifthe system uses evaporative plant for cooling the Heat Cool Auto operating type is not recommended See notes for Wiser below Schedule Control The Schedule Control properties control how the C Bus Thermostat scheduling will be controlled The options are e Enable Scheduling for Non evaporative Plant Equipment this selects whether the non evaporative plant can be controlled by schedules e Enable Scheduling for Evaporative Plant Equipment this selects whether the evaporative plant can be controlled by schedules e Enable Group this is the C Bus Enable Control Application Group used to enable schedule program control of the C Bus Thermostat e Disable Group this is the C Bus Enable Control Application Group used to disable schedule program control of the C Bus Thermostat e Override Group this i
387. m the Pulse Power Meter Manager The Pulse Power Meter Editor allows the following aspects of a power meter to be selected Name this is a name for the power meter Network the C Bus Network the power meter is on Application the C Bus Application the pulses are on Group the C Bus Group Address the pulses are on Energy per Pulse the amount of energy through the power meter for each pulse Watt Hours Power Generator select this if the power being measured is from a device generating the power for example a solar panel or wind turbine This will result in the measured value being subtracted from the total power consumption Include in Totals select this option if you want this meter to be included in the totals for power peak power energy and cost e Tariff the Tariff which applies to this meter Offset the no load Reactive Power 4 25 12 6 Displaying Power and Energy To display values from Power Meters use Power Meter In built System IO variables Example 1 14kW To display the power consumed by all power meters as shown above 1 Add a bar Slider 2 Select the slider In built System IO properties e Key Function Status e In Built System IO Variable Power Meter Total e Meter Tariff All Meters e Units Watts 3 Select the Slider properties e Range Max 15000 for 15kW change this to suit e Bar Image select the image file PICED Image Library Slider Bars Traffic Light bmp Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric
388. mb the bit that slides up and down and tick marks the lines along the side The Slider thumb is used to set or indicate the C Bus Level Position Border Background Slider Alpha Blend You can Style Slot Thumb Slider Shape Rectangle x Shape Pointer Right f Bar Border Style Lowered x Border Style Raised 7 SEEN Border width 2 E Border Width k F Vertical width 10 Thumb Width p E Horizontal Border Colour Thumb Length 20 Iz Range Border Colour Background Colour Min fo packy d Col ackground Colour ae os Space at end 9 Bar Tick Marks f Single Colour Active Colour Style Right gt Colour Blend Inactive Golour Colour C Image seai f 2 7 Length f Select Image set the following slider details e Style A Slider has a thumb the bit that slides up and down A Bar has a rectangle of colour to indicate the C Bus Level e Orientation Vertical Horizontal e Range Min the minimum value for the slider Max the maximum value for the slider e Appearance of the Slot e The Bar properties if it is a Bar Style Shape Border Style Border Width Slot width Border Colour Background Colour Space at end of slot between the end of the slot and the inside edge of the border Single Colour Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 110 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Colour Blen
389. messages from the C Touch being written to the PICED log It also allows the logic usage to be monitored The C Touch Logic Usage as a of the maximum scan time will be logged every minute or when it exceeds the previous maximum C Touch Mark 2 Resources The following applies to C Touch firmware 3 0 or later Memory The PICED Software generates a file which is transferred to a C Touch unit The C Touch units have limited amounts of memory so you are limited in the size of the configuration file that you can transfer To see the exact amount of memory used by your Project select Resources Report from the Transfer menu A file resources txt is created in the project directory which has further details of the memory usage The 5000CTB has 256KB of memory for the user configuration data This is used to store all aspects of the Project including Pages Fonts Scenes Schedules Logic and other Project settings There is an additional 8KB of memory to store user settings which includes e Changes made to Scenes and Schedules since the last project transfer e Levels of C Bus Group Addresses e User settings for the backlight screen calibration screen contrast daylight savings and so forth For information on minimising the size of the transfer file refer to C Touch Resources Processor Capacity C Touch also has limits on how much logic can be run in one scan There are various methods of determining how much logic can be r
390. meters e The power usage of the three meters is believed to be roughly as follows e Meter 1 50 e Meter 2 30 e Meter 3 20 e An electricity bill as follows e For the last 3 months e 450 3000kWh The data can be entered in two different ways as follows Option 1 1 Go to the Power Meter Manager history tab 2 Enter some approximate data for each meter for today e Meter 1 15kWh e Meter 2 9kWh e Meter 3 6kWh 3 Edit the data as described in Example 2 4 The daily and hourly data will be in proportion to the entered approximate historical data Option 2 1 Go to the Power Meter Manager history tab 2 Select Meter 1 3 Select Daily Data Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 259 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Select the range of dates for the period three months up to today Click on Edit In Data Type select Total for Selected Days Enter 50 of the energy 1500kWh Enter 50 of the cost 225 Leave Copy to Hourly Data selected 10 Click on OK 11 Repeat steps 2 to 10 for each meter using the relative percentage for each OONOOS Once the historical data above is entered adding additional bills for periods prior will automatically allocate the energy across the meters proportionally so the steps in example 2 can be followed using the appropriate dates and energy usage 4 25 12 5 Pulse Power Meter Editor The Pulse Power Meter Editor can be opened fro
391. mixing two colours together to yield an intermediate colour Ticking the Colour Blending tick box will allow an indicator or component to display different colours between minimum and maximum The two endpoint colours must be selected for this to work Note that if a colour and the complement of that colour are mixed together the result is a neutral grey So the combination of blue and yellow red and cyan or green and magenta will be neutral grey in a 50 50 mix ie when the level is at 50 Conversely two colours which are not complements such as red and green two of the additive primary colours will yield some kind of colour at all ratios Hence for an indicator to show as coloured at all settings the two end points should not be complements of each other If you click the Copy Colour To Background button the active and inactive Border colours will be copied to the active and inactive Background colours Shadow The component can have a shadow from 0 no shadow to 100 black shadow which is selected using the Shadow control Levels in between 10 and 90 particularly around 40 give a realistic looking shadow 50 75 100 Shadow Shadow Shadow There are some limitations for the use of shadows e They are drawn using Alpha Blending and hence use additional processor power Therefore large components with shadows should be avoided where possible An invsible translucent transparent component will still have a shadow lf you h
392. month or year will NOT be included in the Schedule Example 1 For example suppose you have selected e Week Days Monday to Friday in the Day of Week set e Any Day ie all days 1 31 in the Day of Month set e January to June in the Month set e 2003 in the Year set Any day which is present in each of the above sets will be included in the Schedule Hence Monday 23 June 2003 will be in the Schedule the day is in Monday Friday the day of the month is in 1 31 the month is in Jan June and the year is 2003 Monday 21 June 2004 will not be in the Schedule the day is in Monday Friday the day of the month is in 1 31 the month is in Jan June but the year is not 2003 Any Saturday or Sunday will not be in the Schedule e Any day in July December will not be in the Schedule e Any day not in the year 2003 will not be in the Schedule Example 2 If you want the Schedule to occur on the first Tuesday of every month select Custom in the list in the Day of Week group and select Tuesday Select Week 1 from the list in the Day of Month Group Leave the Month group set to Any Month Leave the Year group set to Any Year Example 3 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 210 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 5 To have a schedule repeat every three days select Any Day in Day of Week and Any Month in the Month group Select Repeat in Day of Month Select 3 in the Repeat Schedule group Selec
393. mory capacity of unit then your project is too large to fit in the unit Refer to the Resources topic for details of minimising the project file size The simplest solution for C Touch projects is to use a different Image Compression selected on the Project Details form or on the Transfer to Unit form Solution 2 It may be necessary to contact Schneider Electric Australia Technical support if the reason description is not self explanatory 11 4 245 Error 14630 Message Network Network Name has been used in this project but is invalid Messages are not able to reach this network from the installed network Cause The project has used a network to which C Bus messages are not able to be sent nor are messages able to be received from Solution Remove the use of this network from the project or change the unit to be on a different network To find which network are used in the project use the Project Summary For more information on C Bus networks see http wwws3 clipsal com cis pdf_files C Bus Networks pdf 11 4 246 Error 14631 Message The use of network Network Name is invalid Messages are not able to reach this network from the installed network Cause You have selected a network to which C Bus messages are not able to be sent nor are messages able to be received from Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 412 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Do not use
394. mponent click on the Background Status Indication check box and select both the active and inactive background colours If the Colour Blending option is selected the colour will change from one colour to the other gradually as the Group Address level changes Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 105 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide If you click the Copy Colour To Border button the active and inactive Background colours will be copied to the active and inactive Border colours 4 9 4 2 4 Text The Text tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the component text the text alignment top left centre etc and the text font Position Border Background Text images Alpha Blend Active Text Alignment Set Font Insert Symbol Use Control Name Inactive Set Font Insert Symbol To select the font click on the Set Font button and the Font Selection form will appear To set the text justification alignment top left centre etc click on one of the Text Alignment buttons For Level Components the Word Wrap option can be selected not for Black and White C Touch If the text is longer than the width of the component it will continue on the next line automatically This is useful for when displaying for a System IO Variable which could get quite long When Word Wrap is selected the text will always be top aligned
395. n open an existing project Reopen open a previously opened file Save Save the project Save As Save the project using a different name Archive Save Backup Save a Backup copy of the Project Export to Archive Export the Project to an Archive Import From Archive Import a Project from an Archive Save as V4 10 Save the Project in a format that can be opened by V4 10 or earlier of the software Open Template Open a project template Add Template Contents Add a template page to the Project Re Add Template Contents Add a template page to the Project which has been used before Save As Template Save the Project as a template Save Page As Template Save the page as a template Save Components As Template Save the selected Components as a template Convert Files Convert Project files from old format to new format Exit exit the program EDIT MENU Undo cancels the previous action s Delete delete the selected component s Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 42 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Cut cut the selected component s Copy copy the selected component s Paste paste a copy of the copied component s Paint Format paint the format of the copied component Copy Groups copy the Group Address of the Primary Selection to the Secondary Selection s Component Properties set the properties of the sel
396. n Boolean Value show the boolean value of the selected channel Energy Value show the energy value for the selected Analogue Power Meter channel Integer Value show the integer value of the selected channel Power Value show the power value for the selected Analogue Power Meter channel Real Value show the real floating point value of the selected channel Show Form show the Measurement App Form Temperature Value show the value of the selected channel which is conveying a temperature reading Valid Value does the selected channel have valid data e Labels moe o o o o o o o o o o o o o oj Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 136 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide eL Action Selector Label the label for a selected Action Selector Clear clear all labels Group Label the label for a selected Group Set Language set the language to be used for labels Show Form show the labels form Show Language show the currently selected language oad Monitor Load Power the current power used by the load Show Form show the Load Monitor Colour C Touch only Total Power the current power used by the site e HVAC Air Conditioning All of the following apply to a specific Zone Group and Zone Number Busy State show if the controller is busy Cooling State show if the controller is cooling Data is Valid show if the data is valid Error Name show the name of any error Error N
397. n captures all Scene Components for the Application selected in the Available Groups panel e Capture Net and App captures all Scene Components for the Network and Application selected in the Available Groups panel Setting Scene Levels It is possible to test the Scene by setting some or all of the Scene levels on C Bus To set the whole Scene click on the Set Scene button or right click on the Scene Components list and select the Set Scene Set Scene item To set just part of a Scene 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Set Scene item or right click on the Set Scene button 3 Select the Set Scene Levels Immediately Set Selected or Set Selected Immediately sub item The meanings of these is discussed below e Set Scene Levels Immediately set the whole Scene immediately do not use the Scene Components ramp rate e Set Selected Set the selected Scene Components using their correct ramp rates e Set Selected Immediately Set the selected Scene Components to their levels immediately do not use their ramp rates If the Live Changes check box is selected any changes made to Scene Components will be broadcast onto C Bus immediately To identify a particular Group Address 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Flash Group item Printing Scene Details To print the Scene matrix ri
398. n Lighting ia Unit Address Unused v The Default Application is used when creating new Components Scenes and Schedules The Unit Address is necessary if you are going to be programming a Black and White C Touch or PAC over C Bus Networks Colour C Touch Projects only Networks E m IV Bridges use Application Connect Mode For the Colour C Touch to correctly model the C Bus networks it is necessary to select whether Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 56 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide networks are to be modelled independently If they are to be modelled independently select the Model Networks Independently check box If the bridges connected to the Colour C Touch network have Application Connect mode set from the Colour C Touch network to the remote network select the Bridges use Application Connect Mode check box Refer to the C Bus Networks document which can be found in the Manuals folder for more details on the modelling of C Bus networks C Bus Control C Bus Control grescescecssersscesseessnssnsenssnssnscsssenssessssessesssecessesssnsensssssossasssseossessey Kasecosceoscoscsososoosoeoscocesoooocossesscosossesesocossoossosocoosseoesesossosesosessesoss IV Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes Use Indicator Kill For showing Scene Status Ramp Groups to Off When a group address is ramped to level 0 the command is received by all C Bus
399. n Mode 36 319 Exit 151 time out 7 Operational State 236 Options 53 63 70 Program 32 36 Order 141 Output Unit 6 P PAC 295 309 amount of logic 299 Connect 299 Controlling 298 Firmware Update 298 Recover 299 Refresh Project 298 resources 298 Stop 299 Updating Project 310 usage 298 Page Link 120 Pages 90 Access Level 91 Add 48 Adding 83 85 90 Adding Components 132 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Alarm 53 63 70 Auto Create 81 267 Deleting 91 Documenting 334 Duplicating 90 Import 48 In built System IO 183 Limits 7 Links 126 133 207 order 32 Page Change Effect 151 Password 91 Properties 91 Save As 82 Saving the Image 337 Selecting 41 90 Start up 53 63 70 Sub Pages 146 System IO 155 Templates 83 84 85 Theme 144 146 Time out 53 63 70 Tools 133 Transition 93 Transition Effect 53 63 70 Paint Format 141 Parameters Command Line 36 Password 91 218 Limits 7 PC Interface 32 316 Percent 15 94 96 266 PICED Introduction 4 Limits 7 Options 32 Project File 48 Screen 31 Start up 32 using 48 Pictures 283 Play List 28 Polygon 132 Pools Application 13 POP3 234 Pop up editor 53 63 70 Position 101 Power 255 Display 254 255 260 Page 429 Home Management Series Power 255 In built System IO 180 181 Meters 254 255 Power Factor 261 Reactive 261 Power Failure Recovery 53 63 70 316 318 Power Meter Analogue
400. n Mode does the following things e Components are activated by a left or right mouse click this is useful for running on Touch Panel PCs e The menus and tool bars are hidden e The Window is set to the same size as the Project Screen Size Note that the Simulation Mode cursor image can be set in the Program Options form Usage with Wiser Home Control The Wiser Home Control runs Simulation Mode in a web browser on a separate form This may require the installation of Adobe Flash to run Simulation Mode for the Wiser Home Control only simulates the user interface To test Logic Scenes Schedules User System IO and E Mail you will need to Transfer the project to the Wiser Home Control first See also Program Options Logging Command Line Parameters Command Line Parameters The PICED program can be started with various properties enabled upon start up These properties are called Command Line Parameters For example the program can start with a particular file loaded and with the C Bus communications channel already open This is particularly useful when the program is set to automatically start when the computer is started by having the program in the Windows Startup folder or if you have a Desktop shortcut To set the command line parameters right click on the PICED shortcut on the desktop or Start menu and select the Properties item The command line parameters are entered into the Target box The syntax is a
401. n be changed to select the required Scene Component The name of the Selected Scene Component Group Address can be displayed using the Scene Component Name in built System IO variable The Level of the selected Group Address can be displayed and adjusted using the Scene Component Level in built System IO variable Some in built System IO marked with above have an offset which allows the use of more than one of this System IO at the same time with different Components For example the level of the selected Scene Component can be shown and controlled but by using an offset of 1 the next one Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 156 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 1 2 can be shown and controlled and so forth See the In built System IO Example for details Scenes which can not be edited If a Scene Locked option is selected then it will not be able to be edited and the Scene Locked variable will be true If a Scene Component Locked option is selected then it will not be able to be edited and the Scene Component Locked variable will be true See also e The In built System IO Example for details of how to edit a Scene using in built System IO variables e Special Functions for editing Scenes e The Scene editing Template which shows how Scene editing can be done In built System IO Example Various templates are supplied with the PICED software to quickly add sets of related comp
402. n of this software Do you want to save this file as the latest format Reason The Project file is the old file format It can be automatically converted to the new format including the backup file Action Click on Yes to save it with the new format Click on No to save it with the same format as it currently is Confirm 14093 Message Do you want to recover the selected load s after a power failure Reason You have requested that selected load s have their Power Failure Recovery status changed Action Click on Yes to recover the state of the selected load s after a power failure Click on No to not recover the state of the selected load s after a power failure Click on Cancel to not change anything Confirm 14094 Message Are you Sure you want to delete old all Special Days Reason You have pressed a button to delete all Special Days or just the old ones the ones that occurred before today Action Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 367 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 94 11 4 95 11 4 96 11 4 97 Click on Yes to delete the Special Days Click on No to leave the Special Days Confirm 14095 Message Are you sure you want to delete the selected item Reason You have attempted to delete a Scene or Scene Action Actions Click on Yes to delete the item Click on Cancel to leave the item Warning 14096 Message Tag can not be added
403. n the error occurred Without this information it is probably going to be impossible for Schneider Electric Australia to diagnose your problem 2 Either click on the Send button to send the details to Schneider Electric Australia or click on the Copy button and then paste the information into an e mail When reporting errors the following information will help with the diagnosis of the problem 1 Details of your computer processor memory hard disk 2 Details of your operating system 3 Version of the software being used 4 Details of the error error number etc 5 What you did to make the error occur Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 339 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 6 Was it possible to make the error occur again To support the diagnosis you may also need to provide 1 Your PICED project file 2 Your C Bus Project File 3 Log Files Message List Confirm 14002 Message Are you Sure you want to delete the selected item You will not be able to undo this action Reason You have attempted to delete a Page Schedule Access Level or User It is not possible to undo this action Actions Click on Yes to delete the item Click on Cancel to leave the item Warning 14003 Message Password Incorrect Cause You have entered an incorrect password Solution Either e Enter the correct password e Obtain help from someone t
404. n the form press the Refresh button To automatically update the form when new data is received select the Auto Refresh check box The Measurement Application Channel Form will allow you to edit the necessary details Measurement Application Channel The Measurement Application Channel form allows you to enter the details for Measurement Channel It can be opened from the Measurement Application Manager The details which can be edited are e Name the name of the Measurement Channel e Network the C Bus Network which the unit is installed on e Device ID the Device ID number this is usually the same as the unit address Channel the channel number the first channel is usually 0 Controllable this allows the value of the channel to be set using In Built System IO Variables which will result in the messages being sent onto C Bus e Units this is the type of data being sent If this measurement channel is reporting the power for a power meter select the additional details e Measuring Power this selects whether the channel is measuring a power level This is used for Analogue Power Meters e Power Generator select this if the power being measured is from a device generating the power for example a solar panel or wind turbine This will result in the measured value being subtracted from the total power consumption e Include in Totals select this option if you want this meter to be included in the totals for power peak
405. nager Report button This lists the errors with the selected filtering applied Error Application Item Error conditions can be added for monitoring by clicking the Add button on the Error Application Manager form This will display the C Bus Error Application Item form This allows you to enter the following details of one or more error conditions to be added e Network the C Bus Network which the unit is installed on e Category the category of error message currently only DALI Gateway or Universal Dimmer are supported e Device ID the ID number the device sending the message e Channel the unit channel to be monitored e Most Severe whether to monitor the Most Severe or Most Recent error condition Enter the desired details and click on the Add button Click on Close when complete HVAC Application C Bus devices controlling HVAC Heating Ventilation amp Air Conditioning can interact via the Air Conditioning Application The PICED software can monitor the HVAC messages and show the status using the HVAC Application Manager For more details on the use of the HVAC Application with specific device types refer to the documentation for the specific device Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 241 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 7 1 See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO C Bus Network Manager HVAC Application Manager The HVAC Application Manage
406. names which can be used in Wiser is limited to 64 characters The names are stored as escaped text which means that non ASCII characters such as Chinese characters use up to 8 of these characters each Solution Shorten the name 11 4 261 Warning 14647 Message This component may be drawn incorrectly due to the combination of colour blend and other status indication Cause The component images in C Touch spectrum are stored as an active and inactive image Colour blending is achieved by blending between the active and inactive image If some other aspect of the component changes between the active and inactive states for example the border style background style text or image the component may not be drawn as expected Solution Click on OK to leave things as they are Click on Cancel to make changes 11 4 262 Confirmation 14648 Message To stop the unit type from running 1 Connect the unit to the PC Physically disconnect the unit from C Bus Wait for 5 seconds Connect the unit to C Bus Wait for 5 seconds Click on OK Transfer the firmware and or project as normal N oF amp OW PO Cause You have selected to recover a C Touch or a PAC unit Solution Follow the above instructions or refer to Recovering C Touch Unit or Recovering PAC Unit for Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 417 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide additional details 11 4 263 Confirmation 14650
407. nction for each of the following conditions e Short Press user has just pressed the Component e Short Release user has pressed the Component for less than 400ms and released e Long Press user has pressed the Component for 400ms e Long Release user has pressed the Component for more than 400ms but less than 10s and released Extra long press user has pressed the Component for 10s rarely used Extra long release user has pressed the Component for more than 10s and released rarely used Key Microfunctions The purposes of the microfunctions are described below The ones with a are not used by regular C Bus key input units Micro function Purpose CCCs Idle Donothing o O Toggle Alternate between setting to 100 and 0 Ramp Toggle Alternate between ramping to 100 and 0 Down Cycle Alternate between ramping to 100 and 1 Standard Key Functions The key microfunctions used by the PICED software are a little different from those used in the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 262 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Toolkit due to the vastly different capabilities of the PICED software The key microfunctions used for each key function are listed below The Slider and Selector key functions work differently so are not listed Eeee Release Release Press Release Unused ide ide ide ide ide ide Onn _ Onkey ide ide ide ide f ide of Offkey ide ide i
408. nd Wellington 1 07 2003 11 22 AM 1 07 2003 11 22 AM 1 07 2003 01 22 PM 1 07 2003 12 22 PM Z lt ZZ ce ee Ss et Zz lt cee K Time Zone AUS Eastern Standard Time 4US Eastern Standard Time GMT 10 00 Starts on last Sunday of March at 3 00 00 AM This year 30 03 2003 3 00 00 AM Standard Time AUS Eastern Daylight Time GMT 11 00 Starts on last Sunday of October at 2 00 00 AM This year 26 10 2003 2 00 00 AM Daylight Saving Time Active Now Adjustment 60 minutes The Timezone Selection form allows you to select from an extensive list of time zones supplied by the operating system There is a list of all Time zones with the following details e GMT offset from GMT Greenwich Mean Time e Name the name of the Timezone e Home the word home is written along side of your home time zone This can only be changed from the operating system e DLS this shows whether Daylight Savings is used in this time zone e Now this shows whether Daylight Savings is currently active e Date amp Time this shows the current data and time in the time zone When a time zone is selected the following details are shown at the bottom of the form e Timezone this is the name of the selected time zone e Standard Time this is when Daylight Savings finishes e Daylight Savings Time this is when Daylight Savings starts e Adjustment this is how much the clocks are adjusted during Daylight Savings time
409. nd in the PICED Firmware folder Cause A firmware file has not been selected Solution Enter a firmware file name in the Firmware box or click on the folder button to select a file Firmware files can be found in the PICED Firmware folder They are the files with a mot file extension 11 4 228 Error 14611 Message Invalid firmware file name Cause The selected firmware file name is invalid Solution Select a valid firmware 11 4 229 Error 14612 Message Please enter a file name to be transferred Cause A Project transfer file has not been selected Solution Select a transfer file 11 4 230 Error 14613 Message Invalid file name to be transferred Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 407 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Cause The transfer file name is invalid Solution Select a valid transfer file 11 4 231 Error 14614 Message Transfer Error Cause The transfer to C Touch PAC failed Solution Try again If it fails again refer to the FAQ 11 4 232 Information 14615 Message Download Terminated by User Reason The download to C Touch PAC was terminated by the user Action Click on OK 11 4 233 Information 14616 Message Download Complete Reason The download to C Touch PAC is complete Action Click on OK 11 4 234 Information 14617 Message Changes can not be made to the Connection while connected Please disconnect before making Copy
410. nder each selected component Use as Theme Component use the currently selected component as the Theme Component Apply Selected Theme Style to All apply the style of the selected Theme Component to all similar Components Apply Theme Style to Selected apply the style of the Theme Component to the selected Components Apply Theme Style to All apply the style of the Theme Components to all Components VIEW MENU Simulation Mode set the program in Simulation Mode Toolbars Hide Toolbars hide the tool bars Show Toolbars show all Tool Bars Restore Toolbars Restore all Tool Bars to their default position Component Label Show Numbers show the number of all Components Show Numbers of Action Comp show the number of all Components which have an Action Show Actions show the Action of all Components which have an Action Network Status show whether the Network for each C Bus Component is on line Component Group show the number of the Component Groups Show Sub Page Frame Border show a dotted border for Sub Page Frames unless in Simulation Mode Background show the black and white C Touch frame Highlight Theme Components when displaying the Theme Components page highlight the Theme Components Remote Control show the C Touch IR Remote Control for testing purposes Log show the Log Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 43 Home Management Series PICED Programme
411. nding off or use an image editor to a lot of processor capacity and may result obtain the desired effect in slow operation The component has multiple actions This may cause unexpected behaviour when this component is activated There are no users who can control C Bus A component is covering another component which has different C Bus control This will cause different actions depending on where the component is pressed A component is covering another component which has a different Page Link This will cause different actions depending on where the component is pressed A component is covering another component which has a different Special Function This will cause different actions depending on where the component is pressed Multiple Master Units have been selected Only one unit should normally be the Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Check that the actions are all required and change if needed Edit the access options in the Access Control Manager Move one component or make the C Bus settings the same in both components See Transferred Images Move one component or make the Page Links the same in both components See Transferred Images Move one component or make the Special Functions the same in both components See Transferred Images Select a single Profile for the Master Unit Page 325 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Error 200 Error 201
412. nformation 14602 Message Press CTRL S to exit Simulation Mode Reason You have entered Simulation Mode To exit Simulation Mode press CTRL S Action Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 404 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on OK 11 4 220 Error 14603 Message Could not connect to unit Reason Cause A connection could not be made to the C Touch PAC unit A reason for the failure is given Solution Try again If it fails then e check that the correct COM Port is selected in the Program Options e check that the serial USB cable is connected See also FAQ 11 4 221 Confirm 14604 Message Do you want to continue despite the errors Cause Your Project has errors in it which may affect the performance Solution To continue regardless click on Yes To stop click on No or Cancel It is recommended that you Check the Project for errors and fix them 11 4 222 Information 14605 Message Written x bytes of configuration data Click on Continue to continue Click on Details to get details of the data to be transferred Reason The configuration data file has been written Action To continue with the transfer click on Continue To view the details of the data click on Details To cancel the transfer click on Cancel Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 405 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 223 Error 14606 Message Mo
413. ng An error condition can be set to be monitored if you are interested in the particular error condition Sometimes error conditions will be broadcast which you are not interested in An example would Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 240 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 6 2 4 25 7 be if particular channels of a unit were not used and you don t want to receive no load or load failure messages To select an error condition to be monitored either e Select the item in the list and click the Monitor button or e Click on the Add button to bring up the Error Application Item form Error Filtering To display only items which monitored select the Just Show Monitored check box To display only items which have a severity greater than OK select the Just Show Failures check box Name An error condition can be named by double clicking on the error condition and entering a name Other To update the list as error messages are received select the Auto Refresh check box To manually update click the Refresh button To acknowledge or clear an error condition select the error in the list and click the Acknowledge or Clear button respectively To generate a report showing the error conditions either e Select the Tools Reports Error Report menu item This lists just the errors which are monitored and which have a severity greater than OK or e Click on the Error Application Ma
414. ng a scene button for more that 10 seconds will show the Scene Editor form For setting Scenes in a different unit use the Preset key function NUDGE UP This adjusts the load level up by the amount set in the Level box NUDGE DOWN This adjusts the load level down by the amount set in the Level box SELECT This selects between one of several levels Only used by Selector Components SLIDER This is used for sliders only STATUS this will show the C Bus status but pressing the component will have no effect UNUSED this will not show C Bus status or perform any C Bus action when pressed Note that if C Bus Remote Control is selected only the Status option is available It is also possible to create Custom Key Functions for use with Components Click on the edit button next to the Key Function list to open the Custom Key Function Manager Custom Key Functions in the list will be highlighted Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 123 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 4 Controlled Item If you wish for the Component to adjust all of the Group Addresses in a Scene select the Scene Groups button and select the desired Scene If you wish to control a Single Group Address then e Select the Single Group button e Select the Network Application and Group Address Level If the component is to be a preset press timer nudge up or nudge down you will need to select the Level You can e
415. nge the size of the image e Use a smaller image Confirm 14011 Message Do you want to change the scene levels Reason You are about to open the Scene Editor This will allow you to add and change scenes Action Click on Yes to open the Scene Editor Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 342 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 11 11 4 12 11 4 13 Click on No to not open the Scene Editor Error 14012 Message Error Connecting to C Gate Cause The connection to C Gate has been lost or could not be established A common cause is that you may be using more C Bus Networks than your C Gate licence allows Solution Check that C Gate is running at the selected IP Address see C Bus Project Try connecting to C Gate using Telnet Refer to the C Gate documentation for more details Re start C Gate and check the number of licences See also Can t Connect To C Gate FAQ Error 14013 Message Could not connect to C Gate at IP Address Cause The connection to C Gate could not be established at P Address Solution Check that C Gate is running at the selected IP Address see C Bus Project Try connecting to C Gate using Telnet Refer to the C Gate documentation for more details See also Can t Connect To C Gate FAQ Information 14014 Message Connected to C Gate version Reason The connection to C Gate was successful The version of C Gate is also given
416. ngine for creating customised system behaviour These elements of the software interact as shown below Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 4 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Logic Engine Project File Scene Controller C Bus Controller Schedule Controller Irrigation Controller 1 2 1 Interaction with Other Software The interaction between the PICED software and C Gate C Bus ToolKit C Touch PAC and Colour C Touch is shown below C Bus Project File C Gate EJ PAC TCP IP C Touch C Touch Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 5 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The C Bus ToolKit is used to create the C Bus Project File This is used by the PICED software for the C Bus Tags C Gate provides the interface between the PICED software and the C Bus Project File as well as providing access to C Bus Projects are transferred to C Touch C Touch Mark 2 PAC or Colour C Touch via Serial RS232 USB or Ethernet as shown above 1 3 Typographic Conventions Menu Items The menu selections in this document follow a simple menu description notation If the user is using the PICED Software and chooses for example the menu Edit then from the resulting menu chooses Select and then from that menu chooses Select All then this process will be described as Edit Select Sel
417. nitor Version is x You will need to upgrade to version y The unit will need to be returned to the factory for upgrading Cause Your C Touch PAC unit has an old version of the Monitor firmware which needs to be upgraded Solution Contact Schneider Electric Australia Technical Support 11 4 224 Information 14607 Message Will connect to unit on network unit address x To change these details edit the Project Details Reason This is confirming the details of which C Touch PAC unit is to be connected to Action Click on OK 11 4 225 Warning 14608 Message Firmware Version is x This configuration software is for version y to z Either change the software or the firmware to give compatible versions Cause The PICED Software version is not compatible with the C Touch PAC Firmware version in the C Touch PAC unit Solution Either change the PICED software or the C Touch PAC firmware to give compatible versions 11 4 226 Information 14609 Message You will need to connect to the unit Serial connector to upgrade the firmware Reason The C Touch PAC firmware can not be transferred via C Bus Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 406 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Action Connect the C Touch Serial connector or PAC USB connector to your computer and transfer the firmware 11 4 227 Error 14610 Message Please enter a firmware file name Firmware files can be fou
418. nnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn eee mnanaa 304 Unit Different Sinirin i anette assed saved eect ecard ere Cede ast ac a e iaa eevee eet 309 Updating Unit Projects si cseiccea eects tatiana 310 Cloning NS sca a secs ease ce parae aaaea ra Enana o EAE aaae ede AEEA aaae cues NSAN aeaaaee 311 C Gate O o a aaa a a E aaea 312 C Gate Algorithm isiissiiiiniiani ennnen anauawa arame eihar in eaaa rrna aai 312 OPTlONS l E aaa raer Ea ae eA a tlie eared et eee ee eerie 313 Automatic Reconnection sssssensnsnunnennnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunn eee ca ce nnmnnn eee deed 314 Frequently Asked Questions cccssccesceseesseeesseeeeeeenseeeseeesneeenaseneneaseaeseeeenaeeneneneees 0 Testing Debugging and Operation s enenesnnsurnnrnnnnrnnrennnnurnnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnn ernennen 316 Connecting to C BUS iec5 ee te etal eee 316 Load MONON Ae aa aa pr eade cern ea cates ds eins dean cae eee sees Reet daaa eae 316 Power Failur RECOVGlY o cc88 fete eceed testes tte eed a ht een eee 318 Simulatlon Mode siin en eee cars eee eo an aie 319 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 5 Logging Events sise iasan aaraa vaca vice ctomeeenccepensedesisces AKE A ERIEN ESEE Eia 319 8 6 Checking th Project an raoir raana pees tease eet hereaunc hd Enana pananda eae tinea te 324 8 7 Project SOMMANY aie iene tae ea Aa eee eA a eee et 328 8 8 Cascaded Scene Report xc ciscie tallest ee eed 329 8 9 Master Unit assin ae ot tie eet ee a eit 329 8 10
419. nother remote control unit you will need to enter the Manufacturer and Key codes see below InfraRed Remote Control V IR Remote Control Enabled Clipsal 8 Key Remote 1 T Manufacturer Code D 4 gt 4 gt Key Code 1 Remote control codes can be found on various web sites or can be read via the Black and White C Touch unit To do this you need to have a Black and White C Touch unit and select the Diagnostics page Select the Unit Data page and there will be information about the last received IR code Point your remote control at the C Touch unit and press the key You will see the Manufacturer Code and Key Code appear on the C Touch screen These values can then be entered in the Component Properties form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 128 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 8 4 9 4 9 You can test that the remote control codes have been set up correctly if using the remote control that came with C Touch by selecting the View Remote Control menu item A form will appear with an image of the remote control unit on it Clicking on one of the keys will execute the action set up for that key A component can only be remote controlled if the page it is on is showing To enable a Component to be remote controlled regardless of which page is showing place the Component on a Theme Page and use that Theme Page for all of your other pages in the project This will ensure that the Com
420. ns of data presented are e Index this is the order in the list e Name the name of the power meter e Description the C Bus Unit Address and Measurement Application Channel e Power the current power level e Tariff the Tariff which applies to this meter At the bottom of the tab there is a message showing how many of the possible Analogue Power Meters have been used Adding Power Meters To add a new Analogue Power Meter click on the Add button The Measurement Application Channel form will be displayed Enter the power meter details and click on OK Editing Power Meters To edit an existing Analogue Power Meter 1 Select the Analogue Power Meter in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Analogue Power Meter in the list 2 The Measurement Application Channel form will be displayed 3 Edit the power meter details 4 Click on OK Deleting Power Meters To delete an existing Analogue Power Meter 1 Select the Analogue Power Meter in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Tariff A Tariff is the cost of the energy per kWh The units of the cost cents dollars pounds etc are up to the user Each Tariff generally corresponds to a single physical power meter When the energy supplier has different tariffs for different electricity usage for example normal usage and off peak usage there will generally be separate electricity meters The Tariff tab shows electricity tariffs used for the vario
421. nt a group to be set to a level to trigger some event e Special Function select a special function if required e Page Link select a page to be displayed if required e Backlight activate the backlight if required this can also be done using a Special Function Backlight Tab Black and White C Touch and C Touch Spectrum only The C Touch unit has a backlight control algorithm which makes the backlight increase in brightness as the room gets brighter This ensures that the C Touch unit is easily readable in all ambient light levels without being too bright when the room is dark Backlight Control Default Fall Back Offset s Yo t 3 Max 169 F p3 a r Light Level Min 21 Max 200 Minze T Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 60 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The graph shows the relationship between the ambient light level and the backlight level The red line shows the relationship when the screen has been recently touched ie it is being used The blue line shows the relationship when the screen has not been touched for a while see the time out duration above The backlight generally gets brighter as the ambient room light level gets brighter In the example above the backlight will be at a constant level when the ambient light level is below about 60 The backlight gradually gets brighter until the light level is around 90 The backlight is at a constant level
422. number Telephony Divert Clear clear the telephone diversion Telephony Reject Incoming Call reject hang up the incoming telephone call Threshold Set store the current light level for the threshold Time Hour Down decrease the hour Time Hour Up increase the hour Time Minute Down decrease the minute Time Minute Up increase the minute Time Reset Seconds reset the seconds to 0 Note that the date and time setting special functions do not operate in Simulation Mode in PICED Many of these things are normally done with the special pages which are included with C Touch There may be occasions where it is necessary to control these features from other pages for example having a time setting page in another language For PAC projects the Special Functions are e None no Special Function is used Daylight Savings Finish stop daylight savings Daylight Savings Start start daylight savings Module Disable disable a Logic Module to stop it from running Module Enable enable a Logic Module System IO Variables System IO Variables are used to provide interaction between the user and various elements of the PICED software They can be controlled by Components or Logic System IO Variables have a value which can be displayed and or changed They are different from Special Functions which have no value associated with them There are two categories of System IO Variables e n built these provide interaction
423. o be edited i e they should be locked Actions If you want to lock the Scene Component click on Yes otherwise click on No 11 4 209 Confirmation 14212 Message This will clear all historical data including Graph data Power Meter data and Load Monitor Energy values Are you sure you want to continue Reason You have selected the Clear Historical Data Menu ltem or Special Function This will clear data from Graphs and Pulse Power Meters Actions Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 401 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide If you want to clear this data click on Yes otherwise click on No 11 4 210 Information 14213 Message Action succeeded failed Reason The action you have requested succeeded or failed Action Click on OK 11 4 211 Confirmation 14214 Message Can not add any more Media Link Groups Maximum is limit Reason There is a limit to the number of Media Link Groups that can be added to a project and that limit has been reached Actions Use the Media Transport Control Application Manager to delete any Media Link Groups which are not required 11 4 212 Confirmation 14215 Message Can not add any more Pulse Power Meters Maximum is limit Reason There is a limit to the number of Pulse Power Meters that can be added to a project and that limit has been reached Actions Use the Power Meter Manager to delete any Pulse Power Meters which are not re
424. o cancel the transfer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 409 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 237 Error 14620 Message There is no Unit Address selected A unit address will be needed if downloading via C Bus Cause A unit address has not been selected If you intend to download to the unit via C Bus you will need to enter a unit address Solution Click on Change to select a unit address Click on Continue to ignore this error Selecting Don t show me again will stop this error message being shown in the future 11 4 238 Warning 14621 Message The type name is too long and will be shortened to name when transferred to C Touch Cause The name is too long to be transferred to C Touch Solution If the proposed name is acceptable then you do not need to do anything Otherwise change the name to something shorter 11 4 239 Error 14622 Message The transfer failed Cause The project transfer process failed Solution Try again If it fails again refer to the FAQ 11 4 240 Error 14623 Message A project must be transferred when the firmware is updated Cause Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 410 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The existing project data in the unit may not be compatible with the new firmware Solution Select a project to transfer 11 4 241 Error 14624 Message Export of C Bus project to C Bus V2 format failed Cau
425. o have the Components have the correct style when they are first placed rather than having to change them afterwards To achieve this you can set some Theme Components with the styles that you wish to have The process is e Create one or more Theme Pages e On the first of the Theme Pages the Theme Components Page place the Components you wish to use in your theme one of each type e Edit the Components on the Theme Components Page to achieve the desired appearance e Every time you place a new Component it will take on the appearance of the corresponding Theme Component When a component is placed by clicking and icon on the Tool Bar if there is a corresponding Theme Component then it will be placed If not then the default one will be placed The component chosen from the theme components page depends on which type of component is being placed Text the first text Component on the Components Theme Page e Shape e if placing a shape with a flat border then it will be the first flat Shape Component on the Theme Components Page e if placing a shape with a 3D border then it will be the first 3D Shape Component on the Theme Components Page C Bus Button the first Button Component on the Theme Components Page which has a C Bus type set Text Button the first Button Component on the Theme Components Page which does not have a C Bus type set e Level the first Level Component on the Theme Components Page Indicator
426. oes the selected channel have Boolean No Value valid data The following values will be reported for system IO variables prior to a value being received via C Bus e Integer values 0 e Real Values 0 0 e Boolean Values false During this time the Measurement App Valid Value will have a value of false The value of the channel data should be ignored during this time as the correct value is unknown Once a C Bus message has been received containing a value for the channel the corresponding system lO variable will have the correct value and the Measurement App Valid Value will have a value of true Measurement Application channels need to be added with the Measurement Application Manager before they can be used There are additional In built System IO Variables for use with Measurement Application Power Meters Note that the General Input Unit refers to channel 0 as being channel 1 A Setting a Measurement App in built System IO variable is only possible if the Controllable property is set In this case the value will also be broadcast onto C Bus Avoid changing these too often as it can create excessive C Bus Traffic See also Special Functions for Measurement Application functions 4 14 1 12 HVAC App In Built System IO The C Bus HVAC Air Conditioning Application can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Settable HVAC Data Valid Is the data
427. of the columns click on the top of the column and drag it to where you want it to be Moving Items in Lists For information which is displayed in Columns it is generally possible to change the order of the items To mowe an item in a list 1 Select the item by clicking on it 2 Click on the up or down button if they exist to move up or down by one position or 3 Click on the item and drag it to the correct position then release the mouse button Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 47 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 A Note that items can only be moved if the columns are sorted by the item number and in increasing order 1 2 3 Creating and Saving Projects Step by Step Guide To use the PICED Program follow these steps e Create any C Bus Networks Applications Group Addresses Levels and Tags needed using the C Bus ToolKit software e Create a directory to put your project in all image files will be put there PICED can do this for you when you Save the Project Create a new project Set the Project Details Add pages Add components to each page Add links to the pages Create Scenes Create Schedules Set up the Irrigation Control if required Set up the Access Control if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Proj
428. ograms Program Name show the name of the selected Irrigation Program Program Number show the number of the selected Irrigation Program Program Select select the Irrigation Program Rain Delay activate the Irrigation Rain Delay Run Zone run the currently selected irrigation zone Running show if the Irrigation Controller is running Running Zone Name name of the currently running zone Stop stop the Irrigation Controller running Time show the duration of the currently selected Zone in the currently selected Program Time Remaining show how much time is remaining on the currently running Zone Time Select select the duration of the currently selected Zone in the currently selected Program by one hour Zone Count show the number of Irrigation Zones Zone Name show the name of the selected Irrigation Zone Zone Number show the number of the selected Irrigation Zone Zone Running show whether the selected Irrigation Zone is running Zone Select select the Irrigation Zone e Special Days Colour C Touch only Edit open the Special Day Manager Name show the name of the current Special Day e Access Control Colour C Touch only Edit open the Access Control Manager Edit Password show the Access Control User Editor Keypad a keypad for entering password Level show the level of the current Access Level Level name show the name of the current Access Level Logged In State show whether anyone is curren
429. on Short Press Short Release Long Press Long Release X Long Press X Long Release Unused Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle On Off Toggle Ramp Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle On On Key Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Off Off Key Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Dimmer Idle Toggle Down Cycle End Ramp Idle End Ramp On Up Idle On Key Up Key End Ramp Idle End Ramp Off Down Idle Off Key Down Key End Ramp Idle End Ramp za _ gt Edit Delete Custom Key Functions Key Function Short Press Short Release Long Press Long Release X Long Press X Long Release My Nudge Up Nudge Up Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle My Nudge Down Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle The top part of the form shows the microfunctions used by the standard key functions These are not able to be edited Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 263 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The bottom part of the form shows the custom key functions and their microfunctions Adding Custom Key Functions To add a new custom key function click on the Add button The Custom Key Function Editor will allow you to enter the necessary details Editing Custom Key Functions To edit an existing custom key function 1 Select a custom key function in the list 2 Click the Edit button The Custom Key Function Editor allows you to enter details of the custom key function Deleting Custom Key Functions To delete an existing custom key function 1 Select a custom key funct
430. onents such as for editing Scenes Schedules or Irrigation It is recommended that these be used or you modify them to suit your own needs The example below shows how to assemble the necessary components for editing a Scene To allow a Scene to be selected and the associated Scene Components to be displayed and controlled a series of Components using In built System IO variables can be used Step 1 Selecting a Scene To allow a Scene to be selected place two Buttons to nudge up and down the Scene Number In built System IO variable The easiest way to do this is to use the Tool Select form 1 Open the Tools form by selecting the Edit Place Component Tools menu item or clicking the Tools button on the Tool Bar Select the Scene Category of the tool required Select the Number Up or Number Down tool Function Click on the OK button Click on the screen where you want the button placed IRN Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 157 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Select Scene Nudge Up Scene Number ne Scene Name Night Scene Nudge Down Scene Number 1 of 6 Scene Count Scene Number You want the user to be able to see the name of the selected Scene so place a Scene Name Component using the Tool Select form You may also want to see the number of the Scene and how many Scenes there are but this is not essential If you place the components as shown abov
431. oolntporg NTP2URL i poo ntporg NTPSURL 2 poo ntporg OO NIP4URL 3 poolntporg Save Preference Load Preference Load Default e Use NTP to Maintain Time on Wiser use internet network time protocol to automatically set the time date NTP URL specify the 4 clock source addresses Save Preference custom NTP URL s can be entered and saved as a preference Load Preference replace the default NTP URL s with the saved preferred values Load Default restore the NTP URL s to the default values Refer to http Awww pool ntp org for alternate NTP URL s Wireless Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 75 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide WiFi NV Enable WiFi SSID My Home Wireless Security WPA WPA2 Personal bd Passphrase abcd1234 Enable Wifi enable for wifi network communications instead of wired ethernet SSID enter the SSID name of the wifi network to connect to Security 3 wifi security modes are supported none WEP WPA WPA2 Personal Passphrase wifi password DDNS V DDNS Enabled DDNS Service default no ip com x Host Name Imyhomewiser2 no ip orgl User Name johndoe Password Preteen DDNS is used to provide access to the wiser over the internet with a URL instead of a changing IP address You must have an existing DDNS account configured with one of the supported DDNS services e DDNS Enabled enabled a dynamic domain name service e DDNS Service a predefined set of D
432. option Using Indicator Kill Messages This option is very similar to the previous one except that when a Scene gets broken the indicator will go off again To enable the use of this option select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 186 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 15 5 This uses the Indicator Kill messages on the Trigger Control Application to synchronise Scene indicators on different C Bus devices This is the only method available for most C Bus units so using this option provided consistency with other C Bus units To use this option e Select the Scene Indicator option on the Status Tab e Select the Use Indicator Kill for Showing Scene Status option One of the features of using this method is that you can use components to adjust Scene Groups and the Scene Indicator will still show that the Scene is set Note that even if this option is not selected the Indicator Kill messages still get sent when a scene is broken A it using this option Scenes must use a Trigger Group Adjusting Scene Groups If you have a Button Slider or Level Indicator showing the level of a Scene it will show the level of the first Group in the Scene If you use a Component to adjust the level of a Scene generally you will not use it to indicate the state of the Scene If you do have an indicator on the component which adjusts the Scene the
433. or 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 363 364 365 366 368 369 370 372 373 374 375 376 377 379 380 382 383 384 385 387 388 389 391 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 Information 343 344 345 354 376 392 399 402 404 405 406 408 416 Warning 340 341 342 353 355 358 362 364 368 369 371 372 373 374 378 380 381 382 384 387 389 390 391 392 393 394 396 404 406 410 413 414 415 416 417 Metric 53 63 70 Metric Units In built System IO 183 Micro functions 122 Monitor C Bus Voltage 253 Component 94 97 Item Form 254 Light Level 253 Loads 316 Manager 253 Properties 112 Temperature 253 Monitors In built System IO 183 Moon Phase 119 164 Mouse coordinates 40 Moving Components 140 Music 330 Music server 330 Media Transport Control Application 246 247 248 N Memory C Touch 281 282 287 289 C Touch Spectrum 289 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Networks 10 Change 269 Page 428 Home Management Series Networks 10 Default 53 63 70 Limits 7 Network Manager 236 Network Properties 238 Operational 236 Selecting 18 States 236 New Project 50 New State 236 Nudge 122 Numbers Hexadecimal 30 O Offset 112 OK State 236 Open 48 Open State 236 Operating Type 243 Operatio
434. or MESSAGES sidisieiciutdstusisasivdsecushahussasenndbiusanuhssaawnisaaluansnatisasnvaduvuduonbiladsnty 339 11 1 PURPOSE E E E E cua ts eaee ee at see eet avo teat T 339 11 2 Suppressing Error Messages sccssccsseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeneeenseeeseeeeeaeeeeesnseeeseeeeeaeenes 339 11 3 Reporting EEK ORS niisiis re iaioa tens aada para a Ae aE aaia Gannpedbdeveerteceeeencense 339 11 4 Message LISt wo cnc aetna aan ata eee 340 Index 421 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 Introduction 1 1 Product Range The products included in this range are 5000CTA C Touch 50x0CT2 C Touch Mark 2 50x0CTC Colour C Touch C 50x0CT2 C Touch Spectrum 5500PACA PAC 5200PG Wiser Wiser 2 1 2 About the PICED software PICED is used to configure the following devices to meet the user s requirements e Black and White C Touch Touchscreen e Black and White C Touch Mark 2 Touchscreen e Colour C Touch Touchscreen e C Touch Spectrum e Pascal Automation Controller PAC e Wiser Home Control The PICED software major features include Display of many components on many pages Note that although the PAC does not have a screen hence is unable to display pages you can still use pages in your project for test purposes Control and monitoring of C Bus Scenes for the control of many loads together Schedules for the automatic control of loads Access Control to provide security Irrigation Control for controlling irrigation systems Logic E
435. or the Media Client can be selected by entering the name of the folder containing it in the Client Skin Name box Alternatively click on the button next to it and navigate to the desired folder By default the Media Client automatically finds compatible media servers If you want to use a specific server select Use Specific Server and enter the server IP Address and Port These will then be used when the Media Player Control Special Function is executed although they can be overridden as part of the Special Function if desired iPod Control The iPod tab contains options for use with the iPod Media Server To have the software start the iPod Media Server on start up select the Start iPod Server when program starts option SlimServer Control The SlimServer Tab contains options for use with the SlimServer Interface e The Start SlimServer Interface when program starts option will result in the software automatically starting the SlimServer Interface when it starts up e The IP Address and Port are used for the connection to the SlimServer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 58 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e The User Name and Password are optionally used to log in to the SlimServer e The Squeezebox MAC Address is the MAC Address of the Squeezebox or other player Internet Tab Colour C Touch Only Proxy Server Settings The proxy server settings are needed if using a Web Cam Image component to view
436. or the y Cause Software function x is not supported by the current project type y Solution Don t try to use this function with this project type 11 4 130 Confirmation 14132 Message The slider Height and Width appear to be wrong for this orientation Would you like them swapped Cause A vertical slider bar graph normally is taller than it is wide A horizontal slider bar graph is normally wider than it is tall The height and width are not what is expected for the current orientation Solution Click on the Yes button to swap the height and width Click on the No button to leave them as they are 11 4 131 Error 14133 Message Can not add any more Scene Items Maximum is imit Cause Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 377 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide There is a limit to the number of Scene Items which can be used and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Scene Items or put some of the Scene Items in another Scene and trigger it from this Scene 11 4 132 Warning 14134 Message Please note that the Auto Create function is only intended for use with creating test projects It is not of any use for creating real Projects and should NEVER be used that way The Auto Create function does not apply some of the same safeguards as when creating a project manually so it must be used with caution and at your risk See the Help file for more details Cause The
437. ore or less often It may also be desirable to define different Irrigation Programs for different seasons e g shorter watering cycles during winter A typical Irrigation program consists of a sequence of events such as e Switch on front lawn sprinkler for 10 minutes e Delay for 2 seconds e Switch on back lawn sprinkler for 12 minutes e Delay for 2 seconds e Switch on garden drippers for 60 minutes An Irrigation Program has a C Bus Trigger Group Address Level Action Selector associated with it which is used to start the Program running When the trigger gets set the Irrigation Program will start running This trigger can either be set with a component or a Schedule to start the Irrigation program Master Loads A Master Load is a load which is on during the entire Irrigation Program For example a pump or master solenoid may need to be switched on as the Irrigation Program commences and stay on until the program completes A Master load can be added which does not control anything but the Group Address can be used by a Component to indicate that the Irrigation is running Valve Types A Level Control valve solenoid stays on only while the voltage is applied to it A Pulse Control valve also called a latched valve needs a pulse applied to one connection to open the valve and then another pulse applied to a different connection to close the valve and therefore it requires two group addresses to control it Zone Delay Overl
438. osi TE ms Single Group f a Network flocalNetwork Final Level Application flighting o Level Group Address kitchen2 He 7 OFF z Level Level ewo dy To control an individual group select the Single Group button To control all of the groups in a Scene select the Scene Groups button and select the appropriate Scene To set a group or Scene groups click on the Ramp Group button and select the required group s level and ramp rate To pulse a group or Scene Groups ie set it to a particular level for a certain time click on the Pulse Group button and select the required group s level ramp rate duration and return level the level returned to at the termination of the pulse To set a scene click on the Set Scene button and select the required scene from the list Notes on Using Timers Pulsed Groups Timers are used where the exact time that something is on for is critical For example if you want something to be pulsed on for a couple of seconds then a Pulse is appropriate If you want to switch a light on at 7 00 PM then off at 6 00 AM then an 11 hour pulse is not so appropriate It is more suitable to have two Schedules See Power Failure Recovery Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 207 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 16 3 Page Link You can also have the Schedule select a page by selecting the required page from the Page Link tab An
439. ouch only Minute Down adjust the time down by a minute Black and White C Touch only Minute Up adjust the time up by a minute Black and White C Touch only Month Down adjust the date to the previous month Black and White C Touch only Month Up adjust the date to the next month Black and White C Touch only Second Reset reset the time seconds Black and White C Touch only Set Date show the date setting page Black and White C Touch only Set New Date Time set the date and time to the selected time Colour C Touch only Set Time show the time setting page Black and White C Touch only Startup Date the date the Project was opened Startup Time the time the Project was opened Sunrise show the sunrise time Sunset show the sunset time Time Select adjust the time to be set Colour C Touch only Time to be Set show the time to be set Colour C Touch only Year Down adjust the date to the previous year Black and White C Touch only Year Up adjust the date to the next year Black and White C Touch only U o o o o o O oo e D in Back Back Page button Backlight show the backlight setting page Black and White C Touch only Calibration show the calibration setting page Black and White C Touch only Cleaning Mode set cleaning mode Black and White C Touch only Contrast show the contrast setting page Black and White C Touch on
440. ouch only Contrast Reset reset the contrast Black and White C Touch only Contrast Up increase the contrast Black and White C Touch only Error Manager show the Error Application Manager Colour C Touch only File Save save the project Colour C Touch only Free Memory show the amount of free memory on the computer Colour C Touch only Internet change the Internet settings Colour C Touch only Log Show show the log Colour C Touch only Logic Edit edit the Logic Colour C Touch only Media Player show the Media Player control Colour C Touch only Processor Usage show the amount of processor usage on the computer Colour C Touch only Project Options edit the project details Colour C Touch only Region set the computer region settings Colour C Touch only Restart restart the computer Colour C Touch only Save Settings save settings to registry Colour C Touch only Simulation Mode Enter Simulation Mode Simulation Mode Exit Simulation Mode System IO User show the User System IO form Colour C Touch only Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 138 Home Management Series 4 9 6 4 9 6 1 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide e Utilities show the utilities form Colour C Touch only The same end result can be achieved by placing a component on a page then setting its properties Various templates are supplied with the PICED software to quickly ad
441. oup Monitored Zones Only HVAC Zones which are monitored can be used The first step in using the HVAC Application In Built System IO variables is to create the Zone Groups and Zones you wish to use All of the HVAC App In Built System IO variables apply to a specific Zone Group and Zone Number except for the HVAC Zone Group State variable which only applies to a Zone Group Controlling Multiple Zones Any System IO variables which can set HVAC Zone properties HVAC Operational Type HVAC Setback Enabled HVAC Set Level and HVAC State need to have all applicable zones selected So for example if the Set Level of Zones 1 2 amp 3 is to be set by a Component using the HVAC Set Level in built System IO then all of these zones need to be selected in the Component Properties It is not possible for a component to show more than one value Hence if more than one zone is selected for a component the data displayed is generally the first zone in the list which is being serviced i e it is enabled and the damper is open If there are no serviced zones the first active Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 173 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide zone will be used If there are no active zones the first zone will usually be used So for example if a Component is showing the temperature of Zones 1 2 and 3 and Zone 1 is switched off then the temperature of Zone 2 will be displayed Temperature The
442. our style and thickness Note that line borders can only be used for Shape components Adding Arbitrary Shapes To add an arbitrary shape Component 1 Select the arbitrary shape icon in the Shapes drop down list on the Place Components Tool Bar If it is already selected then click on the Shape button on the Tool Bar 2 Click on the Page where one corner is to be 3 Move the mouse to where the next corner is to be you will see a line drawn as you move the mouse 4 Click on the Page where the next corner is to be 5 Repeat step 4 for all corners 6 Click on the first corner again to finish the shape Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 132 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 7 Edit the Component Properties to set the border and background Note that arbitrary shape borders can only be used for Shape components 4 9 5 3 Tool Select If you wish to use a quick method to place a component with either a Special Function or In built System IO or a link to a Special Page for Black and White C Touch 1 ONA eO N o Open the Tools form by selecting the Edit Place Component Tools menu item or clicking the Tools button on the Tool Bar Select the Category of the tool required Select the tool Function Select any properties Click on the OK button Click on the screen where you want the button placed A component using the corresponding Theme Component style will be placed with the
443. ovision to set the calibration An item has non ASCII characters This will not be displayed correctly in C Touch units The project has Schedules but has no provision for setting the date and or time The project displays the time but has no provision for setting the time The project displays the date but has no provision for setting the date The Project has a lot of pulse power meters There is a large total area using alpha blending and or shadows Alpha blending large areas uses a lot of processor capacity and may result in slow operation There is a large total area of stretched re sized images Scaling large images uses a lot of processor capacity and may result in slow operation The project has no provision for setting Networking A Scene has no Scene Components Project uses alarms but has no sound file selected PICED Programmer s Guide Add a page link to the calibration page Change the name to contain just ASCII characters a z A Z 0 9 and other symbols on an English keyboard Add a page link to the date amp time setting page Add a page link to the time setting page Add a page link to the date setting page Review whether the maximum rate of pulses is likely to occur and whether this combined with other C Bus traffic will cause a problem Switch alpha blending off or use an image editor to obtain the desired effect Use an image editor to pre scale the images to the d
444. ox e Select the Group Address for the first Zone in the Min GA box e Select the Group Address for the last Zone in the Max GA box This will create a series of Irrigation Zones using the selected Groups Addresses on the Irrigation Application Irrigation Programs Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 268 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 5 6 5 7 To automatically create Irrigation Programs e Select the Irrigation tab e Select the Auto Create Programs check box e Select the Trigger Group for the first Program in the Min GA box e Select the Trigger Group for the last Program in the Max GA box This will create a series of Irrigation Programs using the selected Trigger Groups on the Trigger Control Application with a Trigger Level of 100 System IO Variables To automatically create Integer System IO Variables e Select the System IO tab e Select the Auto Create Integer System IO check box e Select the number of System IO Variables to create in the System IO Count box This will create the selected number of System IO Variables each given the name Int x where x is the number of the System IO Variable Change Networks Sometimes it is necessary to change everything in a PICED Project from one Network to another The reasons for doing this include e Changing the C Bus Project topology e Re using part or all of a PICED Project with a different C Bus project e Moving a C Touch or PAC
445. plications Group Addresses and Levels are assigned a number from 0 255 0 FF hexadecimal Remembering these numbers is inconvenient so a name can be assigned to them The name is referred to as a tag Examples of tags are e Network Tags e Local Network e Third Floor e Application Tags e Lighting e Control e Group Address Tags e Kitchen Light e Pool Pump Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 29 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Level Tags e Welcome Home Scene e Irrigation On There are two ways of creating tags for use with a project e From the Software in a form that has a drop down list to select a group address or level there will be two buttons alongside which allow you to add a new tag or to edit the selected one e Using the C Bus Tool Kit see C Bus documentation for details To create new C Bus Networks or Applications it is necessary to use the C Bus ToolKit software C Bus tags get loaded into a project when you select the C Bus project See also Refresh C Bus Tags 2 5 Hexadecimal Numbers A Itis not usually necessary to understand or use hexadecimal numbers A Hexadecimal number is a number represented in base 16 Everyday numbers are represented in decimal which is base 10 In the decimal system numbers are expressed with 10 symbols the familiar digits 0 9 The hexadecimal system uses 16 symbols the ten digits 0 to 9 plus six letters
446. ponent is always available without having to copy it to every page Inserting Symbols in Text Each Font has many characters symbols apart from the letters of the alphabet and the numbers such as Hu etc Many of these symbols do not have a corresponding key on a standard keyboard When editing the text of a component select the position in the text that you want a symbol inserted Right click on the text and select the Insert Symbol menu item A form appears which shows all possible symbols in the currently selected font Click on the symbols that you want inserted Click on the OK button to insert the selected symbols Selected Symbols amp 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEF GHI JK LMNO PQARSTUVWXYZ abcdef ghi j kimno par st uvwxyz i io iol f t iS Clo o oj p js J je jm ji IS b n Z i f ua Onan OU j P u T 1 J Ye h Ali AAAAAABZGCEEEEFEI TT DNOOOOGx GBUUUUY PR aaaaatavwecgoetet iiif 6A0G06GKECHEFHBUUHHY pb yY Font Selection Fonts can be selected by means of the Font Selection form A list of fonts shows all of the fonts currently used in the project with the currently selected font highlighted A sample of the font is also displayed Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 129 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 10 Currently used Fonts Example of font ABCDEFGH
447. quired 11 4 213 Confirmation 14216 Message Can not add any more tariffs Maximum is limit Reason Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 402 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide There is a limit to the number of tariffs that can be added to a project and that limit has been reached Actions Use the Power Meter Manager to delete any tariffs which are not required 11 4 214 Confirmation 14217 Message The C Bus Project name is an old format Do you want to transform this to the latest format Click on Yes to transform to the new format Click on No to use a different C Bus project or to close PICED Reason The C Bus Project you are using was created with an old version of C Bus ToolKit and is not compatible with the current version of C Gate It will need to be transformed into the new format before it can be used Actions To transform the project to the new format click on Yes If you click on No you can either select a different C Bus project or close PICED and then use C Bus ToolKit to transform the project 11 4 215 Confirmation 14218 Message Do you want to close the C Bus Networks Reason You are closing a C Bus project and there are C Bus Networks open The Ask Each Time Program Option is selected Actions Click on Yes to close all open C Bus Networks Click on No to leave all C Bus Networks open 11 4 216 Confirmation 14219 Message Can not add any more Audio Matrix S
448. r this is the Matrix Switcher used by the Source e Source Number this is the number assigned to the Source in MARPA e Name this is a name for the Source to identify it e Source Type this is the type of Source needed to know which types of Source Controls are relevant Note that for the local source one of the external source options should be selected e Media Link Group this is the Medial Link Group for the Source if used Source Controls For Wiser projects there is a list of Controls used to control the audio device for the Source If the Source type uses Media Transport Control then the Controls will use one of the Transport Control functions If the Source type uses Trigger Control then the Controls will have a Trigger Group and Action Selector to control a device via Infra Red IR control When the Widget is displayed normally the short list of controls is displayed A maximum of 5 controls can be displayed in the short list When the Widget is expanded the complete list of Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 251 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide controls is displayed in the order that they appear in the list The Controls list shows e Number position in the list e Icon An icon used for the Control e Function Trigger a description of what the Control does Transport Control function or Trigger e Short List Position the position in the short list of controls Adding a Sou
449. r can be used to 1 Select HVAC Zone Groups to be used 1 Select HVAC Zones to be used 2 Monitor the HVAC Application data C Touch Mark 1 units do not support the HVAC Application The Wiser does not support all HVAC features To open the HVAC Application Manager either e select the Project C Bus Applications HVAC Manager menu item or e click on a component with the HVAC Manager Special Function Zone Group Tab A Zone Group also known as a communication group corresponds to a piece of HVAC plant or equipment A Zone Group may control one or more Zones see below The columns of data presented on the Zone Group tab include e Number the number of the Zone Group also called a Communication Group Number e Name the name of the HVAC Zone e Plant Type the type of air conditioning plant heat pump evaporative etc Adding New Zone Groups To add a new Zone Group click on the Add button The HVAC Zone Group Form will allow you to enter the necessary details Editing Zone Groups To edit an existing Zone Group 1 Select a Zone Group in the list and click the Edit button or 2 Double click on a Zone Group in the list The HVAC Zone Group Form allows you to enter details of the Zone Group Deleting Zone Groups To delete an existing Zone Group 1 Select a Zone Group in the list 2 Click the Delete button This will also delete all Zones within the group Zone Tab An HVAC Zone is an area whic
450. r file Transferring via C Bus There may be occasions where is inconvenient to remove the C Touch unit from the wall and connect to the serial connector In this case you may wish to transfer via C Bus There are several limitations to using this approach e Firstly it is much slower Using the serial cable is approximately 20 times faster e You can not transfer across C Bus bridges e You can only transfer new configuration data not firmware e Ifthe firmware is the wrong version transferring a project may permanently damage the unit and it will need to be returned for repair see Help Software Properties for the compatible firmware versions e C Gate must be on the same computer as PICED The process to transfer via C Bus is as follows 1 In the Project Details form enter the Unit Address of the C Touch unit 2 Connect your PC to a PC Interface on the same network as the C Touch unit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 276 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 3 Connect to C Bus by selecting the Connect to C Bus menu item from the Options Menu 4 Inthe Transfer menu select the Transfer Project to Unit menu item and the Transfer to Unit form will appear Alternatively click on the transfer button on the Tool Bar 5 The Project Status will show if the project has any errors which need to be corrected before transferring the project These are the errors reported when a Check Project
451. r s Guide Network States shows the connection state of the networks Units show the C Bus Units which have been found on the networks once networks have been opened Project Files open the Windows Explorer to show the project files PROJECT MENU Project Details set the Project Details Resize Project adjust the size of the screen Grid 1 32 set the Components placement grid Snap Size to Grid select whether the size gets snapped to a multiple of the grid Snap all to Grid snap all Components to the grid Do not Show Grid hide the grid Show Grid Dots show dots on the grid Show Grid Lines show lines on the grid Edit Schedules edit or add a schedule Edit Scenes edit a scene Edit Irrigation open the Irrigation Controller Edit Special Days open the Special Days Manager Edit Access Control open the Access Control editor Edit System IO open the System IO Editor Edit Logic open the Logic Editor Load Monitor open the Load Monitor form Monitors show the Monitor Manager C Bus Networks show the C Bus Network Manager Widget Manager show the Widget Manager E Mail Manager show the E Mail Manager Power Meter Manager show the Power Meter Manager Custom Key Manager show the Custom Key Function Manager Clear Historical Data this clears data from Graphs and Pulse Power Meters Edit Profiles show the Profile Manager C Bus Applications Error Manager show the
452. ram Options for to select another serial port and try again Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 414 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click on Cancel to quit 11 4 253 Confirmation 14638 Message Do you want to create Daylight Savings schedules Cause Your location has Daylight Savings but there are no Schedules which use Special Functions to set the start and finish of daylight savings time This message will only appear if you have daylight savings selected Solution Click on Yes to automatically create the Schedules Click on No to not create the Schedules 11 4 254 Warning 14639 Message If this project is transferred to the Wiser Home Control you will no longer be able to do transfers via the Internet Cause The Project Transfer From PICED option allows future updates to be made wa the Internet Disabling this option will prevent this Solution Select the Project Transfer From PICED option if you wish to be able to do remote updates to Wiser Home Control 11 4 255 Error 14640 Message Widget can not be added Reason Cause The Widget can not be added due to the reason given Solution The solution depends on the particular reason for the error 11 4 256 Error 14642 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 415 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Password can not contain spaces or the following characters LER lt gt amp
453. ram start up only 2 Someone has closed C Gate 3 There has been a network infrastructure failure and the remote C Gate server can not be contacted 4 Firewall set up problems There is an option to automatically re connect to C Gate if the connection fails To select this 1 Open the Program Options form 2 Select the Automatically re connect C Gate if connection fails option If this option is selected and the C Gate connection fails the C Gate Connection form will be displayed C Gate Connection Connecting to Local C Gate HOGERRORREe The software needs a C Gate connection to operate Reconnecting in 43 Re connect to C Gate Now Help Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 314 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The form appearance will vary slightly depending on whether C Gate is local or remote and whether the initial connection to C Gate failed or a later connection The C Gate connection form will try to connect PICED to C Gate on a regular basis To manually attempt a re connection click on the Re connect C Gate Now button To close the PICED software click on the Close button During start up there is also a Change C Gate Setting button which allows you to change the IP Address of the C Gate server Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 315 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 2 Testing Debugging and Operation Connecting to
454. rammer s Guide 11 4 184 Warning 14186 Message Some Network Properties are invalid Click on Show to see the errors Click on Default to set the default Network properties Click on Continue to ignore the error Cause Some of the C Bus Network properties as set up in the C Bus Network Manager appear to be invalid Solution Click on Show to show a list of possible errors After reviewing the errors correct any problems Click on Default to set the default properties for all C Bus Networks Click on Continue to ignore this error 11 4 185 Error 14187 Message Could not connect to C Gate at IP Address Reason PICED can not operate without a valid C Gate connection e Click on Close to close PICED e Click on Continue to select an alternative C Gate server e Click on Help for more information Cause There was an error when trying to connect to the C Gate server Solution Click on Close to close PICED Click on Continue to attempt to connect to an alternative C Gate server This option is not normally recommended If the error reason contains the message Unable to determine server version then the PICED software has been unable to read the version from C Gate This may be due to the computer being too slow or too busy causing a delay in the connection to C Gate Check Computer Requirements in the FAQ If this problem persists you may need to start C Gate prior to starting PICED see Starting Up Automatically in FAQ
455. rate is meaningless and is ignored Security Application The Security Application is used for monitoring and controlling C Bus enabled security panels Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 23 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 5 2 3 6 Typical uses include e Remote security keypad emulation e Arming security system e Setting security system mode e Monitoring alarms e Monitoring security zones The Security Application functions can be used via e Security Application form select Project C Bus Applications Security App menu item e Special Functions e In Built System IO Variables e Tools e Logic The C Bus Network Manager can be used to select which Networks the Security Application messages will be sent to The C Bus Security Application is explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document help file or PDF Refer to the security panel instructions for details of the operation of the device and the C Bus Security Application Measurement Application The Measurement Application is used for monitoring and displaying data broadcast by devices such as the General Input Unit Devices broadcasting data on the Measurement Application can have one or more channels of data Measurement Application messages contain the following information e The device ID which broadcast the message this is often but not necessarily the same as the unit address e The channel number thes
456. rce Control To add an Audio Source Control click on the Add button The Audio Source Control Editor will be displayed Enter the Source Control details and click on OK To automatically add a set of default controls relevant to the Source Type click on the Load Default button When editing the controls is complete clicking on the Save Default button will save the set of controls as the new defaults for use in the future Editing a Source Control To edit an existing Source Control 1 Select the Source Control in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Source Control in the list 2 The Audio Source Control Editor will be displayed 3 Edit the Source Control details 4 Click on OK Deleting a Source Control To delete an existing Source Control 1 Select the Source Control in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Local Sources For Wiser projects the Local Source for each Audio Zone can be selected The process is 1 Select the Local Sources tab on the Audio Application Manager 2 Click the Auto Create button to automatically create a Local Source for each Audio Zone with the Enable Local Source option selected OR 3 Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons as for a regular Source except that the Zone related to the Local Source needs to be selected For Zones with no matching Local Source the default details from the Local Source on the Sources tab will be used 4 25 10 5 Audio Source Control Editor
457. re The help files can be accessed from the Help menu or from any form with a Help button in this case you will be taken directly to the relevant help topic The help files include e Main this provides details for using the software FAQ this answers Frequently Asked Questions Tutorial this gives a step by step guide to using the software Logic this provides information about using the Logic Engine C Bus Concepts this provides details about C Bus in particular the C Bus Applications Manuals There are various PDF manuals provided with the PICED software These can all be found in the Manuals folder e C Bus Concepts this provides general information about C Bus as well as details of C Bus Applications e C Bus Networks this provides details for multi network installations e Advanced C Bus Fault Diagnosis this provides details of solving C Bus system problems e C Touch and PAC documents these give details for installing and using the products FAQ There is a Frequently Asked Questions FAQ help file and PDF distributed with the PICED software This should be read for more information on how to perform common tasks Tip of the Day The Software has many features that you may not know of The Tip of the Day is designed to introduce a few of these ideas to you The Tip of the Day form will be displayed when you start the software You can also display it by selecting the Tip of the Day item in the Help Menu
458. re updates over the internet When a new version is found an auto upgrade is performed e Wiser2 LED s enable disable Wiser2 front panel LED s inbuilt system IO can be used to override this setting LAN Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 74 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide F Obtain an IP Address Automatically Wiser IP Address 192 168 2 na Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Open Gateway Address 192 168 2 wl DNS 1 192 168 1 1l DNS 2 0 0 0 0 DNS 3 0 0 0 0 Obtain an IP Address Automatically when enabled obtain an IP address using DHCP addressing when disabled you will need to specify IP address subnet mask gateway address and DNS address es Wiser IP Address specify static IP address Subnet Mask this must match the subnet of IP network Simulation IP Address if Obtain IP Address Automatically is selected this field allows you to enter the DHCP IP address of the unit to use Simulation Mode Open Open simulation mode using the specific static IP Address or the specified Simulation IP Address Gateway Address the address of the router that provides internet access for the wiser e DNS domain name server address es For details of the usage of the Wiser Home Control properties particularly with how they apply to different network configurations please refer to the Wiser Home Control Installation guide NTP NTP J Use NTP to Maintain Time on Wiser NIPIURL O p
459. re already on To select this behaviour select the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes check box in the C Bus Options This will result in the following occurring e Nudge Up On Up and Dimmer will only increase the level of Group Addresses which are already on e Nudge Down Off Down and Dimmer will only decrease Group Addresses which are on and only to a minimum level of 1 To have all of the Groups in the Scenes controlled regardless of their level de select the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes check box Nudging If the nudge up or nudge down key functions are used all of the Scene Components will be adjusted Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 185 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 15 4 up or down accordingly The Scene Components groups which are off will only be adjusted if the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes option is off Ramping If the On Up Off Down or Dimmer key functions are used all of the Scene Components will be ramped up or down accordingly The Scene Components groups which are off will only be adjusted if the Nudge Ramp only On Groups in Scenes option is off Toggle If the On Off toggle key function is used the Scene Components will be toggled off goes to on and vice versa If the states of the Scene Components different ie some are on and some are off then the first Component gets toggled and all of the other Scene Components get set to t
460. re no hardware protection keys dongles used However there are some limitations placed on the software which are worth noting e C Bus Connections will time out after 2 to 3 days e Simulation Mode will time out after 20 minutes See also Licence Agreement Software Limits There are limits applicable to certain aspects of the PICED software These are shown in the table below They can also be seen by selecting the Help Software Properties menu item Note that there are resource limits for C Touch C Touch Mark 2 C Touch Spectrum and PAC projects This means that it is not possible to have the limit of each of the features listed below in the same project Property C C C PAC Wiser Touch Touch Touch Spectru Colour m Maximum number of Pages ECE Maximum number of Components 100 100 250 100 100 per Page Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 7 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Property C ae Touch Spectru Colour Maximum number of Schedules 250 2 Maximum number of Scenes 250 2 Maximum number of Scene Components per Scene Maximum number of Users 100 100 Maximum length of Passwords Maximum number of Access Levels Maximum number of Irrigation Programs Maximum number of Irrigation Zones Maximum number of Irrigation eer Tal Zones Maximum number of Maximum number of Special Days Days Maximum number of User System 100 100 e A variables Maxim
461. re to reduce the offset or to make the Schedule be at a fixed time such as 1AM Sunrise or Sunset Does not Occur on Some Days For locations which are close to the North or South Pole there are days where the sun does not rise or set On these days schedules based on sunrise or sunset will not occur The alternative is to use Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 386 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide a fixed Schedule Actions Click on Yes to save the Schedule as it is Click on No to change the Schedule 11 4 162 Warning 14164 Message This project uses the Measurement Application with System IO variables The support for this has changed Cause In versions of the PICED software prior to V4 0 it was possible to have a Measurement Application channel associated with a System IO Variable This mechanism was replaced in V4 0 by the use of In built System IO variables to achieve the same purpose The project loaded uses System IO variables with the Measurement Application but this will no longer work Solution Change any components using the User System IO variables to use In built System IO variables with the Measurement Application Change any Logic code which uses the User System IO variables to use In built System IO variables 11 4 163 Warning 14165 Message There is no rain delay Schedule Cause You have clicked on a button to set the Rain Delay but there is no rain delay Schedule
462. regardless of their level Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 65 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Indicator Kill C Bus Indicator Kill show the status of Scenes Scene group levels will not be used for showing the status of Scenes Note that Indicator Kill messages are sent when a Scene is broken regardless of this setting Wiser Tab When a Wiser Home Control Project is selected this page will allow you to select the following details Skin Skin purple people 4 3 v The skin controls the appearance and functionality of the Wiser Home Control user interface A preview image of the selected skin is shown For details of the skin select Help Wiser Home Control Skin or Help Wiser Home Control User Guide Properties Wiser Properties Wiser IP Address 192 168 2 E f Unit Name MyUnt Unit Password Pra Tools Password Freee CNI Properties CNI IP Address 192 168 2 1a Open CNI Port 10001 The Wiser Properties group allows you to select various properties of a Wiser unit e Wiser IP Address this is the IP Address or URL for the Wiser Home Control on the LAN e Unit Name used so that the unit can be recognised when connected e Unit Password the Wiser Home Control password is required so that PICED can log in e Tools Password this is the password to protect the Wiser tools page It can only use numbers with 4 to 6 digits Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric
463. resses which have not been assigned a tag name If you want to change the group tag name see Edit lighting application group 2 Specify the tag group name in the Group Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes Add a new Group Add a new Group to Application Lighting Group Address 100 Group Description Porch Light F Edit Lighting Group The Edit Lighting Group form allows you to edit a group address tag and to turn an application group on or off Changing the application group tag name To change the group address tag name follow the procedure below 1 Edit the group tag name in the Group Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes If you want to add a new group see Add lighting application group Turning the group on or off There are two buttons for turning the group on and off This is useful for checking to see if the group virtual circuit is operational 1 To turn the group on click the Set On button 2 To turn the group off click the Set Off button Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 21 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 6 7 2 3 1 6 8 2 3 1 6 9 Edit a Group i Group Address 32 Group Description Set ON Set OFF Cancel Add Lighting Level The Add Lighting Level form allows you to specify a Lighting Group Address level and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 S
464. ric Australia Page 334 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 10 1 Story Board Pro Forma dI dil Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 335 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 10 2 Scene Pro Forma 10 3 Schedule Pro Forma Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia oa Page 336 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide ET MEENA EE a a CO eee CO ae eee MEME Se ee ee ee E a ee O M E ee ee ee EEEN me Ee ee E EEE 2 2 ee ee aaa aaa es ee ae ae aS EEEREN z E ee ee es ee The screen page images from the project can be saved individually to a file To save a single screen Name Load or Scene Date Enabled By 10 4 Saving the Screen Images Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 337 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 10 5 image e Select the required page e Select the Tools Reports Save Screen or Tools Reports Save Screen with Border menu options e Select either JPEG or bitmap format e Select the required directory e Enter the file name e Click on the Save button The image will then be saved to the selected file in the selected format with or without a border as required Repeat the above process for each page you wish to save an image of To save all screen images with borders as JPEG files select the Tools Reports Save All Screen Images menu item The s
465. right 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 408 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide changes Reason The C Touch PAC connection can not be changed in the Project details which C Touch PAC is connected Action Disconnect from C Touch PAC and try again 11 4 235 Error 14618 Message Please connect to C Bus first Cause Because you have selected to download to C Touch PAC via C Bus it is necessary to connect to C Bus before connecting to C Touch PAC Solution Connect to C Bus and try again 11 4 236 Confirmation 14619 Message Please confirm that the following unit details are correct Failure to do so may permanently damage the unit Network Network Name Unit Address Unit Address Unit Type Unit Type Firmware Version Earliest Version Latest Version Cause You are about to transfer a project via C Bus If the details are incorrect the consequences may be serious If the Network or unit address is wrong you may download the data to the wrong unit If the unit type is wrong it is unpredictable what the consequences may be If the unit firmware version is not in the range from the earliest version to the latest version you will permanently damage the unit and will have to return the unit to the factory for repair Solution Click on Yes to transfer the project to the unit The transfer via C Bus will take a long time up to two hours depending on the size of the project Click on No t
466. rm Click Cancel to leave the Monitor Manager form open 11 4 172 Confirmation 14174 Message This monitor is used by a Project Component Are you sure you want to delete it Reason The selected Monitor is used by a Monitor Component or by a Component using the Monitor In built System IO variable Deleting this monitor will mean that the Component will no longer work Actions Click on Yes to delete the monitor Click on No to leave the Monitor 11 4 173 Warning 14175 Message There are Components using the Measurement Application which do not have a corresponding Measurement Channel Cause The project has used a Component with In built System IO with Measurement Application Channels which are not listed in the Measurement Application Manager These Components will not work without a corresponding Measurement Application Channels in the Measurement Application Manager Solution Click Auto Create to create the necessary Measurement Channel Click OK to close the Measurement Manager form Click Cancel to leave the Measurement Manager form open 11 4 174 Confirmation 14176 Message This Measurement Channel is used by a Project Component Are you sure you want to delete it Reason The selected Measurement Channel is used by a Component through an In built System 10 Deleting this Measurement Channel will mean that the Component will no longer work Actions Click on Yes to delete the Measurement Channel Click on No to leave t
467. rning 107 Warning 108 Warning 109 Warning 110 Warning 111 Warning 112 Meaning The project has scenes which have the same trigger This means that several scenes will be triggered at once An Irrigation Program has no Schedules triggering it The Irrigation Program can only be started manually A Component has a page link to the page that it is on This will not do anything useful The project has no provision for setting cleaning mode Cleaning mode disables the touch screen temporarily to allow it to be cleaned The image is large and stretched re sized Scaling large images uses a lot of processor capacity and may result in slow operation A component is covering or partly covering a component which may change appearance When the component behind changes you will not be able to see those changes The component is large and uses alpha blending Alpha blending large areas uses PICED Programmer s Guide Corrective Action Edit the scenes to change one or more of the triggers If you require automatic operation of the Irrigation Program create a Schedule to trigger the Irrigation Program Change the page link Add a page link to the cleaning page If the project is unresponsive use an image editor to pre scale the images to the desired size or use the Re scale Images function Move one or more components See Transferred Images If the project is unresponsive switch alpha ble
468. rolling the C Touch Mark 2 C Touch Spectrum Resources Memory The PICED Software generates a file which is transferred to a C Touch Spectrum unit The C Touch units have limited amounts of memory so you are limited in the size of the configuration file that you can transfer To see the exact amount of memory used by your Project select Resources Report from the Transfer menu A file resources txt is created in the project directory which has further details of the memory usage The C Touch Spectrum has 256KB of memory for the user configuration data This is used to store all aspects of the Project except for colour images including Pages Fonts Scenes Schedules Logic and other Project settings There is an additional 8MB of memory for use with colour images There is an additional 8KB of memory to store user settings which includes e Changes made to Scenes and Schedules since the last project transfer e Levels of C Bus Group Addresses e User settings for the backlight screen calibration screen contrast daylight savings and so forth For information on minimising the size of the transfer file refer to C Touch Resources Processor Capacity C Touch also has limits on how much logic can be run in one scan There are various methods of determining how much logic can be run in a C Touch e The Logic Resources form shows a scan by scan estimate of how much the C Touch is using e The How Much Logic Is Possible in the Lo
469. rom the list and click on the Delete button To edit a Schedule select the required Schedule from the list and click on the Edit button or double click on the required schedule The Schedule Editor form will appear To duplicate a Schedule select the required Schedule and click on the Duplicate button You will be prompted to enter the name of the new Schedule which must be unique To change the order of the Schedules select a Schedule and drag it to the correct position SCHEDULE TREE The Schedule Tree view on the left of the Schedule Manager allows you to select sets of schedules a Date collections Week Days Week Days Weekend Days 10th Dec 2002 in Groups Local Network Lighting Kitchen 1 Kitchen 2 Dining 1 Lounge Sprinkler 1 Sprinkler 2 Porch Control G amp Enable The alternative Schedule selection options are All Schedules Select the All Schedules node and all Schedules will be displayed Schedules by Date See below Schedule Collections see below By Network select the desired Network and all Schedules related to that Network will be shown e By Application select the desired Network and Application and all Schedules related to that Network Application will be shown e By Group Address select the desired Network Application and Group Address and all Schedules related to that Network Application Group Address will be shown The Group Address icon in the tree shows the st
470. rrect them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit Transferring a C Touch Spectrum Project to the Unit Transferring a C Touch Spectrum project to the unit is the same as transferring a C Touch Mark 2 roject to the unit Transferring a C Touch Spectrum Project From the Unit Connect to the C Touch Spectrum unit then refer to the instructions for transferring a C Touch project Note that any logic does not get transferred from the unit Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first Connect to the C Touch Spectrum unit then refer to the instructions for transferring a C Touch project Firmware Update Updating the C Touch Spectrum firmware is the same as updating the C Touch Mark 2 firmware Reloading Firmware Reloading the C Touch Spectrum firmware is the same as reloading C Touch Mark 2 firmware Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 288 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 Controlling the C Touch Spectrum Controlling the C Touch Spectrum via PICED is the same as cont
471. rred to as Action Selectors e The ramp rate is meaningless and is ignored Scene Indicators The Trigger Control Application also supports the synchronisation of Scene indicators between devices A key on another unit can be used to remotely trigger a Scene in a touch screen or PAC The indicator on that remote unit will then show that the Scene has been set If the level of one of the groups in the Scene changes the touch screen or PAC sends an indicator kill C Bus command to switch off the indicator in the remote unit The Scene Indicator control is also designed to facilitate a Scene being spread across more than one device For example a key unit may only be able to set 10 groups as part of a Scene By having three key units controlling 10 groups each you could have a 30 group Scene Because touch screen or PAC can support large Scenes it is not recommended to put parts of the Scene in another device See also Triggering Scenes and Scene Status Indication Enable Control Application The Enable Control Application is used to enable system functions Examples include e Enabling Schedules e Enabling the Irrigation Controller e Enabling keys on Key Input Units The Enable Control Application uses application number 203 CB hex and uses most of the Lighting Application messages however it should be noted that e The group addresses are referred to as Enable Groups e The levels are referred to as Values e The ramp
472. rties Example March Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri See also Adjusting Calendar Month 4 9 3 14 Sub Page Frame A Sub Page Frame component is used to display a Sub Page The properties of a Sub Page Frame Component are e Position and size e Sub Page Frame Properties When a Sub Page Frame Component is placed on a page it will be invisible unless you have selected the View Show Sub Page Frame Border menu item option Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 99 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 4 4 9 4 1 4 9 4 2 The Sub Page Frame component will initially display the Default Sub Page The Sub Page displayed in the frame can then be changed using Page Links When the Sub Page changes a Page Transition effect can be used Sub Page Frames work best when the Sub Pages displayed in the frame are all the same size and are the same size as the frame To edit the Sub Page which is displayed in the Sub Page Frame either 1 Select the frame and use the Page Show Sub Page menu item 2 Select the frame and use Ctrl Shift S 3 Hold Alt key while double clicking on the frame Component Properties To change the properties of a particular Component either e Double click on the component or e Select the component by clicking on it and select the Edit Component Properties menu item A form will appear that will enable the user to change the Component s properties Physical appe
473. s Add 1 hour Create Schedules Start of Daylight Savings Day First Sunday in October Time 2 00 00 AM Daylight Saving Starts 4 10 2009 Time Zone End of Daylight Savings Day First Sunday in April Time 3 00 00 AM Daylight Saving Finishes 5 04 2009 By default these will be set to the values set for your computer To reset these parameters to the default click the Reset to Local Timezone button To select a different time zone click on the Select Other Timezone button It should not normally be necessary to manually change any of the parameters on this tab as they are read from the PC s operating system When complete click on the Next button Timezone Selection The Daylight Savings tab of the Project Details Wizard Options Page allows you to enter the time zone and Daylight Savings details This process is simplified by clicking on the Select Other Timezone button on the Project Details Daylight Savings Tab This will open the Timezone Selection form Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 79 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 8 pom Name Homme Jors Now Date amp Time 1 07 2003 09 52 4M 1 07 2003 10 22 4M 1 07 2003 11 22 AM 1 07 2003 11 22 4M 1 07 2003 10 22 4M 09 30 Darwin 10 00 Guam Port Moresby 10 00 Yladivostok 10 00 Hobart 10 00 Brisbane Canberra Melbourne Sydne 11 00 Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonia 12 00 Auckla
474. s Applications Measurement Manager menu item or e click on a component with the Measurement Manager Special Function The columns of data presented in the Measurement Application Manager include e Number this is the number of the Measurement Channel in the list e Name the name of the Measurement Channel e Network the C Bus Network which the unit is installed on e Device ID the device ID number this is usually the same as the unit address Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 245 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 8 2 4 25 9 e Channel the channel number the first channel is 0 for a General Input Unit 1 for a Current Measurement Unit e Current Value the value of the data for the channel blank if it has not been received Adding New Channels To add a new Channel click on the Add button The Measurement Application Channel Form will allow you to enter the necessary details If there are Channels which have been used by a Component with In built System IO but which are not present in the Measurement Application Manager the Auto Create button will be enabled Clicking on this button will automatically create any Channels needed Editing Channels To edit an existing Channel 1 Select a Channel in the list and click the Edit button or 2 Double click on a Channel in the list Viewing Channel Data As data is received it will be shown on the form To refresh the data o
475. s Guide 4 15 1 Note that the Groups in a Scene can be adjusted if required See also Trigger Control Application Triggering Scenes Scene Status Indication Delays in Scenes Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Cascaded Scene Report Triggering Scenes Scenes in the PICED software Black and White C Touch Colour C Touch or PAC can be set in one of two basic ways e By directly setting the required Scene from a Component or Schedule e By setting the Scene Trigger Group to its trigger Level If a Scene has no Trigger Group associated with it then only the first option is available Setting Direct When a Scene is set directly the groups in the Scene are set to their default levels Following that the Scene Trigger is broadcast in case there are other C Bus devices which contain other parts of the Scene Setting via the Trigger Group Scenes can be triggered via the Scene Trigger Group by e A Component setting the Scene Trigger e A Schedule setting the Scene Trigger e A Scene having a Scene Component which sets the Scene Trigger e Logic setting the Scene Trigger e A received C Bus command which sets the Scene Trigger If a Scene is triggered by the Scene Trigger Group being set then the Scene Trigger is not re broadcast A Scene Trigger consists of e Network this can be optionally ignored e Application Trigger Control by is recommended e Group Address aka Action Selector on the Trigger
476. s Guide Error Severity The severity of an error reflects how critical the error is The error severity categories in order of severity are Unknown the current error severity is unknown no messages have been received e All OK An Error Severity of All OK is a shortcut used to indicate that all Monitored Events watched by an Error Monitoring Device are OK OK An Error Severity of OK is used to indicate that the status of an individual Monitored Event being watched by an Error Monitoring Device is currently within normal operating conditions Minor Failure An Error Severity of Minor Failure is used to indicate a warning or low priority error for an individual Monitored Event being watched by an Error Monitoring Device General Failure An Error Severity of General Failure is used to indicate an error for an individual Monitored Event being watched by an Error Monitoring Device Extreme Failure An Error Severity of Extreme Failure is used to indicate a catastrophic or dangerous failure for an individual Monitored Event being watched by an Error Monitoring Device Most Severe Errors Error messages can be Most Recent and or Most Severe Most Recent error messages reflect the present status of the error condition Most Severe error messages reflect the most severe error condition which has existed since the condition was last cleared A Most Severe error can be cleared using the Error Manager or a Special Function
477. s PICED Programmer s Guide 5 2 5 3 5 4 Re coloured Image This can be used to very quickly create sets of icons in whatever colour you need for your project Re scale Images If you are using images which are stretched these need to be re scaled each time they are drawn on the screen This can use considerable processor time particularly for large images To avoid this images can be re scaled as follows 1 Select Tools Images Re Scale All Images or Tools Images Re Scale Selected Images or Tools Images Re Scale Page Background Image 2 The specified image s will be re scaled once and saved to disk with a new name 3 The new image files will be used from then on instead of the original images 4 It will no longer be necessary for the software to re scale images each time as the new images are already the correct size Note The Tools Images Re Scale Page Background Image only applies if the background image is set to be stretched to fit the screen Refresh Images Once you load an image into a Project it will remain the same until it is re loaded If you edit the file on disk you will not see the new image on the screen unless you open the Project again or use the Tools Images Refresh Images menu item Convert Levels The Convert Levels allows you to convert between percent level and Hexadecimal values Select the Tools Convert Levels menu item to open the convert levels form Copyright 2
478. s able to be displayed on a Black and White C Touch are surprisingly black and white See also Add colour by Hex Code and Pick Colours Adding Components to a Page Components are items which can be placed on a page and may either e be purely visual or e respond with some action when activated There are many component types each having their own set of features To add components to a page e Select the required page e Click on the required component on the tool bar OR select the required component from the Component menu e Click on the page where the component is required If the component is a button or shape click and drag to set the size required See also Adding Lines and Adding Arbitrary Shapes e Edit the component properties if required It is possible to have the Component Properties editor appear automatically when a Component is placed by selecting the option in the Program Options See also Software Limits component manipulation Good Design Practices and Keyboard Shortcuts Adding Lines To add a line Component 1 Select the line in the Shapes drop down list on the Place Components Tool Bar If it is already selected then click on the Shape button on the Tool Bar 2 Click on the Page where the line is to start 3 Move the mouse to where the line is to end you will see a line drawn as you move the mouse 4 Click on the Page where the line is to end 5 Edit the Component Properties to set the line col
479. s active if the page selected by the Page Link is currently displayed If the Component selects a Sub Page Link then the Component will show as active if the page selected by the Sub Page Link is currently displayed The Page Link option is particularly useful for Theme Pages with menu bars or for use with Sub Pages C Bus Properties To set the C Bus properties of a component Open the Component Properties form Select the C Bus tab Select the C Bus type key function Select the Controlled Item Scene or Group Address Select the Other Properties Level Ramp Rate Pulse Duration Select the Indicator Functions Alternatively the Group Address of one component can be copied to other components using the Copy Group Address function Key Functions The C Bus tab of the Component Properties form allows you to set the C Bus functionality of the Component Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 122 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Key Function Ramp Rate Timer Ped instantaneously be Controlled Item Pulse Scene Groups O E Duration Single Group DLR a a Network Local Network a a Application Lighting z Final Level Group Address Kitchen 2 dP Level Level OFF z Level on 2 Get Current Level C Bus Key Function The component will behave differently depending on which C Bus type is selected The C
480. s follows Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 36 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide ExeFilename filename cgate sim nosplash syncschedules log enable log save log append autosave autosave time Where e ExeFilename is the path and file name of the executable file Note that if there are spaces in the executable file path or file name the ExeFileName must be enclosed within double quotes Filename is the name of a file to be loaded Note that if there are spaces in the file name the file name must be enclosed within double quotes cgate selects whether C Bus communications are to be opened with C Gate sim puts the program in Simulation Mode nosplash shows the splash screen for only the minimum amount of time syneschedules performs a Synchronise to Schedules after connection to C Gate log enable enables the logging these override the Remember Setting setting log save enables the logging and saves it to a log file log append enables the logging and appends it to the log file autosave sets the autosave feature on with the default duration 15 minutes autosave time sets the autosave on with the specified time in seconds The ExeFileName must be present and must be first The Filename is optional but if used must be second All other parameters are optional and may occur in any order There must be a space between each parameter Examples C Clipsal
481. s loaded into touch screens in different rooms and they have mostly the same features but with a different time out page applicable to that room For example you may want to have three profiles named Main Bedroom Kids Room 1 and Kids Room 2 for three different touch screens You could create a single Project and handle the differences between the touch screens using the Profiles The properties which can be select based on a Profile include e Time out Page e Start up Page e Master Unit e Component Visibility e Schedules e Colour C Touch Local IP Address Profile Groups Profiles can also be arranged into groups to allow for rapid selection of properties for Profiles which are related For example it may be desirable to have common properties for touch screens on the same floor but have them different from touch screens on a different floor In this case it may be desirable to have a Profile Group called Floor 1 for the Profiles Touch Screen 1A and Touch Screen 1B and a Profile Group called Floor 2 for the Profiles Touch Screen 2A and Touch Screen 2B Profiles and Profile Groups can be created using the Profile Manager Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 147 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Properties which vary according to the Profile are edited using the Profile Values form 4 12 1 Profile Manager The Profile Manager allows you to view the Profiles and Profile Groups u
482. s on how the networks are constructed The networks below are each connected to other networks via a bridge Each bridge is used in Application Connect mode see the C Bus documentation for more details Each network has a Touchscreen on it which is capable of transmitting messages addressed to any network PC Teterface Tree Topology The Touchscreen on Network 1 can send commands to its local network Network 1 which will be automatically bridged across to the other networks Each of the other Touchscreens will see the command and act accordingly updating indicators etc The Touchscreen on Network 1 can also send bridged commands addressed to any one of the other networks In this case the command will arrive as an inter network command and so the bridges will not automatically resend this across to the other networks If the Touchscreen on Network 2 sends a command to its local network then the command will be automatically sent across the bridge to Network 1 However since it will arrive at Network 1 as an inter network command it will not then be sent across the other bridges to the other networks In this case the Touchscreen on Network 1 will see the command but the others on Networks 3 and 4 will not Fully Connected Networks Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 11 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To make all C Bus devices see all commands and hence stay synchronised with each other
483. s the C Bus Enable Control Application Group used to override schedule program control of the C Bus Thermostat A Itis not recommended that schedule program control of evaporative plant be used as it can cause damage to the plant equipment and or the building if not used correctly See notes for Wiser below Temperature Limits This allows you to select the minimum and maximum temperature values The temperature and comfort level set level can only be set within these limits Evaporative Comfort Level Properties The Comfort Level properties for the plant control how the comfort level is calculated e Lowest Comfort Temperature this is the temperature corresponding to conform level 1 e Comfort Level Step Size this is the difference in temperature for each comfort level step e Number of Comfort Levels this is the total number of comfort levels Fan Properties Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 244 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 25 7 3 4 25 8 4 25 8 1 e Heating Fan Speeds the number of fans speeds in the HVAC heating plant e Cooling Fan Speeds the number of fans speeds in the HVAC cooling plant e Unit used for ventilation this selects whether the heating or cooling plant is used for ventilation Use with Wiser Home Control The Wiser Home Control does not support all possible features of the HVAC Application The following limitations are applied for Wiser Home Control projects
484. sage will be displayed A large X will be placed where the missing images should be While the Open File form is open you can right click on the area where the files are displayed not on a file and select how you want them sorted Open File Look in Projects e ex a i Lai Irrigate 2 i view gt E access control test ctd m bedside clock ctd Arrange Icons By J Name m fred cts Refresh Size m irrigation ctd Type kej irrigation xml Modified Undo Delete Ctrl Z File name test 2 xml di Properties Files of type Project Files pexm et Cancel Help File Types The file extensions of the Project file types used by the PICED software are listed below CTD Project data file CTP Template file CTE Secure Project file this encrypts the file when it is saved to prevent tampering CTA Project Archive file XML this was the Project file used by older versions of this software and can still be opened by this version CTD project back up file CTP back up template file CTE back up secure Project file tar gz archive transfer file for a Wiser Home Control File Conversion The PICED software can open the files from any previous version The files do not need to be converted or imported to use them To convert all of the Project files in a directory and its sub directories from the old format XML to the new format CTD select the Convert Files item from the File men
485. scal Automation Controller PAC Some software functions are applicable to some units but not to others as shown in the table below Touch Spectrum Colour Display size 320 x 240 320x 240 640 x 480 No Set by skin Set by skin pixels pixels pixels Pages and Pages and Pages and Components Components Components e ni Mie T a T White colours colours Onl colours colours marae Schedules _ Schedules Schedules Schedules Schedules ae a A eee Component Onl Only Only Only Blending Only Only Only Images Only Functions bee Contro METER O ESAEREN ae onl Yes S Yes Yes Yes Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 309 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 9 Touch Spectrum Colour Control ae Widgets No No No No yes yes Logic System IO System IO Network Fully Fully Choice Fully Fully Fully Modelling connected connected connected connected connected onl onl onl onl onl Edit Scenes Add delete Edit No No Yes No No N Recove Only Only Only a These features are available in PAC Wiser projects in PICED for testing These features are not available in the PAC Wiser itself These features are available in C Touch units with logic only See also Software Limits Updating Unit Projects Once a project has been transferred to a Touch Screen PAC or Wiser unit the user is able to make changes to various aspects o
486. se The C Bus Project needs to be exported to V2 format before it can be downloaded to the colour C Touch This process has failed Solution There are a few issues that can cause this 1 Use of tags not supported by C Bus V2 for example the use of illegal characters such as 2 Use of networks which are invalid ie can not be communicated with from the network which the C Touch is installed on For more information on C Bus networks see http www3 clipsal com cis pdf_files C Bus Networks pdf 3 Use of duplicate level tags within an Application this is allowed in ToolKit but not in C Bus V2 It is necessary to fix the problems using the C Bus ToolKit before the project can be exported 11 4 242 Error 14627 Message No project data available Cause The project data has not been stored in the PAC and hence can not be uploaded Solution Click on OK 11 4 243 Error 14628 Message A template Project can not be transferred to the unit Cause The currently open Project is a Template These can not be transferred to a unit Solution Save the Project as a normal project and then transfer Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 411 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 244 Error 14629 Message The transfer failed Reason Cause The project failed to transfer to the unit The Reason explains the specific cause of the failure Solution 1 If the cause of the failure is Exceeded me
487. se allow you to select properties for a Widget including e Labels e Icons e C Bus Networks Applications Group Addresses and Action Selectors Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 232 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 21 4 21 1 e Security Zones e HVAC Zones Preview When a Widget type is selected a preview will appear in the panel on the right After changes have been made to the properties click on the Preview button to update the preview image Templates You can choose to use a Widget as a Template for when you add more Widgets of the same Service type To do this 1 Open a Widget Set the properties as described above Select the Use As Template check box Click on OK This Widget will now have an icon next to it in the list showing it is a Template Add another Widget of the same Service Type If you open the new Widget you will see that its properties are the same as for the Template idget oo W P SN e 5 The Help button provides help related to the form in this case the Widget Editor as on all forms There is also a Widget Help button which provides help for the selected widget and the selected Skin E Mail E Mail can be accessed by e Components using In built System IO e Logic e Widgets Wiser Home Control projects only To use E Mail with the PICED software E Mail accounts need to be created with the E Mail Manager E Mail can
488. se and Sunset Time Zone GMT 09 30 Change Time Zone Date oz 02 2011 X Calculate Sunrise Sunset To find the Longitude and Latitude of cities look in an Atlas or one of the many Internet sites such as http www heavens above com countries asp To verify that the data entered is correct click on the Calculate Sunrise Sunset button and confirm that the data provided is correct The sunrise and sunset times can usually be found in newspapers or on the Internet To use this location automatically each time a project is created click on the Save as Default button To allow the location longitude and latitude to be viewed and selected using a map click on the Map button to open the Location Selection form Daylight Savings Tab The Daylight Savings tab of the Options page allows you to enter various parameters related to your location including e The time zone e The start date and time of Daylight Savings e The finish date and time of Daylight Savings e The amount of time adjustment during Daylight Savings The Daylight Savings settings are used for the calculation of sunrise and sunset times Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 69 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 5 6 Time Zone GMT 09 30 Reset to Local Time Zone Daylight Savings Select Other Time Zone C No daylight savings Add 1 hour Create Schedules Start of Daylight Savings Da
489. sed in a project and allows you to add edit and delete them To open the Profile Manager either e Select the Project Edit Profiles menu item or e Click the Profiles button on the Tool Bars prscvesccensensecseeee Profiles as Profile Groups Edit Delete 3 12 Profiles Used Current Profile Profile 2 Profile 1 2 Profile 2 3 Profile 3 The Current Profile is the Profile currently selected for this Project The user interface and Simulation Mode show what you will see on a unit with this Project and Profile The Current Profile is the Profile used when the Project is transferred to the unit The Profile can be changed at the time of transfer if required Profiles Adding a Profile To Add a new Profile 1 Select the Profiles tab 2 Click on the Add button 3 The Profile Editor will open 4 Enter the name of the Profile 5 Click on OK For Wiser Projects a Profile has a user name and password This is used by Wiser to provide a different user interface as controlled by the Profile to each different user Editing a Profile To edit an existing Profile 1 Select the Profiles tab 2 Either e Double click on the required Profile or e Click on the Profile to select it then click on the Edit button 3 The Profile Editor will open 4 Alter the details of the Profile 5 Click on OK Deleting a Profile To delete an existing Profile 1 Select the Profiles tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric
490. select the Off Group as well 2 To edit an existing Master Load select the load in the list and click the Edit Load button Alternatively double click the item in the list The Master Load form will allow you to edit the Master Load s properties 3 To delete an existing Master Load select the load in the list and click the Delete Load button 4 To change the order of the Master Loads select a Master Load in the list and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons Click the Next button when complete Zones Page The Zones Page shows the details of the selected irrigation Zones 1 Number 2 C Bus Network 3 C Bus Application It is recommended that the Irrigation Application 71 be used for this purpose 4 C Bus Group 5 Off Group This is the group used to switch the solenoid off This will only be displayed if the Allow Latched Solenoids option on the Settings page was selected Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 226 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Add Zone Edit Zone Delete Zone Move Up Move Down 5 16 Zone Loads Used 1 Wired Irrigation Lawn North 2 Wired Irrigation Lawn South 3 Wired Irrigation Drippers North 4 Wired Irrigation Drippers South 5 Wired Irrigation Garden The Zones can be selected using this page 1 To add a new Zone click on the Add Zone button The Zone form will allow you to select the load Group Address If you have selected the Allow Latched So
491. select the Activate Component menu item See also Status Program Options and Remote Control 4 9 3 Component Types There are only a few basic types of Components but they can have their properties set to make them look like there are in fact hundreds of types e Text Images Shapes Buttons Sliders Level Indicators Clocks Monitors Selectors HTML Web Cam Image Graphs Calendars All components have the following properties in common e all components may have an Action e all components may have their Remote Control properties set e all components have a Position and Size 4 9 3 1 Text A Text Component displays one or more lines of text The font can be set There is no border or background Examples tet canbe any font S ize style or 4 9 3 2 Images An Image Component displays an image picture on the page An Image Component has no border or background When the Project is Saved all image files are copied to the project directory If an image that is used by the project is deleted or renamed an error message will be raised and a dummy image will be displayed a large red X The image is limited to the size of the screen Images can be stretched in the PICED software but it may be preferable to use an image Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 94 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide manipulation program to perform this before placing the ima
492. select the Schedule Time Type normal sunrise sunset repeat random cenes Colour C Touch only Component Count show the total number of Scene Components Component Current Level show the current level on C Bus of the Scene Component Component Current Level Select change the current level on C Bus of the Scene Component Component Level show the C Bus level of the selected Scene Component Component Level Select change the C Bus level of the selected Scene Component Component Name show the name of the selected Scene Component Component Number show the number of the selected Scene Component Component Ramp Rate Select select the ramp rate for the selected Scene Component Component Select select a Scene Component Count show the total number of Scenes Edit open the Scene Manager Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 133 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Name show the name of the selected Scene Nudge Level Down nudge down the C Bus level of the selected Scene Nudge Level Up nudge up the C Bus level of the selected Scene Number show the number of the selected Scene Scene Select select a Scene Set set the selected Scene Set Level Off set the selected Scene off Set Level On set the selected Scene on Store store the levels of the selected Scene e Irrigation Colour C Touch only Edit open the Irrigation Manager Program Count show the number of Irrigation Pr
493. selection of the default order Day Month Year or Month Day Year or Year Month Day The Time Format option allows for the selection of the default time format 12 hour or 24 hour These options will be used when a new clock Component is placed on a Page and will be used by the unit when displaying system date time information Location Tab The Location tab of the Options page box allows you to select the location of the project installation which is used for sunrise sunset calculations The essential data is the Longitude and Latitude of the installation The easiest way to select this is to select the Country from the first drop down list then the city from the second drop down list This will enter the Longitude and Latitude for you If the Country and or City is not in the list s then type them in and type in the Longitude and Latitude If you click on the Add to Database button this city will be added to your database of Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 61 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide cities and will be available for the next time you use the software Installer Pages Alarm C Bus Media Internet Misc Location Daylight Savings Location Country australia v Add to Database City adelaide bd Save as Default Latitude f4 55 OF C North South Map Longitude ji383646 00 C West East Verify Sunrise and Sunset Time Zone GMT 09 30 Change Time Zone Date oz
494. sh Philippines 09 English South Africa OA English Trinidad 0B English UK 0C English USA oD English Zimbabwe OE Afrikaans 40 Basque 41 Catalan 42 Danish 43 Dutch Belgium 44 Dutch Netherlands 45 Faeroese 46 Finnish 47 French Belgium 48 French Canada 49 French 4A French Luxembourg 4B French Monaco 4C French Switzerland 4D Galician 4E German Austria 4F German 50 German Liechtenstein 51 German Luxembourg 52 German Switzerland 53 Icelandic 54 Indonesian 55 Italian 56 Italian Switzerland 57 Malay Brunei 58 Malay 59 Norwegian 5A Norwegian Nynorsk 5B Portuguese Brazil 5C Portuguese 5D Spanish Argentine 5E Spanish Bolivia 5F Spanish Chile 60 Spanish Colombia 61 Spanish Costa Rica 62 Spanish Dominican 63 Republic Spanish Ecuador 64 Spanish El Salvador 65 Spanish Guatemala 66 Spanish Honduras 67 Spanish 68 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 17 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 6 Spanish Mexico 69 Spanish Nicaragua 6A Spanish Panama 6B Spanish Paraguay 6C Spanish Peru 6D Spanish Puerto Rico 6E Spanish Traditional 6F Spanish Uruguay 70 Spanish Venezuela 71 Swahili 72 Swedish 73 Swedish Finland 74 Chinese_cp936 CA Note that Labels are not the same as C Bus Tags C Bus Tags are stored in the C Bus Project Database and generally do not change Labels change from time to time and are broadcast onto
495. ssary images can be copied from the project folder and used Decompiled Project Text Components Text is saved in the C Touch unit as a bitmap When transferred there are two choices 1 Create as Text Components this creates text components of the same size and in the same position as the original project but with the default font and text the word text 2 Create as Images this creates an image component in the project which looks like the original text Since this is not a text component it is not possible to edit the text or appearance To make changes it is necessary to delete the component and replace it with an actual text component Button Components Buttons are saved in the C Touch unit as a pair bitmaps one for the Active image and one for the inactive image When transferred there are two choices 1 Create as Default Buttons this creates button components of the same size and in the same position as the original project but with the default border style and text If the project was created using mainly the default border styles this option will often give good results and is much easier to edit 2 Create as Buttons with 2 Images this creates a button component in the project which looks like the original one and contains the two images as custom images Shape Components Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 279 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Shapes are saved in
496. ssigned any description name you wish They can also be given an abbreviation This is used for e The Calendar Tab see above when there is more than one Special Day for the same date e For Calendar Components Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 219 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide See also Software Limits 4 18 2 Special Day Editor The Special Day Editor allows you to set the Special Day type s for a particular day or range of days The Special Day Editor is opened from the Special Day Manager by double clicking on the required day Special Day Type More V Normal M Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 Most of the time you will want to just set the Special Day type s for the selected day In this case you just need to select the Special Days Normal Public Holiday etc and then click on OK To access the more advanced Special Day creation features click on the More button The form will change to Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 220 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Special Day Type Day Single Day C Single Day Every Year Set Day Type bd Multiple Days Add Day Type C Remove Day Type Starting 3 05 2005 v Normal Public Holiday Special Day 1 Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 Special Day 6 lL ttitlt
497. ssssoasososseossosononoS C Remote Machine IP Address Command Port 20023 Status Change Port 20025 C Bus Project IV Use C Bus EXAMPLE v Most of the time you will want to use the C Gate on your Local Machine the computer which PICED is running on In this case the Local Machine option needs to be selected If you want to connect to C Gate on a remote machine select the Remote Machine option enter the IP Address of the remote machine click on the Load Projects button select Use C Bus when a C Bus network is present deselect when using the Wiser2 without a C Bus network select the required C Bus Project If you have C Gate configured to use a non standard Command Port or Status Change Port the port numbers should be entered Note that the details on this page can not be changed while C Bus is connected When complete click on the Next button Options The C Bus Project page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select various options of the C Bus Project which varies according to unit type Project Tab The Project tab allows you to enter details of the Project name location etc Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 53 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Project name Fred s House Location Consultant Architect Owner Notes Refresh Project I m a m It is possible to have the PICED software remind you to transfer any user changes made to a the proje
498. st Scene will have a Trigger Group of 1 with a Trigger Level of 100 The next Scene will use Trigger Group 2 and so on Schedules To automatically create Schedules e Select the Schedules tab Select the Auto Create Schedules check box Select the number of Schedules to create in the Schedules Count box Select Random Time or Schedules spaced at 1 Minute Intervals starting at 12 00 noon Select whether the Schedule action is to be just On Off commands Random Levels or whether it should also include Random Scenes Select the minimum and maximum lighting Group Addresses to be controlled from the Min GA and Max GA boxes respectively This will create the selected number of Schedules each given the name Schedule x where x is the number of the Schedule Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 267 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The first Schedule will control the Group Address selected by Min GA The next Schedule will use the next Group Address and so on If the Max GA Group Address is reached then the next Schedule will use the Min GA Group Address again If the Random Scenes option is selected then roughly 20 of the Schedules will set a random Scene Pages To automatically create Pages e Select the Pages amp Components tab e Select the Auto Create Pages check box e Select the number of Pages to create in the Pages Count box This will create the selected number of Pages each given th
499. st all Networks and Applications used by the Wiser project It is preferable to have tags for all Group Addresses used too Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first If you have a Wiser Project open and it has been transferred to a Wiser unit you can transfer changes made by a user back to the project in your computer 1 Connect the computer to the Wiser unit 2 Click on the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item 3 The Transfer Utility will be displayed Options for connecting to the Wiser unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 4 A list of Wiser units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Wiser unit from the list e Enter a folder for the project if you want it saved elsewhere this is only a temporary file Click on Start Note that PICED will Save a Back up of the Project in case you need to revert to it later Firmware Update To update the Wiser firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a Wiser Home Control Project to the Unit At step 8 make sure you select the new Firmware file You can not transfer a project with the firmware update this must be done afterwards Customising the Skin Currently the only visual aspect of the skin which can be changed is the background image To change this 1 Copy one of the skins to new folder For ex
500. stallation Manual for more information A If you select the Transfer Other Configuration File option the archive file selected must not be one created using the Archive Export as the format is slightly different Transferring a Colour C Touch Project from the Unit To transfer a project stored in a Colour C Touch unit to the PICED software 1 Connect to the Colour C Touch unit 2 Select the Transfer Transfer Project from Unit menu item 3 The Project Details Wizard will be shown Click on Next 4 Select Colour C Touch Click on Next 5 The archive file will be transferred using the Transfer Utility e The Transfer Utility will be opened for you e f you have more than one Network card you will be asked to select the one which is connected to the Colour C Touch Options for connecting to the Colour C Touch unit will be presented Select the desired one enter any required details and click on OK 6 A list of Colour C Touch units which have been found will be displayed e Select the desired Colour C Touch unit from the list e 7 Select Retrieve Project From Colour C Touch Enter a folder for the project Click on Start The Import Archive Wizard will be displayed 8 Select the transferred archive file Click on Next 9 Select a folder to store the project Click on Next 10 Click on Next Click on Finish 11 Select the project file Click on OK Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is
501. status of Scenes Note that Indicator Kill messages are sent when a Scene is broken regardless of this setting Broadcast Power Failure Recovery Levels Colour C Touch only When this option is selected all groups which have their level restored by the Power Failure Recovery process will have their level broadcast onto C Bus This is not normally necessary Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 57 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide C Gate Options only applies to running the project in PICED C Gate Options C Gate Test NOOP A asnoseeceassonsecsnscencessnsettoesssnsenceassosseesen The C Gate Test option can be selected if you want to regularly verify that the connection to C Gate is still OK This option will result in a NOOP command being sent to C Gate on a regular basis if there have been no other commands for a minute or so If there is no reply from C Gate the connection will be closed and re opened This should only ever be used in extreme cases as it can disguise an underlying reliability problem The Poll for Changes option selects whether to use a regular C Gate tree command to obtain the current C Bus levels Refer to C Gate Algorithm for additional details Media Tab Colour C Touch Only Client Skin Name skint Automatically find server s peeees iPod SlimServer Use specific server IP Address Port j 0030 The desired skin f
502. stem IO variables If this option is selected the unit will automatically respond to the Media Transport Control Get Status messages and transmit Category Selection and Track information onto C Bus Media Transport Control Summary The Media Transport Control Summary information can be displayed by clicking on the Details button on the Media Transport Control Application Manager A list of all Media Link Groups along with all of their properties will be displayed Audio Application C Bus devices can broadcast data via the C Bus Audio Application The relevant Matrix Switchers Zones and Sources can be entered using the Audio Application Manager For more details on the use of the Audio Application with specific device types refer to the documentation for the specific device See also Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO 4 25 10 1 Audio Application Manager The Audio Application Manager can be used to enter details of the installed audio equipment The details of relevance are e Matrix Switchers e Audio sources e Audio zones To open the Audio Manager either e select the Project C Bus Applications Audio Manager menu item or e click on a component with the Audio Manager Show Special Function Matrix Switchers Tab The Matrix Switchers tab shows a list of the Matrix Switchers The columns of data are e Name e Matrix Number this is their Matrix Switcher number Adding a Matrix Switcher To add
503. stom Format When displaying a value using the custom option there are several properties which can be selected to control the text displayed e Prefix Text this is text displayed before the numerical value e Postfix Text this is text displayed after the numerical value e Gain this is used to scale the value displayed see below e Offset this is used to scale the value displayed see below e Decimal Places this controls the accuracy of the number displayed Value Scalin Sometimes it is necessary to change the value which is displayed For example you may have a temperature sensor connected to an analogue input unit which is broadcasting the value on a Group Address In these cases it is necessary to scale the value There are two parameters which are used to implement the scaling The gain is multiplied by the value and the offset is added to the value to get the result which is displayed For example with a gain of 2 and an offset of 10 the relationship between the level and the result displayed would be Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 113 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Result 2 Level 10 eG o If you do not want to use scaling have the gain 1 and the offset 0 Calculating Scaling Coefficients To calculate the necessary gain and offset values click on the Calculate button Enter the result you want displayed when the C Bus level is at its minimum and click OK
504. store Project Details all of the information in the Project Details form Pages each of which may contain various components Theme Pages Scenes Schedules Irrigation Programs Special Days Access Control Logic Bus Application data C o Error Reporting Application O O O HVAC Application Measurement Application Media Transport Control Application Audio Application Power Meters Monitors E Mail Accounts Profiles Wiser data Widgets and Options O Project Templates A project template is a complete project which can be re used It will generally contain the required structure and graphics without the site specific details The Theme Templates supplied with PICED are examples of Project Templates Page Templates A page template is a single page with Components on it Component Templates A component template is a set of Components which can be added to a project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 83 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 7 1 Other Templates Templates are also used for things like e Logic code e Special Days such as public holidays Templates Supplied with PICED The templates folder contains many folders with various templates Components single customised Components and sets of related Components Games simple games Logic samples of logic code Pages pages for editing and control Special Days public holidays for Australia Themes
505. synchronised This is referred to as reconciliation In the log extract below you can see Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 312 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 1 A lighting command for group Level 2 Office 1 being sent before Network 241 is on line 2 The Network 241 coming on line 3 The discrepancy is discovered between the level for the group in PICED and in C Gate 4 The discrepancy is reconciled by a new level being sent to C Bus 30 10 2009 8 54 00 AM C Bus Tx Set Level 2 Office 1 On Logic Line 2882 Scene Level 2 Work Hours 30 10 2009 8 54 00 AM Info Network 241 Level 2 is off line command has been queued 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Gate Tx 376 get 241 state 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Gate Rx 376 300 PROJECT 241 state ok 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Gate Tx 377 tree 241 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Gate Rx 377 320 Network name 241 type CNI address 192 168 1 10 10001 state ok 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Bus Rx Level correction from C Gate tree 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Bus Rx Set Level 2 Office 1 On 30 10 2009 8 55 00 AM C Bus Tx Level 2 Office 1 to On Reconcile Groups The C Bus Network State can be displayed for a Component controlling C Bus This will indicate that that the network for the Component is currently off line and the state shown may be wrong If a Network goes off line and a Group Address changes state on C Bus during the time it is off line
506. t 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Click on the lt button or right click on the Scene Components list and select Delete To edit a Scene Component 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Change the level using the spin edit slider On and Off buttons or nudge buttons left and right arrows 3 Change the ramp rate using the Ramp Rate Combo Box OR 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Edit item or just double click the item in the list 3 The Scene Component Editor will open 4 Enter the desired properties for the Scene Component s and click on OK when complete To edit more than one Scene Component at a time select the required ones and follow the instructions above The parameters that are common to each of the Scene Components will be shown All other parameters will be blank If any parameter is changed it will apply to all of the selected Scene Components For example to change the level of all Scene Components to 0 select all of the Scene Components select one then hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while selecting the others Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Edit item Change the C Bus level to 0 Click on OK All of the Scene Components will now be set to 0 Nothing else in the Scene Components will have changed To duplicate a Scen
507. t Properties form Status Indication Control C Bus Indicator Active Range Automatic eRe Hee reset Level C Bus Level Preset Leye Scene Indicator eo E an Custom Levels System IO Level 4 oe VINO LEYE Click Maximum Level C Page Link Automatic Option If the Automatic option is selected then the status will indicate e the C Bus level if the Component controls C Bus or e the System IO level if the Component controls a System IO variable or e the click state if the Component controls something else C Bus Level Option If the C Bus Level option is selected then the Component status will indicate the status of the associated C Bus Group Address or Scene as described below The C Bus Indicator Range group of the status tab allows you to select how the C Bus state indication will be related to the C Bus Group Address Level By default it will show the Inactive state of the button when the C Bus level is 0 and the Active state of the button for any other C Bus level There are circumstances where this behaviour may need to be changed The options which are able to be selected are e Default when this is selected the default behaviour is used e Preset Level when this is selected and the button is a PRESET or STATUS button see above the Active state will be shown if the C Bus level equals the selected level on the Key Functions Tab otherwise the Inactive state will be
508. t the next day that you wish to have it occur Public Holidays and other Special Days Special Days can be used to define sets of days which are related to each other These can be included in Schedules or excluded from Schedules by selecting them in the Day of Week group box Example 4 To have a Schedule occur on Monday to Friday but not on Public Holidays select Custom in the list in the Day of Week group and select Monday through to Friday Select Public Holidays in the Not On group Use the Special Day Manager to set the Public Holidays Example 5 To have a Schedule occur on a Birthday e Use the Special Day Manager to create the Birthday Special Day category and to set all of the Birthdays e In the Schedule Editor select Custom in the list in the Day of Week group and de select Sunday through to Saturday Select Birthdays in the Also On group Note When you have set up a Schedule use the Year View to confirm that you have it correct Creating One Off Schedules Sometimes it is desirable to create a set of Schedules which will only run on a particular day For example in a shopping centre you may have an extended trading day and for just that day you need to modify the Schedules The easiest way to do this is as follows Open the Schedule Manager Select the Date view Select the date for the one off Schedules Click on the One Off Copy button Select whether you want to copy All Schedules for this date
509. t Background Colour 1 Select Background Colour 2 Image El If an Access Level has been set for a page then when the user tries to select that page they will have to Log in to get access to that page After a certain time of displaying a page it will time out and select the Time Out page The Page time out duration can be set to e Project Default use the time out duration set in the Project Details e Never time out this is useful if an alarm or message page has been displayed e Other time enter the time required Note The Start up and Time out page s must always have the lowest Access Level otherwise you will not be able to open a project Ifa Theme is selected the Page Background settings will be ignored Theme Page Properties If the Page being edited is a Theme Page then the Page Properties form will be slightly different e The Page Time Out details are disabled because they are not relevant to a Theme Page e The Access Level is disabled Sub Page Properties If the Page being edited is a Sub Page then the Page Properties form will be slightly different e The Page Time Out details are hidden because they are not relevant to a Sub Page e The Height and Width of the Sub Page can be selected e The Page Background options are different If the Style is set to Colour then the background of the Sub Page will be the selected colour If the Style is set to Transparent then the Sub Page will b
510. t Details See also Good Design Practices Setting the Project details When a new Project is created all of the parameters will be set to default values To set Project details select the Project Project Details menu item The Project Details Wizard will appear which will allow you to set various Project related parameters Project Type Screen Size C Bus Project Unit Address Project Details Installer Details Options C Bus Options Location Daylight Savings Auto Page Creation Project Type Screen Size The Project Type page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select the type of project and for a C Touch project its orientation Firstly select the project device type from the list Device Type c Touch x C Touch C Touch Colour C Touch Mark 2 C Touch Mark 2 no logic C Touch Spectrum C Touch Spectrum no logic Pascal 4utomation Controller Wiser If this is a Black and White C Touch project select the screen orientation Orientation R Window at Top Note that for a PAC and Wiser the Screen Size is only relevant for placing components for test purposes The PAC and Wiser do not actually use the Screen Size or any components placed The Project Type determines which features are available in the software listed in Unit Differences see also Software Limits When complete click on the Next button Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 51 Home Management
511. t Incoming Call reject hang up the incoming telephone call Ringing is the telephone ringing Ringing Number the ringing telephone number Secondary Isolated is the telephone interface secondary output isolated e Error Application Clear Most Severe Errors clear any Most Severe errors Project Most Recent Error Status show if there is an error anywhere in the project Project Most Recent Error Name show a description of the error with the highest severity Project Most Severe Error Status show if there is a Most Severe error anywhere in the project Project Most Severe Error Name show a description of the Most Severe error with the highest severity Network Most Recent Error Status show if there is an error anywhere in a network Network Most Recent Error Name show a description of the error with the highest severity Network Most Severe Error Status show if there is a Most Severe error anywhere in a network Network Most Severe Error Name show a description of the Most Severe error with the highest severity Show Error Manager show the Error Manager Unit Most Recent Error Status show if there is an error anywhere in a unit Unit Most Recent Error Name show a description of the error with the highest severity Unit Most Severe Error Status show if there is a Most Severe error anywhere in a unit Unit Most Severe Error Name show a description of the Most Severe error with the highest severity e Measurement Applicatio
512. t on the C Bus Tab select the Activate Component for Specific C Bus Level button Ifa Component is activated by a C Bus Group Address it can not also be used to control C Bus In this case only the Status Key Function option will be available on the C Bus Tab Component Activation via IR Remote Control The C Touch units can be controlled from an Infra Red IR remote control You can either use the one that comes with the unit or any remote control which uses NEC codes A remote control key can be associated with a Component on the C Touch unit When the remote control key is pressed the C Touch unit will act as if you pressed the screen in the centre of that component If you want a Component to only be activated by remote control and not by someone clicking on it make the component very small and put it near the edge of the screen away from other Components This will minimise the chance that someone will accidentally click on it Never place other Components with actions on top of an IR activated Component as the Component on top will be activated when the IR command is received To set up the association between a component and a remote control key Select the Remote Control tab from the Component Properties form Select the IR Remote Control Enabled check box If you are using the remote control that came with the C Touch unit 5035TX you can just select the desired key from the drop down list If you are using a
513. t to the software on the desktop Sync to Schedules Synchronise Scheduled Groups to Schedules Log In Log in Log out Magnify open the Windows magnifier to show aspects of the screen in details Open Image Editor open the image editor selected in Program Options Pick Colour pick a colour from the screen for use with components pages etc Create Compact Tag File create a compact version of the C Bus tag database Plot Graph this allows you to Plot the Graph of a Graoh Component using Windows Excel Refresh C Bus Tags this allows you to Refresh the C Bus Tags used by the project TRANSFER MENU Prepare Transfer File prepares the open file for transferring at a later date Resources Report shows a report on how much memory has been used by a C Touch or PAC project Connect to Unit establishes communications between the PC and the C Touch PAC unit ready for transferring Transfer Project to Unit allows you to transfer your configuration or new firmware to the C Touch PAC unit Transfer Project from Unit allows you to transfer a Project from the C Touch PAC unit Refresh Project from Unit allows you to transfer user changes from a unit so that the Project can be updated Read File from Unit allows you to transfer a configuration file from the C Touch PAC unit to the computer for Cloning Units Control Unit control the C Touch or PAC Recover C Touch or PAC allows you to stop a C Touch or PAC to make it eas
514. te Scene All Off Network App Group Level Local Network Lighting Basement Light 1 Local Network Local Network Lighting Basement Light 2 Lighting Lighting Bed 1 Light Bed 2 Light Local Network Lighting Bedside Lights Local Network Lighting Bathroom Lights Local Network Local Network Lighting Lighting Outside Light PIR Disable 0 0 0 0 0 P aw o _on o u oo J Live Changes Selected C Whole Scene The Scene Matrix Manager shows only the Group Addresses which are used in one or more Scenes Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 195 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Alongside each Group Address the level of that Group Address in each Scene is shown If a Group Address is not used in a particular Scene the cell will be blank The columns can be sorted by clicking on top of the column or they can be rearranged and have their widths changed by dragging them Scene Management Scenes can be managed in a similar way to the Scene Manager e To add a Scene click on the Add Scene button or right click on one of the cells and select the Add item To delete a Scene select a cell in the Scene column and click the Delete button or right click and select the Delete item e To edit a Scene select a cell in the Scene column and click the Edit button or right click and select the Edit i
515. ted C Bus Group Address If the Active and Inactive Images are the same only one is transferred Three Images Sliders have up to three images Two are for the background of the slider active and inactive and the third is for the thumb the bit that slides up and down Dynamic Text Components Clocks Level Indicators and Monitors all have their text generated dynamically ie as required These components have a single image saved for their background and have fonts transferred as required The fonts used for Text components do not need to be transferred as they are saved as an image Care needs to be used when using components which are translucent ie transparent but not invisible For example a button with a PNG image with translucency around the edges to soften the edge When the image for this is saved it is a copy of what is on the computer screen drawn on a plain background but it is not actually translucent This means that if you put a translucent component over the top of something that changes eg a button with an indicator or a clock you will not see the thing below change Colour C Touch The Colour C Touch can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the Colour C Touch and are disabled To create a project for a Colour C Touch unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add pages and add components to each page with
516. tem To duplicate a Scene select a cell in the Scene column and click the Duplicate button or right click and select the Duplicate item To select a Scene click on any cell in the Scene column The selected Scene name will be highlighted Selecting Scene Components e To select a Scene Component click on a cell in the Scenes grid e To select additional Scene Components hold down the CTRL key and click on the other Scene Component cells To select all Scene Components in the selected Scene right click on the Scene Components list and select the Select All in Scene item e To de select all Scene Components right click on the Scenes list and select the De select All item Scene Trigger To view the trigger for a Scene hold the mouse over the Scene name cell A hint will appear with the details of the trigger Scene Levels To change the levels in a Scene 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Change the level using the spin edit slider On and Off buttons or nudge buttons left and right arrows 3 Change the ramp rate using the Ramp Rate Combo Box OR 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scenes list 2 Right click on the Scenes list and select the Edit item or just double click the item in the list 3 The Scene Editor will open 4 Enter the desired properties for the Scene Component s and click on OK when complete To view additional details of a Scene Component Such as ramp rate
517. tem select the Irrigation button on the Toolbar or click on a Component using the Irrigation Special Function Irrigation Control is not available for Black and White C Touch or PAC projects Master Enable Page The first page allows the selection of the Master Enable group Select the Network Application Group Address and Level for enabling the Irrigation Control If this Group Address is set to any other level the Irrigation Controller will be disabled It is recommended that the Enable Control Application CB be used for this purpose If the Unused Group Address is selected there will be no Master Enable and the Irrigation Controller will always be enabled Note that if the Master Enable Group is disabled while an irrigation cycle is underway the cycle will be terminated See also Power Failure Recovery Network Wired v Application Group Irrigation Enable l 2 Value ON Enabled 7 You can add information related to Irrigation by entering it in the Notes box Click the Next button when complete Settings Page This page allows the selection of various irrigation options Zone Delay Overlap Delay 1 seconds Overlap Latched Solenoids Allow latched solenoids On Off Pulse Duration 2 sj seconds Master Loads J Use Master Loads Master Load Delay 2 aj seconds Zone Delay Overlap this sets the Zone Overlap or Zone Delay The Allow Latched Solenoids check box enables the use of
518. tem IO 155 Tools 133 Time out 7 90 Time out Page 53 63 70 Timer 94 96 122 106 94 106 106 129 145 198 164 151 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia PICED Programmer s Guide Timezone Tip of the Day Tool Select 53 63 70 79 332 133 31 38 5 29 274 141 28 282 289 50 Transfer Project from Unit 277 286 288 293 297 Transfer Project to Unit 275 284 288 291 295 Transfer Utility 291 300 305 Transform 403 Transition Effects Translucency Colour Translucent 282 289 Transparent 282 289 Images 107 Transport Control Tools 133 Transport Control Application Editor 247 Manager 247 Summary 248 Trending 98 Trigger Control Application Scene Indicators 186 Scene Trigger 184 185 Tool Bars ToolKit Top Track Transfer Project 93 53 63 70 28 246 23 Triggering 14 Typographic Conventions 6 U Undo 144 Ungroup Components Unit Master 329 Updating Project 310 Unit Address 53 63 70 Unit Differences 309 Units cloning 143 311 Universal Dimmer 240 241 Updating 275 284 288 295 User Manual 338 Users Editor 216 Page 433 Home Management Series Users Limits 7 Using PICED 48 V Valve Types 222 Ventilation 13 27 Visible Properties 100 Vista 395 Voltage Monitors 97 253 W WAV Files 143 Weather 97 115 Web Cam 97 115 274 Image Component 98 Web Pages 97 115 143 Web Site 333 What s New 332 Widgets 229 Edit
519. text editor spreadsheet or database and Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 89 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 10 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 print from there Time Out You may wish the C Touch unit to display a particular page after C Touch has not been used for some time The page and the duration of the time out period can be set in the Project Details form When the time out period expires e any logged in user will be logged out e the backlight will turn off e the time out page will be displayed If the room is dark a different time out page will normally be displayed The Dark Time Out Page has no buttons on it When you touch it it just turns on the backlight and displays your regular time out page The intention is so that if you press the C Touch screen at night when you can t see the screen you will not accidentally switch something that you did not want to To set the threshold lighting level at which the dark time out page is displayed 1 Select the Backlight Setting page or a page containing a button with the threshold set Special Function 2 Switch the backlight off 3 Adjust the light level in the room until the C Touch unit is just becoming difficult to read 4 Press the threshold setting button Each Page can also have its time out duration set independently if required Pages which allow access to more critical functions should have a shorter time out set Pages
520. text file if needed Note that the animation image file created has a single line of the transparency colour at the bottom of the image This is required to guarantee that the bottom left pixel in the image this is the one which sets the transparency colour is the correct colour Create Compact Tag File The Colour C Touch uses a compact version of the C Bus Project tag information It is not of any interest to most users This file is generated automatically when transferring a project to the Colour C Touch It can also be generated by opening a Project then selecting the Tools Create Compact Tag File menu item A file with a ctf extension will be generated in the Project directory This file can also be used by third party devices Refer to the C Bus Enabled Program for details Plot Graph The data from a Graph Component can be plotted in Microsoft Excel if required This provides additional flexibility for formatting and printing beyond that supplied in PICED Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 273 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The steps for plotting a graph in Excel are Ensure that Microsoft Excel is installed Select the Tools Plot Graph menu item Select the required Graph Component from the list Click on the Graph in Excel button Manipulate the graph as required in Excel Close Excel when complete 5 18 Refresh C Bus Tags Oarwn If C Bus Tags get changed by another piec
521. the Alpha Blend Status Indication option To have the Alpha Blending level change according to the Component level select the Variable Blending Level option Note Alpha Blending is not available in Black and White C Touch projects 4 9 4 2 11 HTML The HTML tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to set the properties of an HTML Component or a Web Cam Image Position Border HTML Alpha Blend RL c Clipsal HTML Test WwebCam1 html Web Cam Wizard Weather Wizard Auto Refresh Enabled Rate 3600 Seconds HTML Component URL The URL is either e alink to a web site or e a link to a file on the computer To enter a URL for a web site either e type in the URL directly eg http mywebsite com or e open the web page with your web browser and then copy and paste the URL into the URL box To enter a URL for a file on the computer either Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 115 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e type in the URL directly eg c Clipsal MyHTMLFile html or e click on the folder button select the file and click on OK To automatically generate HTML for the display of web cams or displaying the weather click on the Web Cam Wizard or Weather Wizard buttons This will open the respective wizards Enter the necessary data including the HTML file name and click on OK A file will be generated containing the necessary HTML code The file name will appear
522. the C Touch unit as a pair bitmaps one for the Active image and one for the inactive image When transferred there are two choices 1 Create as Shape Components this creates button components of the same size and in the same position as the original project but with the default border and style a simple rectangle 2 Create as Buttons with 2 Images this creates a button component in the project which looks like the original shape and contains the two images as custom images Image Components Image components will be re created exactly as they were on the C Touch unit The images will be saves as the dithered image Slider Components Slider components will be re created using the default style but will have the same size position and function Level Indicator Components Level Indicator components will be re created using the default style but will have the same size position and function Clock Components Clock components will be re created using the default style but will have the same size position and function Monitor Components Monitor components will be re created using the default style but will have the same size position and function Logic Logic can not be recovered unless the zip file is used see above Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first If you have a C Touch Project open and it has been
523. the Date Time Set and Date Time Cancel Special Functions Time to be Set In built System IO Date Time Set Special Function Set Date Time Date Time Cancel Cancel Date Time Special Function lt Setting the Date To allow the user to set the date using ln built System IO variables you need to have nudge up and down buttons to adjust the day month and year These are all available using the Tool Select form Note that these do not directly change the clock date they just change the Date To Be Set variable To actually change the clock date to match the Date To Be Set you need to use a button with the Date Time Set Special Function It is also recommended to have a button with the Date Time Cancel Special Function to allow the change to be cancelled Calendar Month Selection Calendar Components can display a month which is selected using the Calendar Month Offset In built System IO variable If the Calendar Component is selected to display the Selected Month it will show the current month plus or minus the value of the Calendar Month Offset system IO variable So for example if it is currently in March and a Calendar Component shows the selected month and the Calendar Month Offset system IO variable has a value of 2 then the calendar will display the month of May The relevant in built System IO Variables are e Calendar Month Offset explained above e Calendar Month number of the selected month e Calendar Month Name n
524. the desired properties Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Set up the Irrigation Control if required Set up the Access Control if required Add E Mail Accounts if required Add Logic if required Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 290 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide The following sections cover aspects of the software which are unique to the Colour C Touch For more details on the installation and use of the Colour C Touch refer to the installation guide and user manual respectively 6 4 1 Transferring a Colour C Touch Project to the Unit A Colour C Touch project is transferred va Ethernet using the Transfer Utility Software The steps in transferring your project are listed below 1 First connect your PC to the Colour C Touch via Ethernet The Colour C Touch can be either connected directly or via an Ethernet Network Refer to the CTC Client help file for more details 1 1 Direct connection For a direct connection a cross over cable is required unless your PC supports Auto MDIX Eth
525. the normal check box used to select a Boolean Value Visible in Profiles Jal These properties will have a drop down list of options to allow you to select which Profiles the value is true for For example the Component Visibility property can be set so that the Component will be visible for some Profiles but not for others visible in Profiles fan Mome Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 150 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 13 If a different combination of profiles is required click on the edit button and the Profile Value editor will open Profile Group Custom I Room 1B V Room 24 Room 2B If you select a combination of Profiles which does not already exist as a profile Group the add button will be enabled Clicking on this button will add a Profile Group with this selection of Profiles String Values String values which vary by profile are handled in the same was as Integer values Special Functions Special Functions perform various actions in the software They can be executed by Components Schedules or Logic Special Functions for the Colour C Touch include None no Special Function is used Access Control Edit Open the Access Control Manager Alarm Off this stops the alarm Alarm On this starts an alarm Alarm Snooze this delays the alarm for a set amount of time Audio All Off switch off all audio zones Audio Manager Sho
526. the page displayed after the time out period it can vary by Profile e Dark Time out Page this is the page displayed after the time out period if it is dark Black and White C Touch only e Time out after this is the period waited following a touch of the screen before the time out page is displayed Start Up Details Start up Details Start up page Main Page Installer Details Fred Installer Contact Details 123 456 789 This section allows you to select the page which will be displayed on start up it can vary by Profile This page is not necessarily the same as the time out page see above You can also select the installer information to be displayed on C Touch Page Transition Colour C Touch only age Transition Page Change Effect None v Sub Page Change Effect None z Speed meim S This controls the Page Transition visual effects of page changes e Page Change Effect this is the effect when changing from one Page to another e Sub Page Change Effect this is the effect when the Sub Page displayed in a Sub Page Frame changes e Speed this is the speed of the transition from one page to another The names of the effects are reasonably self explanatory To see all effects in action select random or cycle close the form and then change pages lots of times The page transition effects can also be set using Special Functions Alarm Tab This tab is not applicable to PAC or Wiser Home Contro
527. the way from the bottom or left if it is a horizontal slider then the Group Address Level is 80 A bar graph does not have a thumb but rather shows the level by means of a coloured bar Examples Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 95 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 3 6 4 9 3 7 M LDII INT E Level Indicators A Level Indicator Component is used to show the precise level of a C Bus group or a System IO Variable The properties of a Level Indicator are e Border and background e Text font e Value to display e Alpha Blending Examples 52 52 _52 33 0c See also Graph Components Clocks A Clock Component is used to show the time day of the week and or date It has a border and background and can have its text font set A Clock Component can also display the amount of time remaining on a C Bus timer sunrise time sunset time the Irrigation Controller timer a Schedule Time a System IO variable time Examples 11 24 AM s2eam irasan 11 24 AM 11 24 28 Wednesday 25 Jun 2003 25 06 03 06 25 03 2003 06 25 See also Calendar Component Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 96 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 3 8 4 9 3 9 4 9 3 10 Monitors A monitor component is like a gauge that can display the value of some variable A monitor can be used to display temperature light lev
528. the winter Schedule every week while at work during the day both Schedules can t apply it s one or the other This is called a mutually exclusive scheduling situation It is possible to set up mutually exclusive schedules to handle this kind of situation by means of setting different levels on an enabling Group Address See the Schedule Editor for details Schedules are created and managed using the Schedule Manager Schedules use the computer clock to determine the time The accuracy of the schedules is therefore limited to the accuracy of the computer clock The computer date and time can be set using Special Functions See also Special Days Software Limits Special Functions In built System IO Schedule Manager The Schedule Manager allows the user to see a summary of all Schedules in a project and to see which are active It also allows you to add duplicate edit and delete Schedules To show the Schedule Manager form click on the Project Edit Schedules menu item or click on the Schedule button on the tool bar ADDING DELETING amp EDITING SCHEDULES Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 198 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To create a new Schedule click on the Add button The Schedule Editor form will appear If a Schedule Collection is selected the new Schedule will have the same enabling conditions as the Schedule Collection To delete a Schedule select the required Schedule f
529. tick marks Colours are selected using the Colour form You can either select a Basic Colour by clicking on the desired colour or you can select a Custom Colour Selecting Custom Colours To select a custom colour click on the Define Custom Colors button Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 130 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Basic colors i Ge ee es mE EG EE EEE eee ERE EEE Nn EE EEE Ee EEE g mi H Custom colors Hue 182 Red 183 See eee ee ea Green 135 Define Custom Colors ColorlSolid Lum Blue 222 Select the shade required by clicking on the colour square Then click on the desired intensity for the colour Alternatively the colour can be selected by entering the Red Green Blue components or the Hue Saturation Luminance components Then click on the Add to Custom Colors button to add the colour to the Custom colors list Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 131 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 9 5 4 9 5 1 4 9 5 2 Click on OK to use the colour To copy a custom colour from one object component or page to another select the first object and open the colour form The colour will already be in the Color Solid box Click on the Add to Custom Colors button to add the colour to the Custom colors list Open the second thing and edit the colour The new custom colour will be there for you to choose The only colour
530. tion by address 1 Type an address into the Address box the address from the Project Details will already be in the address box 2 Click on the Go to Address button 3 The map will be centred on the address and the latitude and longitude boxes will be updated unless the address was invalid To select a location by dragging the map 1 Click and drag the map so that the location is in the centre of the map 2 Click on the Get Location button 3 The latitude and longitude boxes will be updated When complete click on the OK button to transfer the latitude and longitude to the Location tab of the Project Details form Click on the Cancel button to close the Location Selection form without making any changes Note this form requires an Internet connection to operate Auto Page Creation The Create Project Pages page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to quickly and automatically create a series of pages for your project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 81 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 6 Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia JV Create Menu JV Label Pages Page Names Theme Page Main theme page z V Add Template Page c delphibin templates pages colour tools ctp v Browse The steps in the process are Select the Auto Create button if you want to automatically create pages For each page you want to have created enter the name in the Page Names list
531. tion fails option if you wish PICED to automatically reconnect to C Gate if the connection fails for any reason Reports The Reports tab allows you to select whether you want your Project Summary and Check Project reports presented as an HTML report to read or print using a web browser or as a text file for inclusion in some other document Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 33 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Operation Mode It is possible to select the type of cursor for when Simulation Mode is running If you are using a Touch Panel PC it may be desirable to have no cursor displayed Start up Options The Start up tab allows you to select how you want the PICED software to start up The options are e Show the Project Details Wizard e Open the project which was open the last time the software was used e Start with a blank project uses the Home C Bus ToolKit Project 9 s Emoowseraenczman ere Ol Ej M C Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 34 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide By default when the right mouse button is clicked on a component the action for that component is executed Alternatively you can have a pop up menu appear when the right mouse button is clicked Activate Component Undo Ctrl Z Delete Ctrl Del Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste GEH Paint Format GEHE Component Properties Align Shift Ctrl
532. tly logged in Log in show the page for entering the user password Log out log the user out and display the start up page Password show the current password as stars User Name show the name of the currently logged in user e Date amp Time Calendar Month Down adjust the month shown on a Galendar Component Colour C Touch only Calendar Month Name show the month selected Colour C Touch only Calendar Month Up adjust the month shown on a Calendar Component Colour C Touch only Calendar Year show the year selected Colour C Touch only Cancel cancel setting the date and time Colour C Touch only Date Select adjust the date to be set Colour C Touch only Date to be Set show the date to be set Colour C Touch only Date Time Form set the computer date and time Colour C Touch only Day Down adjust the date to the previous day Black and White C Touch only Day Up adjust the date to the next day Black and White C Touch only Daylight Savings show whether Daylight Savings is active Colour C Touch only Daylight Savings Start start Daylight Savings Black and White C Touch only Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 134 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Daylight Savings Stop stop Daylight Savings Black and White C Touch only Hour Down adjust the time down by an hour Black and White C Touch only Hour Up adjust the time up by an hour Black and White C T
533. tmap before use Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 388 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Cause An animated GIF was encountered when loading an image Animated GIF files are not supported directly Only animated bitmaps are supported by the PICED software Solution Use the Tools Images Convert Animated GIF menu item to convert the animated GIF images into an animated bitmap 11 4 169 Error 14171 Message Can not add any more Monitors Maximum is value Cause There is a limit to the number of Monitors which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Monitors 11 4 170 Error 14172 Message Please select a monitor Cause A Monitor has not been selected Solution Select a Monitor and click on OK 11 4 171 Warning 14173 Message There are monitor Components which do not have a corresponding monitor Cause The project has used Monitor Components which are not listed in the Monitor Manager These Monitor Components will not work without a corresponding Monitor in the Monitor Manager Note that prior to V4 of PICED the Monitor Manager did not exist and Monitors were created automatically Solution Click Auto Create to automatically create the necessary monitors for each of the Monitor Components Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 389 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Click OK to close the Monitor Manager fo
534. to File Name check box and the file name will be automatically generated from the date and time and hence will be different each time The log file name will be of the form year_month_day_time txt The log file will be stored in the program folder c clipsal PICED by default If the Limit File Size option is selected the file will be closed when it gets to 100 000 lines usually around 2MB or when the time is midnight then another log file will be started When this option is selected the old log files will be deleted after the selected number of days There are check boxes on the Options Tab which enable various options e Show Info Messages This enables the logging of information messages Show C Gate Messages this displays messages to and from C Gate Show C Touch PAC Messages this displays messages sent to C Touch PAC va the serial interface Show Logic Debug Messages this displays Logic Log Messages Show Logic Serial Messages this displays Logic Serial Messages Show Logic TCP IP Messages this displays Logic TCP IP Socket Messages Show Event Time When selected this appends the date and time of each event Show Data as CSV This logs all data as Comma Separated Values to allow the log file to be imported into a spreadsheet database or other program e Colour Highlighting this controls whether the different types of logged commands are shown in different colours e Show Usage and Debug Messages see b
535. to make the changes but leave the form open or click on OK Creating a Desktop Shortcut To create a desktop shortcut which will start the software and load the currently loaded file select the Create Desktop Shortcut item from the Tools Menu The desktop shortcut will be created with the following parameters e The currently loaded file e The current connection to C Bus Once the shortcut has been created you may add other Command Line Parameters by selecting the shortcut right clicking on it and setting the properties Magnify Screen You can magnify an area of the screen by using selecting the Tools Magnify menu item This opens the Windows magnifier utility Refer to Windows documentation for more details Image Editor To open the Default Image Editor select the Tools Image Editor menu item To edit the image of a particular component 1 If you want to edit the active image then Activate the component 2 Select the component 3 Select the Tools Images Open Image menu item 4 Make any changes using the image editor and save the file 5 If you want to see the changes you will need to Refresh the Images You will be asked whether you want to do this Click on Yes Pick Colours To pick a colour from the project Page select the Tools Pick Colour menu item Move the mouse over the colour to be selected The selected colour will be shown on the Status Bar Click on the colour to be used and it will be added to
536. to set Solution Create a Rain Delay Schedule 11 4 164 Error 14166 Message Can not add any more Air Conditioning Zones Maximum is x Cause There is a limit to the number of Air Conditioning Zones which can be used and that limit has been reached Solution Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 387 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Reduce the number of Air Conditioning Zones 11 4 165 Error 14167 Message Can not add any more Measurement Channels Maximum is x Cause There is a limit to the number of Measurement Channels which can be stored and that limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Measurement Channels 11 4 166 Error14168 Message File is not animated GIF Cause An animated GIF file was expected Solution Select an animated GIF file 11 4 167 Error14169 Message File is an animated GIF These are not supported by PICED directly Cause You have placed an image and it is an animated GIF Animated GIF files are not supported directly Only animated bitmaps are supported by the PICED software Solution Click on Convert to convert the selected animated GIF to an animated bitmap Click on Static to convert the selected animated GIF to a static bitmap image Click on Cancel to cancel the placement of the image 11 4 168 Error14170 Message File name is an animated GIF These are not supported by PICED directly Please convert this to an animated bi
537. transfer new firmware select the Transfer Firmware check box and enter the desired file mot The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICED Firmware 6 To set the C Touch time to match the PC time select the Set Unit Time to PC Time check box 7 Click on OK The transfer process will start It may take up to five minutes depending on the size of your file Transferring via C Bus There may be occasions where is inconvenient to remove the PAC unit from wherever it is installed and connect to the PC USB connector In this case you may wish to transfer via C Bus There are several limitations to using this approach e Firstly it is much slower Using the USB cable is approximately 20 times faster e You can not transfer across C Bus bridges e You can only transfer new configuration data not firmware e Ifthe firmware is the wrong version transferring a project will permanently damage the unit and it will need to be returned for repair see Help Software Properties for the compatible firmware versions e C Gate must be on the same computer as PICED The process to transfer via C Bus is as follows 1 In the Project Details form enter the Unit Address of the PAC unit 2 Connect your PC to a PC Interface on the same network as the PAC unit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 296 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 5 2 3 Connect to C Bus by selecting the Connect to C Bus menu
538. transferred to a C Touch unit you can transfer changes made by a user back to the project in your computer 1 Connect the computer to the C Touch unit 2 Click on the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item 3 The Transfer Project From Unit form will be displayed 4 Select the correct Serial Port 5 Click on Next 6 Click on Finish Note that PICED will Save a Back up of the Project in case you need to revert to it later Firmware Update To update the Black and White C Touch firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a C Touch Project to the Unit At step 5 make sure you select the new Firmware file You must transfer a project with the firmware update It is not possible to update the firmware without transferring a project Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 280 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide A Firmware update can not be done via C Bus Controlling the C Touch There are several things that you can do once you are connected to the C Touch Unit Under the Transfer menu there is a Control Unit sub menu Under this there are the following menu items Beep This will make the C Touch unit beep This can be used as a test to verify that you have connected correctly to the C Touch unit Reset This allows you to reset the C Touch unit Reset Calibration This allows you to reset the calibration of the Touchscreen if it has been set incorrectly Reset Contrast This allows
539. trolled via the C Bus Audio Application and the Media Transport Control Application These two applications control different aspects of the MRA system and are described below Audio Application The C Bus Audio Application can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Variable Name Settable Mute the Audio Zone Boolean _lves_ Audio Volume Set the Audio Zone volume 0 __ Integer to 255 Audio Balance Audio Zone balance 0 to 255 Audio Zone bass 0 to 255 e E E Audio Treble Audio Zone treble 0 to 255 Yes Audio Last Error Code Audio Zone last error code Audio Zone Source Audio Zone source 1 to 7 Audio High Priority Audio Zone high priority input Boolean Yes door bell Audio Timer The most recent setting for the Integer Yes audio off timer Audio Timer Setting the Audio Timer variable will set the timer in the Matrix Switcher to this value in minutes The Matrix Switcher will update this value every minute until it gets to zero when it turns off Setting the Audio Timer to 0 will switch off the zones Audio Balance Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 177 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide A value of 50 level 127 is a centre balance Values less than this change the balance to the left Values more than this change the balance to the right Audio Bass and Treble A value of 50 level 127 is a flat response Values less than this red
540. ttractive and usable Projects simply A Theme consists of a series of Theme Pages which contain the templates to be used for the Pages and Components in the Project For example you may wish to have a particular background colour and some images for all of the Pages in your Project By placing these on a Theme Page they can easily be used by all of the other Pages in your project If you decide to change the look of the Project you can just change the Theme Page and all of the other Pages in the Project using this Theme Page will automatically change to the new Theme To create a Theme e Create one or more Theme Pages On the first Theme Page add any Theme Components required On the second and subsequent pages add any Components to give the desired appearance On the Project Pages select the Page Theme Save the project as a Theme by selecting File Save as Template and save the project to the templates themes folder in a new folder If you wish to have a preview image of the theme on the project wizard save a screen image of the project called preview jpg in the same folder You can use the Tools Reports Save Screen menu item to do this Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 144 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 10 1 Theme Components When a Component is placed on a Page it has a default appearance This appearance can be edited to make it look however you want It is more convenient t
541. tware you are using sets DTR high and RTS low or vice versa The C Touch Configuration Software does this for you when you connect to the Touchscreen A simple method to initialise the handshaking lines to enable C Touch to be used as a PC Interface IS 1 Start the C Touch Configuration Software 2 Select Connect to C Bus from the Options menu 3 Select the required COM port 4 Disconnect again repeating steps 2 and 3 5 The above steps have now set the Handshaking lines and any software may use C Touch as a PC Interface provided the software does not reset the handshaking lines Load Monitor The Load Monitor shows every Network Application and Group Address used by PICED It allows you to e See the level of each Group Address Load e Toggle the state of the Group Address by double clicking on the Group in the list e Select Power Failure Recovery see below e Measure approximate power consumption To display the Load Monitor e Select the Project Load Monitor menu item or e Click on the Load Monitor button on the Tool Bar Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 316 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To refresh the display click on the Refresh button on the Load Monitor Tool Bar or select the Auto Refresh check box to automatically refresh every 10 seconds The columns of data displayed are e Load this is the name C Bus Tag of the Group Address Level this is the Level of t
542. u Click on No to save the project in the selected directory Error 14080 Message Can not add any more Special Days Maximum is limit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 363 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 80 11 4 81 11 4 82 11 4 83 Cause There is a limit to the number of Special Days which can be used and this limit has been reached Solution Reduce the number of Special Days used by deleting any that have already occurred Error 14081 Message Can not have an Special day in both the Also On and Not On groups Cause A Special Day is in the Also On group and in the Not On group This is not logical Solution Remove the Special Day from one of the groups Warning 14082 Message The Nudge level should typically be between 1 and 50 Cause The amount of the Nudge Up Nudge Down should typically be between 1 and 50 If it is less than 1 then it will not do anything If it is more that 50 then maybe another C Bus function would be more suitable Solution Change the Nudge level to be between 1 and 50 Error 14083 Message Dimming Ramp Rate can not be zero Cause The Ramp Rate has been set to zero instantaneous which is not appropriate for the selected C Bus type Solution Change the ramp rate to be greater than zero Error 14084 Message Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 364 Home Management Series PICED Programm
543. u and select the required directory When complete you will be presented with a list of all of the files which have been converted This just re names the files it does not actually change the file contents Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 49 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 4 File Format Change In version 4 11 the project file ctd format changed This does not affect the use of the software in any way except if you want to take a project which was saved in V4 11 or later and open it with V4 10 or earlier To do this use the File Archive Save as V4 10 menu item which will save the file in the same format as V4 10 which is also suitable for opening with older versions of the software Other Files The C Bus Project file is used by the PICED software via C Gate to get the C Bus Tags If you are using the Load Monitor features there will be a data file _PFR csv used This contains the Power Failure Recovery data The Project may also use Images of various types including Bitmaps bmp JPEG files jpg or jpeg Windows Metafiles wmf Portable Network Graphic files png Icons ico and Enhanced Metafiles emf If the Run Program Special Function is used various other files may be used by the Project including documents and other programs When archiving a project or copying the project from one computer to another all of the above files are needed The Proj
544. ucces eden st aeea tle Ninana KA NNa an AAA Aan ARANAN Aani naan 7 1 6 Important Information ssceccsssccsceccives cecescee cessed eaneserieectesseenenap even deecsneeeesnceeethecedessuansuenczeuee 7 2 C Bus Concepts saisnsistasacsehatesinasnasennenadannravansitiausastnarnachsinananavtiainseiniahubastinagnn 10 2 1 Abo t C BUS issnin piseeesecicnctelceevace eeteded execesameaqencddl openeenteeendeeesede awaawa noaa anaia naeia siete 10 2 2 INNGEWOFKS a E E E E T T 10 2 3 Applications ese cece oa sca ces ee este arpaa aaeanoa a EENE EEE aaar aA aap NAASE KEN riais 13 2 4 CHB US TiS E E E E E 29 2 5 Hexadecimal Numbers assess cece acti ees Sow dae ete cns decece ce eects de nnne nnmn na 30 3 Configuring the PICED Softwar e sssssssssseseseseseseeeseseeesesesnseeeseenseeeenees 31 3 1 STAMEING the SOT WAC aaae ceed a aa a ra aa aparra exec aa A daa Ee Kaaa Siap custanncunce caumeexetess 31 3 2 Sofiware Scree N innen tien einai ene 31 3 3 Program ptlons ninnan anade ei ee ees ase ee ete ee 32 3 4 Slmullatlon Mod 0 22 eis ieee tide esd oe teen ie 36 3 5 Command Line Parameters cccsscsccssceesseeceesenseeeseesseeseeenseessneeseeeenasseseeasnaesanees 36 4 Using the PICED Software inwissiosivccscisetsivstsinsciesisnssvinsnucssivassnusnscunsdeunedseiensasvseveverunnes 38 4 1 TOOL BOIS Siscsiccceacdissecccsics sctecsaecatacaseveigs tans veceansscetaiswisoes excuoaes escesecs extaeavexctoonsvanate 38 4 2 Boa od Lod oC alent ir ta een a
545. uce the bass treble Values more than this boost the bass treble Audio Volume To display the audio volume as a percent using a Level Indicator 1 Place a level indicator on the page 2 Select the status system IO key function 3 Select the Audio Volume in built System IO variable 4 On the value tab visible properties tab e Select System IO Value Custom Set Postfix Text to Set Gain to 0 39216 Media Transport Control Application Media Transport Control information can be controlled and or monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 178 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Media Transport Control Setting the fast forward speed Integer Yes Fast Forward Media Transport Control Pausing the music Boolean Yes Pause Media Transport Control Playing the music Boolean Yes Play Media Transport Control Selecting the Selection Integer Yes Selection Yes Media Transport Control Displaying the Selection Name String Selection Name Media Transport Control Switching the power on and off Power Media Transport Control Enabling repeat Integer Yes Repeat 0 off 1 repeat current track 2 repeat alll Media Transport Control Setting the rewind speed Integer Yes Rewind Media Transport Control Boolean Yes Shuffle Media Transport Control Selecting the Category Integer Yes Category Media Transport
546. uld not be run because REASON Cause The program PROGRAM NAME could not be run The REASON explains the cause Solution Reason t C C SCSC C C SSlutticm _ Cid The specified file was not found Check the file name Check that the file name exists The specified path was not found Check the file path Check that the file path exists The EXE file is invalid non Win32 EXE or error Check that the file will run manually in EXE image The filename association is incomplete or Check the Windows file associations with the invalid filename extension The specified dynamic link library was not found Check the file name Check that the file name exists There is no application associated with the Check the Windows file associations with the filename extension filename extension There was not enough memory to complete the Close down some other programs to free up operation some memory A sharing violation occurred Close any program which is also using the file The operating system denied access to the Check that you have access to this file There specified file may be access restrictions on this file Error 14023 Message Could not connect to Serial port REASON This could be caused by Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 346 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 11 4 23 e The COM Port being used by another program e The wrong
547. ule Collection Conditions form This will allow you to change the Enabling Group Address and the Day on which all of the Schedules in the selected Schedule Collection occur Refer to the Schedule Editor for more details The Schedule Collection icon in the tree shows the enabled state of the Schedule Collection Enabled Disabled SCHEDULE TABLE VIEW The Schedule Table displays the Schedule data in several columns as described below Number Description Date Time ction i Enable State 1 Irrigation Every Day 8 00 00 PM Set Irrigation Control to Lawns Always Disabled 2 Night Every Day Sunset 1 00 00 Ramp Lounge to 100 over 8 seconds Always Disabled 3 Enable Irrigation 18th Mar 4 04 00 PM Set Irrigation Enable to Irrigation On Always Disabled 4 Test Every Day 7 50 20 PM Pulse Scene Scene 2 Groups to 100 for 3sec Always Disabled The columns are e Number This is the number of the Schedule e Description This is the name that has been given to the Schedule e Date This is the day s that the Schedule will be executed e Time This is the time that the Schedule will be executed e Action This is the action that the Schedule will perform e Enable This shows under which conditions the Schedule is enabled e State This is whether the Schedule is enabled or not Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 200 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Note that the width of the columns can be
548. um number of Maximum number of Logic Timers Timers 20 50 Maximum number of Logic 100 50 Modules Maximum number of 50 50 ConditionStays True Functions or HasChanged Functions Amount of logic code See How Much Logic Is Possible in logic help file FAQ Maximum number of logic TCP IP 10 4 20 client sockets Maximum number of C Bus Networks Ae Me number of C Bus EA Maximum number of HVAC Zones number of HVAC Zones 10 Maximum number of Measurement 100 100 100 Serer ae Maximum number of Monitors number of Monitors 100 Maximum number of E Mail Accounts Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 8 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Property C C C PAC Touch Touch Touch Spectru Colour m Maximum number of Media Link 4 4 12 4 4 4 Groups Maximum number of Pulse Power Meters Maximum number of Power Meters e and pulse combined Maximum number of Tarifs number of Tariffs Maximum number of Matrix ae Maximum number of Profiles number of Profiles C Bus Error Reporting Application te eter 1 Only used for testing 2 Only for the C Touch Mark 2 units supporting logic 3 Only for C Touch Mark 2 4 There are separate limits for pulse power meters analogue measurement channels and total number of power meters See also Licences and Unit Differences Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 9 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide
549. umber show the number of the error Error State show whether there is an error Fan Speed Select select the fan speed Fan Speed Text show the speed of the fan Fan State show if the fan is running Heating State show if the controller is heating HVAC Refresh refresh the data from all HVAC controllers Mode Name show the name of the HVAC mode Mode Select set the mode see HVAC App In Built System IO Operating Type Name show the name of the Operating Type Operating Type Select set the Operating Type see HVAC App In Built System IO Plant Equipment show the HVAC plant equipment type see HVAC App In Built System IO Plant Equipment Name show the name of the HVAC plant equipment type Sensor Status show the temperature sensor status Sensor Status Name show the sensor status name Setback State show whether temperature setback is enabled Set Level show set point numerical value Set Level Select select the set point Set Level Text text showing the Set Level value includes oC or oF if showing a temperature Set Level Type Name show what type the set level is Temperature Comfort Level or Fan Speed Temperature show the current temperature Zone Damper Open show if the damper is open Zone Enabled show the state of the Zone enabled disabled Zone Group State control the Zone Group on off this does not use a Zone Number e Shutters control for the C Bus Shutter Relay A 1 Key Togg
550. un in a C Touch e The Logic Resources form shows a scan by scan estimate of how much the C Touch is using e The How Much Logic Is Possible in the Logic help file shows how to estimate the amount of code which is possible e The actual Logic usage can be logged e The C Touch status indicator will indicate if there is too much logic The average scan duration is not allowed to exceed 75ms This is reported as 100 However a scan is allowed to occasionally take up to 150ms 200 as long as this does not bring the average over 75ms Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 287 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 C Touch Spectrum The C Touch Spectrum can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the C Touch Spectrum and are disabled The C Touch Spectrum is very similar to the Black and White C Touch Mark 2 but with a colour screen The firmware capabilities are mostly the same Refer to Software Limits and Unit Differences for details To create a project for a C Touch Spectrum unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add pages and add components to each page with the desired properties Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Set up the Irrigation Control if required Set up the Access Control if required Add Logic if required Check the Project for errors and co
551. ure item or right click on the Capture button 3 Select the Capture Selected Capture Network Capture Application or Capture Net and App sub item The meanings of these is discussed below e Capture Selected captures just the selected item s e Capture Network captures all Scene Components for the Network selected in the Available Groups panel Capture Application captures all Scene Components for the Application selected in the Available Groups panel e Capture Net and App captures all Scene Components for the Network and Application selected in the Available Groups panel Setting the Scene to C Bus It is possible to test the Scene by setting some or all of the Scene levels on C Bus To set the whole Scene click on the Set Scene button or right click on the Scene Components list and select the Set Scene Set Scene item To set just part of a Scene 1 Select the desired Scene Component s in the Scene Components list 2 Right click on the Scene Components list and select the Set Scene item or right click on the Set Scene button 3 Select the Set Scene Levels Immediately Set Selected or Set Selected Immediately sub item The meanings of these is discussed below e Set Scene Levels Immediately set the whole Scene immediately do not use the Scene Components ramp rate e Set Selected Set the selected Scene Components using their correct ramp rates e Set Selected Immediately Set the selected Scene Components to th
552. us Track select the previous Track Media Transport Control Status Request send a command for the Media Transport Control information Category Selection and Track names to be updated A command is sent for each Media Link Group used in the project e Media Transport Control Show Form show the Media Transport Control Application Manager Password Character enter a character of the user password Password Clear clear the currently entered password Password Edit edit the user password Password Enter enter the password and log in if successful Scene Edit If All Scenes is selected then the Scene Manager will be opened If Specific Scene is selected then the selected scene will be opened Scene Store store the current settings for the selected Scene e Scene Set Selected set the Scene selected using n built System IO Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 153 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 14 e Scene Store Selected store the Scene selected using In built System IO Schedule Edit If All Schedules is selected then the Schedule Manager will be opened If Specific Schedule is selected then the selected schedule will be opened Security Alarm raise an alarm activate the security system Security Arm arm the security system Security Keypad emulate a security keypad key press Special Day Edit Open the Special Days Manager Telephony Divert divert the teleohone to another
553. us meters It is possible to enter between one and six different electricity tariffs for different meters These tariffs are used by the Power Meter Manager for use with calculating the energy cost for use with Power Meter In built System IO variables Adding Tariffs Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 256 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide To add a new Tariff 1 Click on the Add button The Tariff form will be displayed 2 Enter the tariff details e Name e Cost per kWh 3 Click on OK Editing Tariffs To edit an existing Tariff 1 Select the Tariff in the list then click on the Edit button or Double click on a Tariff in the list 2 The Tariff form will be displayed 3 Edit the tariff details 4 Click on OK Deleting Tariffs To delete an existing Tariff 1 Select the Tariff in the list 2 Click on the Delete button Note that it is necessary to always have at least one tariff History The history tab shows recorded power meter historical data History data can be entered so that components show meaningful data immediately without having to wait for days or months to accumulate actual data Other The Other tab is used for entering the carbon footprint factor for use by the Power Meter Manager in calculating carbon dioxide CO emissions for use by Power Meter In built System IO Variables The value entered is the number of kg of CO emitted for every kWh of energy use
554. use is over the Page the current colour being picked if tools pick colour has been selected whether Simulation Mode is active C Bus Connection Status The C Bus Connection Status panel of the Status Bar displays a bar graph showing the connection status of the networks in the project with text superimposed with the latest status information 2 4 net The width of the coloured segments in the graph is proportional to the number of networks in each state The colour of the segments of the graph shows the networks in each state e White Network is in closed open or new state e Red Network is in error state e Yellow Network is in the sync state e Orange network is in the operational state e Green Network is in the OK state C Bus Synchronisation Status Network 253 synchronisation progress 44 The C Bus Synchronisation Status panel of the Status Bar displays a networks synchronisation status message and progress percentage only when that network is being synchronised If no networks are being the no synchronisation status information is displayed Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 40 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Whilst a synchronisation status message and progress percentage is being displayed the C Bus Connection Status panel shall be displaying network s in the sync state using the yellow segment colour See also C Bus Network Manager 4 3 Keyboard Short
555. used to control the night light on the Black and White C Touch For Black and White C Touch the Image Compression option provides the option to compress images to reduce the project resources so that large projects will fit For C Touch Spectrum projects the image Translucency Colour can be selected When the Component images are captured for transfer to the unit they are drawn on a plain colour background Images with translucency for example PNGs will have pixels which get blended with Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 59 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide this background colour To get the best visual appearance for these images it is recommended that a translucency colour be selected which is similar to the page background colour Note that it is important to not use a colour which is used in the project because this colour is used to indicate the transparency of the image and if this colour is actually used in an image then the pixels with that colour will not be drawn Proximity Sensor C Touch Spectrum only Proximity Sensor Network ica O CS Application Trigger Control ts Group Address cunused gt o 2 Action Selector oen Ea Special Function None Page Link hone z 7 Backlight This section allows you to select what happens when the proximity sensor is activated by a nearby hand e Network Application Group and Action Selector select this if you wa
556. using the appropriate Special Functions Recover Unit If you have problems connecting to a C Touch unit to transfer a project to the unit or from the unit it may be necessary to stop the unit from running first To do this 1 Physically disconnect the C Touch from C Bus 2 Connect the C Touch to the PC via a serial cable 3 Select the Transfer Recover C Touch or PAC menu item 4 Connect the C Touch to C Bus 5 Wait for 5 seconds for the C Touch to just start up 6 Click on the OK button 7 PICED will connect to the unit and immediately stop it from running 8 Transfer the firmware and or project as normal A It should not normally be necessary to do this This is only intended for emergency use It may require several attempts to get the timing correct Black and White C Touch Mark 2 The Black and White C Touch Mark 2 can be configured through the use of the PICED software Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the Black and White C Touch Mark 2 and are disabled The Black and White C Touch Mark 2 is very similar to the Black and White C Touch with a few physical changes The firmware capabilities are mostly the same Refer to Software Limits and Unit Differences for details To create a project for a Black and White C Touch Mark 2 unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Add pages and add components to each page with the desired properties Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days
557. utline To change the component alignment e Select the component s which you want to change e Select the Align menu item from the Edit menu or click on the Align speed button on the tool bar e Select the required actions in the Component Alignment form see below e Click on OK Align to Primary Selection Grid Left C Centres Right 3 e Tops Snap To Grid Ae C Centres Qo Bottoms Align to Page Centre Space Evenly a HH HHH C Components Group Selection C Page Oo C Components ot Selection E o C Group None af Page None If one or more Components are aligned with respect to another Component the Primary Selection is the one that the others will be aligned to Alignments can be made in several ways e Secondary selections can be aligned with respect to the primary selection horizontally or vertically e Components may be aligned to the centre of the page either individually or as a group horizontally or vertically e Components can be spaced evenly either within the group or across the page horizontally or vertically It is not possible to do more than one type of alignment at a time as this may give unpredictable results If the Align to Grid check box is selected all of the selected components will be placed on the grid It is also possible to align the left top right or bottom sides of selected components by means of the Edit Align menu items or by the Keyboard Shortcuts Note th
558. vary by Profile The Date Order option allows for the selection of the default order Day Month Year or Month Day Year or Year Month Day The Time Format option allows for the selection of the default time format 12 hour or 24 hour These options will be used when a new clock Component is placed on a Page and will be used by the unit when displaying system date time information Location Tab The Location tab of the Options page box allows you to select the location of the project installation which is used for sunrise sunset calculations The essential data is the Longitude and Latitude of the installation The easiest way to select this is to select the Country from the first drop down list then the city from the second drop down list This will enter the Longitude and Latitude for you If the Country and or City is not in the list s then type them in and type in the Longitude and Latitude If you click on the Add to Database button this city will be added to your database of cities and will be available for the next time you use the software Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 68 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Installer Pages Alarm C Bus Media Internet Misc Location Daylight Savings Location Country australia z Add to Database City adelaide ki Save as Default Latitude f4 5507 C North South Map Longitude fissse4e6 0000 C West East Verify Sunri
559. very 10 seconds Group selection drop down list this allows you to select whether you want to display all Groups or just Monitored Groups Power Failure Recovery The Power Fail Recovery button on the tool bar activates or de activates the power fail recovery of the selected load s Colour C Touch only Black and White C Touch and PAC automatically recover the level of all loads after power failure This is particularly useful for Group Addresses which are not used in any C Bus units Phantom Groups It is not possible for a C Bus device including a software application to know the levels of these Groups unless it stores the levels itself Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 317 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 8 3 See also Logging Events In built System IO Power Failure Recovery When the PICED software starts up it assumes all Group Address Levels are off level 0 When C Gate is connected the levels from the Networks are read and then PICED will show the correct levels for the Group Addresses Following a power failure C Bus recovers the Group Address Levels from the Output Units When C Gate connects to C Bus it also reads the Levels from the Output Units There are several circumstances where a Group Address may not exist in any Output Units Generally this is where Group Address is used to control something other than a load e Triggering a Scene e Enabling a Schedu
560. w display the Audio Application Manager Audio Next Source select the next Source for this Zone Audio Previous Source select the previous Source for this Zone Backlight Bright set the backlight level to the brighter setting Backlight Dim set the backlight level to the dim setting Button Press Warning displays a message warning the user not to press the button Calibrate Touch Screen run the program to calibrate the touch screen Cleaning Mode this disables the touch screen so that it can be cleaned Clear Historical Data this clears data from Graphs and Pulse Power Meters Date Time Form Show Set the computer Date Time and Timezone Date Time Cancel cancel the adjustment of the date time Date Time Set set the time to that selected using the in built System IO E Mail Manager Show show the E Mail Manager E Mail Delete delete the selected E Mail E Mail Show show the E Mail messages Error Application Clear Most Severe clear any Most Severe errors Error Manager Show show the Error Manager form HVAC Manager Show show the HVAC Application Manager Installer Details shows a form with details of the installer Internet Setup Set the computer Internet properties Irrigation Edit Open the Irrigation Manager Irrigation Rain Delay allow the user to enter a rain delay Irrigation Run Zone Run an Irrigation Zone manual control Irrigation Stop stop the Irrigation Program from running Labels Clear
561. w log and saves all future logged events into the selected file e Append This appends all logged events to the end of the existing selected file The Remember Setting option can be used to have the log start up in the same state disabled enabled saving or appending when the PICED software next starts up This setting is overridden by any Command Line Parameters The Scroll Lock check box can be used to stop the messages from scrolling up the screen while you look at them This can also be controlled using the Scroll Lock button on the keyboard The Clear Log button clears all entries in the log but not in the file The Comment button allows you to put a comment into the log file The C Gate button allows you to send a specific command to C Gate Click the C Gate button enter the command and click on OK There is a pop up menu to allow text in the log to be copied e Copy copy the selected lines in the log list to the Windows clipboard e Select All select all lines in the log e De select All de select all lines in the log Options Tab Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 320 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Log Options mLog File Select Log File M Suto File Mame JV Limit File Size Keep logs For f F days To select the log file name e Click the Select Log File button and enter the log file name if no name is selected it will use log txt or e Select the Au
562. ware Some features of the PICED software are not relevant for the PAC and are disabled To create a project for a PAC unit Create a new project Set the Project Details Create Scenes Create Schedules and Special Days Add Logic Check the Project for errors and correct them Check the project Summary if desired Test the project Simulation Mode Save the project Transfer the Project to the unit To update the project at a later date e Save a back up copy of the Project e Transfer the user changes from the Unit if there are any e Make changes to the Project e Save the project e Transfer the Project to the unit The following sections cover aspects of the software which are unique to the PAC For more details on the installation and use of the PAC refer to the installation guide Transferring a PAC Project to the Unit There are two types of information that you may want to transfer to the PAC Unit The more common requirement is to transfer the user configuration data that you have created Occasionally you may wish to transfer new firmware into the unit to add new features There are two alternative means of transferring data to the PAC unit directly via a USB cable or via C Bus You can select which option you wish to use in the Program Options form Transferring via the USB Cable To transfer the Project follow the steps below 1 Connect your PC to the PAC via the supplied USB cable PC Pac The USB
563. ware Update To update the Wiser firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a Wiser Home Control Project to the Unit At step 8 make sure you select the new Firmware file You can not transfer a project with the firmware update this must be done afterwards Customising the Skin Currently the only visual aspect of the skin which can be changed is the background image To change this 1 Copy one of the skins to new folder For example copy C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser Go Green 4 3 to C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser MySkin 2 Edit the bkgd jpg file in the new folder 3 The next time PICED is run you will see the new skin in the Skin selection list 4 If you want to you can also make the skin preview work e Do a screen grab of Wiser displaying a project with your new background e Shrink the image to 160 x 120 pixels e Save as preview jpg in the new folder If you need to customise the language in the skin you can edit the skin definition file The easiest way is as follows 1 Copy one of the skins to new folder For example copy C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser Go Green 4 3 to C Clipsal PICED Templates Wiser MySkin 2 Open the skin_definition xml file in the new folder using a program like Notepad 3 Find the text for the language you are using and change as required 4 If you want to add a new language you will need to make a copy of each section of the file which contains language related content they all start with lt
564. when the light level is above about 90 When the screen has not been touched for some time the backlight level drops by around 30 The sliders control the minimum and maximum level of the light level and the backlight level The Fall Back Offset controls how much the backlight will dim by after the screen has not been touched for a while The Default button resets the backlight properties to their default levels Misc Tab Metric Units can be selected to display Temperature in Centigrade rather than Fahrenheit The Master Unit setting controls whether the unit will be the C Bus Master The Master Unit can also vary by Profile To automatically delete one off Schedules Schedules that occur on a single day which occurred at least a month in the past select the One Off Schedules check box This only applies to the Colour C Touch To automatically delete Special Days which occurred in the past select the Special Days check box This only applies to the Colour C Touch The auto deletion of Schedules and Special Days occurs when a file is loaded and at midnight each day If the The Enable Popup Editor option is selected Colour C Touch only anywhere that data needs to be entered there is an edit button 4 which you can click to show the pop up editor so that you can edit new data without needing a keyboard This only applies to the Colour C Touch HomeGate forms not the operating system forms The Date Order option allows for the
565. witchers Maximum is limit Reason There is a limit to the number of Matrix Switchers that can be added to a project and that limit has been reached Actions Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 403 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Delete any unused Matrix Switchers using the Audio Application Manager 11 4 217 Warning 14220 Message The Form Name form is already being displayed Cause A form is already open behind the form you are currently using You have clicked on something which requires the other form to be displayed but it is already being displayed Solution Close the form which you are using then select the other form 11 4 218 Confirmation 14221 Message Image IMAGE NAME is missing Do you want to use matching file from the image library if it can be found Cause An image file could not be found Solution 1 Click on the Yes or Yes to all button to have PICED try to find the image file in the image library and copy it into the project folder There is a chance that an image with the same name will be found but it will be the wrong image If this happens then copy the correct image to the project folder then reload the project or Refresh Images Solution 2 Click on the No or No to all button Obtain the missing image file and put a copy in the project folder then reload the project or Refresh Images Solution 3 Delete the image from the project 11 4 219 I
566. work Most The highest of any Most Recent Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 169 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Variable Name Settable Recent Error Severity errors anywhere in the Network ee eee Error App Network Most The name of the highest of any String No Recent Error Name Most Recent errors anywhere in the Network Error App Network Most Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Severe Error Status Severe error anywhere in the Network Error App Network Most The highest of any Most Severe Integer No Severe Error Severity errors anywhere in the Network Error App Network Most The name of the highest of any String No Severe Error Name Most Severe errors anywhere in the Network Error App Project Most Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Recent Error Status Recent error anywhere in the project Error App Project Most The highest of any Most Recent Integer No Recent Error Severity errors anywhere in the project Error App Project Most The name of the highest of any String No Recent Error Name Most Recent errors anywhere in the project Error App Project Most Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Severe Error Status Severe error anywhere in the project Error App Project Most The highest of any Most Severe Integer No Severe Error Severity errors anywhere in the project Error App Project Most The name of the highest of any String No Severe Error Name Most Severe errors anywhere in
567. work Variable Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes 2 3 1 6 11 Add Enable Value The Add Enable Value form allows you to specify an enable network variable value and to assign a tag name to it To do so follow the instruction below 1 Select the value using the Value drop down list It lists a set of values It will list the remaining 256 addresses which have not been assigned a tag name If you require a value which is already in Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 22 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide use you can reassign the variable level 2 Specify the tag name in the Description field 3 Click the OK button to save changes 2 3 1 6 12 Edit Enable Value 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 The Edit Enable Value form allows you to edit an enable network value tag name To do so follow the instruction below 1 Edit the value name in the Description field 2 Click the OK button to save the changes Trigger Control Application The Trigger Control Application is used to trigger things to happen immediately Examples include e Triggering Scenes e Triggering an Irrigation Program e Sending an Infra Red command from a C Bus IR Transmitter The Trigger Control Application uses application number 202 CA hex and uses most of the Lighting Application messages however it should be noted that e The group addresses are referred to as Trigger Groups e The levels are refe
568. works If the software sends a command to a remote network any PICED Components will show the correct state If the state is changed by something on the remote network the command may not appear on the local network and hence the software will not show the correct state For more information on C Bus networks see the C Bus Networks document in the PICED manuals folder See also Software Limits and C Bus Network Manager Applications A C Bus Application is used to combine related system behaviour Typically used applications are Lighting Irrigation Heating Trigger Control Enable Control Security Telephony Measurement Error Application Date Time Application Media Transport Control Application Each C Bus Application has a number 0 to 255 and a name C Bus Tag The C Bus Applications are explained in detail in the C Bus Concepts document e Select Help C Bus Concepts for the help file version e C Bus Concepts PDF document in the PICED manuals folder See also Software Limits Lighting Applications The Lighting Applications are typically used for controlling e Lighting e Solenoids e Curtains and shutters The range of Application Numbers for lighting is 48 30 hex to 95 5F hex The default Lighting Application number is 56 38 hex Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 13 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 There are other C Bus Applications wh
569. ws you to select which image s are displayed on a button Selector or Image component and the image alignment top left centre etc Position Border Background Text Images Alpha Blend J Transparent Image alarm_on bmp Copy T M Image Alignment ro z Ee e select one of the standard images or select an image IV Show Image Image Files H ileyative Sage Select Active Image x P Select Frame Using Level alarm_off bmp ON Select Inactive Image x M CUSTOM To display an image select the Show Image check box Either e click on the Custom button and select your own active and inactive images by clicking on the Select Active Image or Select Inactive Image button A form will appear allowing you to click on the Copy button to copy the name of the active image to the inactive image click on the x buttons to clear the selected images Image Types The PICED software supports the following image types e Bitmap bmp e JPEG jpg jpeg e Graphics Interchange Format gif e Windows Metafile wmf e Portable Network Graphics png e Icons ico Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 107 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide e Enhanced Metafiles emf Transparent Images A bitmap image can be made transparent by selecting the Transparent Image check box The colour of the bottom left pixel will be used as the transparent colour Any pixels in the
570. x 7 Select the Profile for the unit 8 Click on OK The transfer process will start It may take up to five minutes depending on the size of your file Transferring via C Bus This is currently not supported but may be in subsequent releases Note The C Touch Mark 2 units have a limit of 10 000 reprogramming cycles If this limit is exceeded reprogramming may no longer be possible Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 285 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 2 6 See also Transferring a Project from the Unit Transferring a C Touch Mark 2 Project From the Unit Connect to the C Touch Mark 2 unit then refer to the instructions for transferring a C Touch project AY Note that any logic does not get transferred from the unit Transferring the Project Changes from the Unit Before updating unit Projects it is a good idea to get any changes to the Project first Connect to the C Touch Mark 2 unit then refer to the instructions for transferring a C Touch project Firmware Update To update the Black and White C Touch Mark 2 firmware follow the instructions for Transferring a C Touch Mark 2 Project to the Unit At step 5 make sure you select the new Firmware file You must transfer a project with the firmware update It is not possible to update the firmware without transferring a project If the unit can not be communicated with the firmware can be reloade
571. xt string as above Telephony Ringing Is the telephone ringing Telephony Ringing The ringing telephone number String Number text string Telephony Secondary Is the telephone interface Boolean Isolated output isolated See also e Special Functions for various telephony related functions e The Telephony Application Template which shows how these variables can be used 4 14 1 10 Error App In Built System IO C Bus Error Application data can be monitored via a series of In Built System IO Variables The data can be shown at several levels Variable Name Settable Error App Unit Most Recent Error Status Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Recent error anywhere in the Unit Error App Unit Most The highest of any Most Recent Integer No Recent Error Severity errors anywhere in the Unit Error App Unit Most Recent Error Name Error App Unit Most Severe Error Status The name of the highest of any String No Most Recent errors anywhere in the Unit Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Severe error anywhere in the Unit Error App Unit Most The highest of any Most Severe Integer No Severe Error Severity errors anywhere in the Unit Error App Unit Most Severe Error Name The name of the highest of any String No Most Severe errors anywhere in the Unit Error App Network Most Recent Error Status Show whether there is a Most Boolean No Recent error anywhere in the Network Error App Net
572. y First Sunday in October Time 2 00 00 AM Daylight Saving Starts 4 10 2009 End of Daylight Savings Day First 7 Sunday in april 7 Time 3 00 00 4M Daylight Saving Finishes 5 04 2009 By default these will be set to the values set for your computer To reset these parameters to the default click the Reset to Local Timezone button To select a different time zone click on the Select Other Timezone button It should not normally be necessary to manually change any of the parameters on this tab as they are read from the PC s operating system When complete click on the Next button Options Wiser2 The C Bus Project page of the Project Details Wizard allows you to select various options of the C Bus Project which varies according to unit type Project Tab The Project tab allows you to enter details of the Project name location etc Project name Fred s House ss ss s lt lt i lt i s Location ON Consultant PT Architect FO Owner FO Notes Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 70 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide Refresh Project It is possible to have the PICED software remind you to transfer any user changes made to a the project in a unit back to the computer before you start editing the project see Updating Unit Projects This is the same as using the Transfer Refresh Project from Unit menu item There are two properties w
573. y to log in This involves entering a password by clicking on the numeric buttons on the screen then clicking on the OK button Password 1 2 ABC DEF GHI 4 S JKL MNO ig 8 STU i The user will be asked to log in if they try to access a page that has an Access Level which is higher than their Access Level Alternatively you can e click on the Log in Log out button on the Tool Bar e select the Tools Log in menu item e click on a component with the Log In Special Function set SO Ww To log out e click on the Log in Log out button on the Tool Bar Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 217 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 17 5 4 18 4 18 1 e select the Tools Log in menu item e click on a component with the Log Out Special Function set Conversion of Old Version Files If you load an older PICED Project file which used passwords only for Access Control PICED will automatically create a user for each password and assign an Access Level to each page which was password protected As it is impossible to know exactly what the user will require a single Access Level is used for all Users and Pages Special Days Special Days are days which are different in some way from a normal day An example is Public Holidays or Birthdays Special Days can be selected in Schedules so that different behaviour can be set for different days Special Days are defined and
574. yed Click on Transfer Firmware Wait for the Colour C Touch unit to re start then repeat steps 3 to 6 The firmware files can be found in C Clipsal PICE D Firmware e f the Colour C Touch firmware is up to date the Transfer tab will be selected Click on Start Wait for the Colour C Touch unit to re start Transfer via a Wiser Home Control Unit Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 292 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 6 4 2 6 4 3 To connect to a Colour C Touch via a Wiser Home Control at a remote site via the Internet the process is the same as above At step 9 you need to e Select the Remote Connection option e Enter the Wiser URL e Enter the Wiser Password e Select Search for CTCs via Wiser Refer to the Transfer Utility help file for additional details Note that the ability to transfer Colour C Touch projects via Wiser is only supported if Wiser is configured using option A or C see Wiser Installation Guide for details If using option A then ports 8336 8337 9000 and 9001 need to be forwarded to the Wiser Unit by the router Prior to transferring via Wiser you will need to log into the Wiser user interface and enable the Project Update option refer to the Wiser user manual for details When complete the Project Update should be disabled again Notes The above process assumes your computer and Colour C Touch are on a network using DHCP Refer to the Colour C Touch In
575. yed will be the Month to Display the offset This allows for multiple calendar components to display different months Show Moon Phase this shows a small icon indicating the quarters on the moon phase It is Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 119 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide approximate to a day or so e Show Schedule Due this shows an icon indicating which days the Schedule selected by Schedule In Built System IO is due on Divider Line The Divider Line group allows you to select properties for the divider line separating the cells e The Line Colour e The Line Width e The Line Style e none this will make the axes transparent in which case it will not be seen e a solid line of different thicknesses e a dotted line line width must be 1 e a dashed line line width must be 1 Cell Colours The Cell Colours group allows you to select the cell colours for e Day Colour the colour to show the days of the month unless it is one of the day types below e Today Colour the colour to show today e Weekend Colour the colour to show weekends e Special Day Colour the colour to show Special Days If the Show Public Holidays with weekend colour option is selected Special Days which are Public Holidays will be shown in the same colour as weekends 4 9 4 2 14 Sub Page The Sub Page tab of the Visible Properties tab allows you to select properties for Sub Page Frame components The D
576. ystem IO Variable e E Mail e Message Count show the number of E Mail messages in the selected account e Message Details show the details of the selected E Mail message e Message Present show if there are any E Mail messages in the selected account e Select Account select an E Mail account e Select Message select an E Mail message e Power Meters e Analogue Meter Energy show the energy usage for the selected Analogue Power Meter Analogue Meter Power show the power for the selected Analogue Power Meter Power show the total power usage Pulse Power Meter Energy show the energy usage for the selected Pulse Power Meter Pulse Power Meter Power show the power for the selected Pulse Power Meter Today s Energy Usage show the energy usage for today Today s Energy Cost show the energy cost for today Today s Peak Power show the peak power usage for today e Other Alarm Cancel Next this cancels the next alarm only Alarm Off stop the alarm Alarm On start the alarm Alarm Snooze snooze the alarm Alarm State this shows whether the alarm is currently on Backlight Off switch the backlight off Black and White C Touch only Backlight On switch the backlight on Black and White C Touch only Backlight Set set the backlight threshold Black and White C Touch only Calibrate calibrate the screen Colour C Touch only Cleaning Mode set Cleaning Mode Colour C Touch only Contrast Down decrease the contrast Black and White C T
577. ze then the template Components will be rearranged so that they fit on the page Component Templates When adding a Component Template to a project the Components in the template will be added to the currently selected page and selected They can then be easily dragged to the correct position Editing Templates To open an existing Template 1 Select Open Template item from the File menu 2 Select the Template file 3 Click on OK 4 You will be prompted to select a C Bus Project since this is not stored in a template Select the C Bus project and click on OK After making changes to the template save the changes as follows 1 Select the File Save menu item 2 You will be prompted to ask whether you want to save the project as a template or as a project file Click on the Template button 3 Select which aspects of the project you want to save in the template Copyright 2014 Schneider Electric Australia Page 85 Home Management Series PICED Programmer s Guide 4 7 7 4 4 7 8 4 7 8 1 4 Click on OK Copying Project Data Using Templates If you have some aspect of a project which you want to re use in another project there are two solutions as described below Saving Project Data for Re use To save aspects of a project for use in a second project 1 Open the first project 2 Create a template containing the data you want to re use 3 Open the new project 4 Add the template contents Adding Project

PICED Programmer`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents